[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2016052019A1 - Terminal device and base station device - Google Patents

Terminal device and base station device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016052019A1
WO2016052019A1 PCT/JP2015/074118 JP2015074118W WO2016052019A1 WO 2016052019 A1 WO2016052019 A1 WO 2016052019A1 JP 2015074118 W JP2015074118 W JP 2015074118W WO 2016052019 A1 WO2016052019 A1 WO 2016052019A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
drs
secondary cell
terminal device
measurement
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/074118
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
林 貴志
寿之 示沢
直紀 草島
渉 大内
デルガド アルバロ ルイズ
公彦 今村
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2016052019A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016052019A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/32Hierarchical cell structures
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/08Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a terminal device and a base station device.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • EUTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • 3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
  • a base station device base station
  • eNodeB evolvedvolveNodeB
  • UE User Equipment
  • LTE is a cellular communication system in which a plurality of areas covered by a base station apparatus are arranged in a cell shape.
  • a single base station apparatus may manage a plurality of cells.
  • LTE supports frequency division duplex (Frequency Division Duplex: FDD) and time division duplex (Time Division Duplex: TDD).
  • LTE adopting the FDD method is also referred to as FD-LTE or LTE FDD.
  • TDD is a technology that enables full-duplex communication in at least two frequency bands by frequency division multiplexing an uplink signal and a downlink signal.
  • LTE employing the TDD scheme is also referred to as TD-LTE or LTE TDD.
  • TDD is a technology that enables full-duplex communication in a single frequency band by time-division multiplexing uplink signals and downlink signals. Details of FD-LTE and TD-LTE are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.
  • the base station apparatus can transmit a reference signal (RS; also referred to as Reference Signal) that is a known signal between the base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus to the terminal apparatus.
  • RS reference signal
  • This reference signal can transmit multiple reference signals for various purposes such as signal and channel demodulation and channel state reporting.
  • the cell-specific reference signal is transmitted in all downlink subframes as a cell-specific reference signal.
  • the terminal-specific reference signal is transmitted as a reference signal specific to the terminal apparatus in a resource to which a data signal for the terminal apparatus is mapped. Details of the reference signal are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.
  • a small cell is a generic term for a cell having a small transmission power of a base station apparatus constituting the cell and having a smaller coverage than a conventional cell (macro cell). For example, by applying small cells in a high frequency band, it is possible to arrange small cells with high density, and there is an effect of improving the frequency utilization efficiency per area.
  • a technique for switching a base station apparatus to a stopped state is being studied for various purposes such as low power consumption and inter-cell interference reduction. Details are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 2.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a base station device, a terminal device, a communication system, and a communication system in which a base station device and a terminal device communicate with each other. To provide a communication method and an integrated circuit.
  • the present invention has taken the following measures. That is, the terminal device according to the present embodiment is characterized by receiving a predetermined higher layer parameter related to switching between the first secondary cell activation timing and the second secondary cell activation timing.
  • transmission efficiency can be improved in a wireless communication system in which a base station device and a terminal device communicate.
  • DRS It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of DRS. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of CRS and / or a structure of DRS. It is a figure which shows another example of a structure of DRS. It is a figure which shows an example of designation
  • the terminal device 1 may be set with a plurality of cells.
  • a technique in which the terminal device 1 communicates via a plurality of cells is referred to as cell aggregation, carrier aggregation, or dual connectivity.
  • the present invention may be applied to each of a plurality of cells set for the terminal device 1. Further, the present invention may be applied to some of the plurality of set cells.
  • a cell set in the terminal device 1 is also referred to as a serving cell.
  • a plurality of configured serving cells include one primary cell (PCell: Primary Cell) and one or more secondary cells (SCell: Secondary Cell).
  • the primary cell is a serving cell in which an initial connection establishment (initial connection establishment) procedure is performed, a serving cell that starts a connection ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ re-establishment procedure, or a cell designated as a primary cell in a handover procedure.
  • the primary cell operates at the primary frequency.
  • a secondary cell may be set at the time when the connection is (re) built or afterwards.
  • the secondary cell operates at the secondary frequency.
  • the connection may be referred to as an RRC connection.
  • the terminal device 1 that supports CA it is aggregated by one primary cell and one or more secondary cells.
  • Dual connectivity refers to radio resources provided from at least two different network points (master base station device (MeNB: Master eNB) and secondary base station device (SeNB: Secondary ⁇ ⁇ eNB)). Is the operation that consumes.
  • the dual connectivity is that the terminal device 1 performs RRC connection at at least two network points.
  • the terminal device 1 may be connected in a RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state and by a non-ideal backhaul.
  • the base station device 3 connected to at least S1-MME (Mobility Management Entity) and serving as a mobility anchor of the core network is referred to as a master base station device.
  • the base station device 3 that is not a master base station device that provides additional radio resources to the terminal device 1 is referred to as a secondary base station device.
  • MCG Master Cell Group
  • SCG Secondary Cell Group
  • the primary cell belongs to the MCG.
  • SCG a secondary cell corresponding to a primary cell is referred to as a primary secondary cell (pSCell: “Primary” Secondary ”Cell).
  • the pSCell may be referred to as a special cell or a special secondary cell (Special (SCell: CellSpecial Secondary Cell).
  • the special SCell base station apparatus configuring the special SCell
  • the special SCell may support functions (capability, performance) equivalent to PCell (base station apparatus configuring the PCell).
  • PCell base station apparatus configuring the PCell
  • only some functions of PCell may be supported by pSCell.
  • the pSCell may support a function of transmitting PDCCH.
  • the pSCell may support a function of performing PDCCH transmission using a search space different from CSS or USS.
  • a search space different from USS is a search space determined based on a value defined in the specification, a search space determined based on an RNTI different from C-RNTI, and the like.
  • the pSCell may always be in an activated state.
  • pSCell is a cell which can receive PUCCH.
  • radio bearers Data Radio Bearer (DRB) and / or Signaling Radio Bearer (SRB) may be individually allocated in the MeNB and SeNB.
  • DRB Data Radio Bearer
  • SRB Signaling Radio Bearer
  • duplex mode may be set individually for MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell, respectively.
  • MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell need not be synchronized.
  • timing adjustment parameters (TAG: “Timing” Advance ”Group) may be set in each of MCG and SCG (or PCell and pSCell). That is, there is no need to synchronize between the MCG and the SCG.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 transmits the UCI corresponding to the cell in the MCG only to the MeNB (PCell), and transmits the UCI corresponding to the cell in the SCG only to the SeNB (pSCell).
  • UCI is SR, HARQ-ACK, and / or CSI.
  • a transmission method using PUCCH and / or PUSCH is applied to each cell group.
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • TAGs Timing Advance Group
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • PUCCH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell.
  • PRACH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell irrespective of whether several TAG is set.
  • PBCH and MIB may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell.
  • RLF Radio Link Failure
  • the secondary cell does not recognize that RLF has been detected even if the conditions for detecting RLF are met.
  • the RLF is detected if the condition is satisfied.
  • the upper layer of the primary secondary cell notifies the upper layer of the primary cell that the RLF has been detected.
  • SPS Semi-Persistent Scheduling
  • DRX Discontinuous Transmission
  • the total number of SPS settings and DRX settings may be determined by the total number of primary cells and primary secondary cells.
  • the secondary cell may perform the same DRX as the primary cell or primary secondary cell of the same cell group.
  • information / parameters related to MAC settings are basically shared with the primary cell / primary secondary cell of the same cell group. Some parameters (for example, sTAG-Id) may be set for each secondary cell.
  • timers and counters may be applied only to the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell.
  • a timer or counter that is applied only to the secondary cell may be set.
  • a FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) or TDD (Time Division Duplex) scheme frame configuration type (Frame Structure Type) is applied.
  • the frame configuration type may be referred to as a frame structure type or a duplex mode.
  • the TDD scheme may be applied to all of a plurality of cells.
  • cells to which the TDD scheme is applied and cells to which the FDD scheme is applied may be aggregated.
  • the present invention can be applied to cells to which TDD is applied.
  • a half-duplex FDD scheme or a full-duplex FDD scheme may be applied.
  • a half-duplex TDD scheme or a full-duplex TDD scheme may be applied.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 transmits information indicating a combination of bands for which carrier aggregation is supported by the terminal apparatus 1 to the base station apparatus 3.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits to the base station device 3 information indicating whether or not simultaneous transmission and reception in the plurality of serving cells in a plurality of different bands are supported for each combination of bands.
  • X / Y includes the meaning of “X or Y”. In the present embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meanings of “X and Y”. In the present embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meaning of “X and / or Y”.
  • FIG. 1 is a conceptual diagram of the wireless communication system of the present embodiment.
  • the radio communication system includes terminal apparatuses 1A to 1C and a base station apparatus 3.
  • the terminal devices 1A to 1C are referred to as the terminal device 1.
  • an uplink physical channel is used in uplink wireless communication from the terminal device 1 to the base station device 3.
  • the uplink physical channel can be used to transmit information output from an upper layer.
  • Uplink physical channels include PUCCH (Physical-Uplink-Control Channel), PUSCH (Physical-Uplink Shared Channel), PRACH (Physical-Random Access Channel), and the like.
  • Uplink Control Information is a physical channel used for transmitting uplink control information (Uplink Control Information: UCI).
  • Uplink control information includes downlink channel state information (Channel State Information: CSI), scheduling request (Scheduling Request: SR) indicating a PUSCH resource request, downlink data (Transport block: TB, Downlink-Shared Channel, DL -SCH) includes ACK (acknowledgement) / NACK (negative-acknowledgement).
  • ACK / NACK is also referred to as HARQ-ACK, HARQ feedback, or response information.
  • the PUSCH is a physical channel used to transmit uplink data (Uplink-Shared Channel: UL-SCH).
  • the PUSCH may also be used to transmit HARQ-ACK and / or channel state information along with uplink data. Also, the PUSCH may be used to transmit only channel state information or only HARQ-ACK and channel state information.
  • PRACH is a physical channel used to transmit a random access preamble.
  • the main purpose of the PRACH is that the terminal device 1 synchronizes with the base station device 3 in the time domain.
  • PRACH is also used to indicate initial connection establishment (initial connection establishment) procedure, handover procedure, connection reestablishment (connection re-establishment) procedure, synchronization for uplink transmission (timing adjustment), and PUSCH resource requirements. Used.
  • uplink physical signals are used in uplink wireless communication.
  • the uplink physical signal includes an uplink reference signal (Uplink Reference Signal: UL RS) and the like.
  • Uplink Reference Signal Uplink Reference Signal: UL RS
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • DMRS relates to transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH.
  • DMRS is time-multiplexed with PUSCH or PUCCH.
  • the base station apparatus 3 uses DMRS to perform propagation channel correction for PUSCH or PUCCH.
  • transmitting both PUSCH and DMRS is simply referred to as transmitting PUSCH.
  • transmitting both PUCCH and DMRS is simply referred to as transmitting PUCCH.
  • the uplink DMRS is also referred to as UL-DMRS.
  • SRS is not related to PUSCH or PUCCH transmission.
  • the base station apparatus 3 uses SRS to measure the uplink channel state.
  • trigger type SRS There are two trigger type SRS (trigger type 0 SRS, trigger type 1 SRS).
  • the trigger type 0 SRS is transmitted when parameters related to the trigger type 0 SRS are set by higher layer signaling.
  • the trigger type 1 SRS is transmitted when parameters related to the trigger type 1 SRS are set by higher layer signaling and transmission is requested by an SRS request included in the DCI format 0 / 1A / 2B / 2C / 2D / 4.
  • the SRS request is included in both FDD and TDD for the DCI format 0 / 1A / 4, and is included only in TDD for the DCI format 2B / 2C / 2D.
  • a downlink physical channel is used in downlink radio communication from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1.
  • the downlink physical channel is used for transmitting information output from an upper layer.
  • the downlink physical channels are PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel), PCFICH (Physical Control Format Indicator Channel), PHICH (Physical Hybrid automatic repeat request Indicator Channel), PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel), EPDCCH (Enhanced Physical Channel ⁇ Control) PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel), PMCH (Physical Multicast Channel) and the like are included.
  • the PBCH is used to broadcast a master information block (Master Information Block: MIB, Broadcast Channel: BCH) commonly used in the terminal device 1.
  • MIB can be updated at 40 ms intervals.
  • SFN system frame number
  • MIB is system information. For example, the MIB includes information indicating SFN.
  • PCFICH is used for transmitting information indicating a region (OFDM symbol) used for transmission of PDCCH.
  • the PHICH is used to transmit an HARQ indicator (HARQ feedback, response information) indicating ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) received by the base station apparatus 3. It is done. For example, when the terminal device 1 receives a HARQ indicator indicating ACK, the corresponding uplink data is not retransmitted. For example, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a HARQ indicator indicating NACK, the corresponding uplink data is retransmitted.
  • a single PHICH transmits a HARQ indicator for a single uplink data.
  • the base station apparatus 3 transmits each of the HARQ indicators for a plurality of uplink data included in the same PUSCH using a plurality of PHICHs.
  • the PDCCH and EPDCCH are used to transmit downlink control information (Downlink Control Information: DCI).
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the downlink control information is also referred to as a DCI format.
  • the downlink control information includes a downlink grant (downlink grant) and an uplink grant (uplink grant).
  • the downlink grant is also referred to as downlink assignment (downlink allocation) or downlink assignment (downlink allocation).
  • the PDCCH is transmitted by a set of one or more continuous CCEs (Control Channel Element).
  • the CCE is composed of nine REGs (Resource Element Group).
  • the REG is composed of four resource elements.
  • i is a CCE number.
  • the EPDCCH is transmitted by a set of one or more continuous ECCE (Enhanced Control Channel Element).
  • the ECCE is composed of a plurality of EREGs (Enhanced Resource Resource Element Group).
  • the downlink grant is used for scheduling a single PDSCH within a single cell.
  • the downlink grant is used for scheduling the PDSCH in the same subframe as the subframe in which the downlink grant is transmitted.
  • the uplink grant is used for scheduling a single PUSCH within a single cell.
  • the uplink grant is used for scheduling a single PUSCH in a subframe that is four or more after the subframe in which the uplink grant is transmitted.
  • a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) parity bit is added to the DCI format.
  • the CRC parity bit is scrambled by RNTI (Radio Network Temporary Identifier).
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • the RNTI is an identifier that can be defined or set according to the purpose of the DCI.
  • the RNTI is set as an identifier preliminarily defined in the specification, an identifier set as information specific to a cell, an identifier set as information specific to the terminal device 1, or information specific to a group belonging to the terminal device 1. Identifier.
  • the CRC parity bit is scrambled by C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier) or SPS C-RNTI (Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier).
  • C-RNTI and SPS C-RNTI are identifiers for identifying the terminal device 1 in the cell.
  • C-RNTI is used to control PDSCH or PUSCH in a single subframe.
  • the SPS C-RNTI is used to periodically allocate PDSCH or PUSCH resources.
  • PDSCH is used to transmit downlink data (Downlink Shared Channel: DL-SCH).
  • DL-SCH Downlink Shared Channel
  • the PDSCH is also used for transmitting higher layer control information.
  • PMCH is used to transmit multicast data (Multicast Channel: MCH).
  • the downlink physical signal includes a synchronization signal (Synchronization signal: SS), a downlink reference signal (Downlink Reference Signal: DL RS), and the like.
  • SS Synchronization signal
  • DL RS Downlink Reference Signal
  • the synchronization signal is used for the terminal device 1 to synchronize the downlink frequency domain and time domain.
  • the synchronization signal is arranged in a predetermined subframe in the radio frame. For example, in the TDD scheme, the synchronization signal is arranged in subframes 0, 1, 5, and 6 in a radio frame. In the FDD scheme, the synchronization signal is arranged in subframes 0 and 5 in the radio frame.
  • the synchronization signal includes a primary synchronization signal (PSS: Primary Synchronization Signal) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS: Secondary Synchronization Signal).
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • the PSS is used for coarse frame / symbol timing synchronization (time domain synchronization) and cell group identification.
  • SSS is used for more accurate frame timing synchronization and cell identification. That is, frame timing synchronization and cell identification can be performed by using PSS and SSS.
  • the downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to correct the propagation path of the downlink physical channel.
  • the downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information.
  • the downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to measure the geographical position of the own device.
  • the downlink reference signal includes CRS (Cell-specific Reference Signal), URS (UE-specific Reference Signal) related to PDSCH, DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) related to EPDCCH, NZP CSI-RS (Non-Zero Power Chanel State Information). -Reference Reference Signal), MBSFN RS (Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service Service over Single Single Frequency Network Reference Signal), PRS (Positioning Reference Signal), NCT CRS (New Carrier Type Type Cell-specific Reference Signal), and DRS (Discovery Reference Signal) including.
  • downlink resources include ZP CSI-RS (Zero Power Channel State Information Information-Reference Signal), CSI-IM (Channel State Information-Interference Measurement), and the like.
  • CRS is transmitted in the entire bandwidth of the subframe.
  • CRS is used to demodulate PBCH / PDCCH / PHICH / PCFICH / PDSCH.
  • the CRS may be used for the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information.
  • PBCH / PDCCH / PHICH / PCFICH is transmitted through an antenna port used for CRS transmission.
  • URS related to PDSCH is transmitted in a subframe and a band used for transmission of PDSCH related to URS.
  • URS is used to demodulate the PDSCH with which the URS is associated.
  • the PDSCH is transmitted by an antenna port used for transmission of CRS or URS based on the transmission mode and the DCI format.
  • the DCI format 1A is used for scheduling of PDSCH transmitted through an antenna port used for CRS transmission.
  • the DCI format 2D is used for scheduling of the PDSCH transmitted through the antenna port used for URS transmission.
  • DMRS related to EPDCCH is transmitted in subframes and bands used for transmission of EPDCCH related to DMRS.
  • DMRS is used to demodulate the EPDCCH with which DMRS is associated.
  • the EPDCCH is transmitted through an antenna port used for DMRS transmission.
  • NZP CSI-RS is transmitted in the set subframe.
  • the resource for transmitting the NZP CSI-RS is set by the base station apparatus 3.
  • the NZP CSI-RS is used by the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information.
  • the terminal device 1 performs signal measurement (channel measurement) using NZP CSI-RS.
  • ZP CSI-RS resources are set by the base station device 3.
  • the base station apparatus 3 transmits ZP CSI-RS with zero output. That is, the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit ZP CSI-RS.
  • the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit PDSCH and EPDCCH in the resource set by ZP CSI-RS.
  • the CSI-IM resource is set by the base station apparatus 3.
  • the CSI-IM resource is set to overlap (overlap) with a part of the ZP CSI-RS resource. That is, the CSI-IM resource has the same characteristics as the ZP CSI-RS, and the base station apparatus 3 transmits the resource set as CSI-IM with zero output. That is, the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit CSI-IM.
  • the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit PDSCH and EPDCCH in resources set by CSI-IM.
  • the terminal device 1 can measure interference with the resource set as the CSI-IM.
  • the channel state information includes CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI (Rank Indicator), and PTI (Precoding Type Indicator), and is measured using CSI-RS or CRS. .
  • the MBSFN RS is transmitted in the entire band of the subframe used for PMCH transmission.
  • the MBSFN RS is used for PMCH demodulation.
  • PMCH is transmitted through an antenna port used for transmission of MBSFN RS.
  • PRS is used for the terminal device 1 to measure the geographical position of the device itself.
  • NCT CRS can be mapped to a predetermined subframe.
  • NCT CRS is mapped to subframes 0 and 5.
  • the NCT CRS can use the same configuration as a part of the CRS.
  • the position of the resource element to which the NCT CRS is mapped can be the same as the position of the resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped.
  • the sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined based on information set through PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, or PDSCH (RRC signaling).
  • a sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined based on parameters such as a cell ID (for example, a physical layer cell identifier) and a slot number.
  • the sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined by a method (expression) different from the sequence (value) used for CRS of antenna port 0.
  • the NCT CRS may be referred to as TRS (Tracking Reference Signal).
  • the downlink physical channel and the downlink physical signal are collectively referred to as a downlink signal.
  • the uplink physical channel and the uplink physical signal are collectively referred to as an uplink signal.
  • the downlink physical channel and the uplink physical channel are collectively referred to as a physical channel.
  • the downlink physical signal and the uplink physical signal are collectively referred to as a physical signal.
  • BCH, MCH, UL-SCH and DL-SCH are transport channels.
  • a channel used in a medium access control (Medium Access Control: MAC) layer is referred to as a transport channel.
  • a transport channel unit used in the MAC layer is also referred to as a transport block (transport block: TB) or a MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit).
  • HARQ HybridbrAutomatic Repeat reQuest
  • the transport block is a unit of data that the MAC layer delivers to the physical layer.
  • the transport block is mapped to a code word, and an encoding process is performed for each code word.
  • RRC signaling As a method of control information signaling (notification and notification) from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1, PDCCH signaling that is signaling through PDCCH, RRC signaling that is signaling through RRC layer (layer), and MAC layer (layer MAC signaling which is signaling through) is used.
  • the RRC signaling is dedicated RRC signaling (DedicatedDeRRC signaling) for notifying control information unique to the terminal device 1 or common RRC signaling (Common RRC signaling) for notifying control information unique to the base station device 3. It is.
  • RRC signaling when simply described as RRC signaling, RRC signaling is dedicated RRC signaling and / or common RRC signaling. Signaling used by higher layers as viewed from the physical layer, such as RRC signaling and MAC CE, may be referred to as upper layer signaling.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a radio frame according to the present embodiment.
  • Each radio frame is 10 ms long.
  • Each radio frame is composed of two half frames.
  • Each half frame is 5 ms long.
  • Each half frame is composed of 5 subframes.
  • Each subframe is 1 ms long and is defined by two consecutive slots.
  • Each of the slots is 0.5 ms long.
  • the i-th subframe in the radio frame is composed of a (2 ⁇ i) th slot and a (2 ⁇ i + 1) th slot. That is, 10 subframes are defined in each radio frame.
  • the subframe includes a downlink subframe (first subframe), an uplink subframe (second subframe), a special subframe (third subframe), and the like.
  • the downlink subframe is a subframe reserved for downlink transmission.
  • the uplink subframe is a subframe reserved for uplink transmission.
  • the special subframe is composed of three fields. The three fields are DwPTS (Downlink Pilot Time Slot), GP (Guard Period), and UpPTS (Uplink Pilot Time Slot). The total length of DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS is 1 ms.
  • DwPTS is a field reserved for downlink transmission.
  • UpPTS is a field reserved for uplink transmission.
  • GP is a field in which downlink transmission and uplink transmission are not performed. Note that the special subframe may be configured only by DwPTS and GP, or may be configured only by GP and UpPTS.
  • the special subframe is arranged between the downlink subframe and the uplink subframe in TDD, and is used for switching from the downlink subframe to the uplink subframe.
  • a single radio frame is composed of a downlink subframe, an uplink subframe, and / or a special subframe. That is, the radio frame may be configured with only downlink subframes. Further, the radio frame may be composed of only uplink subframes.
  • the wireless communication system of this embodiment supports 5 ms and 10 ms downlink-uplink-switch-point-periodicity.
  • the downlink-uplink switch point period is 5 ms
  • a special subframe is included in both half frames in the radio frame.
  • the downlink-uplink switch point period is 10 ms
  • a special subframe is included only in the first half frame in the radio frame.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the slot according to the present embodiment.
  • normal CP normal Cyclic Prefix
  • An extended CP extendedexCyclic Prefix
  • the physical signal or physical channel transmitted in each of the slots is represented by a resource grid.
  • the resource grid is defined by a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency direction and a plurality of OFDM symbols in the time direction.
  • the resource grid is defined by a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency direction and a plurality of SC-FDMA symbols in the time direction. The number of subcarriers or resource blocks depends on the cell bandwidth.
  • the number of OFDM symbols or SC-FDMA symbols constituting one slot is 7 for normal CP and 6 for extended CP.
  • Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a resource element.
  • Resource elements are identified using subcarrier numbers and OFDM symbol or SC-FDMA symbol numbers.
  • the resource block is used for mapping to a resource element of a certain physical channel (PDSCH or PUSCH).
  • resource blocks virtual resource blocks and physical resource blocks are defined.
  • a physical channel is first mapped to a virtual resource block. Thereafter, the virtual resource block is mapped to the physical resource block.
  • One physical resource block is defined by 7 consecutive OFDM symbols or SC-FDMA symbols in the time domain and 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. Therefore, one physical resource block is composed of (7 ⁇ 12) resource elements.
  • One physical resource block corresponds to one slot in the time domain and corresponds to 180 kHz in the frequency domain.
  • Physical resource blocks are numbered from 0 in the frequency domain. Further, two resource blocks in one subframe corresponding to the same physical resource block number are defined as physical resource block pairs (PRB pair, RB pair).
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the downlink subframe according to the present embodiment.
  • the base station apparatus 3 can transmit a downlink physical channel (PBCH, PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH) and / or a downlink physical signal (synchronization signal, downlink reference signal) in the downlink subframe.
  • PBCH is transmitted only in subframe 0 in the radio frame.
  • the downlink reference signal is arranged in resource elements distributed in the frequency domain and the time domain. For simplicity of explanation, the downlink reference signal is not shown in FIG.
  • a plurality of PDCCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed.
  • a plurality of EPDCCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed.
  • a plurality of PDSCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed.
  • PDCCH, PDSCH and / or EPDCCH may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the uplink subframe according to the present embodiment.
  • the terminal device 1 may transmit an uplink physical channel (PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH) and an uplink physical signal (UL-DMRS, SRS) in the uplink subframe.
  • PUCCH region a plurality of PUCCHs are frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed.
  • PUSCH region a plurality of PUSCHs may be frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed.
  • PUCCH and PUSCH may be frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed.
  • the PRACH may be arranged over a single subframe or two subframes. A plurality of PRACHs may be code-multiplexed.
  • SRS is transmitted using the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. That is, the SRS is arranged in the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 can restrict simultaneous transmission of SRS and PUCCH / PUSCH / PRACH in a single SC-FDMA symbol of a single cell.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 transmits PUSCH and / or PUCCH using an SC-FDMA symbol excluding the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe,
  • the SRS can be transmitted using the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 can transmit SRS, PUSCH, and PUCCH in a single uplink subframe of a single cell.
  • DMRS is time-multiplexed with PUCCH or PUSCH. For simplicity of explanation, DMRS is not shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the special subframe of the present embodiment.
  • DwPTS is composed of the first to tenth SC-FDMA symbols in the special subframe
  • GP is composed of the eleventh and twelfth SC-FDMA symbols in the special subframe
  • UpPTS is the special subframe. It consists of the 13th and 14th SC-FDMA symbols in the frame.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, synchronization signal, and downlink reference signal in the DwPTS of the special subframe.
  • the base station apparatus 3 can restrict PBCH transmission in the DwPTS of the special subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 may transmit PRACH and SRS in the UpPTS of the special subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 can restrict transmission of PUCCH, PUSCH, and DMRS in the UpPTS of the special subframe.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal device 1 of the present embodiment.
  • the terminal device 1 includes an upper layer processing unit 101, a control unit 103, a receiving unit 105, a transmitting unit 107, and a transmission / reception antenna 109.
  • the higher layer processing unit 101 includes a radio resource control unit 1011, a subframe setting unit 1013, a scheduling information interpretation unit 1015, and a channel state information (CSI) report control unit 1017.
  • the reception unit 105 includes a decoding unit 1051, a demodulation unit 1053, a demultiplexing unit 1055, a radio reception unit 1057, and a channel measurement unit 1059.
  • the transmission unit 107 includes an encoding unit 1071, a modulation unit 1073, a multiplexing unit 1075, a radio transmission unit 1077, and an uplink reference signal generation unit 1079.
  • the upper layer processing unit 101 outputs uplink data (transport block) generated by a user operation or the like to the transmission unit 107.
  • the upper layer processing unit 101 includes a medium access control (MAC: Medium Access Control) layer, a packet data integration protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP) layer, a radio link control (Radio Link Control: RLC) layer, and radio resource control. Process the (Radio Resource Control: RRC) layer.
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the upper layer processing unit 101 has a function of controlling the physical layer to perform cell activation / deactivation and a function of controlling the physical layer to manage uplink transmission timing. I have.
  • the upper layer processing unit 101 has a function of determining whether to report a measurement instruction calculated by the receiving unit 105 and a measurement result calculated by the receiving unit 105.
  • the radio resource control unit 1011 included in the upper layer processing unit 101 manages various setting information of the own device. Also, the radio resource control unit 1011 generates information arranged in each uplink channel and outputs the information to the transmission unit 107.
  • the subframe setting unit 1013 included in the higher layer processing unit 101 is based on information set by the base station device 3, and is different from the base station device 3 and / or the base station device 3 (for example, the base station device).
  • the subframe setting in 3A) is managed.
  • the subframe setting is an uplink or downlink setting for the subframe.
  • Subframe configuration includes subframe pattern configuration (Subframe pattern configuration), uplink-downlink configuration (Uplink-downlink configuration), uplink reference UL-DL configuration (Uplink reference configuration), and downlink reference UL-DL configuration (Downlink). reference configuration) and / or transmission direction UL-DL configuration (transmission direction configuration).
  • the subframe setting unit 1013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL-DL setting. set. Also, the subframe setting unit 1013 can set at least two subframe sets.
  • the subframe pattern setting includes EPDCCH subframe setting.
  • the subframe setting unit 1013 is also referred to as a terminal subframe setting unit.
  • the scheduling information interpretation unit 1015 included in the upper layer processing unit 101 interprets the DCI format (scheduling information) received via the reception unit 105, and based on the interpretation result of the DCI format, the reception unit 105 and the transmission unit Control information is generated in order to perform the control of 107 and output to the control unit 103.
  • the scheduling information interpretation unit 1015 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL-DL setting. Based on this, the timing for performing the transmission process and the reception process is determined.
  • the CSI report control unit 1017 specifies a CSI reference resource.
  • the CSI report control unit 1017 instructs the channel measurement unit 1059 to derive the CQI related to the CSI reference resource.
  • the CSI report control unit 1017 instructs the transmission unit 107 to transmit CQI.
  • the CSI report control unit 1017 sets a setting used when the channel measurement unit 1059 calculates CQI.
  • the control unit 103 generates a control signal for controlling the receiving unit 105 and the transmitting unit 107 based on the control information from the higher layer processing unit 101. Control unit 103 outputs the generated control signal to receiving unit 105 and transmitting unit 107 to control receiving unit 105 and transmitting unit 107.
  • the reception unit 105 separates, demodulates, and decodes the reception signal received by the transmission / reception antenna 109 from the base station apparatus 3 based on the control signal input from the control unit 103.
  • the receiving unit 105 outputs the decoded information to the upper layer processing unit 101.
  • the radio reception unit 1057 converts the downlink signal received by the transmission / reception antenna 109 into an intermediate frequency (down-conversion: down convert), removes unnecessary frequency components, and amplifies the signal level so that the signal level is appropriately maintained.
  • the level is controlled, quadrature demodulation is performed based on the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the received signal, and the analog signal that has been demodulated is converted into a digital signal.
  • the radio reception unit 1057 removes a portion corresponding to a guard interval (Guard Interval: GI) from the converted digital signal, performs a fast Fourier transform (FFT Fourier Transform: FFT) on the signal from which the guard interval is removed, Extract the region signal.
  • GI Guard Interval
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • the demultiplexer 1055 separates the PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, and / or downlink reference signal from the extracted signal. Further, demultiplexing section 1055 compensates the propagation path of PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and / or PDSCH from the estimated value of the propagation path input from channel measurement section 1059. Also, the demultiplexing unit 1055 outputs the demultiplexed downlink reference signal to the channel measurement unit 1059.
  • the demodulating unit 1053 multiplies the PHICH by a corresponding code and synthesizes the signal, demodulates the synthesized signal using a BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Shift Keying) modulation method, and outputs the demodulated signal to the decoding unit 1051.
  • Decoding section 1051 decodes the PHICH addressed to the own apparatus, and outputs the decoded HARQ indicator to higher layer processing section 101.
  • Demodulation section 1053 performs QPSK modulation demodulation on PDCCH and / or EPDCCH, and outputs the result to decoding section 1051.
  • Decoding section 1051 attempts to decode PDCCH and / or EPDCCH, and outputs the decoded downlink control information and the RNTI corresponding to the downlink control information to higher layer processing section 101 when the decoding is successful.
  • the demodulation unit 1053 demodulates the modulation scheme notified by the downlink grant such as QPSK (Quadrature Shift Keying), 16QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM, and the like to the decoding unit 1051.
  • Decoding section 1051 performs decoding based on the information regarding the coding rate notified by the downlink control information, and outputs the decoded downlink data (transport block) to higher layer processing section 101.
  • the channel measurement unit 1059 measures the downlink path loss and channel state from the downlink reference signal input from the demultiplexing unit 1055, and outputs the measured path loss and channel state to the upper layer processing unit 101. Also, channel measurement section 1059 calculates an estimated value of the downlink propagation path from the downlink reference signal, and outputs it to demultiplexing section 1055. The channel measurement unit 1059 performs channel measurement and / or interference measurement in order to calculate CQI. The channel measurement unit 1059 performs measurement notified from the downlink reference signal input from the demultiplexing unit 1055 to the upper layer. Channel measurement section 1059 calculates RSRP and RSRQ and outputs the result to upper layer processing section 101.
  • the transmission unit 107 generates an uplink reference signal in accordance with the control signal input from the control unit 103, encodes and modulates the uplink data (transport block) input from the higher layer processing unit 101, PUCCH, The PUSCH and the generated uplink reference signal are multiplexed and transmitted to the base station apparatus 3 via the transmission / reception antenna 109.
  • the encoding unit 1071 performs encoding such as convolutional encoding and block encoding on the uplink control information input from the higher layer processing unit 101.
  • the encoding unit 1071 performs turbo encoding based on information used for PUSCH scheduling.
  • the modulation unit 1073 modulates the coded bits input from the coding unit 1071 using a modulation method notified by downlink control information such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, or a modulation method predetermined for each channel.
  • Modulation section 1073 determines the number of spatially multiplexed data sequences based on information used for PUSCH scheduling, and uses MIMO SM (Multiple Input Multiple Output Spatial Multiplexing) to transmit a plurality of data transmitted on the same PUSCH. Are mapped to a plurality of sequences, and precoding is performed on the sequences.
  • MIMO SM Multiple Input Multiple Output Spatial Multiplexing
  • the uplink reference signal generation unit 1079 is a physical layer cell identifier for identifying the base station device 3 (referred to as physical cell identity: PCI, Cell ID, etc.), a bandwidth for arranging the uplink reference signal, and an uplink grant.
  • a sequence determined by a predetermined rule (formula) is generated on the basis of the cyclic shift and the parameter value for generating the DMRS sequence notified in (1).
  • the multiplexing unit 1075 rearranges the PUSCH modulation symbols in parallel according to the control signal input from the control unit 103, and then performs a discrete Fourier transform (Discrete-Fourier-Transform: DFT).
  • multiplexing section 1075 multiplexes the PUCCH and PUSCH signals and the generated uplink reference signal for each transmission antenna port. That is, multiplexing section 1075 arranges the PUCCH and PUSCH signals and the generated uplink reference signal in the resource element for each transmission antenna port.
  • the radio transmission unit 1077 performs inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) on the multiplexed signal, performs SC-FDMA modulation, and adds a guard interval to the SC-FDMA-modulated SC-FDMA symbol.
  • IFFT inverse fast Fourier transform
  • Generating a baseband digital signal converting the baseband digital signal to an analog signal, generating an in-phase component and a quadrature component of an intermediate frequency from the analog signal, removing an extra frequency component for the intermediate frequency band,
  • the intermediate frequency signal is converted to a high frequency signal (up-conversion: up convert), an extra frequency component is removed, the power is amplified, and output to the transmission / reception antenna 109 for transmission.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram showing the configuration of the base station apparatus 3 of the present embodiment.
  • the base station apparatus 3 includes an upper layer processing unit 301, a control unit 303, a reception unit 305, a transmission unit 307, and a transmission / reception antenna 309.
  • the higher layer processing unit 301 includes a radio resource control unit 3011, a subframe setting unit 3013, a scheduling unit 3015, and a CSI report control unit 3017.
  • the reception unit 305 includes a decoding unit 3051, a demodulation unit 3053, a demultiplexing unit 3055, a wireless reception unit 3057, and a channel measurement unit 3059.
  • the transmission unit 307 includes an encoding unit 3071, a modulation unit 3073, a multiplexing unit 3075, a radio transmission unit 3077, and a downlink reference signal generation unit 3079.
  • the upper layer processing unit 301 includes a medium access control (MAC: Medium Access Control) layer, a packet data integration protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP) layer, a radio link control (Radio Link Control: RLC) layer, a radio resource control (Radio). Resource (Control: RRC) layer processing. Further, upper layer processing section 301 generates control information for controlling receiving section 305 and transmitting section 307 and outputs the control information to control section 303. The upper layer processing unit 301 has a function of acquiring the reported measurement result.
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • Radio Radio Resource
  • the radio resource control unit 3011 included in the higher layer processing unit 301 generates downlink data (transport block), system information, RRC message, MAC CE (Control Element), etc. arranged in the downlink PDSCH, or higher level. Obtained from the node and output to the transmission unit 307.
  • the radio resource control unit 3011 manages various setting information of each terminal device 1.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 included in the higher layer processing unit 301 includes subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or Management of the transmission direction UL-DL setting is performed for each terminal device 1.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or for each terminal apparatus 1. Alternatively, the transmission direction UL-DL setting is set.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 transmits information related to subframe setting to the terminal device 1.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 is also referred to as a base station subframe setting unit.
  • the base station apparatus 3 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL for the terminal apparatus 1.
  • -DL settings may be determined.
  • the base station apparatus 3 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission to the terminal apparatus 1.
  • the direction UL-DL setting may be instructed from an upper node.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink based on the uplink traffic volume and the downlink traffic volume.
  • a reference UL-DL configuration and / or a transmission direction UL-DL configuration may be determined.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 can manage at least two subframe sets.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the terminal devices 1.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the serving cells.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the CSI processes.
  • the subframe setting unit 3013 can transmit information indicating at least two subframe sets to the terminal device 1 via the transmission unit 307.
  • the scheduling unit 3015 included in the upper layer processing unit 301 uses the received channel state information and the channel allocation information, the channel estimation value, the channel quality, the channel quality, and the like to assign physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH).
  • the coding rate and modulation scheme and transmission power of the frame and physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH) are determined.
  • the scheduling unit 3015 determines whether to schedule a downlink physical channel and / or downlink physical signal or schedule an uplink physical channel and / or uplink physical signal in a flexible subframe. Based on the scheduling result, scheduling section 3015 generates control information (for example, DCI format) for controlling receiving section 305 and transmitting section 307 and outputs the control information to control section 303.
  • control information for example, DCI format
  • the scheduling unit 3015 generates information used for scheduling of physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH) based on the scheduling result.
  • the scheduling unit 3015 is based on UL-DL configuration, subframe pattern configuration, uplink-downlink configuration, uplink reference UL-DL configuration, downlink reference UL-DL configuration, and / or transmission direction UL-DL configuration.
  • the timing (subframe) for performing the transmission process and the reception process is determined.
  • the CSI report control unit 3017 provided in the higher layer processing unit 301 controls the CSI report of the terminal device 1.
  • the CSI report control unit 3017 transmits information indicating various settings assumed by the terminal device 1 to derive the CQI in the CSI reference resource to the terminal device 1 via the transmission unit 307.
  • the control unit 303 generates a control signal for controlling the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307 based on the control information from the higher layer processing unit 301.
  • the control unit 303 outputs the generated control signal to the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307 and controls the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307.
  • the receiving unit 305 separates, demodulates and decodes the received signal received from the terminal device 1 via the transmission / reception antenna 309 according to the control signal input from the control unit 303, and outputs the decoded information to the higher layer processing unit 301.
  • the radio reception unit 3057 converts an uplink signal received via the transmission / reception antenna 309 into an intermediate frequency (down-conversion: down convert), removes unnecessary frequency components, and appropriately maintains the signal level. In this way, the amplification level is controlled, and based on the in-phase and quadrature components of the received signal, quadrature demodulation is performed, and the quadrature demodulated analog signal is converted into a digital signal.
  • the wireless receiver 3057 removes a portion corresponding to a guard interval (Guard Interval: GI) from the converted digital signal.
  • the radio reception unit 3057 performs fast Fourier transform (FFT) on the signal from which the guard interval is removed, extracts a frequency domain signal, and outputs the signal to the demultiplexing unit 3055.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • the demultiplexing unit 1055 demultiplexes the signal input from the radio receiving unit 3057 into signals such as PUCCH, PUSCH, and uplink reference signal. This separation is performed based on radio resource allocation information included in the uplink grant that is determined in advance by the base station apparatus 3 using the radio resource control unit 3011 and notified to each terminal apparatus 1.
  • demultiplexing section 3055 compensates for the propagation paths of PUCCH and PUSCH from the propagation path estimation value input from channel measurement section 3059. Further, the demultiplexing unit 3055 outputs the separated uplink reference signal to the channel measurement unit 3059.
  • the demodulator 3053 performs inverse discrete Fourier transform (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform: IDFT) on the PUSCH, acquires modulation symbols, and performs BPSK (Binary Shift Keying), QPSK, 16QAM,
  • IDFT inverse discrete Fourier transform
  • BPSK Binary Shift Keying
  • QPSK Quadrature Phase Keying
  • 16QAM 16QAM
  • the received signal is demodulated using a predetermined modulation scheme such as 64QAM, or the modulation method notified by the own device to each terminal device 1 in advance using an uplink grant.
  • the demodulator 3053 uses the MIMO SM based on the number of spatially multiplexed sequences notified in advance to each terminal device 1 using an uplink grant and information indicating precoding performed on the sequences.
  • a plurality of uplink data modulation symbols transmitted on the PUSCH are separated.
  • the decoding unit 3051 encodes the demodulated PUCCH and PUSCH encoding bits in a predetermined encoding scheme, or a coding rate at which the device itself notifies the terminal device 1 in advance with an uplink grant. And the decoded uplink data and the uplink control information are output to the upper layer processing unit 101.
  • decoding section 3051 performs decoding using the encoded bits held in the HARQ buffer input from higher layer processing section 301 and the demodulated encoded bits.
  • Channel measurement section 309 measures an estimated channel value, channel quality, and the like from the uplink reference signal input from demultiplexing section 3055 and outputs the result to demultiplexing section 3055 and higher layer processing section 301.
  • the transmission unit 307 generates a downlink reference signal according to the control signal input from the control unit 303, encodes and modulates the HARQ indicator, downlink control information, and downlink data input from the higher layer processing unit 301. Then, the PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, and downlink reference signal are multiplexed, and the signal is transmitted to the terminal device 1 via the transmission / reception antenna 309.
  • the encoding unit 3071 is a predetermined encoding method such as block encoding, convolutional encoding, turbo encoding, and the like for the HARQ indicator, downlink control information, and downlink data input from the higher layer processing unit 301 Or is encoded using the encoding method determined by the radio resource control unit 3011.
  • the modulation unit 3073 modulates the coded bits input from the coding unit 3071 with a modulation scheme determined in advance by the radio resource control unit 3011 such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
  • the downlink reference signal generation unit 3079 generates a known sequence as a downlink reference signal, which is obtained by a predetermined rule based on a physical layer cell identifier (PCI) for identifying the base station apparatus 3 and the like. To do.
  • the multiplexing unit 3075 multiplexes the modulated modulation symbol of each channel and the generated downlink reference signal. That is, multiplexing section 3075 arranges the modulated modulation symbol of each channel and the generated downlink reference signal in the resource element.
  • the wireless transmission unit 3077 performs inverse fast Fourier transform (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform: IFFT) on the multiplexed modulation symbols and the like, performs modulation in the OFDM scheme, adds a guard interval to the OFDM symbol that has been OFDM-modulated, and baseband
  • IFFT inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • the baseband digital signal is converted to an analog signal, the in-phase and quadrature components of the intermediate frequency are generated from the analog signal, the extra frequency components for the intermediate frequency band are removed, and the intermediate-frequency signal Is converted to a high-frequency signal (up-conversion: up convert), an extra frequency component is removed, power is amplified, and output to the transmission / reception antenna 309 for transmission.
  • PDCCH or EPDCCH is used for notifying (designating) downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • information on PDSCH resource allocation information on MCS (Modulation and coding Coding scheme), information on scrambling identity (also called scrambling identifier), reference signal sequence identity (base sequence identity, Information on a base sequence identifier and a base sequence index).
  • MCS Modulation and coding Coding scheme
  • scrambling identity also called scrambling identifier
  • reference signal sequence identity base sequence identity
  • Information on a base sequence identifier and a base sequence index Information on a base sequence identifier and a base sequence index.
  • Small cell is a generic term for a cell having a small coverage, which is configured by the base station apparatus 3 having a lower transmission power than a macro cell. Since small cells can be set to have a small coverage, they can be operated densely.
  • the small cell base station apparatus 3 is arranged at a different location from the macro cell base station apparatus.
  • the closely arranged small cells are synchronized and can be configured as a small cell cluster.
  • the small cells in the small cell cluster are connected by backhaul (optical fiber, X2 interface, S1 interface).
  • eICIC enhanced Inter-Cell Interference Coordination
  • FeICIC Frether enhanced Inter Inter- Interference suppression techniques such as Cell Interference Coordination and CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point transmission / reception)
  • the small cell may be operated in a different frequency band from that of the macro cell, or may be operated in the same frequency band.
  • path loss propagation path attenuation
  • Small cells operated in different frequency bands are operated using macro cells and carrier aggregation technology or dual connectivity technology.
  • the small cell may be operated at the same frequency as the macro cell. Small cells may be operated outside the coverage of macro cells.
  • the small cell base station apparatus 3 may be arranged at the same location as the macro cell base station apparatus.
  • the base station device 3 can set the macro cell as Pcell and the small cell as Scell or pSCell for the terminal apparatus 1.
  • the terminal device 1 only needs to recognize as PCell, SCell, or pSCell, and does not need to be recognized as a macro cell or a small cell.
  • the secondary cell is configured by configuring a serving cell set together with the primary cell.
  • the number of downlink component carriers set in the terminal device 1 must be greater than or equal to the number of uplink component carriers set in the terminal device 1, and only the uplink component carrier is set as a secondary cell. It is not possible.
  • the terminal device 1 always uses a primary cell and a primary secondary cell for transmission of PUCCH. In other words, the terminal device 1 does not expect to transmit the PUCCH in a secondary cell other than the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • the reconfiguration / addition / deletion of the secondary cell is performed by RRC.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the activation / deactivation mechanism of the secondary cell is supported. Primary cells are not activated / deactivated.
  • the terminal device 1 does not need to receive the associated PDCCH or PDSCH, cannot transmit on the associated uplink, and does not need to perform CQI measurement.
  • the terminal device 1 receives the PDSCH and the PDCCH, and therefore expects to be able to perform CQI measurement.
  • Activation / deactivation mechanism is based on the combination of MAC CE and deactivation timer.
  • MAC CE notifies secondary cell activation and deactivation information in bitmap format. Bits that are set to 1 indicate activation of the associated secondary cell, and bits that are set to 0 indicate deactivation of the associated secondary cell.
  • the secondary cell set in the terminal device 1 is set to be deactivated as an initial state. That is, even if various parameters for the secondary cell are set for the terminal device 1, it is not always possible to perform communication using the secondary cell.
  • the MAC CE has a fixed size and is composed of seven Ci fields and one R field, and is defined as follows.
  • Ci is a secondary cell set to secondary cell index (SCellIndex) i
  • the Ci field indicates the activation / deactivation state of the secondary cell with secondary cell index i.
  • the terminal device 1 ignores the Ci field.
  • the Ci field is set to “1”, it indicates that the secondary cell with the secondary cell index i is activated.
  • the Ci field is set to “0”, it indicates that the secondary cell with the secondary cell index i has been deactivated.
  • R is a reserved bit and is set to “0”.
  • DeactivationTimer a deactivation timer for the secondary cell
  • the deactivation timer When the deactivation timer is set for the secondary cell, it is a timer related to the maintenance time of the secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 holds a deactivation timer for each secondary cell, and when the deactivation timer expires, the terminal device 1 deactivates the secondary cell related to the expired deactivation timer.
  • the initial value of the deactivation timer for the secondary cell is set from the upper layer (RRC layer) using the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.
  • the initial value of the deactivation timer for the secondary cell for example, one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which is a value related to the number of radio frames, is set.
  • rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames
  • rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames
  • rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames
  • rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames
  • rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames.
  • rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames
  • rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.
  • the field related to the deactivation timer for the secondary cell (parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10) is set only in the terminal device 1 in which one or more secondary cells are set.
  • the terminal device 1 deletes the existing value of the field related to the deactivation timer and assumes that infinity is set as the value.
  • the terminal device 1 When receiving the MAC CE instructing the activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 sets the secondary cell whose activation is set by the MAC CE as the activation.
  • the terminal device 1 can perform the following operations on the secondary cell for which activation is set by the MAC CE.
  • the operation includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell Data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 When receiving the MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts a deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the MAC CE.
  • start means that the timer starts counting while holding the value. Note that restarting means setting a value to an initial value and starting a timer count.
  • the terminal device 1 When receiving the MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 triggers transmission of transmission power remaining capacity (power headroom (PHR: Power head room)).
  • PHR Power head room
  • the terminal device 1 deactivates the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Set as a tivat.
  • the terminal device 1 When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received, or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 relates to the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Stop the deactivation timer.
  • the terminal device 1 When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received, or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 relates to the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Flush all HARQ buffers
  • the activated PDCCH in the secondary cell indicates a downlink grant (uplink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the activated secondary cell is activated
  • the terminal device 1 restarts the deactivation timer related to the activated secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 When the secondary cell is deactivated, the terminal device 1 does not perform the following operation on the deactivated secondary cell.
  • the operation includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI reporting to the secondary cell, uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in the secondary cell, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, and PDCCH transmission in the secondary cell. It is a PDCCH monitor for a monitor and a secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 stops the random access procedure that is being executed.
  • secondary cell activation / deactivation timing An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described.
  • an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is the first secondary cell activation / deactivation timing or the conventional secondary cell activation / deactivation timing. Called.
  • the terminal device 1 When receiving an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting among the operations corresponding to the activation described above.
  • the operations excluding the related operations and the operations related to the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell are defined as a minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes). )) And not earlier than subframe n + 8.
  • a minimum requirement for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes).
  • uplink in the secondary cell is not slower than the minimum requirement (minimummrequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and not earlier than subframe n + 8 Transmission of link data (UL-SCH), transmission of RACH in the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and monitoring of PDCCH for the secondary cell can be performed.
  • minimum requirement eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)
  • UL-SCH Transmission of link data
  • SRS transmission in the secondary cell which is later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and earlier than subframe n + 8 (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell cannot be performed.
  • minimum requirement eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)
  • UL-SCH subframe n + 8
  • starting the deactivation timer means holding the value and starting the timer count.
  • the deactivation timer is restarted when the value is set to an initial value and the timer starts counting.
  • the minimum requirement may be different for FDD (E-UTRA FDD) and TDD (E-UTRA TDD). That is, the terminal device 1 that has received the activation command for the secondary cell may apply (set) a different minimum requirement depending on whether the secondary cell is FDD or TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 receives the deactivation command for the secondary cell (MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) or the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) related to the secondary cell is received.
  • the minimum requirements for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)
  • operations related to CSI reporting must be applied in subframe n + 8. That is, it is applied later than the defined minimum requirement (minimum requirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and earlier than subframe n + 8.
  • the terminal device 1 when receiving the deactivation command for the secondary cell (MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 receives the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) for the secondary cell in the subframe n + 8. ) / PMI (Precoding / Matrix / Indicator) / RI (Rank / Indicator) / PTI (Precoding / Type / Indicator) is not reported.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted, RACH is not transmitted in the secondary cell, PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.
  • secondary cell activation / deactivation timing An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a second secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.
  • the transition time from the deactivation state to the activation state (or the transition time from the OFF state to the ON state) can be shortened. . Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.
  • the terminal device 1 When the terminal device 1 receives an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 enters the operation corresponding to the activation described above (or enters the ON state). The corresponding action) must be applied in subframe n + 8.
  • an activation command for the secondary cell for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell.
  • the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, or a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell) ) Has expired, the operation corresponding to the deactivation described above (or the operation corresponding to the OFF state) must be applied in subframe n + 8.
  • a deactivation command for the secondary cell for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell
  • a deactivation timer sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell
  • the terminal apparatus 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported, SRS is not transmitted in the secondary cell, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell is not transmitted. The RACH is not transmitted, the PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and the PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank
  • PTI Precoding Type Indicator
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell.
  • the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells.
  • the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.
  • secondary cell activation / deactivation timing An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a third secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.
  • the secondary cell activation (or ON state) is instructed and then PDCCH monitoring starts in the secondary cell and / or for the secondary cell It is possible to shorten the time until the start of monitoring of the PDCCH. Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.
  • the terminal device 1 When the terminal device 1 receives an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 enters the operation corresponding to the activation described above (or enters the ON state). Operations corresponding to CSI reporting, operations related to the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell, operations other than PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell Must be applied no later than the defined minimum requirements (minimum requirement, eg 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and no earlier than subframe n + 8 There.
  • operations related to CSI reporting operations related to a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and PDCCH for the secondary cell must be applied in subframe n + 8.
  • uplink in the secondary cell is not slower than the minimum requirement (minimummrequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and not earlier than subframe n + 8 Transmission of link data (UL-SCH) and transmission of RACH in the secondary cell can be performed.
  • operations applied in subframe n + 8 are SRS transmission in the secondary cell and secondary cell.
  • UL-SCH Uplink data
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell.
  • the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, or a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell) ) Expires, among the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above (or the operations corresponding to the OFF state), the operation related to CSI reporting, the operation related to monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell Operations other than those related to monitoring of the PDCCH are not slower than the defined minimum requirements (minimumminirequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and subframe n It must be applied no earlier than 8. Of the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations related to CSI reporting must be applied in subframe n + 8.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported, PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.
  • the operations not performed in the subframe n + 8 are the SRS transmission in the secondary cell, Any of transmission of uplink data (UL-SCH), transmission of RACH in the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and monitoring of PDCCH for the secondary cell may be used.
  • UL-SCH uplink data
  • RACH radio access control
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell.
  • the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells.
  • the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.
  • secondary cell activation / deactivation timing An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.
  • the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.
  • terminal apparatus 1 When receiving an activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, terminal apparatus 1 receives CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) for the secondary cell in subframe n + 8. / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, Deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command must be started or restarted. And in sub-frame n + A, transmission of SRS in a secondary cell can be performed. Then, in subframe n + B, uplink data (UL-SCH) can be transmitted in the secondary cell. Then, in the subframe n + C, the RACH can be transmitted in the secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + D, PDCCH can be monitored in a secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + E, the PDCCH with respect to a secondary cell can be monitored.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix In
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be set (transmitted or notified by a signal) from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer), or may be preset values.
  • the value may be a value related to the capability of the terminal device 1 or may be a predetermined value determined by a specification or the like.
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be transmitted or broadcast from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer (Higher layer) using one value (or parameter), or may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer. It may be transmitted or notified from a layer (Higher layer) using a plurality of values (or parameters).
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be set individually, or some or all may be set in common.
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be commonly set for the operation.
  • a common value is set for the PDCCH monitor in the secondary cell and the PDCCH monitor for the secondary cell. May be.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell.
  • the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 When the terminal apparatus 1 receives the deactivation command for the secondary cell in the subframe n, in the subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel QualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) for the secondary cell is received. / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported. And in sub-frame n + A, transmission of SRS in a secondary cell is not performed. Then, in subframe n + B, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted in the secondary cell. Then, in subframe n + C, RACH is not transmitted in the secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + D, PDCCH monitoring in a secondary cell is not performed. And in sub-frame n + E, PDCCH monitoring with respect to a secondary cell is not performed.
  • CQI Channel QualityIndicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • PTI Precoding Type Indic
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be set (transmitted or notified by a signal) from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer), or may be preset values.
  • the value may be a value related to the capability of the terminal device 1 or may be a predetermined value determined by a specification or the like.
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be transmitted or broadcast from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer (Higher layer) using one value (or parameter), or may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer. It may be transmitted or notified from a layer (Higher layer) using a plurality of values (or parameters).
  • the mobile station device 1 may set A, B, C, D, and E based on one value (or parameter) transmitted or broadcast from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer).
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 may set A, B, C, D, and E based on a plurality of values (or parameters) transmitted or notified from the base station apparatus 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer).
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be set individually, or some or all may be set in common.
  • A, B, C, D, and E may be commonly set for the operation.
  • a common value is set for the PDCCH monitor in the secondary cell and the PDCCH monitor for the secondary cell. May be.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.
  • the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell.
  • the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
  • the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells.
  • the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.
  • the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is the timing at which a part or all of the operations corresponding to activation / deactivation are applied after the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell. Preferably there is.
  • the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is the timing at which a part or all of the operations corresponding to the ON state / OFF state are applied after the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell. It is preferable that
  • a plurality of secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied to the terminal device 1 (a plurality of timings may be set).
  • the activation command for the secondary cell may be a MAC CE that instructs activation (or ON) of the secondary cell, or an L1 signal related to the instruction for activation (or ON) of the secondary cell.
  • an L2 signal predetermined MAC CE related to the activation (or ON) of the secondary cell. It may be any signal related to the instruction to activate (or turn on) the secondary cell.
  • the deactivation command for the secondary cell may be a MAC CE for instructing the deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell, or an L1 signal related to the instruction for the deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell.
  • L2 signal predetermined MAC CE related to the instruction of deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell
  • predetermined MAC CE predetermined MAC CE related to the instruction of deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell
  • the ON state of the secondary cell may be a state where an operation corresponding to activation may be possible, a state where a part of the operation corresponding to activation may be possible, or an operation corresponding to activation. In addition, any operation may be possible or impossible.
  • the secondary cell OFF state may be a state in which an operation corresponding to the deactivation can be performed, or a part of the operation corresponding to the deactivation may be possible. In addition to the operation to be performed, any operation may be possible or impossible.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 whose minimum requirement is 8 ms (8 subframes).
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 that does not have a minimum requirement.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 having a predetermined terminal capability (UE (capability). Further, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be the terminal device 1 that has transmitted or reported information indicating a predetermined terminal capability (UE capability).
  • the predetermined terminal capability includes a capability related to a predetermined activation / deactivation, a capability related to a predetermined secondary cell, a capability related to ON / OFF (start / stop) of a cell, and a capability related to DRS.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 in which a secondary cell to which ON / OFF can be applied is set, and a predetermined activation / deactivation is performed. May be a terminal device 1 in which a secondary cell to which is applicable is set, or a terminal device 1 in which RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to activation / deactivation is set, It may be a terminal device 1 in which RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell ON / OFF (start / stop) is set, and L1 signal (predetermined DCI) related to cell ON / OFF ,
  • the predetermined DCI format, the predetermined format in the predetermined DCI format Terminal device 1 that has received the L1 signal (a predetermined field in a predetermined DCI, a predetermined DCI format, or a predetermined DCI format) may be used.
  • L2 signal predetermined MAC CE
  • predetermined MAC CE L2 signal related to cell ON / OFF
  • L2 signal predetermined predetermined
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 in which DRS is set, or a terminal device 1 in which a function related to DRS is set. Also good.
  • Functions related to DRS include downlink time domain synchronization based on DRS (time synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization based on DRS (frequency synchronization), and cell / transmission point identification based on DRS (cell / transmission point) identification), measurement of RSRP based on DRS (RSRP measurement), measurement of RSRQ based on DRS (RSRQ measurement), measurement of geographical location of UE 1 based on DRS (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI based on DRS (CSI measurement).
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may receive the activation command to trigger a predetermined communication.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to start random access (RACH transmission) by receiving an activation command.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to receive an SRS by receiving an activation command.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to receive CSI by receiving an activation command.
  • the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to transmit CSI based on DRS (calculated based on DRS) by receiving an activation command. .
  • the terminal device 1 may switch the timing of the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation according to the conditions. For example, the terminal device 1 may switch the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation timing to any of the first to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timings according to conditions.
  • the terminal device 1 may be set with a default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, and may switch the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation timing according to conditions.
  • the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, and is applied according to conditions.
  • the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be switched to any of the second to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timings.
  • the terminal device 1 has initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing set, and, depending on conditions, the initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing and L1 signaling at the same time Cell ON / OFF (start / stop) may be applied.
  • the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing
  • the ON / OFF (start / stop) of the cell using L1 signaling may be applied simultaneously with the timing of 1 (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation.
  • the terminal device 1 has a default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing set, and depending on conditions, a different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, or a cell using L1 signaling ON / OFF (start / stop) may be applied.
  • the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, Any one of timings of second to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation, or cell ON / OFF (start / stop) using L1 signaling may be applied.
  • the timing of the secondary cell activation / deactivation is as follows. It is preferably applied only to the secondary cell. That is, the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is preferably not applied to the primary cell.
  • each cell set in the mobile station apparatus 1 When a plurality of cells are set in the mobile station apparatus 1 (when one primary cell and one or a plurality of secondary cells are set), each cell set in the mobile station apparatus 1 Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied. That is, the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a plurality of cells are set may switch the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing for each cell.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may switch the timing of secondary cell activation / deactivation for the plurality of secondary cells.
  • the mobile station device When a plurality of cell groups (one cell group is preferably configured to include at least one primary cell and one primary secondary cell) is set in the mobile station device 1, the mobile station device Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be applied for each cell group set to 1. That is, the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a plurality of cell groups are set may switch the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing for each cell group.
  • the primary / secondary cell is a cell used in dual connectivity.
  • the dual connectivity is an operation in which a predetermined terminal device consumes radio resources provided from at least two different network points (a master base station device (MeNB: Master eNB) and a secondary base station device (SeNB: Secondary eNB)). is there.
  • a terminal device makes an RRC connection at at least two network points.
  • the terminal devices may be connected in a RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state and by a non-ideal backhaul.
  • a base station device connected to at least the S1-MME and serving as a mobility anchor of the core network is referred to as a master base station device.
  • a base station device that is not a master base station device that provides additional radio resources to the terminal device is referred to as a secondary base station device.
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • the cell group may be a serving cell group.
  • the primary cell belongs to the MCG.
  • a secondary cell corresponding to the primary cell is referred to as a primary secondary cell (pSCell: Primary Secondary Cell).
  • pSCell Primary Secondary Cell
  • the pSCell may be referred to as a special cell or a special secondary cell (Special SCell: Special Secondary Cell).
  • the special SCell base station apparatus configuring the special SCell
  • only some functions of PCell may be supported by pSCell.
  • the pSCell may support a function of transmitting PDCCH.
  • the pSCell may support a function of performing PDCCH transmission using a search space different from CSS or USS.
  • a search space different from USS is based on a search space determined based on a value defined in the specification, a search space determined based on an RNTI different from C-RNTI, and a value set in an upper layer different from RNTI. Search space determined by Further, the pSCell may always be in an activated state.
  • pSCell is a cell which can receive PUCCH.
  • a data radio bearer (DRB: Data Radio Bearer) may be individually allocated in the MeNB and SeNB.
  • a signaling radio bearer (SRB: Signaling Radio Bearer) may be allocated only to the MeNB.
  • duplex modes may be set individually for MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell, respectively.
  • MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell may not be synchronized.
  • a plurality of timing adjustment parameters (TAG: Timing Advance Group) may be set in each of the MCG and the SCG. That is, the terminal device can perform uplink transmission at different timings in each CG.
  • TAG Timing Advance Group
  • the terminal device can transmit the UCI corresponding to the cell in the MCG only to the MeNB (PCell), and the UCI corresponding to the cell in the SCG can be transmitted only to the SeNB (pSCell).
  • UCI is SR, HARQ-ACK, and / or CSI.
  • a transmission method using PUCCH and / or PUSCH is applied to each cell group.
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • MIB Master Information Block
  • RLF Radio Link Failure
  • the secondary cell does not recognize that RLF has been detected even if the conditions for detecting RLF are met.
  • the RLF is detected if the condition is satisfied.
  • the upper layer of the primary secondary cell notifies the upper layer of the primary cell that the RLF has been detected.
  • SPS Semi-Persistent Scheduling
  • DRX Discontinuous Reception
  • the secondary cell may perform the same DRX as the primary cell.
  • information / parameters related to MAC settings are basically shared with the primary cell / primary secondary cell of the same cell group. Some parameters (for example, sTAG-Id) may be set for each secondary cell.
  • Some timers and counters may be applied only to the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell. A timer or counter that is applied only to the secondary cell may be set.
  • the condition is preferably that a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set / not set.
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter high layer parameter
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set performs the switching.
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter high layer parameter
  • the condition is that DRS is set for the carrier frequency for the band, and that a predetermined higher layer parameter is set / not set.
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter is set / not set.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band and a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band and a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set performs the switching.
  • the condition is that DRS is set / not set to the carrier frequency for the band.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band performs the switching.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 for which DRS is not set performs the switching.
  • the condition is that DRS is set / not set to the carrier frequency for a band (licensed band assisted access) used for LAA (licensed band and cell-unaggregated unlicensed band).
  • a band licensed band assisted access
  • LAA licensed band and cell-unaggregated unlicensed band.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA performs the switching.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is not set as the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA performs the switching.
  • the condition is preferably that DRS is set / not set for the carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band).
  • a band not used for LAA a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA performs the switching.
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is not set to the carrier frequency for the band used for non-LAA performs the switching.
  • the condition is that a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set (in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) in the band used for LAA (Licensed assisted access) (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with the license band).
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) in the band used for LAA (Licensed assisted access) (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with the license band).
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in the band used for LAA (for the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) performs the switching.
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter is set (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) in a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band).
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter is set in a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band).
  • the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in a band used for non-LAA (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) performs the switching.
  • a predetermined higher layer parameter is not set in a band used for non-LAA (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) performs the switching.
  • the switching is preferably performed (applied) to a cell (secondary cell) corresponding to a carrier frequency for a band.
  • the condition is preferably that self-carrier scheduling or cross-carrier scheduling is / are not set for a band (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with a license band) used for LAA (Licensed assisted access). That is, it is preferable that PDCCH in a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA or PDCCH for a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA is detected (decoded).
  • the condition is preferably that self carrier scheduling or cross carrier scheduling is / is not set for a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). That is, it is preferable that PDCCH in a cell corresponding to a band used for non-LAA or PDCCH for a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA is detected (decoded).
  • the predetermined upper layer parameter is a parameter related to switching (application) to a different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, or ON / OFF (activation / deactivation) of a cell using L1 signaling. It may be a parameter related to switching (application) to (stop). For example, it may be information related to instructing switching (application) or information related to not instructing switching (application).
  • Setting DRS means setting parameters related to DRS.
  • physical cell identifiers related to DRS PCID: physical cell ID, physCellID, physical layer cell ID
  • DRS are related. Any of virtual cell identifier (VCID: virtual cell ID), CSI-RS resource element configuration (CSI-RSRE configuration) related to DRS, and CSI-RS subframe configuration (CSI-RS subframeSIconfiguration) related to DRS is set It may be done.
  • the CSI-RS subframe setting related to DRS is preferably equal to the subframe offset between the SSS (secondary synchronization signal) and the CSI-RS in the DRS opportunity (DRS occasion).
  • the DRS functions include downlink time domain synchronization based on DRS (time (synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization based on DRS (frequency synchronization), and cell / transmission point identification based on DRS (cell / transmission point). identification), measurement of RSRP based on DRS (RSRP measurement), measurement of RSRQ based on DRS (RSRQ measurement), measurement of geographical location of UE 1 based on DRS (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI based on DRS (CSI measurement).
  • DRS is composed of multiple signals.
  • DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CRS.
  • DRS measurement based on CSI-RS CSI-RS-based DRS measurement
  • the DRS is preferably configured by PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS.
  • the DRS is preferably transmitted in a DRS opportunity (DRS occasion) within a DRS measurement timing setting (DMTC: TCDRS measurement timing configurations).
  • DMTC DRS measurement timing setting
  • the DMTC is preferably notified (set) by the period and the offset.
  • the maximum allowed measurement bandwidth (Maximum allowed measurement) bandwidth, the MBSFN subframe setting of the neighboring cell, and the TDD UL-DL configuration of the neighboring cell may be used.
  • a neighbor transmission point list (neighbour TPs list) is notified in addition to DMTC notification (setting). May be.
  • the adjacent transmission point list preferably includes information on identification of each transmission point and information for assisting synchronization of each transmission point.
  • a neighbor cell list (neighbour cells list) may be notified in addition to the DMTC notification (setting).
  • the neighbor cell list preferably includes information on physical cell identifiers (PCIDs: “physical cell ID”, “physCell ID”, “physical cell layer ID”) of the adjacent cell.
  • the following describes the unlicensed band (unlicensed band).
  • a license band is a band that is licensed by the government or frequency manager, and is used for telecommunication business.
  • An unlicensed band (unlicensed band) is a band that does not require a license used in a specific low-power radio station such as a wireless LAN.
  • the unlicensed band may be 2.4 GHz and / or 5 GHz (5150-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, 5725-5850 MHz).
  • LTE-U LTE-Unlicensed
  • LAA Licensed assisted access
  • the license band cell In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, it is preferable to set the license band cell as the primary cell and the unlicensed band cell as the secondary cell.
  • the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may be operated asynchronously. That is, the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may be operated in dual connectivity.
  • the cell of the unlicensed band is not used independently (in Standalone).
  • the license band cell is preferably used for control data and user data communication, and the unlicensed band cell is preferably used for user data communication.
  • an unlicensed band cell has only radio resources used for downlink communication.
  • an unlicensed band cell may not have radio resources used for uplink communication.
  • the cell of the unlicensed band is preferably used only for downlink user data transmission.
  • the license band cell adopts the FDD method or the TDD method using uplink-downlink settings 0 to 6.
  • the FDD method or the TDD method using the uplink-downlink settings 0 to 6 is applied to the cell of the unlicensed band.
  • the uplink-downlink setting of 7 is preferably an uplink-downlink setting in which all subframes in the radio frame are reserved (reserved) as downlink subframes. That is, subframe 1 in the radio frame is not a special subframe. That is, when the uplink-downlink setting is 7, subframes 0 and 5 are not reserved for downlink transmission, and subframe 2 is not reserved for uplink transmission.
  • OFDM For license band cells, it is preferable to use OFDM for the downlink access method and SC-FDMA for the uplink access method.
  • the unlicensed band cell is preferably used by OFDM or SC-FDMA for the downlink access method.
  • SC-FDMA single-cluster SC-FDMA (SC-FDMA that does not perform discrete arrangement in the frequency domain).
  • SC-FDMA single-cluster SC-FDMA (SC-FDMA that does not perform discrete arrangement in the frequency domain).
  • Unlicensed band cells are preferably operated at different subcarrier intervals than license band cells.
  • the subcarrier interval of the unlicensed band cell is 312.5 kHz
  • the subcarrier interval of the license band cell is 15 kHz.
  • the cell of the unlicensed band is preferably operated with a radio frame length (subframe length) different from that of the license band cell.
  • the maximum uplink (or downlink) maximum transmission power of the unlicensed band cell is preferably different from that of the license band cell.
  • the maximum uplink transmission power of an unlicensed band cell is preferably less than 23 dBm.
  • the downlink reference signal transmitted in the unlicensed band cell is preferably different from the downlink reference signal transmitted in the license band cell.
  • PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB are not transmitted to the unlicensed band cell. That is, it is preferable that only a part of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB is transmitted in the unlicensed band cell.
  • the cell of the unlicensed band is preferably different from the cell of the license band in the transmission frequency of some or all of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS and SIB.
  • an unlicensed band cell preferably has a longer transmission interval in a part or all of the time domain of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB than a license band cell.
  • the base station device 3 preferably includes collision avoidance means for avoiding a collision between communication in an unlicensed band cell and communication in another wireless communication system using the same frequency. For example, before the base station apparatus starts communication in an unlicensed band cell, it may be in communication so that it detects the usage status of the frequency (channel) to be transmitted and does not transmit multiple carriers at the same frequency. For example, it is preferable to have a function (carrier sense, LBT: Listen Before Talk) for attempting communication again after a certain time.
  • a function carrier sense, LBT: Listen Before Talk
  • Bands (E-UTRA operating bands) that can be used for communication between the base station device 3 and the mobile station device 1 may be managed by a table shared by the base station device 3 and the mobile station device 1.
  • bands that can be used for communication (E-UTRA ⁇ ⁇ operating ⁇ bands) may be managed by an index
  • a band corresponding to a predetermined index may be a license band
  • a band corresponding to a predetermined index may be an unlicensed band.
  • the index of bands (E-UTRAoperatingUbands) that can be used for communication may be transmitted from the mobile station apparatus 1 as a message of terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation) as FreqBandIndicator.
  • the band (E-UTRA operating band) index usable for communication is associated with a band operated as an uplink, a band operated as a downlink, and a multiplexing mode (FDD system or TDD system). It is preferable.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may be notified whether the function related to communication in the unlicensed band is supported. That is, information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band may be transmitted from the mobile station apparatus 1 as a message of terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation). For example, information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band may be included in parameters (PhyLayerParameters) related to the physical layer.
  • information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band is held (set) for each band, and terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation) May be transmitted from the mobile station apparatus 1 as a message.
  • UECapabilityInformation terminal capability information
  • information related to support of functions related to communication in an unlicensed band may be included in parameters (RF-Parameters) related to radio frequencies.
  • the function related to communication in the unlicensed band of the mobile station apparatus 1 may be a function related to carrier sense or LBT.
  • the function related to communication in the unlicensed band of the mobile station apparatus 1 may be a function related to the uplink-downlink setting of 7.
  • a synchronization signal such as PSS / SSS, CRS, PBCH, SIB, etc.
  • a reference signal and broadcast information are transmitted. Therefore, those signals generate inter-cell interference.
  • the power of the base station apparatus 3 is wasted by constantly transmitting these signals.
  • the base station apparatus 3 transitions to an ON state (operating state, a starting state) and an OFF state (stopping state).
  • the base station device 3 does not transmit / receive data to / from the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can transition to the OFF state.
  • the base station device 3 transmits / receives data to / from the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can transition to the ON state.
  • the state in which the base station apparatus 3 is stopped is a state in which at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, PBCH, PDCCH, and PDSCH is not transmitted.
  • PSS / SSS is not transmitted for one half frame or more (5 subframes or more).
  • the state where the base station device 3 is stopped is a state where only DRS is transmitted. Note that the base station apparatus 3 may perform reception processing at the receiving unit of the base station apparatus even in a stopped state.
  • the state in which the cell / base station apparatus 3 is activated is a state in which at least one of PSS / SSS and CRS is transmitted.
  • PSS / SSS is transmitted in one half frame.
  • the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3 may be associated by processing (assuming or operation) of the terminal device 1 with respect to a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal.
  • the processing is monitoring, reception processing, transmission processing, or the like. That is, the terminal device 1 does not need to recognize that the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, and the terminal device 1 may switch processing for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal.
  • the transition between the start state and the stop state in the base station device 3 includes switching of processing for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal device 1.
  • the activation state in the base station device 3 corresponds to the first process for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal device 1.
  • the stop state in the base station apparatus 3 corresponds to the second process for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal apparatus 1.
  • the ON state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as a conventional terminal device.
  • a specific example of the base station device 3 in the ON state is as follows.
  • the terminal device 1 expects to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in a predetermined subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting based on the set CSI reporting mode.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 expects a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) for CSI reporting and a CSI reference resource to exist.
  • a reference signal for example, CRS or CSI-RS
  • the OFF state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 performs processing different from that of the conventional terminal device.
  • a specific example of the base station device 3 in the OFF state is as follows.
  • the terminal device 1 does not expect to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH.
  • the terminal device 1 does not monitor PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in all subframes.
  • the terminal device 1 does not report CSI regardless of the set CSI report mode.
  • the terminal device 1 does not expect the presence of a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) and a CSI reference resource for CSI reporting.
  • a reference signal for example, CRS or CSI-RS
  • the transition between the start state and the stop state in the base station device 3 includes, for example, the connection state of the terminal device 1, the data request status of the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3, and the CSI measurement from the terminal device 1. And / or RRM measurement information.
  • the base station apparatus 3 can explicitly or implicitly set or notify the terminal apparatus 1 of information (cell state information) regarding transition between the activated state and the deactivated state in the base station apparatus 3. .
  • the base station apparatus 3 explicitly notifies the terminal apparatus 1 of the cell state information using RRC, MAC, PDCCH and / or EPDCCH.
  • the base station device 3 implicitly notifies the cell state information to the terminal device 1 according to the presence or absence of a predetermined channel or signal.
  • the base station device 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal device 1 is connected has its activation state stopped based on the connection state of the terminal device 1, the data state of the terminal device 1, and the measurement information of the terminal device 1. It is determined whether or not to transit to.
  • the base station apparatus 3 that has determined to shift to the stop state transmits information to shift to the stop state to the base station apparatus 3 of the surrounding cells, and prepares for cell stop. Note that the determination as to whether or not to change the activation state to the stop state and the transmission of information that changes to the stop state may not be performed in the serving cell.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S -It may be determined and transmitted by a GW (Serving Gateway).
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 is connected to the base station device 3, the terminal device 1 is instructed to hand over to the surrounding cell, or the deactivation is transmitted. Do.
  • the serving cell to which no terminal device 1 is connected due to cell stop preparation transitions from a start state to a stop state.
  • the base station device 3 transitions from a stopped state to a started state.
  • the time from the stop to the transition to the start state and the time from the start to the transition to the stop state are referred to as a transition time (Transition Time).
  • Transition Time Transition Time
  • Whether or not the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state transitions to the activated state includes, for example, an uplink reference signal from the terminal apparatus 1, cell detection information from the terminal apparatus 1, and physical layer information from the terminal apparatus 1. It is determined based on measurement information.
  • the base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal apparatus 1 is connected and the stopped base station apparatus 3 (adjacent cell) share the DRS settings via the backhaul. Further, the serving cell notifies the terminal device 1 of the setting of the DRS.
  • the neighboring cell transmits DRS.
  • the terminal device 1 detects the DRS transmitted from the neighboring cell based on the DRS setting notified from the serving cell. Further, the terminal device 1 performs physical layer measurement using the DRS transmitted from the adjacent cell. The terminal device 1 reports the measurement to the serving cell.
  • the serving cell determines whether or not to transition the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state to the activated state based on the measurement report from the terminal device 1, and determines to transition to the activated state Information indicating start-up is notified to the base station apparatus 3 in a stopped state via the backhaul.
  • the determination as to whether or not to change the stop state to the start state and the transmission of information instructing the start may not be performed by the serving cell, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), S-GW (Serving ⁇ Gateway) may be determined and transmitted.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving ⁇ Gateway
  • the base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal apparatus is connected and the base station apparatus 3 (adjacent cell) in a stopped state share the SRS setting of the terminal apparatus 1 via the backhaul. Further, the serving cell notifies the terminal device 1 of the setting of the SRS.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits the SRS based on the setting of the SRS or the instruction of the SRS request.
  • the neighboring cell detects the SRS transmitted from the terminal device 1. Further, the adjacent cell performs physical layer measurement using the SRS transmitted from the terminal device 1. Based on the measurement result by SRS, the adjacent cell determines whether or not to shift the base station device 3 to the activated state, and transitions from the stopped state to the activated state.
  • the determination as to whether or not to change the stop state to the start state does not have to be performed in the neighboring cell.
  • the determination is performed by the serving cell, MME (Mobility Management Entity), and S-GW (Serving Gateway). May be sent.
  • the neighboring cell performs measurement of the physical layer using the SRS, and then transmits the measurement result to the serving cell, the MME, and the S-GW, and receives information instructing activation.
  • the serving cell may notify the terminal device 1 of information indicating the activation / deactivation state of surrounding cells.
  • the terminal device 1 switches the behavior of the terminal device 1 by recognizing the start state or the stop state of the cell.
  • the behavior of the terminal device 1 is, for example, an interference measurement method.
  • L1 signaling Layer 1 signaling
  • the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell is notified by PDCCH or EPDCCH.
  • One bit corresponding to the target cell is assigned, 0 (false, disable) indicates stop, and 1 (true, enable) indicates activation.
  • Bits corresponding to the target cell may be configured as an aggregated bitmap, and a plurality of cells may be notified of activation / deactivation states at the same time. The association between the bit and the target cell is notified by dedicated RRC signaling.
  • Information indicating the start / stop state is notified in downlink control information (DCI: Downlink Control Information) format 1C.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • Information indicating the start / stop state may be notified in the DCI format 3 / 3A. Note that the information indicating the start / stop state may be notified in the same payload size (number of bits) format as the DCI format 1C.
  • the DCI format includes a DCI format related to uplink scheduling and a DCI format related to downlink scheduling.
  • a DCI format related to uplink scheduling is called an uplink grant
  • a DCI format related to downlink scheduling is called a downlink grant (downlink assignment).
  • One DCI format may be transmitted to a plurality of terminal devices 1. For example, when transmitting only the transmission power control command (TPC command: “Transmission“ Power Control ”command), the command may be transmitted to a plurality of terminal devices 1 in a batch.
  • TPC command Transmission“ Power Control ”command
  • Such scheduling (or triggering) is called group scheduling (group triggering).
  • the terminal device 1 is individually assigned an index and detects bits based on the index.
  • DCI format 0 is used for PUSCH scheduling in one uplink cell.
  • DCI format 1 is used for scheduling one PDSCH codeword in one cell.
  • DCI format 1A is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell and random access processing started by PDCCH order.
  • DCI corresponding to the PDCCH order may be transmitted by PDCCH or EPDCCH.
  • the DCI format 0 and the DCI format 1A can be transmitted using the same bit information field. Based on the value indicated in a certain bit field, the terminal device 1 has a DCI format mapped to the received bit information field. It is determined whether it is DCI format 0 or DCI format 1A.
  • DCI format 1B is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell with precoding information.
  • the DCI format 1C is used for notifying a change (change) of a multicast control channel (MCCH: “Multicast Control Channel”) and for performing compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword. Further, the DCI format 1C may be used for notifying a random access response by being scrambled using RA-RNTI (Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier).
  • RA-RNTI Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • compact scheduling refers to, for example, scheduling a narrow bandwidth PDSCH.
  • the DCI format size is determined depending on the bandwidth used for the PDSCH that performs scheduling. If the bandwidth is narrow, the required DCI format size can also be reduced.
  • the DCI format 1C is scrambled using an RNTI (eg, eIMTA-RNTI) related to dynamic TDD (first type (mode) TDD), so that information indicating the TDD UL-DL setting is set. Also good.
  • RNTI eg, eIMTA-RNTI
  • first type TDD dynamic TDD
  • second type TDD second type TDD
  • Dynamic TDD refers to TDD that switches TDD UL-DL settings using L1 signaling according to uplink / downlink communication status. Dynamic TDD is also used to extend interference management and adaptive traffic control.
  • the dynamic TDD may be referred to as eIMTA (enhanced Interference Management and Traffic Management) or TDD-ModeA.
  • DCI format 1D is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell with information on precoding and power offset.
  • DCI format 2 / 2A / 2B / 2C / 2D is used not only for scheduling one PDSCH codeword but also for scheduling two (or multiple) PDSCH codewords.
  • DCI format 3 / 3A indicates the value of a transmission power control command for adjusting the transmission power of PUSCH or PUCCH for a plurality of terminal devices 1.
  • the terminal device 1 can detect the value of the transmission power control command corresponding to the PUSCH or the PUCCH by detecting the bit information corresponding to the index (TPC-Index) assigned to the own station.
  • TPC-Index the index assigned to the own station.
  • DCI format 4 is used for PUSCH scheduling in one uplink cell with multi-antenna port transmission mode.
  • Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is used to detect DCI transmission errors.
  • the CRC is scrambled with each RNTI.
  • CRC parity bits include C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), SPS C-RNTI (Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), SI-RNTI (System Information Radio Network Temporary Identifier), P-RNTI ( Paging-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), RA-RNTI (Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), TPC-PUCCH-RNTI (Transmit Power Control-Physical Uplink Control Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), TPC-PUSCH-RNTI (Transmit It is scrambled by Control-Physical Uplink Shared Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier, temporary C-RNTI, M-RNTI (MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Services) -Radio Network Temporary Identifier), or TDD-Mode A-RNTI.
  • C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • SPS C-RNTI Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell
  • C-RNTI and SPS C-RNTI are identifiers for identifying the terminal device 1 in the cell.
  • C-RNTI is used to control PDSCH or PUSCH in a single subframe.
  • SPS C-RNTI is used to periodically allocate PDSCH or PUSCH resources.
  • a control channel having a CRC scrambled by SI-RNTI is used to control SIB (System Information Block).
  • the control channel with CRC scrambled with P-RNTI is used to control paging.
  • a control channel having a CRC scrambled with RA-RNTI is used to control a response to RACH.
  • a control channel having a CRC scrambled by TPC-PUCCH-RNTI is used for power control of PUCCH.
  • a control channel having a CRC scrambled by TPC-PUSCH-RNTI is used to perform power control of PUSCH.
  • a control channel having a CRC scrambled with a temporary C-RNTI is used for a terminal device not identified by the C-RNTI.
  • a control channel having a CRC scrambled with M-RNTI is used to control MBMS.
  • the control channel having the CRC scrambled by TDD-ModeA-RNTI is used to notify the terminal device 1 of the TDD UL / DL setting information of each TDD serving cell in dynamic TDD.
  • the DCI format may be scrambled using a new RNTI, not limited to the above RNTI.
  • the control area of each serving cell is composed of a set of CCEs.
  • CCEs are numbered from 0 to N CCE, k -1.
  • N CCE, k is the total number of CCEs in the control region of subframe k.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors a set of PDCCH candidates of one or more activated serving cells set by control layer information through higher layer signaling.
  • monitoring means trying to decode each PDCCH in the set corresponding to all monitored DCI formats.
  • a set of PDCCH candidates to be monitored is called a search space.
  • a search space a shared search space (CSS) and a terminal-specific search space (USS) are defined.
  • CSS Common Search Space
  • the base station apparatus 3 can reduce resources for transmitting a control channel by mapping a common control channel to a CSS in a plurality of terminal apparatuses.
  • the USS (UE-specific Search Space) is a search space set using at least parameters specific to the terminal device 1. Therefore, since the USS can individually transmit a control channel specific to the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can efficiently control the terminal device 1.
  • the CSS may be set by further using parameters unique to the terminal device 1.
  • the parameters unique to the terminal device 1 are set to have the same value among the plurality of terminal devices.
  • the CSS is common among a plurality of terminal devices set to the same parameter.
  • the unit set to the same parameter among a plurality of terminal devices is a cell, a transmission point, a UE group, and the like. Since a plurality of terminal devices set to the same parameter can receive a common control channel mapped to the CSS, resources for transmitting the control channel can be reduced.
  • Such a search space may be referred to as USS instead of CSS.
  • a USS that is a search space common to a plurality of terminal devices may be set.
  • a USS unique to one terminal device is also referred to as a first USS
  • a USS common to a plurality of terminal devices is also referred to as a second USS.
  • the search space S (L) k for each aggregation level is defined by a set of PDCCH candidates.
  • the number of CCEs used for one PDCCH is also referred to as an aggregation level.
  • the number of CCEs used for one PDCCH is 1, 2, 4 or 8.
  • the CCE corresponding to the PDCCH candidate of the search space S (L) k is given by Equation (1) in FIG.
  • Y k indicates a value in subframe k.
  • m ′ m.
  • m is a value from 0 to M (L) ⁇ 1
  • M (L) is the number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored in a predetermined search space.
  • the initial value Y ⁇ 1 of Y k is the value of RNTI (eg, C-RNTI).
  • the aggregation level is defined for each search space. For example, in the CSS, aggregation levels 4 and 8 are defined. For example, in USS, aggregation levels 1, 2, 4, and 8 are defined.
  • the number of PDCCH candidates is defined at each aggregation level of each search space. For example, in CSS, the number of PDCCH candidates is 4 at aggregation level 4, and the number of PDCCH candidates is 2 at aggregation level 8. For example, in USS, the number of PDCCH candidates is 6 in aggregation 1, the number of PDCCH candidates is 6 in aggregation level 2, the number of PDCCH candidates is 2 in aggregation level 4, and the number of PDCCH candidates is in aggregation level 8. The number is two.
  • EPDCCH is transmitted using a set of one or more ECCE (Enhanced control channel element).
  • Each ECCE is composed of a plurality of EREG (Enhanced resource element group).
  • EREG is used to define the mapping of EPDCCH to resource elements.
  • 16 EREGs numbered from 0 to 15, are defined. That is, EREG0 to EREG15 are defined in each RB pair.
  • EREG0 to EREG15 are periodically defined with priority given to the frequency direction with respect to resource elements other than resource elements to which predetermined signals and / or channels are mapped. For example, the resource element to which the demodulation reference signal associated with the EPDCCH transmitted through the antenna ports 107 to 110 is mapped does not define EREG.
  • the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH depends on the EPDCCH format and is determined based on other parameters.
  • the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is also referred to as an aggregation level.
  • the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is determined based on the number of resource elements that can be used for EPDCCH transmission in one RB pair, the EPDCCH transmission method, and the like.
  • the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32.
  • the number of EREGs used for one ECCE is determined based on the type of subframe and the type of cyclic prefix, and is 4 or 8.
  • Distributed transmission (Distributed transmission) and localized transmission (Localized transmission) are supported as EPDCCH transmission methods.
  • EPDCCH can use distributed transmission or local transmission.
  • Distributed transmission and local transmission differ in the mapping of ECCE to EREG and RB pairs.
  • one ECCE is configured using EREGs of a plurality of RB pairs.
  • one ECCE is configured using one RB pair of EREGs.
  • the base station device 3 performs settings related to the EPDCCH for the terminal device 1.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors a plurality of EPDCCHs based on the setting from the base station device 3.
  • a set of RB pairs in which the terminal device 1 monitors the EPDCCH can be set.
  • the set of RB pairs is also referred to as an EPDCCH set or an EPDCCH-PRB set.
  • One or more EPDCCH sets can be set for one terminal device 1.
  • Each EPDCCH set is composed of one or more RB pairs.
  • the setting regarding EPDCCH can be performed individually for each EPDCCH set.
  • the base station device 3 can set a predetermined number of EPDCCH sets for the terminal device 1. For example, up to two EPDCCH sets can be configured as EPDCCH set 0 and / or EPDCCH set 1. Each of the EPDCCH sets can be configured with a predetermined number of RB pairs. Each EPDCCH set constitutes one set of a plurality of ECCEs. The number of ECCEs configured in one EPDCCH set is determined based on the number of RB pairs set as the EPDCCH set and the number of EREGs used for one ECCE. When the number of ECCEs configured in one EPDCCH set is N, each EPDCCH set configures ECCEs numbered from 0 to N-1. For example, when the number of EREGs used for one ECCE is 4, an EPDCCH set composed of four RB pairs constitutes 16 ECCEs.
  • the EPDCCH candidates monitored by the terminal device 1 are defined based on the ECCE configured in the EPDCCH set.
  • a set of EPDCCH candidates is defined as a search space (search area).
  • a terminal-specific search space that is a search space unique to the terminal device 1 and a common search space that is a search space unique to the base station device 3 (cell, transmission point, UE group) are defined.
  • the monitoring of the EPDCCH includes the terminal device 1 attempting to decode each of the EPDCCH candidates in the search space according to the DCI format to be monitored.
  • the terminal-specific search space ES (L) k of the EPDCCH at the aggregation level L ⁇ ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 ⁇ is defined by a set of EPDCCH candidates.
  • Equation (2) the ECCE corresponding to the EPDCCH candidate m of the search space ES (L) k is given by Equation (2) in FIG.
  • Y p, k represents a value in EPDCCH set p and subframe k.
  • Y p, k can be set independently by the search space.
  • Y p, k is a value unique to the base station apparatus 3 (cell).
  • Y p, k is a value defined in advance or a value determined based on a parameter unique to the base station apparatus 3.
  • Y p, k is determined based on a predetermined value, the subframe k, and the RNTI (eg, C-RNTI) of the terminal device 1.
  • RNTI eg, C-RNTI
  • a plurality of common search spaces and / or a plurality of terminal-specific search spaces may be set in one EPDCCH set.
  • the DCI format monitored by the terminal device 1 depends on the transmission mode set for each serving cell. In other words, the DCI format monitored by the terminal device 1 varies depending on the transmission mode. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 1 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 1. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 4 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 2. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 10 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 2D. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 1 is set monitors the DCI format 0. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 2 is set monitors DCI format 0 and DCI format 4.
  • the control region in which the PDCCH for the terminal device 1 is arranged is not notified, and the terminal device 1 decodes all DCI formats corresponding to all PDCCH candidates and transmission modes for all aggregation levels defined in each search space. Try. In other words, the terminal device 1 tries to decode in all aggregation levels, PDCCH candidates, and DCI formats that may be transmitted to the terminal device 1. Then, the terminal device 1 recognizes the PDCCH that has been successfully decoded as control information addressed to the terminal device 1. This is called blind decoding.
  • the number of decoding does not increase. For example, since the DCI format 0 and the DCI format 1A have the same bit size, two types of DCI formats can be decoded by one decoding.
  • the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 1 is set attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size DCI formats in the aggregation 4 and two PDCCH candidates in the aggregation 8 in the CSS. Attempts to decode DCI formats of two bit sizes.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 tries to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of DCI formats in aggregation 1 in aggregation 1, and tries to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of bit sizes in DCI format in aggregation 2.
  • two PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size DCI formats are tried to be decoded.
  • two PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size of DCI formats are tried to be decoded. That is, the terminal device 1 tries to decode PDCCH 44 times in one subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 2 is set attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of DCI formats of bit sizes in the aggregation 4 in the CSS, and in the aggregation 8 to the two PDCCH candidates. Attempts to decode DCI formats of two bit sizes.
  • the terminal device 1 attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats in aggregation 1 in aggregation 1, and attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and three types of bit sizes in DCI format in aggregation 2.
  • two PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats of bit sizes are tried to be decoded.
  • two PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats of bit sizes are tried to be decoded. That is, the terminal device 1 tries PDCCH decoding 60 times in one subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 can decode PDCCHs having different coding rates without prior information, and can efficiently transmit control information between the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1.
  • a shared search space is a search space common to cells. Information indicating the start / stop state is notified by the terminal group shared search space.
  • the terminal group shared search space is a starting point of CCE in which PDCCH candidates are arranged using RNTI (UE-group C-RNTI, TP-specific-RNTI, SCE-RNTI) commonly allocated in the terminal group. Is a search space to be determined.
  • the plurality of terminal devices 1 in which the terminal group RNTI is set detect the DCI format using the PDCCH arranged in the same search space.
  • the notification of the information indicating the start / stop state is performed at a predetermined timing or a set timing.
  • the notification timing is in units of one radio frame.
  • the notification of information indicating the start / stop state indicates information of the next radio frame that has received the L1 signaling.
  • L1 signaling is received in the first subframe (subframe 0) in the radio frame, information on the received radio frame may be indicated.
  • the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by a change (change) in the DRS configuration.
  • Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by the configuration of the DRS being different between the activation state and the deactivation state.
  • the configuration of the DRS transmitted from the target cell may be transmitted differently between the activated state and the deactivated state.
  • the terminal device 1 may receive from the base station device 3 information related to the DRS configuration transmitted in the activated state and information related to the DRS configuration transmitted in the deactivated state.
  • the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be indicated by a change (change) in a parameter (or parameter value) of a configuration with DRS.
  • a certain parameter included in the setting of the DRS may be different between the activated state and the deactivated state (or may be individually set).
  • the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different resource element arrangements.
  • the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different antenna ports.
  • the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different scramble sequences.
  • the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different initial values or methods (formulas) for generating the initial value of the scramble sequence.
  • the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission power.
  • the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission subframe intervals.
  • the transmission bandwidth or the number of resource blocks may be different between the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state. That is, the information regarding the setting of DRS transmitted in the activated state and the information regarding the setting of DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may be individually set.
  • Such information may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 using higher layer signaling. That is, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be parameter setting information related to the DRS configuration. In other words, a certain parameter is set for each of the activated state and the deactivated state.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor two types of configurations, that is, a DRS configuration indicating a start state and a DRS configuration indicating a stop state.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor two types using a DRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a start state and a DRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a stop state.
  • the terminal device 1 is notified of information regarding the monitoring pattern of the two DRS configurations. That is, when information regarding a monitoring pattern of one DRS configuration is not notified, DRSs of two configurations may be monitored based on one monitoring pattern.
  • the terminal device 1 When measuring the DRS in the activated state during the measurement DRS of the stopped DRS, the terminal device 1 recognizes the small cell in the deactivated state as the activated state.
  • the terminal device 1 may implicitly acquire the information on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell based on the monitoring pattern in which the DRS is detected.
  • the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the start state and the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the stop state may be defined in advance.
  • the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the start state and the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the stop state may be notified from the base station apparatus 3 by dedicated RRC signaling (upper layer signaling).
  • the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by the difference between the activation state and the deactivation state CRS configuration (CRS setting) of the target cell.
  • CRS configuration CRS setting
  • the configuration of the CRS transmitted from the target cell differs between the activated state and the deactivated state.
  • CRS setting information of a different configuration is notified to the terminal device 1.
  • the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be indicated by a change of a certain parameter (or parameter value) related to the CRS configuration.
  • the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different resource element arrangements.
  • the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different antenna ports.
  • the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different scramble sequences.
  • the initial value of the scramble sequence may be different between the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state.
  • the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission power.
  • the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission subframe intervals.
  • the transmission bandwidth or the number of resource blocks may be different between the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state. That is, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be parameter setting information regarding the CRS configuration. At that time, a certain parameter is individually set for each of the activated state and the deactivated state.
  • an example is given for CRS, but PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, PRS, and the like may be similarly indicated.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the CRS configuration indicating the start state and the CRS configuration indicating the stop state.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors two types using a CRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a start state and a CRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a stop state.
  • the terminal device 1 implicitly acquires information on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell based on the monitoring pattern in which the CRS is detected.
  • the monitoring pattern of the CRS configuration indicating the stop state may be defined in advance.
  • the monitoring pattern of the configuration of the CRS indicating the stop state may be notified from the base station apparatus 3 by dedicated RRC signaling.
  • Information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state may be notified by dedicated RRC signaling.
  • Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the cell may be reported in a list associated with the center frequency (carrier frequency) and the cell ID.
  • the terminal device 1 can recognize the start / stop state of the target cell by the above notification method.
  • any of the notification methods described above is applied.
  • the cell detection means that the terminal device 1 detects a synchronization signal (such as PSS or SSS) or / and a reference signal (such as CRS or CSI-RS) transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell.
  • a synchronization signal such as PSS or SSS
  • a reference signal such as CRS or CSI-RS
  • the synchronization signal or / and reference signal used for cell detection includes cell ID information.
  • the terminal device 1 detects the cell based on the cell ID of the cell and the detection standard of the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal.
  • the cell detection may include the detection of the base station device 3.
  • Detection of the primary cell may include detection of the master base station device.
  • detection of the primary secondary cell may include detection of the secondary base station apparatus.
  • the terminal device 1 determines detection based on the received power intensity or / and received power quality of the synchronization signal or / and reference signal from the cell.
  • the terminal device 1 compares the received power strength or / and received power quality of the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal with a threshold value, and determines that the cell has been detected when the received strength or / and received quality is high.
  • the received power intensity is, for example, RSRP.
  • the reception quality is, for example, an interference amount, RSRQ, SINR, or the like.
  • the cell detection may be determined by a measurement event described later.
  • the terminal device 1 determines detection based on the success or failure of decoding of the synchronization signal or / and reference signal information from the cell. For example, the cell (base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell) transmits a synchronization signal or / and a reference signal with a parity code such as CRC. The terminal device 1 performs decoding using the parity code included in the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal, and determines that the cell has been detected when it is determined that the decoding is correctly performed by parity detection.
  • the cell base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell
  • the terminal device 1 performs decoding using the parity code included in the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal, and determines that the cell has been detected when it is determined that the decoding is correctly performed by parity detection.
  • the terminal device 1 After the cell is detected in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 selects a cell to be connected / activated and a cell to be disconnected / inactivated.
  • the terminal device 1 reports the detected cell information to the connected base station device 3.
  • the detected cell information includes a cell ID and measurement information.
  • CRS for explaining the details of CRS is transmitted through antenna ports 0 to 3.
  • the CRS is arranged in all downlink subframes that are non-MBSFN subframes (non-MBSFN subframe). In other words, the CRS is arranged in all downlink subframes except the MBSFN subframe.
  • a resource element and a signal sequence are determined based on a physical cell identifier (PCI).
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the CRS.
  • the CRS signal is generated using a pseudo-random number sequence.
  • the pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on a physical cell identifier (PCI).
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot.
  • R0 to R3 in FIG. 10 are used as resource elements of CRS in the case of normal CP.
  • R0 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 0
  • R1 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 1
  • R2 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 2
  • R3 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 3.
  • Resource elements of CRS transmitted by one antenna port are arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis.
  • Resource elements of CRS transmitted at antenna port 0 and CRS transmitted at antenna port 1 are arranged 3 subcarriers apart. The CRS is shifted cell-specifically on the frequency based on the cell ID.
  • Resource elements of CRS transmitted at antenna port 0 and CRS transmitted at antenna port 1 are arranged in OFDM symbols 0 and 4 in the case of normal CP, and are arranged in OFDM symbols 0 and 3 in the case of extended CP. .
  • Resource elements of CRS transmitted through antenna port 2 and CRS transmitted through antenna port 3 are arranged in OFDM symbol 1.
  • CRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink, and is transmitted over a wide band. Note that the DRS may have the same configuration as the CRS.
  • DRS includes downlink time domain synchronization (time synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization (frequency synchronization), cell / transmission point identification, RSRP measurement (RSRP measurement), RSRQ It is transmitted from the base station device 3 for various purposes such as measurement (RSRQ measurement), measurement of the geographical position of the terminal device 1 (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI (CSI measurement).
  • the DRS may be a reference signal used to support the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3.
  • the DRS can be a reference signal used for detecting the base station device 3 in which the terminal device 1 is in the ON state and / or the OFF state.
  • DRS is composed of multiple signals.
  • DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CRS.
  • the PSS and SSS included in the DRS may be used for time synchronization, frequency synchronization, cell identification and transmission point identification.
  • the CRS included in the DRS may be used for RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, and CSI measurement.
  • DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CSI-RS.
  • the PSS and SSS included in the DRS may be used for time synchronization, frequency synchronization, cell identification and transmission point identification.
  • the CSI-RS included in the DRS may be used for transmission point identification, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, and CSI measurement.
  • a DRS composed of a plurality of signals may be referred to as a detection burst.
  • a reference signal for measuring RSRP and / or RSRQ may be referred to as DRS.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may switch and transmit the first DRS configured by PSS, SSS, and CRS and the second DRS configured by PSS, SSS, and CSI-RS. In that case, the base station apparatus 3 sets the first DRS or the second DRS in the terminal apparatus 1.
  • the DRS is transmitted in the downlink subframe.
  • the DRS is transmitted on the downlink component carrier.
  • DRS is transmitted when the base station apparatus 3 is in a stopped state (off state, “dormant” mode, “deactivation”). Further, the DRS may be transmitted even when the base station apparatus 3 is in an activated state (on state, active mode, and activation).
  • DRS can be set independently for each base station device (cell, transmission point). For example, a plurality of small cells transmit DRSs having different settings using different resources.
  • the base station device 3 sets a DRS list and DRS measurement (detection, monitoring, transmission) timing for the terminal device 1.
  • the DRS-related list is a list of information related to the base station apparatus that transmits the DRS that the terminal apparatus 1 may receive.
  • the list related to DRS is a list of transmission point IDs of transmission points that transmit DRS.
  • the plurality of transmission points transmit DRSs specific to the respective transmission points based on the DRS measurement timing set for the terminal device 1.
  • the terminal device 1 performs DRS measurement based on the DRS-related list set in the base station device 3 and the DRS measurement timing.
  • the terminal device 1 measures DRS determined based on a list related to DRS in a subframe or resource determined based on DRS measurement timing. Further, the terminal device 1 reports the measurement result by the DRS measurement to the base station device 3.
  • Each transmission point transmits DRS in one subframe. That is, each transmission point transmits PSS related to one DRS, SSS, and CRS and / or CSI-RS in one subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 expects a DRS corresponding to one transmission point to be transmitted in one subframe.
  • One DRS may be transmitted in a plurality of subframes.
  • DRS transmission or DRS measurement timing is set periodically on the time axis.
  • DRS transmission or DRS measurement timing may be set in successive subframes.
  • the DRS may be transmitted in bursts.
  • the transmission timing of DRS or the measurement timing of DRS is set in N subframes that are continuous in M subframe periods.
  • a subframe L in which DRS is arranged within a cycle may be set.
  • the values of M, N and / or L are set in the upper layer. Note that the number N of subframes transmitted continuously within a cycle may be defined in advance. If the subframe period M is set to be long, the number of times that the DRS is transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state is reduced, and inter-cell interference can be reduced. Note that different settings may be applied to the values of M, N, and / or L depending on the stop state and the start state. Also, parameters corresponding to the values of M, N and / or L may be notified by higher layer signaling.
  • the parameter corresponding to M may indicate not only the period but also the subframe offset (or start subframe). That is, the parameter corresponding to M may be an index associated with a period and / or a subframe offset.
  • the parameter corresponding to N may be managed in a table.
  • the value of the parameter corresponding to N may not directly represent the number of subframes. Further, the parameter corresponding to N may be indicated by including not only the number of subframes but also the start subframe.
  • the parameter corresponding to L may be managed in a table.
  • the parameter corresponding to L may be associated with the period.
  • the parameter value corresponding to L may not indicate the offset of the subframe as it is.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in addition to the DRS measurement. For example, in the parameter corresponding to N, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH. At that time, the terminal device 1 may be required to support a function of monitoring the PDCCH for a small cell in a stopped state.
  • the DRS may be transmitted including transmission point ID information.
  • the transmission point ID information is information for identifying a transmission point (cell) that transmits DRS.
  • the transmission point ID includes physical cell identifier (physical cell ID, physical cell ID, physical layer cell ID), CGI (Cell Global Identity), new cell identifier (small cell ID), discovery ID (Discovery ID), Extended cell ID (extended cell ID, etc.)).
  • the transmission point ID may be an ID different from the physical cell identifier recognized by the PSS and SSS included in the DRS.
  • the transmission point ID may be an ID associated with a physical cell identifier recognized by the PSS and SSS included in the DRS.
  • a certain transmission point ID may be associated with any one of the physical cell identifiers recognized by the PSS and the SSS included in the DRS.
  • a plurality of IDs related to the cell may be transmitted by DRS.
  • the physical cell identifier can be substantially expanded by transmitting a combination of the physical cell identifier and the new cell identifier by DRS.
  • DRS is transmitted at antenna ports p, ..., p + n-1.
  • n indicates the total number of antenna ports that transmit DRS.
  • Values other than 0 to 22 and 107 to 110 may be applied to the values of p,. That is, the DRS may be transmitted using an antenna port different from the antenna ports used for other reference signals.
  • a plurality of structures and / or configurations may be applied to the DRS.
  • the plurality of configurations may be configurations or settings of a plurality of signals.
  • the plurality of configurations may be signals having a plurality of configurations.
  • the DRS may be composed of a plurality of signals.
  • the same configuration (or setting) as the PSS may be applied to the DRS.
  • the same configuration (or setting) as SSS may be applied to DRS.
  • the same configuration (or setting) as the CRS may be applied to the DRS.
  • the same configuration (or setting) as CSI-RS may be applied to DRS.
  • DRS may be based on the configuration (or setting) of the first signal to the nth signal (n is a natural number).
  • the DRS may be based on the first configuration signal to the nth configuration signal.
  • the signal configuration may include radio resource arrangement (resource setting) and subframe setting.
  • signals (radio resources) of each configuration may be properly used according to the purpose.
  • signals used for time domain and frequency domain synchronization, cell identification, and RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI measurement (RRM measurement) may be performed using signals having different configurations. That is, the terminal apparatus 1 performs time domain and frequency domain synchronization using the first signal, performs cell identification using the second signal, and performs RSRP / RSRQ measurement using the third signal. May be performed. Also, time domain and frequency domain synchronization and cell identification are performed using the first signal and the second signal, and RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI measurement (RRM measurement) is performed using the third signal. Good.
  • a signal having a specific configuration may be transmitted to indicate the start / stop state of the small cell.
  • the terminal device 1 may recognize that the small cell is in the activated state and perform processing. That is, the terminal device 1 may recognize that the small cell is in the activated state by detecting the fourth signal (the signal having the fourth configuration).
  • CSI measurement may be performed using the fifth signal (the signal having the fifth configuration).
  • the terminal device 1 may perform the CSI report in the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe from the subframe in which the CSI measurement is performed.
  • the CSI measurement may be performed using another signal instead of the fifth signal.
  • CSI measurement is performed in a stopped state, setting information for performing CSI measurement / CSI report in the stopped state is notified from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 using higher layer signaling. .
  • the configuration of the DRS transmitted from the small cell may be different depending on whether the small cell is activated or stopped.
  • the signal of the third configuration may be transmitted from the first configuration if it is in the stopped state
  • the signal of the fourth configuration may be transmitted from the first configuration if it is in the activated state.
  • the signal of the fourth configuration may be transmitted instead of the signal of the third configuration.
  • a plurality of signals having the same configuration as SSS are set, a plurality of signals are transmitted in the small cell stop state, but only one signal may be transmitted in the small cell start state. . That is, the configuration of the DRS may be switched according to the state of the small cell.
  • the DRS may be composed of a plurality of signals in order to transmit an extended physical layer cell identifier (PCI: [Physical] layer [Cell] Identity).
  • PCI Physical layer cell identifier
  • TP ID Transmission Point Identity
  • the plurality of signals may be a plurality of SSSs or signals having the same configuration as the SSS.
  • the plurality of signals may be signals having the same configuration as PSS and SSS.
  • the plurality of signals may be signals having the same configuration as the PSS and the plurality of SSSs.
  • the TPID may be a virtual cell identifier (VCID: “Virtual Cell Identity”).
  • the TPID may be an ID for identifying the transmission point, that is, the base station device 3.
  • the VCID may be an identifier used for a signal sequence.
  • the cell ID group is identified by the signal of the first configuration
  • the cell ID is identified by the signal of the first configuration and the signal of the second configuration
  • the signal of the first configuration The TPID may be identified by the signal having the second configuration and the signal having the third configuration. Further, the TPID may be extended by the signal of the fourth configuration.
  • the DRS may be set separately from the PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS. That is, DRS resource setting, subframe setting, antenna port index, number of antenna ports, ID for sequence generation, etc. may be set independently (individually) from PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS. Good.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a DRS configuration.
  • a sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) used for DRS may be generated by a Zadoff-Chu sequence on the frequency axis.
  • DRS may be arrange
  • the DRS may be transmitted using 62 resource blocks using 6 resource blocks.
  • 10 subcarriers of the 6 resource blocks may be transmitted with zero power.
  • the DRS may reserve 10 subcarriers out of the 6 resource blocks and may not transmit a signal.
  • DRS is arranged in the last OFDM symbol of slot number 0 and slot number 10 in the case of FDD (frame configuration type 1), and the third of subframe 1 and subframe 6 in the case of TDD (frame configuration type 2). Maps to an OFDM symbol.
  • the DRS may be transmitted including a part of information specifying the cell ID.
  • the DRS may be arranged in a resource block (different frequency position) different from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of resource blocks from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of subcarriers than the PSS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted including information different from the cell ID (PCI or VCID).
  • PCI or VCID cell ID
  • FIG. 9 shows another example of the configuration of the DRS.
  • a sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) used for DRS may be interleaved by concatenating two binary sequences of length 31.
  • the DRS sequence may be generated based on the M sequence.
  • the DRS is different from the signal arranged in subframe 0 and the signal arranged in subframe 5.
  • the DRS is arranged in the sixth OFDM symbol of slot number 0 and slot number 10 in the case of FDD, and is arranged in the seventh OFDM symbol of slot number 1 and slot number 11 in the case of TDD.
  • the DRS may be transmitted including a part of information specifying the cell ID.
  • the DRS may be arranged in a resource block (different frequency position) different from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of resource blocks than the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of subcarriers from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted including information different from the cell ID.
  • the number of subframes in which the DRS is transmitted is not limited.
  • the DRS may be transmitted in subframes 0, 1, 5, and 6. That is, a plurality of DRSs based on the SSS configuration may be transmitted. In this case, a lot of information can be included in the DRS and transmitted. In this case, since the number of orthogonal sequences increases, there is an effect of suppressing inter-cell interference.
  • FIG. 10 shows another example of the configuration of the DRS.
  • the DRS signal is generated using a pseudo-random sequence.
  • the pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on a cell ID (PCI, VCID, scramble identifier (scramble ID), scrambling identifier (scrambling ID), scrambling initialization ID (scrambling ID)).
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot.
  • the resource elements of DRS transmitted by one antenna port are arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis.
  • the DRS resource elements transmitted at antenna port p and the DRS resource elements transmitted at antenna port p + 1 are arranged 3 subcarriers apart.
  • the DRS is shifted in a cell-specific manner on the frequency based on the cell ID.
  • the resource elements of the DRS transmitted through the antenna port p and the DRS transmitted through the antenna port p + 1 are arranged in the OFDM symbols 0 and 4 in the case of the normal CP, and are arranged in the OFDM symbols 0 and 3 in the case of the extended CP. .
  • the resource elements of the DRS transmitted at antenna port p + 2 and the DRS transmitted at antenna port p + 3 are arranged in OFDM symbol 1.
  • DRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink and is transmitted in a wide band. Note that the DRS transmission bandwidth may be set using higher layer signaling. The DRS transmission bandwidth may be considered to be the same as the measurement bandwidth.
  • the DRS may be transmitted using a pseudo-random number sequence different from the CRS.
  • DRS may use a calculation method of a sequence different from CRS.
  • the DRS may be arranged on the frequency with a subcarrier period different from that of the CRS.
  • the arrangement relationship of the resource elements of the antenna port p to which DRS is transmitted and the antenna port p + 1 to which DRS is transmitted may be different from the arrangement relationship of the antenna port 0 and the antenna port 1.
  • the DRS may shift the arrangement on the frequency based on information different from the CRS.
  • the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the CRS.
  • the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the CRS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band.
  • FIG. 10 shows another example of the DRS configuration.
  • a sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) of DRS (D1, D2 in FIG. 10) is generated using a pseudo-random number sequence.
  • the pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on information from an upper layer.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the cell ID when information from an upper layer is not set.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot.
  • the resource element in which the DRS is arranged is determined by a resource setting number (DRS resource configuration index), and may be calculated using the table of FIG.
  • k ′ represents a subcarrier number
  • l ′ represents an OFDM symbol number
  • n s represents a slot number
  • n s mod2 represents a slot number in the subframe.
  • DRS is arranged in resource elements of slot number 0, subcarrier number 9, OFDM symbol numbers 5 and 6.
  • DRS is a bandwidth set for the downlink, and is transmitted in a wide band.
  • a pseudo-random number sequence different from CSI-RS may be used as the DRS sequence.
  • the DRS sequence may be generated based on a sequence calculation method different from CSI-RS. Note that the DRS is not limited to the table of FIG. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the CSI-RS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band.
  • FIG. 10 shows another example of the DRS configuration.
  • the resource element in which the DRS is arranged is determined by a resource setting number (DRS resource configuration index), and is calculated using the table of FIG.
  • k ′ represents a subcarrier number
  • l ′ represents an OFDM symbol number
  • n s represents a slot number
  • n s mod2 represents a slot number in the subframe.
  • DRS is arranged in resource elements of slot number 0, subcarrier number 9, OFDM symbol numbers 5 and 6.
  • DRS is a bandwidth set for the downlink, and is transmitted in a wide band.
  • the DRS may be transmitted with zero output in the configured resource element.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may not transmit the DRS in the set resource element.
  • a resource element in which no DRS is transmitted from the base station device 3 can be used for interference measurement from an adjacent cell (or an adjacent base station device).
  • the DRS may have the same configuration as R6 in FIG.
  • FIG. 11 shows an example of the DRS configuration.
  • the DRS sequence is generated using a pseudo-random sequence.
  • the pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the cell ID.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP.
  • the pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot.
  • the DRS transmitted by one antenna port is arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis.
  • the DRS is shifted in a cell-specific manner on the frequency based on the cell ID.
  • the DRS is arranged in the OFDM symbol 3, 5, 6 in the slot 0th, and in the OFD symbols 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 in the slot 1 in the slot.
  • OFDM symbols 4 and 5 are allocated to OFDM symbols 1, 2, 4, and 5 in the first slot.
  • the DRS resource elements are arranged such that the frequency is shifted by L by L in the l-th OFDM symbol and the l + L-th OFDM symbol.
  • DRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink and is transmitted in a wide band.
  • a pseudo-random number sequence different from PRS may be used as the DRS sequence.
  • a DRS sequence may use a sequence calculation method different from PRS.
  • the DRS may be arranged on the frequency with a subcarrier period different from that of the PRS.
  • the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the PRS.
  • the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the PRS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band. That is, the DRS transmission bandwidth or measurement bandwidth may be set in the upper layer.
  • the DRS may be configured to include CSI-IM resources.
  • the CSI-IM resource is a resource used for the terminal device 1 to measure interference.
  • the terminal device 1 uses the CSI-IM resource as a resource for measuring interference in CSI measurement or a resource for measuring interference in RSRQ measurement.
  • the CSI-IM resource is set using the same method as the CSI-RS setting method.
  • the CSI-IM resource may be a resource configured as a zero power CSI-RS.
  • DRS may be comprised combining a plurality of said examples.
  • the DRS may be configured by combining a signal configured based on a Zadoff-Chu sequence, a signal configured based on an M sequence, and a signal configured based on a Gold sequence.
  • a signal configured based on the Gold sequence is configured with a wider band than a signal configured based on the Zadoff-Chu sequence, and a signal configured based on the Zadoff-Chu sequence is transmitted using 6 resource blocks.
  • the signal configured based on the Gold sequence may be transmitted in the entire band of the subframe. That is, the bandwidth in which the DRS is transmitted may be configured by the upper layer.
  • the DRS is preferably composed of signals having different configurations in different series.
  • DRS combines a signal composed of a Zadoff-Chu sequence, a signal composed based on an M sequence, a signal composed based on a Gold sequence, and a signal transmitted with zero output (Zero power). It may be configured.
  • a resource element may be specified by DRS setting information for a signal configured based on the Gold sequence and a signal transmitted with zero output.
  • the signal configured based on the Gold sequence is configured with a wider band than the signal configured with the Zadoff-Chu sequence, and the signal configured with the Zadoff-Chu sequence is transmitted using 6 resource blocks.
  • a signal configured based on the sequence may be transmitted in the entire band of the subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 is notified of the DRS setting by dedicated RRC signaling.
  • the setting of the DRS includes information common to cells transmitting the RS and information for each cell transmitting the DRS. Note that the DRS setting may be notified by being included in the measurement target setting information described later.
  • Information common to cells transmitting DRS includes information on the center frequency of the band, information on the bandwidth, information on subframes, and the like.
  • Cell-specific information for transmitting a DRS includes information on the center frequency of the band, information on the bandwidth, information on subframes, information specifying a resource element, information specifying a cell (cell ID, PCI, VCID), etc. Is included.
  • the terminal device 1 can recognize a subframe including a DRS by setting the DRS, the DRS may not be detected in a subframe that does not include the DRS. Thereby, the power consumption of the terminal device 1 can be reduced.
  • the DRS setting may include the setting of the first configuration signal to the setting of the nth configuration signal.
  • the signal resource settings for each component may be set individually.
  • the subframe setting and transmission power of the signals of each configuration may be common (or a common value).
  • the cell ID, antenna port index, and number of antenna ports may be set only for a signal having a certain configuration.
  • a plurality of resource settings, subframe settings, and the like may be set for a signal having a certain configuration.
  • the DRS setting may include information (parameter) indicating the frequency at which the DRS is transmitted.
  • the DRS setting may include information indicating an offset (offset value) of a subframe in which the DRS may be transmitted.
  • the DRS setting may include information indicating a subframe period in which the DRS may be transmitted.
  • the DRS settings may include an identifier for generating a DRS sequence.
  • the DRS setting may include information indicating an antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted.
  • the DRS setting may include information indicating the DRS burst transmission period.
  • the DRS setting may include information indicating a subframe period in which the DRS is measured at a time during the subframe period.
  • the DRS setting may include information necessary for transmitting the DRS and / or information necessary for receiving the DRS and / or information necessary for measuring the DRS.
  • the information included in the above DRS settings may be set for each signal of each configuration. That is, the above information may be set for each signal having a different configuration.
  • the DRS setting may be notified using higher layer signaling.
  • the DRS setting may be notified using system information. Also, some information on the DRS settings may be notified using L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE).
  • DCI format L1 signaling
  • MAC CE L2 signaling
  • DRS may be used for a reference signal (listening RS) for synchronization (network listening) between base station apparatuses via a radio interface at the same frequency.
  • listening RS reference signal
  • a TDD system By synchronizing the transmission timing between base station apparatuses, it is possible to apply a TDD system, apply inter-cell interference suppression techniques such as eICIC and CoMP, and apply carrier aggregation between base stations with different transmission points.
  • inter-cell interference suppression techniques such as eICIC and CoMP
  • carrier aggregation between base stations with different transmission points.
  • GSNN Global Navigation Satellite System
  • the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for the transmission timing is determined and the transmission timing of the listening RS is designated by the backhaul.
  • the base station apparatus 3 that performs synchronization of transmission timing and the reception timing of the listening RS are designated by the backhaul.
  • the base station apparatus 3, MME, or S-GW may determine the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for the transmission timing, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing, and the transmission / reception timing of the listening RS.
  • the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing transmits the listening RS in the downlink component carrier or the downlink subframe based on the transmission timing notified by the backhaul.
  • the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing receives the listening RS at the notified reception timing, and synchronizes the transmission timing.
  • the listening RS may be transmitted even when the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing is in a stopped state.
  • the listening RS may be received even when the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in the activated / stopped state.
  • the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes transmission timing stops transmission of a downlink signal and receives a radio signal while receiving a listening RS.
  • the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is set in the uplink subframe while receiving the listening RS.
  • the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing recognizes that the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in a stopped state while receiving the listening RS. That is, the terminal device 1 recognizes that PSS / SSS, PBCH, CRS, PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH are not transmitted from the base station device 3 that performs transmission timing synchronization.
  • the terminal device 1 is notified of the timing of receiving the listening RS from the base station device 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 is notified of the stop state from the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 does not measure the base station device 3 at the timing of receiving the listening RS. Note that the terminal apparatus 1 connected to the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing may be recognized as an uplink subframe while the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing receives the listening RS.
  • the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing stops transmission of the downlink signal while receiving the listening RS, and performs reception processing using the downlink component carrier.
  • the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing recognizes that the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in a stopped state while receiving the listening RS. That is, the terminal device 1 recognizes that PSS / SSS, PBCH, CRS, PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH are not transmitted from the base station device 3 that performs transmission timing synchronization.
  • the terminal device 1 is notified of the timing of receiving the listening RS from the base station device 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 is notified of the stop state from the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 does not measure the base station device 3 at the timing of receiving the listening RS.
  • the terminal device 1 may detect a cell using the listening RS transmitted from the base station device 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing.
  • the terminal device 1 measures the physical layer reported to the upper layer.
  • Physical layer measurements include RSRP (Reference Signal-Received Power), RSSI (Received Signal-Strength Indicator), and RSRQ (Reference Signal-Received Quality).
  • RSRP is defined as the received power of the reference signal.
  • RSRQ is defined as the reception quality of the reference signal.
  • RSRP is defined as a value obtained by linearly averaging the powers of resource elements to which CRS included in the considered measurement frequency bandwidth is transmitted.
  • a resource element to which CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped is used. If the terminal device can detect the CRS of antenna port 1, the resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped (the radio resource mapped to the resource element assigned to antenna port 0) for RSRP determination.
  • a resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 1 is mapped (a radio resource mapped to the resource element assigned to antenna port 1) can also be used.
  • the RSRP calculated using the resource element to which the CRS of the antenna port 0 is mapped is referred to as a CRS base RSRP or a first RSRP.
  • the terminal device 1 measures the RSRP of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle (RRC_IDLE) state.
  • the intra-frequency cell in the RRC idle state is a cell in the same frequency band as the cell from which the terminal apparatus broadcasts system information.
  • the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle state is a cell in a frequency band different from the cell in which the terminal device 1 receives the system information by broadcasting.
  • the terminal device 1 measures RSRP of an intra-frequency cell and / or an inter-frequency cell in an RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state.
  • the intra-frequency cell in the RRC connection state is a cell in the same frequency band as the cell from which the terminal device 1 has received system information by RRC signaling or broadcast.
  • the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection state is a cell in a frequency band different from the cell in which the terminal device 1 receives the system information by RRC signaling or broadcast.
  • RSRP is defined as a value obtained by linearly averaging the power of the resource elements to which the DRS included in the considered measurement frequency bandwidth is transmitted. In determining RSRP, a resource element to which DRS is mapped is used. The resource element and antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted are notified in the upper layer.
  • the terminal device 1 measures the RSRP of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state.
  • RSSI is defined by the total received power observed using the receiving antenna.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • the RSSI is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that are assumed to include the reference signal for antenna port 0.
  • the RSSI is configured with a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0.
  • RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • E-UTRA carrier RSSI is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing OFDM symbols not including DRS. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • the resource element and / or antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted is notified in the upper layer.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • the RSSI is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS).
  • the RSSI is configured by a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS).
  • RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • E-UTRA carrier RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS), and the RSRP value.
  • RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) and the value of RSRP.
  • RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • RSRQ is defined by the ratio of RSRP and RSSI, and is used for the same purpose as the signal-to-interference noise ratio (SINR) of the measurement target cell, which is an indicator of communication quality.
  • SINR signal-to-interference noise ratio
  • RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N ⁇ RSRP / RSSI.
  • N is the number of resource blocks corresponding to the measurement bandwidth of RSSI, and the numerator and denominator of RSRQ are configured by the same set of resource blocks.
  • RSRP is the first RSRP.
  • the RSRQ calculated using the RSRQ calculated using the first RSRP is referred to as a CRS-based RSRQ or a first RSRQ.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • the RSSI is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the reference signal for antenna port 0.
  • the RSSI is configured by a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0 (the radio resource mapped to the antenna port 0).
  • RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • the terminal device 1 measures the RSRQ of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle state.
  • the terminal device 1 measures RSRQ of an intra-frequency cell and / or an inter-frequency cell in an RRC connection state.
  • RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N ⁇ RSRP / RSSI.
  • N is the number of resource blocks in the RSSI measurement bandwidth, and the RSRQ numerator and denominator must be composed of the same set of resource blocks.
  • RSRP is the second RSRP.
  • the RSRQ calculated using the RSRQ calculated using the second RSRP is referred to as a second RSRQ.
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • the RSSI is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that are assumed to include the reference signal for antenna port 0.
  • the RSSI is configured with a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0.
  • RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N ⁇ RSRP / RSSI.
  • N is the number of resource blocks corresponding to the measurement bandwidth of RSSI, and the numerator and denominator of RSRQ are configured by the same set of resource blocks.
  • RSRP is measured based on DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS).
  • RSSI E-UTRA carrier RSSI
  • E-UTRA carrier RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS), and the RSRP value.
  • RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) and the value of RSRP.
  • RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks.
  • the total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
  • the RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained based on RSRP and a linear average value of total received power obtained by OFDM symbols not including DRS within the measurement bandwidth.
  • RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from a linear average value of total received power obtained for all OFDM symbols of the measurement bandwidth.
  • RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from a linear average value of total received power obtained by OFDM symbols not including DRS within the measurement bandwidth.
  • RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from RSSI measurement for CRS constituting DRS.
  • the measurement bandwidth may be set at 5 MHz or more when the DRS has the same configuration as the CSI-RS.
  • the measurement bandwidth may be set at 6 RBs and / or 15 RBs when the DRS has the same configuration as the CSI-RS.
  • DRS measurement bandwidth may be set using higher layer signaling.
  • the terminal device 1 measures the RSRQ of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection state.
  • the first measurement procedure will be described.
  • the first measurement is a measurement of the first RSRP or the first RSRQ.
  • the first measurement may be measurement of the first signal (the signal having the first configuration) (RRM measurement, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, RSSI measurement).
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes the resource element in which the CRS transmitted by the antenna port 0 is arranged from the physical cell identifier (PCI). And 1st RSRP is measured from the resource element by which CRS transmitted by the antenna port 0 is arrange
  • first measurement results The results (first RSRP and first RSRQ) obtained based on the first measurement procedure are referred to as first measurement results.
  • the second measurement procedure (second measurement procedure) will be described.
  • the second measurement is a measurement of the second RSRP or the second RSRQ.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes the resource element in which the DRS is arranged from the DRS setting information. And 2nd RSRP is measured from the resource element by which DRS is arrange
  • second measurement results the results obtained based on the second measurement procedure are referred to as second measurement results.
  • the second measurement may be measurement of a second signal (signal of the second configuration) (RRM measurement, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, RSSI measurement).
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a measurement model.
  • the measurement unit 1301 may include a first layer filtering unit 13011, a third layer filtering unit 13012, and a report criterion evaluation unit 13013. Note that the measurement unit 1301 may be configured to include some functions of the reception unit 105 and the upper layer processing unit 101. Specifically, the first layer filtering unit 13011 may be included in the receiving unit 105, and the third layer filtering unit 13012 and the report criterion evaluation 13013 may be included in the upper layer processing unit 101.
  • the measured value (sample) input from the physical layer is filtered by the first layer filtering unit 13011.
  • an average of a plurality of input values, a weighted average, an average following channel characteristics, and the like may be applied to the first layer filtering unit 13011, and other filter methods may be applied.
  • the measurement value reported from the first layer is input to the third layer after the first layer filtering unit 13011.
  • the measurement value input to the third layer filtering unit 13012 is filtered.
  • the configuration of layer 3 filtering is provided from RRC signaling.
  • the interval that is filtered and reported by the third layer filtering unit 13012 is the same as the input measurement interval.
  • the report criterion evaluation unit 13013 checks whether it is actually necessary to report the measurement value. Evaluation is based on one or more measurement flows.
  • the terminal device 1 evaluates the report criteria at least every time a new measurement result is reported.
  • the setting of report criteria is provided by RRC signaling. After it is determined that the report of the measurement value is necessary in the evaluation of the report criteria, the terminal device 1 sends measurement report information (measurement report message) via the wireless interface.
  • the base station device 3 transmits a measurement configuration (Measurement configuration) message to the terminal device 1 using an RRC connection reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message of RRC signaling (radio resource control signal).
  • the terminal device 1 sets the system information included in the measurement configuration (Measurement configuration) message, and serves the serving cell (serving cell) and neighboring cells (listed cell and / or detection cell) according to the notified system information. (including detected cells), measurement, event evaluation, and measurement reports.
  • the list cell is a cell (cell notified from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 as an adjacent cell list) listed in the measurement object (Measurement object), and the detected cell depends on the measurement object (Measurement object).
  • a cell that is detected by the terminal device 1 at the instructed frequency but is not listed in the measurement object (Measurement object) (a cell detected by the terminal device 1 itself that is not notified as an adjacent cell list).
  • Intra-frequency measurements are measurements at the serving cell's downlink frequency (downlink frequency).
  • Inter-frequency measurement is a measurement at a frequency different from the downlink frequency of the serving cell.
  • Inter-RAT measurement is a measurement using a radio technology (eg, UTRA, GERAN, CDMA2000, etc.) different from the radio technology (eg, EUTRA) of the serving cell.
  • Measurement setting (Measurement configuration) message includes measurement identifier (measId), measurement object (Measurement objects), reporting setting (Reporting configurations) setting addition and / or modification and / or deletion, physical quantity setting (quantityConfig), measurement gap Settings (measGapConfig), serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), and the like are included.
  • the physical quantity setting specifies the third layer filtering coefficient (L3 filtering coefficient) when the measurement object (Measurement objects) is EUTRA.
  • the third layer filtering coefficient defines the ratio (ratio) between the latest measurement result and the past filtering measurement result.
  • the filtering result is used for event evaluation in the terminal device 1.
  • the measurement gap setting (measGapConfig) is used for setting the measurement gap pattern (measurement gap pattern) and controlling the activation / deactivation of the measurement gap (measurement gap).
  • a gap pattern (gap pattern), a start system frame number (startSFN), and a start subframe number (startSubframeNumber) are notified as information when the measurement gap is activated.
  • the gap pattern (gap pattern) defines which pattern is used as the measurement gap (measurement gap).
  • the start system frame number (startSFN) defines a system frame number (SFN: System Frame Number) for starting a measurement gap (measurement gap).
  • the start subframe number (startSubframeNumber) defines the subframe number at which the measurement gap (measurement gap) starts.
  • the measurement gap is a period (time, subframe) that the terminal device 1 may use to perform measurement when uplink / downlink transmission is not scheduled.
  • the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports the measurement of DRS (or the DRS setting is set)
  • DRS may be measured.
  • the DRS transmission subframe based on the subframe setting included in the DRS setting is measured. If it overlaps with the subframe defined based on the gap setting, the DRS may be measured on the measurement gap. If the DRS transmission subframe is on the measurement gap, the terminal device 1 may measure the DRS on the measurement gap.
  • the DCI format or MAC CE indicates the cell in which the stop state is indicated. Only DRS may be measured over the measurement gap. That is, the terminal device 1 does not have to perform DRS measurement on the measurement gap for the cell in which the activation state is indicated. The base station apparatus 3 may not transmit the DRS in the activated cell.
  • the measurement gap may be set for each DRS or for each cell in which the start / stop state is indicated.
  • the serving cell quality threshold represents a threshold related to the quality of the serving cell (serving cell), and is used to control whether or not the terminal device 1 needs to perform measurement.
  • the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure) is set as a value for RSRP.
  • the measurement identifier (measId) is used to link the measurement object (Measurement objects) and the reporting configuration (Reporting configurations). Specifically, the measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the report setting identifier (reportConfigId) ). One measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and one report setting identifier (reportConfigId) are associated with the measurement identifier (measId).
  • the measurement setting (Measurement configuration) message can be added / modified / deleted with respect to the relationship between the measurement identifier (measId), the measurement object (Measurement objects), and the reporting setting (Reporting configurations).
  • “MeasObjectToRemoveList” is a command for deleting the measurement object (Measurement objects) corresponding to the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId). At this time, all measurement identifiers (measId) associated with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) are deleted. This command can specify a plurality of measurement object identifiers (measObjectId) at the same time.
  • measObjectToAddModifyList is a command that modifies the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) to the specified measurement object (Measurement objects) or adds the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the specified measurement object (Measurement objects) It is.
  • This command can specify a plurality of measurement object identifiers (measObjectId) at the same time.
  • ReportConfigToRemoveList is a command for deleting a specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) and a report configuration (Reporting configuration) corresponding to the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId). At this time, all measurement identifiers (measId) associated with the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) are deleted. This command can specify a plurality of report configuration identifiers (reportConfigId) at the same time.
  • “MeasIdToRemoveList” is a command for deleting a specified measurement identifier (measId). At this time, the measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the report setting identifier (reportConfigId) associated with the designated measurement identifier (measId) are maintained without being deleted. This command can specify a plurality of measurement identifiers (measId) at the same time.
  • measIdToAddModifyList is modified to associate the specified measurement identifier (measId) with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) and the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId), or specified with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId)
  • This command can specify a plurality of measurement identifiers (measId) at the same time.
  • Measurement objects are specified for each radio access technology (RAT: Radio Access Technology) and frequency.
  • RAT Radio Access Technology
  • the reporting configuration has a rule for EUTRA and a rule for RATs other than EUTRA.
  • Measurement objects include a measurement object EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) associated with a measurement object identifier (measObjectId).
  • the measurement object identifier is an identifier used for identifying the setting of the measurement object (Measurement objects).
  • the setting of measurement objects is specified for each radio access technology (RAT) and frequency.
  • Measurement objects are separately specified for EUTRA, UTRA, GERAN, and CDMA2000.
  • Measurement object EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA), which is a measurement object for EUTRA, defines information to be applied to neighboring cells of EUTRA.
  • the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) having different frequencies is treated as a different measurement target (Measurement objects), and a measurement target identifier (measObjectId) is assigned separately.
  • the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) relates to EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo), measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth), antenna port 1 presence information (presenceAntennaPort1), offset frequency (offsetFreq), neighbor cell list (neighbour cell list) Information, information about black list (black list) is included.
  • EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo) specifies a carrier frequency to be measured.
  • the measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth) indicates a measurement bandwidth common to all adjacent cells operating at the carrier frequency to be measured.
  • the antenna port 1 presence information (presenceAntennaPort1) indicates whether the antenna port 1 is used in the measurement target cell.
  • the offset frequency (offsetFreq) indicates a measurement offset value applied at the frequency to be measured.
  • the base station apparatus 3 performs a setting different from the first measurement in order to cause the terminal apparatus 1 to perform the second measurement.
  • the signal to be measured (or the signal configuration and the signal setting) may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement.
  • the cell ID set in the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement.
  • the antenna port of the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement.
  • the measurement cycle (or measurement subframe pattern) of the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. That is, the first measurement and the second measurement may be set individually.
  • the measurement target EUTRA includes EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo), measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth), DRS setting information, offset frequency (offsetFreq), information on neighboring cell list (neighbour cell list), black list ( blacklist).
  • EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo) specifies a carrier frequency to be measured.
  • the measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth) indicates a measurement bandwidth common to all adjacent cells operating at the carrier frequency to be measured.
  • the DRS setting information is used to notify the terminal device 1 of common setting information in a frequency band necessary for detecting the DRS setting.
  • the DRS setting information is a subframe number or subframe transmitted in the measurement target cell. Indicates the period.
  • the offset frequency (offsetFreq) indicates a measurement offset value applied at the frequency to be measured.
  • the information on the neighbor cell list includes information on neighbor cells that are subject to event evaluation and measurement reports.
  • Information on the neighbor cell list includes a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID), a cell-specific offset (cellIndividualOffset, indicating a measurement offset value applied to the neighbor cell), and the like.
  • this information is for the terminal device 1 to add, modify, or delete the neighboring cell list (neighbour cell list) already acquired from the broadcast information (broadcast system information). It is used as information.
  • the information on the black list includes information on neighboring cells that are not subject to event evaluation and measurement reports.
  • the information related to the black list includes a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID). In the case of EUTRA, this information is used as information for the terminal device 1 to add, modify, or delete the black cell list (black listed cell list) already acquired from the broadcast information.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the information related to the new neighbor cell list may include information related to event evaluation and neighbor cells that are subject to measurement reports.
  • Information on the new neighboring cell list may include a cell ID, a cell-specific offset (cellIndividualOffset, a measurement offset value applied to the neighboring cell), cell-specific DRS setting information, and the like.
  • the cell-specific DRS setting information is DRS information set in a cell-specific manner, for example, information indicating a DRS resource element to be used. In the case of EUTRA, this information is used as information for the terminal device 1 to add, modify or delete the new neighboring cell list that has already been acquired from the broadcast information (broadcast system information). Is done.
  • the information on the new black list may include information on neighboring cells that are not subject to event evaluation or measurement reports.
  • cell ID etc. may be contained as information regarding a new black list. In the case of EUTRA, this information is added, corrected, or deleted with respect to a new black cell list (black listed small cell list) that the terminal device 1 has already acquired from the broadcast information. It is used as information for
  • the cell ID is, for example, a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID, physical layer cell ID), CGI (Cell Global Identity / Identifier), ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier / Identity), discovery ID (Discovery ID).
  • a virtual cell identifier virtual cell ID
  • a transmission point ID and the like, which are configured based on cell (transmission point) ID information transmitted by DRS.
  • a parameter related to a sequence generator may be used instead of the cell ID.
  • the neighboring cell list may indicate a DRS list. That is, the terminal device 1 may measure the DRS of the cell ID set in the neighboring cell list.
  • the black list may indicate the DRS black list. That is, the terminal device 1 does not need to measure the DRS of the cell ID set in the black list.
  • the reporting configuration includes a reporting configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA) associated with a reporting configuration identifier (reportConfigId).
  • the report setting identifier is an identifier used to identify a reporting configuration related to measurement (Reporting configuration).
  • the reporting configuration relating to measurement includes the regulations for EUTRA and the regulations for RATs other than EUTRA (UTRA, GERAN, CDMA2000).
  • Reporting configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA), which is a reporting configuration for EUTRA, defines the triggering criteria (triggering criteria) of events used for reporting of measurements in EUTRA.
  • the report configuration EUTRA includes event identifier (eventId), trigger amount (triggerQuantity), hysteresis (hysteresis), trigger time (timeToTrigger), report amount (reportQuantity), maximum number of report cells (maxReportCells), and report interval. (ReportInterval) and the number of reports (reportAmount) are included.
  • event identifier is used to select a condition related to event trigger reporting (event triggered reporting).
  • event trigger reporting is a method for reporting measurement when an event trigger condition is satisfied.
  • event trigger periodic report is also an event trigger periodic report in which a measurement is reported a certain number of times at regular intervals when an event trigger condition is satisfied.
  • the trigger amount is an amount used for evaluating the event trigger condition. That is, RSRP or RSRQ is designated. That is, the terminal device 1 uses the amount specified by this trigger amount (triggerQuantity) to measure the downlink reference signal, and whether or not the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied. Determine.
  • Hysteresis is a parameter used in event trigger conditions.
  • the trigger time indicates a period in which the event trigger condition should be satisfied.
  • the report amount indicates the amount reported in the measurement report (measurementmeasurereport).
  • the amount specified by the trigger amount (triggerQuantity), or RSRP and RSRQ are specified.
  • the maximum number of report cells indicates the maximum number of cells to be included in the measurement report.
  • the reporting interval (reportInterval) is used for periodic reporting (periodical reporting) or event trigger periodic reporting (eventtriggered periodic reporting), and is periodically reported for each interval indicated by the reporting interval (reportInterval).
  • the number of reports (reportAmount) defines the number of times that periodic reporting is performed as necessary.
  • threshold parameters and offset parameters used in event trigger conditions described later are notified to the terminal device 1 together with the event identifier (eventId) in the report setting.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may or may not notify the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure).
  • the terminal apparatus 1 performs the measurement of the neighboring cell when the RSRP of the serving cell (serving cell) is lower than the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure).
  • Perform event evaluation whether or not event trigger condition is satisfied, also referred to as reporting condition evaluation).
  • the base station apparatus 3 does not notify the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure)
  • the terminal apparatus 1 performs measurement of the adjacent cell and event evaluation regardless of the RSRP of the serving cell (serving cell).
  • the terminal device 1 that satisfies the event trigger condition transmits a measurement report to the base station device 3.
  • the measurement report (Measurement report) includes a measurement result (Measurement result).
  • a plurality of event trigger conditions for performing measurement reports are defined, and there are a subscription condition and a withdrawal condition, respectively. That is, the terminal device 1 that satisfies the subscription condition for the event specified by the base station device 3 transmits a measurement report (measurement report) to the base station device 3. On the other hand, the terminal device 1 that has transmitted the measurement report (measurement report) while satisfying the event subscription condition stops transmitting the measurement report (measurement report) when the event leaving condition is satisfied.
  • either the first measurement result or the second measurement result is used.
  • the report settings specify the type of measurement results used to evaluate event trigger conditions. Depending on the parameter, the event trigger condition is evaluated using either the first measurement result or the second measurement result.
  • the terminal device 1 measures the downlink reference signal using the physical quantity specified by the trigger physical quantity (triggerQuantity), and determines whether the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied. To do.
  • the first measurement result or the second measurement result is defined by a new parameter (triggerMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result used for evaluating the event trigger condition in addition to the trigger physical quantity. May be.
  • the new parameter is set with information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result or information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result. For example, when information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result is set in the new parameter, the terminal device 1 performs the second measurement and uses the second measurement result. Evaluate event trigger conditions.
  • the parameter may be shared with a parameter (reportMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result to be reported.
  • the measurement used to evaluate the event trigger condition for each You may specify the type of result. For example, a new parameter (triggerMeasTypeServ) for the measurement result of the serving cell and a new parameter (triggerMeasTypeNeigh) for the measurement result of the neighboring cell may be defined.
  • the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the condition that specifies the measurement.
  • the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell. For example, if the target cell is in the activated state, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result, and if the target cell is in the stopped state, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result. Is done.
  • the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the detection of the reference signal. For example, when CRS is detected and DRS is not detected, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result, and when CRS is not detected and DRS is detected, the second measurement result is Event trigger conditions may be evaluated. Further, when both CRS and DRS are detected, the event trigger condition may be evaluated using the measurement result with the higher received power. When both CRS and DRS are detected, the event trigger condition may be evaluated using a measurement result obtained by averaging both received powers. Further, when both CRS and DRS are not detected, the event trigger condition may not be evaluated.
  • This measurement result includes a measurement identifier (measId), a serving cell measurement result (measResultServing), and an EUTRA measurement result list (measResultListEUTRA).
  • the EUTRA measurement result list includes a physical cell identifier (physicalCellIdentity) and an EUTRA cell measurement result (measResultEUTRA).
  • the measurement identifier (measId) is an identifier used for the link between the measurement target identifier (measObjectId) and the report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) as described above.
  • the physical cell identifier (physicalCellIdentity) is used to identify the cell.
  • the EUTRA cell measurement result (measResultEUTRA) is a measurement result for the EUTRA cell. The measurement result of the adjacent cell is included only when the related event occurs.
  • the terminal device 1 may report the measurement result including the RSRP and RSRQ results for the target cell.
  • the RSRP and RSRQ reported at one time may be either one of the first measurement result or the second measurement result.
  • the first measurement result may be a measurement result obtained from the first measurement.
  • the second measurement result may be a measurement result obtained from the second measurement.
  • the first measurement result is a measurement result obtained based on the setting information related to the first measurement
  • the second measurement result is a measurement result obtained based on the setting information related to the second measurement. It is.
  • the measurement result is reported based on a parameter that determines whether the measurement result is the first measurement result or the second measurement result.
  • the criterion for determining whether the measurement result is the first measurement result or the second measurement result is, for example, a new parameter (reportMeasType).
  • the new parameter may be set with information indicating that the first measurement result is reported or information indicating that the second measurement result is reported. For example, when information indicating that the second measurement result is reported is set in the new parameter, the terminal device 1 recognizes the new parameter, performs the second measurement, and measures the second measurement result. Transmission is carried out in the report message, and the first measurement result is not transmitted.
  • the new parameter may be set with information indicating that the first measurement result and the second measurement result are reported.
  • the new parameter may be shared with a parameter (triggerMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result used for evaluating the event trigger condition.
  • the parameter may be shared with an upper layer parameter that specifies a measurement method.
  • the parameter (reportQuantity) indicating the report physical quantity may be set for each type to be measured as a parameter (reportQuantityRSRP) for RSRP and a parameter (reportQuantityRSRQ) for RSRQ.
  • a parameter for RSRP
  • a parameter for RSRQ
  • the terminal device 1 transmits the first RSRP and the second RSRQ, and the second RSRP and the first RSRQ. Will not send.
  • the type of the measurement result to be reported may be determined depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell.
  • the type of measurement result to be reported is determined depending on the detection of the reference signal. For example, when CRS is detected and DRS is not detected, the first measurement result is reported, and when CRS is not detected and DRS is detected, the second measurement result is reported. If both CRS and DRS are detected, the measurement result with the higher received power is reported. If both CRS and DRS are not detected, they are not reported or the lowest value is reported.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 determines which type of measurement in the measurement result in order to make the base station apparatus 3 recognize whether the reported measurement result is the result calculated by the first measurement or the result calculated by the second measurement.
  • a parameter may be added that specifies whether is set.
  • the terminal device 1 reports the first measurement result and / or the second measurement result to the base station device 3.
  • a combination of an event, an event trigger condition, and a measurement result report is not limited, but an example of a preferable combination will be described below.
  • a measurement object (measObject) including a neighbor cell list or a black list in which a physical cell identifier is set is set, and an event triggered by the first measurement and an event trigger condition Is set, and the measurement report message including the first measurement results (measResults) is transmitted by associating them with the ID.
  • a measurement object (measObject) including a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the extended cell ID is set is set, and triggered by the second measurement.
  • a report setting (reportConfig) in which events and event trigger conditions are set is set, and a measurement report message including the second measurement results (measResults) is transmitted by associating them with an ID.
  • the measurement object, report setting, and measurement result for the first measurement and the measurement object, report setting, and measurement result for the second measurement are set in the terminal device 1. That is, the report setting for the first measurement result and the report setting for the second measurement result are set independently.
  • a measurement object including a neighbor cell list or a black list in which a physical cell identifier is set is set, and an event triggered by the first measurement and an event trigger condition
  • the report setting (reportConfig) is set, and these are linked by the measurement result (measResults) and the ID.
  • a measurement object including a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the extended cell ID is set is set, and an event triggered by the second measurement is set.
  • a report configuration in which event trigger conditions are set is set is set, and these are associated with the measurement results (measResults) and ID.
  • the measurement object and report setting for the first measurement and the measurement object and report setting for the second measurement are set, and the field of the measurement result is shared between the first measurement and the second measurement. Depending on the event, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is transmitted.
  • the terminal device 1 can report the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 is a terminal device 1 that communicates with the base station device 3, and performs the first measurement based on the first RS (CRS), and based on the second RS (DRS).
  • a receiving unit 105 that performs a second measurement, and an upper layer processing unit 101 that reports the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the base station device 3, and in the first state, The first measurement result is reported to the base station apparatus 3, and in the second state, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is reported to the base station apparatus 3.
  • the base station apparatus 3 sets an event for reporting the first measurement result and an event for reporting the second measurement result. Further, as an example, in the second state, only the event reporting the second measurement is set by the base station device 3. The event trigger condition for reporting the second measurement result is defined using the second measurement result.
  • the first state is a state in which the setting information of the second RS is not notified
  • the second state is a state in which the setting information of the second RS is notified from the base station apparatus 3. It is the state that was done.
  • the first state is a state where the second measurement information is not set
  • the second state is the case where the second measurement information is set from the base station apparatus 3.
  • the second state is a state in which the first RS is not transmitted.
  • the report settings for DRS may be set separately from the report settings for CRS and CSI-RS.
  • the value is determined depending on the path loss.
  • PHR Power Headroom
  • referenceSignalPower is given by the upper layer.
  • ReferenceSignalPower is information based on the transmission power of CRS.
  • higher layer filtered RSRP is the first RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.
  • the serving cell c belongs to a TAG (pTAG) including the primary cell
  • the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for referenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered for the uplink primary cell.
  • the serving cell set by the upper layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking is used as the reference serving cell of referenceSignalPower and higherhighlayer filtered RSRP.
  • the serving cell c belongs to a TAG (eg, sTAG) that does not include a primary cell, the serving cell c is used as a reference serving cell of referenceSignalPower and higherhighlayer filtered RSRP.
  • referenceSignalPower is given by the upper layer.
  • ReferenceSignalPower is information based on the transmission power of CRS.
  • higher layer filtered RSRP is the first RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.
  • discoveryReferenceSignalPower is a parameter related to DRS transmission power, and is given by the upper layer.
  • higher layer filtered RSRP2 is the second RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.
  • the case of being set by the upper layer may be, for example, a case based on the setting of the DRS notified using upper layer signaling.
  • the case where it is set by the upper layer may be a case where it is based on the measurement setting notified using upper layer signaling, for example.
  • the case of being set by the upper layer may be, for example, a case based on the setting of uplink transmission power control notified using upper layer signaling. That is, the case where it is set by the higher layer may include a case where a parameter or information is notified using higher layer signaling and is set in the terminal device 1.
  • the serving cell c belongs to a TAG including the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for the discoveryReferenceSignalPower and the higher layer filtered for the uplink primary cell.
  • the serving cell set by the upper layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking is used as the reference serving cell of discoveryReferenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered RSRP2. If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG that does not include a primary cell, the serving cell c is used as a reference serving cell for discoveryReferenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered RSRP2.
  • the terminal device 1 may not perform the following process.
  • the processing includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell Data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • PTI Precoding Type Indicator
  • the terminal device 1 may perform the following process even if the secondary cell is in a stopped state.
  • the processing includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI report to the secondary cell, (uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in the secondary cell), RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 makes a request for SRS transmission to the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If there is (SRS request is transmitted), SRS may be transmitted in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive SRS.
  • PDCCH / EPDCCH DCI format
  • the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell
  • CSI request is Terminal device 1 may transmit CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell using the PUSCH of the primary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell on the PUSCH of the primary cell.
  • a random access response grant (RAR grant) is transmitted from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If so, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive the RACH in the secondary cell.
  • RAR grant random access response grant
  • the RA-RNTI is scrambled from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. If the DCI format with CRC can be detected, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive the RACH in the secondary cell.
  • PDCCH / EPDCCH DCI format
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell. . That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is set only when the EPDCCH set (or EPDCCH setting) is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. May monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.
  • the terminal device 1 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, even if information related to uplink scheduling is transmitted to the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 does not perform uplink transmission based on information related to uplink scheduling. Also good. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 does not expect uplink transmission to be performed in a small cell in a stopped state.
  • the terminal device 1 is secondary if it has a request for SRS transmission to the secondary cell (SRS request is transmitted) by self-scheduling.
  • SRS may be transmitted in the cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive SRS.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 performs CQI / PMI for the secondary cell. / RI / PTI may be transmitted using the PUSCH of the secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 performs RACH transmission in the secondary cell. May be.
  • the terminal device 1 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, if the DCI format with the CRC in which the RA-RNTI is scrambled can be detected for the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 Then, RACH transmission may be performed.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell. That is, if the terminal device 1 has not received the setting of the EPDCCH set for the primary secondary cell, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the secondary cell. Moreover, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit PDCCH with respect to the terminal device 1 by a secondary cell, if the setting of an EPDCCH set is not set with respect to the primary secondary cell.
  • the terminal The apparatus 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is only connected to the secondary cell when the EPDCCH set is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. PDCCH may be monitored.
  • the terminal device 1 may perform uplink transmission based on information related to uplink scheduling in the secondary cell. For example, when DCI format 0 is detected for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may perform PUSCH transmission in the secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 uses the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If there is a request for SRS transmission for (SRS request is transmitted), the SRS may be transmitted in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • PDCCH / EPDCCH DCI format
  • Terminal apparatus 1 may transmit CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell using the PUSCH of the primary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • a random access response grant (RAR grant) is generated from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If it is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. In this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the random access response grant (RAR grant) by the PDCCH order to the secondary cell in the stopped state by cross carrier scheduling.
  • RAR grant random access response grant
  • RA-RNTI is scrambled from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. If the DCI format with CRC is detected, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • PDCCH / EPDCCH DCI format
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell.
  • the downlink grant or the uplink grant is performed from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is only connected to the secondary cell when the EPDCCH set is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. PDCCH may be monitored.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell in the stopped state.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the secondary cell in the stopped state. May be.
  • the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the stopped secondary cell. Further, the base station apparatus 3 transmits the PDCCH in the stopped secondary cell to the terminal apparatus 1 depending on whether or not the EPDCCH setting and / or the EPDCCH set setting for the stopped secondary cell is set. It may be determined whether or not.
  • the terminal device 1 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if information on uplink scheduling is transmitted from the primary cell to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling, the terminal device 1 relates to uplink scheduling. Uplink transmission based on information may be performed. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to transmission modes 1 to 9 by higher layer signaling, and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH.
  • the terminal device 1 assumes that the antenna ports 0 to 3 and 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.
  • the terminal device 1 For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to the transmission mode 10 by higher layer signaling, and for each EPDCCH-PRB set, the terminal device 1 If the terminal device 1 is set by the higher layer to further decode the PDSCH corresponding to the pseudo shared arrangement (QCL: Quasi Co-Location) type A, The apparatus 1 assumes that antenna ports 0 to 3 and antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.
  • QCL Quasi Co-Location
  • the terminal device 1 is set by the upper layer to decode the PDSCH according to the pseudo-shared arrangement type B, the terminal device 1 is higher in terms of Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. Assume that the antenna ports 15 to 22 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to the layer parameter (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
  • QCL type A may assume that the terminal device 1 has a pseudo shared arrangement of the antenna ports 0 to 3 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell with regard to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.
  • the terminal device 1 has antenna ports 15 to 22 and antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to upper layer parameters (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) regarding Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. You may assume that it is a pseudo-shared arrangement.
  • the terminal device 1 assumes that the antenna ports 0 to 3 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged when the type A is set based on the higher layer parameter QCL operation.
  • type B it is assumed that the antenna ports 15 to 22 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to the upper layer parameter (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
  • the terminal device 1 set to monitor the EPDCCH assumes that the CRS and the EPDCCH are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner when the type A is set based on the higher layer parameter QCL operation.
  • Type B it is assumed that CSI-RS and EPDCCH are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
  • the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to the transmission mode 10 by higher layer signaling, and for each EPDCCH-PRB set, the terminal device 1 Parameters set by higher layer parameters (re-MappingQCL-ConfigId, PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-ConfigId) to determine EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement Set (PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-Config) is used.
  • an upper layer parameter (qcl-DRS-ConfigId) for determining the mapping and the EPDCCH antenna port pseudo shared arrangement may be set.
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 is set to receive DRS by higher layer signaling, and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH, the terminal device 1 It is assumed that one or more antenna ports corresponding to the upper layer parameter (qcl-DRS-ConfigId) and the antenna ports 107 to 110 are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
  • the upper layer parameter qcl-DRS-ConfigId
  • Various parameters for determining the EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement for DRS It may be set. That is, the number of DRS antenna ports (drs-PortsCount) may be included in the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS. Further, the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS may include DRS frequency shift (drs-FreqShift).
  • zero power DRS-ID may be included in the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS.
  • the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS may include the ID (qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId) of the non-zero power DRS arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
  • the target signal may be changed depending on the start / stop state of the serving cell (secondary cell).
  • the terminal apparatus 1 is pseudo-shared with the DRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is assumed to be pseudo-shared with the CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. Good.
  • the terminal device 1 is quasi-shared with CSI-RS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is quasi-shared with CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. May be.
  • the terminal device 1 is pseudo-shared with CSI-RS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is pseudo-shared with CSI-RS, CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. You may assume that That is, the terminal device 1 determines the pseudo shared arrangement (resource element mapping and antenna port) of the EPDCCH based on the set setting information.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may transmit information regarding a plurality of QCL settings when changing the pseudo-shared arrangement of the EPDCCH in the activated state and the deactivated state.
  • discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) will be described.
  • the terminal device 1 activates PDCCH monitoring of the terminal device 1 for the C-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, and SPS-RNTI of the terminal device 1 (whether or not to perform PDCCH monitoring). May be set by RRC with DRX function to control. If DRX is not set, the terminal device 1 continues to monitor the PDCCH continuously. In order to perform DRX, a plurality of timers (onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, etc.) are set in the terminal device 1.
  • a subframe for monitoring the PDCCH is set during DRX.
  • Parameters related to short DRX may be set as options.
  • a HARQ RTT timer is defined for each DL HARQ process (excluding broadcast processes). Note that a period during which the PDCCH can be monitored during DRX is referred to as an active time.
  • the active time may be a time when at least one of the timers (onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, mac-ContentionResolutionTimer) is active.
  • the active time may be a time during which a scheduling request is transmitted on the PUCCH and is pending.
  • the active time may be an uplink grant for pending HARQ transmission, and may be a time when data is in the corresponding HARQ buffer.
  • the active time may be a time during which the PDCCH instructing new transmission related to the C-RNTI of the terminal device 1 is not received after successful reception of a random access response for a preamble that is not selected by the terminal device 1.
  • the active time may be the number of subframes set as DRX active time (drx-Activetime).
  • the terminal apparatus 1 will, for each subframe, if the HARQ RTT timer expires in this subframe or if the corresponding HARQ process data has not been successfully decoded, the corresponding HARQ Start a DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) for the process.
  • drx-RetransmissionTimer DRX retransmission timer
  • the terminal device 1 may receive a DRX command MAC control element (MAC CE) for each subframe, and a duration timer (onDurationTimer) and a DRX inactivity timer (drx ⁇ InactivityTimer).
  • MAC CE DRX command MAC control element
  • onDurationTimer a duration timer
  • drx ⁇ InactivityTimer a DRX inactivity timer
  • the duration timer (onDurationTimer) is used to define continuous PDCCH subframes at the beginning of the DRX cycle.
  • the DRX inactivity timer (drx-InactivityTimer) is for specifying the number of consecutive PDCCH subframes after the subframe in which the PDCCH instructing the initial uplink / downlink user data transmission to a certain terminal apparatus 1 is transmitted. Used.
  • the DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) is used to specify the maximum number of consecutive PDCCH subframes until a downlink transmission is received.
  • the HARQ RTT timer is used to specify the minimum number (minimum amount) of subframes before downlink HARQ transmission is expected by the terminal device 1.
  • the MAC contention resolution timer (mac-ContentionResolutionTimer) specifies the number of consecutive subframes in which the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH after the message 3 (PUSCH corresponding to the random access response grant) is transmitted. Used for.
  • DRX short cycle timer (drxShortCycleTimer) is used to define the number of consecutive subframes in which the terminal device 1 follows the short DRX cycle.
  • DRX start offset (drxStartOffset) is used to define the subframe in which the DRX cycle starts.
  • the active time is a time related to the DRX operation, and defines a period (time) during which the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the PDCCH monitoring subframe.
  • the PDCCH monitoring subframe is basically the same as the PDCCH subframe. However, when the terminal device 1 is capable of eIMTA in a certain serving cell, the PDCCH monitoring subframe is in accordance with the TDD UL-DL setting indicated by the L1 signaling related to eIMTA (for example, the DCI format in which eIMTA-RNTI is scrambled). Thus, it is a subframe including the determined downlink subframe and DwPTS.
  • the terminal device 1 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 expires the DRX inactivity timer for each subframe or receives a DRX command MAC CE in this subframe, and further sets a short DRX cycle. If so, start (restart) the DRX short cycle timer (drxShortCycleTimer) and use the short DRX cycle. Otherwise, the long DRX cycle is used.
  • the terminal device 1 uses the long DRX cycle when the DRX short cycle timer expires for each subframe.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 When DRX is set, the terminal apparatus 1 has a predetermined formula for each subframe based on a system frame number, a subframe number, a short DRX cycle (and / or a long DRX cycle), and a DRX start offset (drxStartOffset). If the condition is satisfied, the duration timer is started.
  • the terminal device 1 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 is in active time for each subframe, and for the PDCCH subframe, the subframe is for uplink transmission for half-duplex FDD terminal device operation. If it is not necessary or if the subframe is not part of the configured measurement gap, the PDCCH is monitored. Furthermore, if the PDCCH indicates downlink transmission, or if downlink assignment is set for this subframe, the HARQ RTT timer for the corresponding HARQ process is started and Stop the DRX retransmission timer for the HARQ process to perform. If the PDCCH indicates a new transmission (downlink or uplink), the DRX inactivity timer is started (or restarted).
  • the terminal device 1 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 evaluates all DRX active time conditions in the latest subframe n for each subframe (including subframe n-5). ) Trigger type 0 SRS is not transmitted if it is not in the active time considering the scheduling request transmitted up to subframe n-5 and the received grant / assignment / DRX command MAC CE.
  • the terminal device 1 sets the duration timer in the latest subframe n, assuming that CQI masking (cqi-Mask) is set up by the upper layer for each subframe. Assume that all DRX active time conditions are being evaluated (including subframe n-5) and that it is not within the active time considering the grant / assignment / DRX command MAC CE received by subframe n-5 , CQI / PMI / RI / PTI is not reported on PUCCH. Otherwise, in the latest subframe n, the terminal apparatus 1 has evaluated all DRX active time conditions and has received the grant / assignment received by subframe n-5 (including subframe n-5). If it is not during the active time considering / DRX command MAC CE, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI (that is, CSI) is not reported in PUCCH.
  • CQI masking cqi-Mask
  • the terminal apparatus 1 may receive / transmit HARQ feedback and transmit the trigger type 1 SRS if there is a possibility that the terminal apparatus 1 may occur regardless of whether or not the terminal apparatus 1 is monitoring the PDCCH.
  • the same active time may be applied to all activated serving cells (activated serving cell (s)).
  • N corresponds to a value set in the HARQ RTT timer or the HARQ RTT timer.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 When DRX is set in the primary cell and the DRS setting for the secondary cell is set, the terminal apparatus 1 is set based on the measurement subframe set based on the DRS setting and the DRX setting.
  • DRS measurement and PDCCH monitoring may be performed in the stopped secondary cell in the overlapping subframe.
  • the active time of DRX applies to all active serving cells, i.e. all serving cells in the activated state, but not to inactive serving cells, i.e. serving cells in the deactivated state.
  • the DRS setting When the DRS setting is set, the DRX active time may be applied to the serving cell (or secondary cell) even if it is inactive (off state, deactivation, and dormant mode). In this case, the DRS setting may not include the subframe setting. That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS based on the DRX active time.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 may measure DRS in a subframe that becomes an active time by DRX. .
  • the terminal apparatus 1 When the DRX inactivity timer or the duration timer expires, the terminal apparatus 1 does not perform DRS measurement even if measurement is possible based on the DRS measurement subframe with respect to the subframe after expiration. Also good. That is, when the DRX inactivity timer or the duration timer expires, the terminal device 1 does not expect the DRS to be transmitted in the subsequent DRS measurement subframe.
  • DRS RRM RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI
  • DRX configuration may be individually set in MCG and SCG, primary cell and primary secondary cell, or MeNB and SeNB.
  • DRX in the SCG may indicate a start / stop state of the primary secondary cell.
  • DRS and PDCCH may be transmitted in the DRX subframe.
  • the DRX setting is used, but various parameters set in the DRX setting may be set as a DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) setting.
  • DTX Continuous Transmission
  • radio link monitoring the downlink radio link quality of the primary cell is monitored by the terminal device 1 in order to indicate whether the upper layer is in-sync or out-of-sync.
  • the physical layer of the terminal device 1 has a threshold (Q in , Q out ) defined based on a test related to radio link monitoring for each radio frame (number of subframes constituting the radio frame). On the other hand, it evaluates the radio link quality, evaluated over the past (previous) time period.
  • the physical layer of the terminal device 1 has a threshold value (Q in , Q out) defined based on a test related to radio link monitoring for each DRX cycle (the number of subframes constituting the DRX cycle). ) For the radio link quality evaluated over the past (previous) time period.
  • the radio link quality is not monitored in subframes other than the subframe indicated by higher layer signaling. That is, when the subframe in which radio link monitoring is performed is restricted by higher layer signaling, terminal apparatus 1 performs radio link monitoring only in the restricted subframe.
  • the physical layer of the terminal device 1 indicates that it is out of synchronization with the upper layer. Further, when the radio link quality is better than the threshold value Q in , it indicates that the physical layer of the terminal device 1 is in synchronization with the upper layer in the radio frame in which the radio link quality is evaluated.
  • the physical layer of the terminal device 1 that supports dual connectivity may perform radio link monitoring for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. Further, a threshold value related to radio link quality may be defined for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • the physical layer of the terminal device 1 that supports dual connectivity may individually evaluate the radio link quality (out of synchronization, within synchronization) for the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • the physical layer of the terminal device 1 supporting dual connectivity activates a protection timer when the synchronization loss continues for a predetermined number of times when evaluating the radio link quality.
  • this protection timer expires, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 notifies the upper layer that a loss of synchronization has occurred in the cell (in other words, a physical layer problem has been detected).
  • the upper layer of the terminal device 1 recognizes that a radio link failure (RLF: “Radio” Link “Failure”) has been detected. At that time, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may notify the base station device 3 that the RLF has been detected in the primary cell.
  • RLF radio link failure
  • the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may not recognize the RLF when the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary secondary cell. Moreover, when the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may perform the same process as that of the primary cell.
  • semi-persistent scheduling When semi-persistent scheduling is set to be effective by the RRC layer (upper layer signaling, upper layer), the following information is provided to the terminal device 1.
  • the information includes the semi-persistent scheduling C-RNTI, if semi-persistent scheduling is enabled for the uplink, the uplink semi-persistent scheduling interval (semiPersistSchedIntervalUL) and the number of empty transmissions before the implicit release.
  • the terminal device 1 After the semi-persistent downlink assignment is set, the terminal device 1 considers that the Nth assignment occurs in the system frame number and the subframe that satisfy a certain condition and is continuous.
  • the certain condition is determined based on the system frame number (SFN start_time ) and the subframe (subframe start_time ) when the downlink assignment set in the terminal device 1 is initialized (or reinitialized). May be.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 After the semi-persistent uplink grant is set, the terminal apparatus 1 sets a subframe offset (Subframe_Offset) based on a certain table if the two interval settings are set to be valid in the upper layer. Otherwise, the subframe offset is set to zero.
  • Subframe_Offset a subframe offset
  • a certain condition means that a certain condition is a system frame number (SFN start_time ) and a subframe (when the uplink grant set in the terminal device 1 is initialized (or reinitialized). subframe start_time ).
  • MAC PDU Protocol Data Unit
  • MAC SDU Service Data Unit
  • the SPS may be performed not only in the primary cell but also in the primary secondary cell. That is, the SPS setting may be set not only for the primary cell but also for the primary secondary cell.
  • the SPS when only one SPS setting is set, the SPS may be applied only to the primary cell.
  • the same setting may be applied in the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
  • the downlink SPS setting and / or the uplink SPS setting may be individually set for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. That is, the downlink SPS setting and / or the uplink SPS setting may be common to the primary cell and the primary secondary cell, or may be set individually. Whether or not to perform SPS in the downlink and / or uplink separately in the primary cell and the primary secondary cell may be determined based on the function information transmitted from the terminal device 1.
  • the PDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell may be scrambled using parameters common to a plurality of terminal apparatuses and / or parameters defined in advance.
  • a common parameter is not set by a plurality of terminal apparatuses, it is scrambled using a physical cell identifier.
  • the PDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell may be cyclically shifted in units of REGs based on parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices and / or parameters defined in advance.
  • cyclic shift is performed based on the value of the physical cell identifier.
  • a search space different from USS and USS is arranged in the primary secondary cell.
  • a search space different from USS is a search space for monitoring a common area in a plurality of terminal devices.
  • the CSS arranged in the primary cell is also called a first CSS, and the search space different from the USS arranged in the primary secondary cell is also called a second CSS.
  • the second CSS is a search space set by using parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices and / or parameters defined in advance. Parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices are notified from an upper layer. As an example of parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices, parameters unique to the base station device 3 (cell, transmission point) are used. For example, a virtual cell identifier, TPID, or the like is used as a parameter specific to the transmission point. As an example of a parameter that is common to a plurality of terminal devices, a parameter that can be set individually for each terminal device, but a parameter that is set to a common value for a plurality of terminals. For example, RNTI or the like is used as a parameter for which a common value is set in a plurality of terminal devices.
  • the PDCCH may be arranged in the second CSS.
  • a CCE at which a search space is started is determined using a parameter common to a plurality of terminals and / or a parameter defined in advance.
  • a common RNTI eg, UE-group-RNTI, CSS-RNTI
  • the CCE at which the second CSS search space is started may be designated in common by the higher layer parameters.
  • Y k used in equation (1) in FIG. 14 is always a fixed value, and an upper layer parameter (for example, a parameter for designating a CCE index) is set. Yk may always be set to 0.
  • the aggregation level of the second CSS arranged in the PDCCH supports 4 and 8. Also, at aggregation level 4, four PDCCH candidates are defined, and at aggregation level 8, two PDCCH candidates are defined. Note that aggregation levels 1, 2, 16, and 32 may be supported. In this case, the blind decoding number is not increased in the second CSS by limiting the number of PDCCH candidates. For example, when 2, 4, and 8 are supported in the second CSS aggregation level, two PDCCH candidates are defined in each aggregation level.
  • the EPDCCH may be arranged in the second CSS.
  • the ECCE at which the search space is started is determined using a parameter common to a plurality of terminals and / or a parameter defined in advance.
  • an RNTI for example, UE-group-RNTI, CSS-RNTI
  • the ECCE at which the second CSS search space is started may be designated in common by the upper layer parameters.
  • Y p, k used in equation (2) in FIG. 14 is always a fixed value
  • an upper layer parameter for example, a parameter for specifying an ECCE index
  • an EPDCCH set arranged in the second CSS may be set.
  • EPDCCH set 0 may be arranged in the USS
  • EPDCCH set 1 may be arranged in the second CSS.
  • the inside of one EPDCCH set may be arrange
  • EPDCCH set 0 may be arranged in the USS and the second CSS.
  • the aggregation level of the second CSS in which the EPDCCH is arranged supports 4 and 8.
  • four EPDCCH candidates are defined in aggregation level 4
  • two EPDCCH candidates are defined in aggregation level 8.
  • aggregation levels 1, 2, 16, and 32 may be supported.
  • the blind decoding number is not increased in the second CSS by limiting the number of PDCCH candidates. For example, when 2, 4, and 8 are supported in the second CSS aggregation level, two PDCCH candidates are defined in each aggregation level.
  • the terminal device 1 uses the second CSS using RA-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TDD-ModeA-RNTI, C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, and Temporary C-RNTI.
  • the terminal device 1 may not monitor the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using SI-RNTI and P-RNTI.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using at least RA-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, and TDD-ModeA-RNTI.
  • the terminal device 1 may not monitor the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS by using SI-RNTI, P-RNTI, C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, and Temporary C-RNTI.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using RNTI (SCE-RNTI) related to small cell on / off.
  • SCE-RNTI RNTI
  • the terminal device 1 increases the number of blind decoding in the primary secondary cell. Specifically, only the USS is arranged in the secondary cell, whereas both the USS and the second CSS are arranged in the primary secondary cell. If the blind decoding number of the second CSS is equal to the blind decoding number of the first CSS, the number of blind decoding increases 12 times, and the burden on the terminal device 1 increases.
  • the second CSS is not placed in the DCI format 0 / 1A.
  • the number of blind decoding in CSS can be reduced.
  • the DCI format 3 / 3A is padded according to the payload size of the DCI format 1C.
  • a new DCI format (DCI format 3B) for transmitting a TPC command is set.
  • DCI format 3B is used for transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH by 1-bit power adjustment.
  • the terminal device 1 can detect the value of the transmission power control command corresponding to the PUSCH or the PUCCH by detecting the bit information corresponding to the index (TPC-Index) assigned to the own station.
  • TPC-Index the index assigned to the own station.
  • the DCI format 3B is padded according to the payload size of the DCI format 1C.
  • the number of blind decoding can be reduced.
  • the second CSS an attempt is made to decode six PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format in aggregation 4, and in aggregation 8 two PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format. Try to decode. That is, the terminal device 1 tries 6 times of decoding in the second CSS. Thereby, the number of blind decoding in CSS can be halved.
  • the second CSS padding bits are inserted until DCI format 1C has the same payload size as DCI format 0.
  • the number of blind decoding can be reduced.
  • an attempt is made to decode six PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format in aggregation 4, and in aggregation 8 two PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format. Try to decode. That is, the terminal device 1 tries 6 times of decoding in the second CSS. Thereby, the number of blind decoding in CSS can be halved.
  • the base station device 3 may be notified of information (capability) indicating the capability of whether or not the terminal device 1 can monitor the second CSS.
  • the terminal device 1 having a high processing capability notifies the base station device 3 of information indicating that the second CSS can be monitored.
  • the terminal device 1 with a low processing capability notifies the base station device 3 of information indicating that the second CSS cannot be monitored.
  • the base station device 3 obtains information indicating the capability of monitoring the second CSS from each terminal device 1, and only the terminal device 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS can receive the second CSS. 2 CSS is set.
  • the base station apparatus 3 may set the terminal apparatus 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS as a UE group.
  • the base station device 3 arranges the PDCCH in the second CSS and performs notification of a random access response, notification of TDD UL / DL setting, and the like. .
  • the base station device 3 arranges the PDCCH in the USS and performs notification of a random access response, notification of TDD UL / DL setting, and the like.
  • DCI format 1A is used for notification of random access response
  • DCI format 1C used for notification of TDD UL / DL setting is padded to the same payload size as DCI format 0. .
  • the information indicating whether or not it is possible to monitor the second CSS may be notified in association with information indicating whether or not the operation can be performed in the dual connectivity mode. That is, the second CSS may be able to be monitored as long as the operation is possible in the dual connectivity mode.
  • the processing of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 when information indicating the activation / deactivation state for the secondary cell of the small cell is transmitted using the DCI format (PDCCH / EPDCCH with the DCI format) will be described. .
  • 1 bit that indicates the activation / deactivation state of each of a plurality of cells may be set.
  • the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state is composed of 15 bits, it may mean that the information indicating the start / stop state for 15 cells is included. That is, the start / stop state may be indicated by one bit.
  • the activation state is indicated by the 1 bit, it may be recognized as a CSI request for the cell corresponding to the 1 bit at the same time.
  • the CSI corresponding to the 1 bit is transmitted in the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe is received.
  • the position of the bit which comprises a DCI format, and a cell index may be matched beforehand.
  • the activation state may be indicated. For example, “1” in one bit indicates activation, and “0” indicates the same state as the previous state. In this case, it is preferably used in combination with another method for instructing the stop state such as a deactivation timer.
  • stop state In the DCI format, only the stop state may be indicated. For example, “1” in one bit indicates stop, and “0” indicates the same state as the previous state. In this case, it is preferably used in combination with another method for instructing the activation state such as activation notification by MAC CE.
  • n bits indicating the activation / deactivation state of each of a plurality of cells may be set.
  • the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state is composed of 15 bits, it may mean that the information indicating the start / stop state for 15 ⁇ n cells is included. . That is, the start / stop state may be indicated by n bits.
  • the information notified by n bits is information on the activation / deactivation state of cells in n subframes. Each bit in n bits corresponds to a subframe. Specifically, the information notified in 8 bits is information indicating the start / stop state of 8 subframes.
  • the information notified by n bits is information indicating a subframe pattern in a start / stop state.
  • the subframe pattern of the start / stop state may be determined in advance.
  • the subframe pattern in the start / stop state may be notified in an upper layer.
  • the information notified with 2 bits indicates four types of subframe patterns.
  • the length of the bit indicating the start / stop state is determined according to the maximum number of types of subframe patterns.
  • the maximum number of types of subframe patterns may be set in an upper layer.
  • the PDCCH / EPDCCH including information indicating the start / stop state is scrambled by an RNTI (for example, SCE-RNTI) for indicating the start / stop state.
  • an RNTI for example, SCE-RNTI
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes that the information indicating the start / stop state is included in the PDCCH / EPDCCH. Thereby, even if the information indicating the start / stop state is included in the same DCI format as the other control information, the terminal device 1 can recognize that it is information for indicating the start / stop state.
  • information instructing the start / stop state for the secondary cell of the small cell may be included in the DCI including other control information scrambled by another RNTI.
  • the state of cell stop may be indicated using the state of UL / DL setting 7 in dynamic TDD.
  • UL / DL settings 1 to 6 may indicate the activation status of the cell.
  • a cell activation / deactivation state may be indicated using a surplus bit other than information indicating the UL / DL setting in dynamic TDD.
  • the remaining bits other than the information for notifying the TPC command may be used to indicate the cell activation / deactivation state.
  • the information indicating the activation state for the secondary cell may be notified by setting a field in the DCI format indicating the downlink grant / uplink grant.
  • a 3-bit field indicating a serving cell is set in DCI format 4 or DCI format 2D.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes that the serving cell indicated by the DCI format of the downlink grant / uplink grant is in the activated state.
  • the information indicating the stop state for the secondary cell may be notified by setting a field in the DCI format indicating the downlink grant / uplink grant.
  • a 3-bit field indicating a serving cell is set in DCI format 4 or DCI format 2D.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes that the serving cell indicated by the DCI format of the downlink grant / uplink grant is in a stopped state.
  • the DCI format including information indicating the start / stop state it is preferable not to specify the start / stop state across a plurality of cell groups.
  • the information indicating the start / stop state corresponding to the secondary cell belonging to the master cell group and the information indicating the start / stop state corresponding to the secondary cell belonging to the secondary cell group are one DCI format. Not included.
  • the information indicating the activation / deactivation state included in one DCI format corresponds only to the serving cell belonging to one cell group.
  • the DCI format including information indicating the start / stop state of the cells belonging to the master cell group is arranged in the first CSS of the primary cell. From the viewpoint of the processing burden of blind decoding, it is preferable that the DCI format including the information indicating the activation / deactivation state has the same number of bits as other DCI formats arranged in the first CSS. Specifically, in the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state, the bits are padded so that the payload size is the same as that of the DCI format 0 / 1A / 3 / 3A or the DCI format 1C. Located in CSS.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the CSS of the primary cell, and acquires the activation / deactivation state of a plurality of secondary cells (small cells) of the cell group to which the primary cell belongs in the DCI format. Thereby, it is easy to notify a plurality of terminal devices using one PDCCH, and overhead is reduced.
  • the DCI format including information instructing the start / stop state of the cells belonging to the secondary cell group is arranged in the SS of the primary secondary cell.
  • the DCI format including information instructing the activation / deactivation state of cells belonging to the secondary cell group is preferably arranged in the SS that can be monitored by a plurality of terminal devices of the primary secondary cell.
  • a DCI format including information indicating the activation / deactivation state of a cell belonging to the secondary cell group is arranged in the second CSS. From the viewpoint of the processing burden of blind decoding, it is preferable that the DCI format including the information indicating the activation / deactivation state has the same number of bits as other DCI formats arranged in the second CSS.
  • bits are padded so as to have the same payload size as the DCI format 0 / 1A / 3 / 3A or DCI format 1C and arranged in the CSS. Is done.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the second CSS of the primary secondary cell, and acquires the activation / deactivation state of a plurality of secondary cells (small cells) of the cell group to which the primary secondary cell belongs in the DCI format. Thereby, it becomes easy to notify a plurality of terminal devices using one PDCCH / EPDCCH, and overhead is reduced.
  • a DCI format including information indicating the activation / deactivation state of a cell may be arranged in the USS of the cell.
  • notification may be made with 1-bit information indicating the start / stop state.
  • the terminal device 1 may continue to recognize the start / stop state instructed in the previously transmitted DCI format until instructed in the next DCI format instructing the cell start / stop state. In this case, it is preferable that the DCI format instructing the cell activation / deactivation state is transmitted periodically.
  • the cycle and timing (subframe) at which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted are notified to the terminal device 1.
  • the cycle in which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted is, for example, one radio frame (10 subframes) or one half frame (5 subframes).
  • the timing at which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted is, for example, subframe 0 or subframe 5. By periodically transmitting, the terminal device 1 can explicitly recognize the period for recognizing the start / stop state.
  • the terminal device 1 may be changed so as to be recognized as a stop state before being instructed by the next DCI format that indicates the start / stop state of the cell.
  • a timer small cell deactivation timer
  • the terminal device 1 is set to the stop state before receiving an instruction from the base station device 3. recognize.
  • the start / stop state instruction for each cell (adjacent cell, transmission point) having a different transmission point from that of the serving cell may be performed in the DCI format.
  • the serving cell and the cell having a different transmission point are preferably connected by a low-delay backhaul such as an optical fiber.
  • the on / off cell PDCCH configuration (on / off cell PDCCH configuration) is used to specify an RNTI and an index for indicating a start / stop state of a small cell (or a secondary cell / serving cell corresponding to the small cell).
  • the small cell on / off function may be set up or released with this setting.
  • the on / off cell PDCCH setting may include an RNTI (eg, SCE-RNTI) indicating that the DCI format is a DCI format that indicates the activation / deactivation state of the small cell (serving cell).
  • the on / off cell PDCCH setting may include a list of small cell indexes indicating activation / deactivation states in the DCI format. The list may notify a specific small cell of the activation / deactivation state. For example, when a certain DCI format is composed of 15 bits, the terminal apparatus 1 does not check the activation / deactivation state for all bits, but activates only the bits corresponding to the index indicated by the list. You may check the status of / stop. All other bits may be recognized as being in a stopped state.
  • RNTI eg, SCE-RNTI
  • the first DCI format size may be the same as the sizes of other DCI formats. By matching the size of the DCI format, new instruction information can be set without increasing the number of blind decoding. If the number (type) of control information to be transmitted and the number of necessary bits are different between the first DCI format and the second DCI format, bits that are not used as control information may be padded.
  • bits other than the bits necessary for the information indicating the start / stop state may be deleted. That is, the first DCI format size may be increased or decreased as necessary.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 When the activation state is instructed by the information indicating the activation / deactivation state, the terminal apparatus 1 performs CSI measurement for the cell in which the activation state is instructed, and the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe is performed.
  • a CSI report may be performed in a frame.
  • URS When PDCCH / EPDCCH and DRS are transmitted in the same subframe, URS (or DMRS) may be transmitted in the same subframe in order to demodulate and decode PDCCH / EPDCCH.
  • terminal apparatus 1 may perform demodulation / decoding of PDCCH / EPDCCH using DRS (one of a plurality of signals constituting DRS). Good.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 determines that the measurement result does not satisfy the threshold in a DRS measurement subframe for a certain cell, May be used to request resetting of the DRS.
  • the ON / OFF cell may be the same as the small cell.
  • the base station device 3 When inter-cell interference is suppressed by transitioning the base station device 3 from the ON state (operating state, starting state) to the OFF state (stopping state) (for the sake of explanation, the base station device 3 is ON) It is assumed that the ON / OFF cell enters the OFF state before the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell set in the terminal device 1 expires.
  • the ON / OFF cell being in the OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 does not expect downlink transmission from the base station device 3. That is, at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and PDSCH may not be transmitted.
  • PSS / SSS is not transmitted for one half frame or more (5 subframes or more).
  • the base station device 3 being in the OFF state is a state in which only DRS is transmitted.
  • the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 performs a process different from that of the conventional terminal device. It may be in a state where processing similar to that of the apparatus is possible.
  • the terminal device 1 may perform uplink transmission such as PUCCH and PUSCH in the ON / OFF cell. That is, the ON / OFF cell may perform reception processing even in the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 does not have to release (release or delete) information related to the ON / OFF cell.
  • the terminal device 1 holds information related to the ON / OFF cell, and stores information related to the ON / OFF cell when the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state. It may be used again.
  • the ON / OFF cell may be in the OFF state and the ON / OFF cell may be deactivated, and the deactivation of the ON / OFF cell is the same as the conventional deactivation (non-ON / OFF cell). Deactivation).
  • the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state and the conventional deactivation may be executed simultaneously.
  • the base station device 3 performs L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE ) To notify the terminal device 1 of the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the control information overhead increases.
  • L1 signaling DCI format
  • L2 signaling MAC CE
  • the terminal device 1 is in the OFF state of the cell that has been turned OFF. Until the timer expires, an extra battery is consumed to perform operations such as monitoring of PDCCH in an ON / OFF cell that is in an OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 implicitly determines (assumes) the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, and determines (assumes) the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 implicitly recognizes it as being in an OFF state (implicit deactivation), or shifts to an operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state in an ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) as an OFF state. It is effective.
  • the operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state may be an operation assuming that at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and PDSCH is not transmitted.
  • the operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 performs processing different from that of a conventional terminal device.
  • the operation in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state may be an operation in which the terminal device 1 performs only uplink transmission such as PUCCH and PUSCH.
  • the terminal device 1 may receive information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell from the base station device 3. That is, the base station device 3 may transmit information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell to the terminal device 1.
  • the terminal device 1 reports CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for ON / OFF cells in which the ON state is set.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • PTI Precoding Type Indicator
  • the OFF state timer of the ON / OFF cell is notified until the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell expires or by the base station device 3 Until it is done, information related to the calculation of CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is measured in the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • PTI Precoding Type Indicator
  • the terminal device 1 measures information related to the calculation of CQI (Channel QualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator).
  • CQI Channel QualityIndicator
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • PTI Precoding Type Indicator
  • the terminal device 1 performs a specific CQI (Channel Quality / Indicator) / PMI (PrecodingMatrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) a predetermined number of times or more in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set.
  • CQI Channel Quality / Indicator
  • PMI PrecodingMatrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • PTI Precoding Type Indicator
  • the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as an OFF state (ON / OFF of the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) The operation may be shifted to communication with a cell).
  • the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • DRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state.
  • the ON / OFF cell when the DRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, or when the received power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, It is determined (assumed) that the DRS is not transmitted, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)
  • the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
  • the case where the RS is not detected is a case where the average power of the RE to which the RS is mapped does not exceed the threshold value.
  • the RE for calculating the power may be averaged over a plurality of subframes.
  • the REs that calculate power may be averaged only in specific subframes.
  • the RE for calculating the power is averaged over some resource blocks of the system bandwidth and may not be averaged over some resource blocks.
  • the terminal device 1 does not include in the average of the power calculated for the RE in which no RS exists in a subframe in which some or all of the terminal devices 1 do not exist.
  • the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • a DRS pattern indicating the ON state and a DRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be defined independently, and when the DRS pattern indicating the OFF state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the OFF state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS using different DRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
  • CRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state.
  • the ON / OFF cell when the CRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the CRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, CRS is not transmitted, that is, it is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)
  • the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
  • the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the CRS pattern indicating the ON state and the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be independently defined, and when the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the OFF state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit CRS using different CRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH / EPDCCH in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 determines (assumes) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state when PDCCH / EPDCCH is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set,
  • the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state).
  • the base station device 3 determines (assumed) that the cell is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state (the operation shifts to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, the base station device 3 does not arrange the PDCCH / EPDCCH in the search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set.
  • the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • cyclic redundancy check CRC: “Cyclic Redundancy Check”
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 has a downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set or an uplink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. If PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating (uplink grant) is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more, it is determined (assumed) that the base station device 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state ( The operation proceeds to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
  • the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set or the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. If the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the uplink grant (uplink grant) is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more, it is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state. (The operation shifts to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
  • the terminal device 1 is a search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, and the downlink grant (downlink grant) or the ON state for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set.
  • the base station apparatus 3 is in an OFF state when PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell for which is set is not detected continuously for a predetermined number of subframes or more,
  • the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state).
  • the base station apparatus 3 is a search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, and the downlink grant (downlink grant) or ON for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set.
  • a PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell in which the state is set is not arranged.
  • the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the OFF state when discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) is set for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set.
  • DRX discontinuous reception
  • the / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state (the operation shifts to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state).
  • the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and preferably does not recognize the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state (the ON It is preferable not to shift to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell).
  • discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for ON / OFF cells may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.
  • a timer related to the duration of intermittent reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for an ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.
  • the PHICH is not transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state (HARQ indicator indicating ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) transmitted by the terminal device 1. (HARQ feedback, response information) may not be transmitted).
  • the terminal device 1 does not detect PHICH in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set (ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) transmitted by the terminal device 1) Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell). The operation shifts to the case of communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in FIG.
  • the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
  • the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • PHICH when PHICH is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that PHICH is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value.
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the above example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell is not limited to being executed separately, and two or more may be executed at the same time. It may be executed at the same time as the activation.
  • the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) that is in the OFF state is the wireless that is determined (assumed) as being in the OFF state. It may be applied from a frame and / or subframe, or may be applied after a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number of subframes from a radio frame and / or subframe determined (assumed) to be in an OFF state. Good.
  • the number of subframes may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.
  • the ON state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as a conventional terminal device.
  • a specific example of the base station device 3 in the ON state is as follows.
  • the terminal device 1 expects to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in a predetermined subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting based on the set CSI reporting mode.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 expects a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) for CSI reporting and a CSI reference resource to exist.
  • a reference signal for example, CRS or CSI-RS
  • the terminal device 1 may use again the information related to the ON / OFF cell that was held in the OFF state.
  • the ON / OFF cell is turned on and the ON / OFF cell is activated, and the activation of the ON / OFF cell is the same as the conventional activation (non-ON / OFF cell). Activation).
  • the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state and the conventional activation may be executed simultaneously.
  • the base station device 3 performs L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE ) To notify the terminal device 1 of the ON / OFF cell ON state, the overhead of the control information increases.
  • L1 signaling DCI format
  • L2 signaling MAC CE
  • the terminal apparatus 1 implicitly determines (assumes) the ON state of the ON / OFF cell, and the ON / OFF cell that is determined (assumed) as the ON state. It is effective that the terminal device 1 implicitly turns on (implicit activation) or shifts to an operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in the ON state.
  • the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state is an operation in which the terminal device 1 uses again the information related to the ON / OFF cell that the ON / OFF cell has held in the OFF state. May be.
  • the operation in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state may be an operation in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as the conventional terminal device.
  • the terminal device 1 may receive information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell from the base station device 3. That is, the base station device 3 may transmit information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell to the terminal device 1.
  • a DRS may not be transmitted, that is, a DRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in an ON state.
  • the terminal device 1 is the ON / OFF cell. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF of the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to operation when communicating with a cell).
  • DRS Downlink Reference Signal
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • a DRS pattern indicating an ON state and a DRS pattern indicating an OFF state may be defined independently, and when a DRS pattern indicating an ON state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as an ON state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS using different DRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
  • the DRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the ON state, that is, the DRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state.
  • the ON / OFF cell when the DRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, It is determined (assumed) that the DRS is not transmitted, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the CRS may not be transmitted, that is, the CRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state.
  • the terminal device 1 is the ON / OFF cell. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF of the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to operation when communicating with a cell).
  • CRS when CRS is detected, it may be determined based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.
  • the predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
  • the CRS pattern indicating the ON state and the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be independently defined, and when the CRS pattern indicating the ON state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the ON state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit CRS using different CRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set.
  • the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the uplink grant (uplink grant) is detected, it is determined (assumed) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (the ON / OFF The operation proceeds to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the OFF cell).
  • the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set is not arranged in the search space based on the carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier IndicatorField) related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set (the ON state is set). It is preferably arranged in a search space based on a carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier Indicator Field) associated with the selected cell.
  • the carrier indicator field CIF, Carrier IndicatorField
  • the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set is set.
  • the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating a grant is preferably CRC masked with an RNTI related to an ON / OFF cell in which an OFF state is set.
  • the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set
  • the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the grant is preferably a payload size including bit information regarding a carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier IndicatorField) related to an ON / OFF cell in which an OFF state is set.
  • a carrier indicator field CIF, Carrier IndicatorField
  • the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state when a timer related to discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set expires,
  • DRX discontinuous
  • the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the ON state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state).
  • discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for ON / OFF cells may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.
  • a timer related to the duration of intermittent reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for an ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.
  • the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and turns on the ON / OFF cell. It recognizes as a state (it moves to the operation
  • the short DRX for the ON / OFF cell may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.
  • timer related to the duration of the short DRX for the ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.
  • the example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell is not limited to being executed separately, and two or more may be executed at the same time. It may be executed at the same time as the activation.
  • the ON state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) that is in the ON state is the wireless that is determined (assumed) as being in the ON state. It may be applied from a frame and / or subframe, or may be applied after a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number of subframes from a radio frame and / or subframe determined (assumed to be in an ON state) Good.
  • the predetermined number of radio frames until the ON state of the ON / OFF cell determined to be in the ON state (assumed) (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state) is applied.
  • the number of subframes may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.
  • the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 has a predetermined function (capability, UEabilityCapability).
  • the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 is in a predetermined mode.
  • the Implicit / Explicit activation mode is defined
  • the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 is the Implicit mode.
  • the switching of the Implicit / Explicit activation mode is preferably notified using the R field reserved in the MAC CE, and when the R field is set to “0”, the explicit activation mode is indicated, and the R field is When set to “1”, it is preferable to indicate the Implicit activation mode.
  • the terminal device 1 When receiving the ON state instruction of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.
  • the terminal device 1 When the PDCCH in the ON / OFF cell does not indicate a downlink grant (uplink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell (Downlink grant) or the uplink grant for the ON / OFF cell (uplink grant) is not indicated, or if there is no PDCCH instruction for the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 is turned OFF related to the ON / OFF cell.
  • Count up the state timer (advance by 1 and add 1). When the OFF state timer is in units of radio frames, the count is incremented when there is no PDCCH instruction in all predetermined radio frames. When the OFF state timer is a unit of a plurality of subframes, it is counted up when there is no PDCCH instruction in all of the plurality of subframes.
  • the OFF state timer may be counted up only in a specific subframe. In other words, the OFF state timer is not counted up except for a specific subframe. For example, in the uplink subframe, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied. For example, in the MBSFN subframe, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied. For example, in the subframe indicated by the higher layer, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied.
  • the terminal device 1 When the OFF state timer associated with the ON / OFF cell expires, the terminal device 1 recognizes the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 When the PDCCH in the ON / OFF cell indicates a downlink grant (downlink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell is a downlink grant ( In the case of indicating a downlink grant or an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts an OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.
  • the terminal device 1 When receiving an OFF state instruction of an ON / OFF cell, or when an OFF state timer associated with the ON / OFF cell expires, the terminal device 1 displays an OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell. Stop.
  • the OFF state timer of the ON / OFF cell may be the same as the deactivation timer (timer related to the cell maintenance time). That is, the ON / OFF cell OFF state timer may be a timer related to the ON / OFF cell maintenance time.
  • the ON / OFF cell When suppressing inter-cell interference using an ON / OFF cell, the ON / OFF cell is dynamically switched between the ON state and the OFF state according to the position of the terminal device 1 and the traffic volume. And the adaptability to the position and traffic volume of the terminal device 1 becomes higher as the switching between the ON state and the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell becomes faster.
  • the ON / OFF cell and / or the non-ON / OFF cell may be set as the primary cell, may be set as the secondary cell, or has a special function (for example, the function of the primary cell) in the secondary cell. ) May be set to a secondary cell (primary secondary cell, special cell).
  • the ON state may be always set for the ON / OFF cell and / or the non-ON / OFF cell.
  • the ON / OFF cell and the non-ON / OFF cell are maintained independently in the terminal device 1. That is, it is preferable that the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell are set independently.
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set from the upper layer (RRC layer) using the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12, and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is set to the upper layer (RRC). Layer) to parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set using two or more of the same parameters.
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set using two or more parameters sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.
  • the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 related to the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is replaced with the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell, and the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell
  • An initial value may be set. For example, when rf2, which is a value related to the number of radio frames, is set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell may be set as rf1.
  • the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 related to the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set as the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.
  • rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which are values related to the number of radio frames, is preferably set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.
  • rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames
  • rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames
  • rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames
  • rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames
  • rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames.
  • rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames
  • rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.
  • the value related to the number of radio frames set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 may be selected from different values.
  • at least one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which are values related to the number of radio frames, is set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10, and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 is set in the radio frame
  • rf1, rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, and rf64 which is a value related to the number of.
  • rf1 corresponds to 1 radio frame
  • rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames
  • rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames
  • rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames
  • rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames.
  • rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames
  • rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames
  • rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.
  • the value set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and / or the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 may be selected from values related to the number of subframes.
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer may be applied from a radio frame and / or subframe that has received the setting, or a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number from the radio frame and / or subframe that has received the setting. It may be applied after the number of subframes.
  • the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set for the terminal device 1 for which the initial value of the first OFF state timer is set. It may be applied from the received radio frame and / or subframe, or the setting of the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set to a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined subframe from the received radio frame and / or subframe. It may be applied several times later, or the initial value of the second OFF state timer may be ignored.
  • the predetermined number of radio frames / or the predetermined number of subframes to which the initial value of the OFF state timer is applied may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell may be set using the upper layer (RRC layer).
  • L1 signaling for example, DCI format
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set using L1 signaling (eg, DCI format)
  • the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is set to the upper layer (RRC layer). ) May be used.
  • the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set to a common value for the set ON / OFF cells.
  • individual values may be set for each of a plurality of set ON / OFF cells, or a plurality of set ON / OFF cells may be grouped to be a common value for the group. May be set.
  • the CSI is configured by CQI (Channel quality indicator), PMI (Precoding matrix indicator), PTI (Precoding type indicator) and / or RI (Rank indicator). RI indicates the number of transmission layers (number of ranks).
  • PMI is information indicating a precoding matrix defined in advance.
  • the PMI indicates one precoding matrix by one piece of information or two pieces of information.
  • the PMI in the case of using two pieces of information is also referred to as a first PMI and a second PMI.
  • CQI is information indicating a combination of a modulation scheme and a coding rate defined in advance.
  • the recommended CSI is reported to the base station apparatus 3.
  • the terminal device 2 reports a CQI that satisfies a predetermined reception quality for each transport block (codeword).
  • Subframes (reporting instances) capable of periodic CSI reporting are determined by the reporting period and subframe offset based on information (CQIPMI index, RI index) set in an upper layer.
  • information set in the upper layer can be set for each subframe set set for measuring CSI.
  • the information may be regarded as common between the subframe sets.
  • one P-CSI report for each serving cell is set by higher layer signaling.
  • one or more P-CSI reports for each serving cell are set by higher layer signaling.
  • the CQI report in a subframe of a serving cell indicates the channel quality in a specific part (part) of the serving cell bandwidth indicated as the bandwidth part. It is a report.
  • the CSI report type supports the PUCCH CSI report mode.
  • the CSI report type may be referred to as PUCCH reporting type (PUCCH reporting type).
  • Type 1 reporting supports CQI feedback for terminal selection subbands.
  • Type 1a reporting supports subband CQI and a second PMI feed bank.
  • Type 2, type 2b, and type 2c reports support wideband CQI and PMI feedback.
  • Type 2a reports support wideband PMI feedbanks.
  • Type 3 reports support RI feedback.
  • Type 4 reports support wideband CQI.
  • Type 5 support RI and wideband PMI feedback.
  • Type 6 reports support RI and PTI feedback.
  • the terminal device 1 is set with information related to CSI measurement and CSI reporting from the base station device 3.
  • CSI measurements are made based on reference signals and / or reference resources (eg, CRS, CSI-RS, CSI-IM resources, and / or DRS).
  • the reference signal used for CSI measurement is determined based on transmission mode settings and the like.
  • CSI measurement is performed based on channel measurement and interference measurement. For example, channel measurement measures the power of a desired cell. Interference measurement measures power other than the desired cell and noise power.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on CRS. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on CSI-RS, and performs interference measurement based on CRS. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on CSI-RS, and performs interference measurement based on CSI-IM resources. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on DRS.
  • the terminal device 1 can perform CSI measurement in consideration of the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3. For example, the terminal device 1 can consider the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3 with respect to the reference signal and / or reference resource for performing CSI measurement.
  • the reference signal in CSI measurement includes a reference resource.
  • a reference signal for interference measurement can be read as a resource referred to for interference measurement. That is, the signal for interference measurement does not have to be mapped. Therefore, whether the resource for interference measurement is valid or invalid can be determined according to the ON state and the OFF state of the base station apparatus 3.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement only when the base station device 3 is ON, and transmits a reference signal for interference measurement only when the base station device 3 is ON. Assume that That is, the terminal device 1 transmits the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3.
  • a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3 and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for CSI measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement only when the base station device 3 is in an ON state, and the reference signal for interference measurement is an ON state of the base station device 3 and Assume that it is transmitted in the OFF state. That is, the terminal device 1 transmits the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the reference signal for interference measurement is transmitted in the ON frame and the OFF state subframe of the base station apparatus 3.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe of the frame. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for channel measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform interference measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in interference measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement when the base station device 3 is in an ON state and an OFF state, and a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3. Assume that it is sent only in the state. That is, terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted in subframes of base station apparatus 3 in the ON state and the OFF state. The terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state, and the substation in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe of the frame. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for the interference measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform channel measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in channel measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.
  • the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement when the base station device 3 is in an ON state and an OFF state, and a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3.
  • a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3.
  • terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted in subframes of base station apparatus 3 in the ON state and the OFF state.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the reference signal for interference measurement is transmitted in the ON frame and the OFF state subframe of the base station apparatus 3.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state, and the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among subframes in a state. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can perform CSI measurement in the terminal apparatus 1 even when transmission of signals and channels other than the reference is stopped in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform CSI measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in interference measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement for calculating the CQI value.
  • the CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process.
  • the channel measurement is based only on non-zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of CSI-RS resources associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, the RRC parameter related to the ON state and the OFF state is set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the CSI-RS within the ON state subframe is set. Resources are used to make that channel measurement.
  • the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement for calculating the CQI value.
  • the CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process.
  • the channel measurement is based only on non-zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of CSI-RS resources associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the sub-frame within the ON state and the OFF state CSI-RS resources are used to make that channel measurement.
  • the terminal device 1 performs interference measurement for calculating the CQI value.
  • the CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process.
  • the interference measurement is based only on the zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of the CSI-IM resource associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, a CSI subframe set is set by an upper layer for the terminal device 1 set in the predetermined transmission mode, a CSI-IM within a subset of subframes belonging to the CSI reference resource Resources are used to make that interference measurement.
  • the CSI-RS within the ON state subframe is set. Resources are used to make that interference measurement.
  • the terminal device 1 performs interference measurement for calculating the CQI value.
  • the CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process.
  • the interference measurement is based only on the zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of the CSI-IM resource associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, a CSI subframe set is set by an upper layer for the terminal device 1 set in the predetermined transmission mode, a CSI-IM within a subset of subframes belonging to the CSI reference resource Resources are used to make that interference measurement.
  • the sub-frame within the ON state and the OFF state CSI-RS resources are used to make the interference measurements.
  • RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set in the upper layer.
  • the setting of the RRC parameter regarding the ON state and the OFF state is also referred to as setting for cell state information.
  • the setting for cell state information is used for cell state information that is explicitly or implicitly notified in the physical layer.
  • the configuration for cell state information includes information necessary for receiving cell state information that is explicitly or implicitly notified in the physical layer.
  • the settings for cell state information can be set individually for each CSI process.
  • the setting for cell state information can be individually set for each CSI subframe set.
  • the CSI process is set as information unique to the terminal device 1 in the upper layer.
  • the terminal device 1 is set with one or more CSI processes, and performs CSI measurement and CSI reporting based on the settings of the CSI processes. For example, when a plurality of CSI processes are set, the terminal device 1 independently reports a plurality of CSIs based on those CSI processes.
  • Each CSI process is configured for cell state information, CSI process identifier, CSI-RS configuration information, CSI-IM configuration information, subframe pattern configured for CSI report, and periodic CSI report. And / or configuration information regarding aperiodic CSI reporting. Note that the settings for cell state information may be common to multiple CSI processes.
  • the CSI reference resource is a resource used for the terminal device 1 to perform CSI measurement. For example, the terminal device 1 measures the CSI when the PDSCH is transmitted using the group of downlink physical resource blocks indicated by the CSI reference resource.
  • the CSI subframe set is configured in an upper layer, each CSI reference resource belongs to one of the CSI subframe sets and does not belong to both of the CSI subframe sets.
  • a CSI reference resource is defined by a group of downlink physical resource blocks corresponding to a band related to a required CQI value.
  • the CSI reference resource is defined by RI and PMI on which the required CQI is conditional.
  • the CSI reference resource is defined by the RI and PMI assumed or generated when obtaining the CQI.
  • the CSI reference resource is defined by one predetermined downlink subframe.
  • the CSI reference resource is defined by a subframe that is a predetermined number of subframes before the subframe that reports CSI.
  • the predetermined number of subframes defining the CSI reference resource is determined based on the transmission mode, the frame configuration type, the number of CSI processes to be configured, and / or the CSI reporting mode. For example, when one CSI process and a periodic CSI report mode are set for the terminal device 1, the predetermined number of subframes defining the CSI reference resource is 4 out of valid downlink subframes. This is the minimum value.
  • a downlink subframe in a certain serving cell is considered to be effective when some or all of the following conditions apply.
  • an effective downlink subframe is an ON state subframe in the terminal device 1 in which RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set.
  • a valid downlink subframe is set as a downlink subframe in the terminal device 1.
  • a valid downlink subframe is not an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) subframe in a predetermined transmission mode.
  • a valid downlink subframe is not included in the range of the measurement interval (measurement) gap) set in the terminal device 1.
  • the effective downlink subframe is an element of the CSI subframe set linked to the periodic CSI report when the CSI subframe set is set in the terminal device 1 in the periodic CSI report. Or part.
  • a valid downlink subframe is a CSI subframe set linked to a downlink subframe with a corresponding CSI request in the uplink DCI format in an aperiodic CSI report for the CSI process. It is an element or part. Under the conditions, a predetermined transmission mode, a plurality of CSI processes, and a CSI subframe set for the CSI process are set in the terminal device 1.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a subframe in an OFF state is not a valid downlink subframe.
  • the terminal device 1 assumes that all subframes including the previous ON state subframe are not valid downlink subframes. Also good. That is, when the base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) is in the OFF state, the terminal apparatus 1 determines that the effective downlink subframe is a predetermined subframe after the subframe in which the ON state is notified or the ON state is notified thereafter. Are assumed to be subframes of
  • the terminal device 1 may use a condition for being a valid downlink subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 may determine whether or not it is a valid downlink subframe regardless of the subframe in the ON state or the OFF state.
  • the terminal device 1 may use conditions for the subframes in the ON state and some subframes in the OFF state to be valid downlink subframes.
  • Some subframes in the OFF state are predetermined subframes defined in advance, predetermined subframes set specifically for the base station apparatus 3, or subframes set specific to the terminal apparatus 1.
  • some subframes in the OFF state are subframes between a predetermined subframe and a predetermined number of subframes before the predetermined subframe.
  • the predetermined subframe is a subframe that is in the ON state or a subframe that has notified the ON state.
  • the predetermined subframe is a subframe that has received the DCI format including the CSI request.
  • the predetermined subframe is a subframe for CSI reporting.
  • the base station apparatus 3 performs settings related to cell state information for the terminal apparatus 1 through RRC signaling.
  • the base station device 3 notifies the cell state by a predetermined method based on the setting related to the cell state information set in the terminal device 1.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 is set with respect to cell state information from the base station apparatus 3 through RRC signaling.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes the cell state by a predetermined method based on the setting related to the cell state information set from the base station device 3.
  • the method for notifying the cell state is an explicit method or an implicit method.
  • the cell state is explicitly notified based on cell state information notified using DCI transmitted by PDCCH or EPDCCH.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state when the cell state information indicates 1 and is in the OFF state when the cell state information indicates 0.
  • the cell state is notified implicitly based on the presence or absence of a reference signal. The presence or absence of the reference signal is determined by comparing the reception power or reception level of the reference signal with a predetermined threshold value.
  • cell status is reported implicitly based on DRX configuration or procedure.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state during the non-DRX period and is in the OFF state during the DRX period.
  • the cell state is notified implicitly based on cell activation (Activation) or deactivation (Deactivation) notified in the MAC layer.
  • the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state during the cell activation period and is in the OFF state during the cell activation period.
  • the setting related to the cell state information is information used for the terminal device 1 to recognize the cell state.
  • the setting related to cell state information includes subframe information, information related to search space, information related to RNTI, and the like as information used to receive or monitor PDCCH or EPDCCH for which cell state information is notified.
  • the setting related to the cell state information includes information related to the reference signal, a virtual cell identifier, a predetermined threshold, subframe information, and the like as information used to recognize the presence or absence of the reference signal.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 recognizes the cell state notification based on a cyclic redundancy check (CCR) added to the PDCCH or EPDCCH including the DCI that notifies the cell state information. For example, when the value obtained by the cyclic redundancy check is not correct, the terminal device 1 determines that the notification of the cell state has not been recognized (detected).
  • CCR cyclic redundancy check
  • the notification of the cell state notification in the terminal device 1 is performed based on whether the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is within a predetermined threshold range. For example, a first threshold value and a second threshold value greater than the first threshold value are defined or set, and the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is changed from the first threshold value to the second threshold value. If it is within the range up to the threshold value, the terminal device 1 determines that the notification of the cell state could not be recognized (detected). Further, when the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is lower than the first threshold value, it is determined that the terminal device 1 is in the OFF state. When the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is higher than the second threshold value, it is determined that the terminal device 1 is in the ON state.
  • a predetermined threshold range For example, a first threshold value and a second threshold value greater than the first threshold value are defined or set, and the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is changed from the first threshold value to the second threshold value. If it is within the range up to
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is assumed to be in the OFF state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. . That is, the terminal device 1 performs the same process as when the OFF state is notified until the next subframe where the notification of the next cell state is performed.
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is assumed to be in the ON state until the subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. . That is, the terminal device 1 performs the same processing as when the ON state is notified until the subframe where the next cell state notification is performed.
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is in the ON state or the OFF state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. Assume different states. That is, the terminal device 1 performs a process different from the case where the ON state or the OFF state is notified until the next subframe where the notification of the next cell state is performed.
  • the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the downlink subframe is in the ON state and the uplink subframe is in the OFF state. That is, the terminal device 1 receives or monitors a part or all of the downlink signals and / or channels, and does not transmit part or all of the uplink signals and / or channels. For example, the terminal device 1 performs reception of a reference signal, PDCCH monitoring, and / or EPDCCH monitoring, and does not perform periodic CSI reporting and / or SRS transmission.
  • the terminal device 1 assumes that the downlink subframe is in the OFF state and the uplink subframe is in the ON state. That is, the terminal device 1 does not receive or monitor a part or all of the downlink signals and / or channels, and transmits part or all of the uplink signals and / or channels. For example, the terminal device 1 does not receive the reference signal, monitor the PDCCH, and / or monitor the EPDCCH, and performs periodic CSI report and / or SRS transmission.
  • the terminal device 1 monitors a predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH that is different from the ON state.
  • the predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH is monitored in a predetermined search space different from the ON state.
  • a CRC scrambled with a predetermined RNTI different from the ON state is added to the predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH.
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is in a predetermined state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the terminal device 1 when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 remains in a predetermined state until the subframe to which the cell state indicated by the next cell state notification is applied. You may assume that there is. Thereby, the subframe in which the cell state is notified and the subframe to which the cell state indicated by the notification is applied can be defined or set independently.
  • the various methods, procedures, settings, and / or processes described in the present embodiment may be independent between the Pcell and the pScell in dual connectivity.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing uplink CoMP (ul-CoMP).
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function (supportedBandCombination, supportedBandListEUTRA) for performing a band combination (CA, non-CA).
  • a function supportedBandCombination, supportedBandListEUTRA
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing cross carrier scheduling (crossCarrierScheduling).
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a plurality of timing advance functions (multipleTimingAdvance).
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support the function of the CSI process.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using cells (plural cells) having different TDD UL-DL settings.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing eIMTA.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using a small cell.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function (dual-connectivity) for performing communication simultaneously with a plurality of base station devices.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using cells (a plurality of cells) of different frame structure types.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support the function of simultaneously transmitting and receiving.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of receiving the EPDCCH.
  • the terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may transmit information (UE-EUTRA-capability or FeatureGroupIndicator) indicating the supported function to the base station device 3.
  • information UE-EUTRA-capability or FeatureGroupIndicator
  • the PDCCH subframe may be defined not only as a subframe accompanied by PDCCH, but also as a subframe accompanied by EPDCCH (Enhanced PDCCH) or R-PDCCH (Relay-PDCCH).
  • EPDCCH Enhanced PDCCH
  • R-PDCCH Relay-PDCCH
  • transmission efficiency can be improved in the wireless communication system in which the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 communicate.
  • a program that operates in the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 related to the present invention is a program that controls a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or the like (a computer is functioned) so as to realize the functions of the above-described embodiments related to the present invention Program).
  • Information handled by these devices is temporarily stored in RAM (Random Access Memory) during processing, and then stored in various ROMs such as Flash ROM (Read Only Memory) and HDD (Hard Disk Drive). Reading, correction, and writing are performed by the CPU as necessary.
  • the terminal device 1 and a part of the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may be realized by a computer.
  • the program for realizing the control function may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium may be read by the computer system and executed.
  • the “computer system” here is a computer system built in the terminal device 1 or the base station device 3 and includes hardware such as an OS and peripheral devices.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a storage device such as a flexible medium, a magneto-optical disk, a portable medium such as a ROM or a CD-ROM, and a hard disk incorporated in a computer system.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” is a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, such as a communication line when transmitting a program via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line,
  • a volatile memory inside a computer system serving as a server or a client may be included and a program that holds a program for a certain period of time.
  • the program may be a program for realizing a part of the functions described above, and may be a program capable of realizing the functions described above in combination with a program already recorded in a computer system.
  • the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment can be realized as an aggregate (device group) composed of a plurality of devices.
  • Each of the devices constituting the device group may include a part or all of each function or each functional block of the base station device 3 according to the above-described embodiment.
  • the device group only needs to have one function or each function block of the base station device 3.
  • the terminal device 1 according to the above-described embodiment can also communicate with the base station device 3 as an aggregate.
  • the base station apparatus 3 in the above-described embodiment may be EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network).
  • the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may have a part or all of the functions of the upper node for the eNodeB.
  • a part or all of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may be realized as an LSI that is typically an integrated circuit, or may be realized as a chip set.
  • Each functional block of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 may be individually chipped, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a chip.
  • the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor.
  • an integrated circuit based on the technology can also be used.
  • the terminal device is described as an example of the terminal device or the communication device.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and is a stationary type or a non-movable type installed indoors and outdoors.
  • the present invention can also be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as electronic devices such as AV devices, kitchen devices, cleaning / washing devices, air conditioning devices, office devices, vending machines, and other daily life devices.
  • the present invention has taken the following measures. That is, the terminal device according to the present embodiment is characterized by receiving a predetermined higher layer parameter related to switching between the first secondary cell activation timing and the second secondary cell activation timing.
  • the secondary cell activation timing of the secondary cell is changed from the first secondary cell activation timing to the second secondary cell activation timing. Switch.
  • ON / OFF (start / stop) of the secondary cell is applied in addition to the activation of the secondary cell.
  • the activation / deactivation of the secondary cell is switched to ON / OFF (start / stop) of the secondary cell.
  • Terminal apparatus 3 Base station apparatus 101 Upper layer processing section 103 Control section 105 Reception section 107 Transmission section 301 Upper layer processing section 303 Control section 305 Reception section 307 Transmission section 1011 Radio resource control section 1013 Subframe Setting unit 1015 Scheduling information interpretation unit 1017 CSI report control unit 3011 Radio resource control unit 3013 Subframe setting unit 3015 Scheduling unit 3017 CSI report control unit 1301 Measurement unit 13011 First layer filtering unit 13012 Third layer filtering unit 13013 Evaluation of report criteria Part

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Digital Transmission Methods That Use Modulated Carrier Waves (AREA)

Abstract

A terminal device is provided which, in a communication system involving communication between a base station device and a terminal device, can perform communication efficiently. This mobile station device receives a prescribed higher-level parameter relating to switching between a first secondary cell activation timing and a second secondary cell activation timing.

Description

端末装置、および、基地局装置Terminal device and base station device
 本発明は、端末装置、および、基地局装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a terminal device and a base station device.
 セルラー移動通信の無線アクセス方式および無線ネットワーク(以下、「Long Term Evolution (LTE)」、または、「Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access : EUTRA」と称する。)が、第三世代パートナーシッププロジェクト(3rd Generation Partnership Project: 3GPP)において検討されている。LTEでは、基地局装置(基地局)をeNodeB(evolved NodeB)、端末装置(移動局、移動局装置、端末)をUE(User Equipment)とも称する。LTEは、基地局装置がカバーするエリアをセル状に複数配置するセルラー通信システムである。単一の基地局装置は複数のセルを管理してもよい。 The wireless access method and wireless network for cellular mobile communications (hereinafter referred to as “Long Term Evolution (LTE)” or “Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access: EUTRA”) is the third generation partnership project 3GPP). In LTE, a base station device (base station) is also called eNodeB (evolvedvolveNodeB), and a terminal device (mobile station, mobile station device, terminal) is also called UE (User Equipment). LTE is a cellular communication system in which a plurality of areas covered by a base station apparatus are arranged in a cell shape. A single base station apparatus may manage a plurality of cells.
 LTEは、周波数分割複信(Frequency Division Duplex: FDD)および時分割複信(Time Division Duplex: TDD)に対応している。FDD方式を採用したLTEをFD-LTEまたはLTE FDDとも称する。TDDは、上りリンク信号と下りリンク信号を周波数分割多重することによって、少なくとも2つの周波数帯域において全二重通信を可能にする技術である。TDD方式を採用したLTEをTD-LTEまたはLTE TDDとも称する。TDDは、上りリンク信号と下りリンク信号を時分割多重することによって、単一の周波数帯域において全二重通信を可能にする技術である。FD-LTEおよびTD-LTEの詳細は、非特許文献1に開示されている。 LTE supports frequency division duplex (Frequency Division Duplex: FDD) and time division duplex (Time Division Duplex: TDD). LTE adopting the FDD method is also referred to as FD-LTE or LTE FDD. TDD is a technology that enables full-duplex communication in at least two frequency bands by frequency division multiplexing an uplink signal and a downlink signal. LTE employing the TDD scheme is also referred to as TD-LTE or LTE TDD. TDD is a technology that enables full-duplex communication in a single frequency band by time-division multiplexing uplink signals and downlink signals. Details of FD-LTE and TD-LTE are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.
 また、基地局装置は、端末装置に対して、基地局装置と端末装置との間において既知の信号である参照信号(RS;Reference Signalとも呼称される)を送信できる。この参照信号は、信号やチャネルの復調やチャネル状態のレポートなどの様々な目的のために、複数の参照信号を送信できる。例えば、セル固有参照信号は、セルに固有の参照信号として、全ての下りリンクサブフレームにおいて送信される。また、例えば、端末固有参照信号は、端末装置に固有の参照信号として、その端末装置に対するデータ信号がマッピングされるリソースにおいて送信される。参照信号の詳細は、非特許文献1に開示されている。 Also, the base station apparatus can transmit a reference signal (RS; also referred to as Reference Signal) that is a known signal between the base station apparatus and the terminal apparatus to the terminal apparatus. This reference signal can transmit multiple reference signals for various purposes such as signal and channel demodulation and channel state reporting. For example, the cell-specific reference signal is transmitted in all downlink subframes as a cell-specific reference signal. Also, for example, the terminal-specific reference signal is transmitted as a reference signal specific to the terminal apparatus in a resource to which a data signal for the terminal apparatus is mapped. Details of the reference signal are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.
 3GPPにおいて、小セル(Small Cell)の導入が検討される。小セルとは、セルを構成する基地局装置の送信電力が小さく、従来のセル(マクロセル)に比べてカバレッジの小さなセルの総称である。例えば、小セルを高周波数帯で適用することで、高密度に小セルを配置することが可能となり、面積あたりの周波数利用効率を向上させる効果がある。小セルの導入検討では、低消費電力化やセル間干渉低減などの様々な目的のために、基地局装置を停止の状態に切り替える技術が検討されている。詳細は、非特許文献2に開示されている。 In 3GPP, introduction of small cells is considered. A small cell is a generic term for a cell having a small transmission power of a base station apparatus constituting the cell and having a smaller coverage than a conventional cell (macro cell). For example, by applying small cells in a high frequency band, it is possible to arrange small cells with high density, and there is an effect of improving the frequency utilization efficiency per area. In consideration of introduction of a small cell, a technique for switching a base station apparatus to a stopped state is being studied for various purposes such as low power consumption and inter-cell interference reduction. Details are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 2.
 しかしながら、基地局装置を停止の状態に切り替えた場合において、同期信号や参照信号の送信も停止され、端末装置は停止の状態の基地局装置を発見することが困難となる。このような状況において、停止の状態の基地局装置に端末装置が接続する際に多くの準備時間が掛かってしまうため、伝送効率を大幅に劣化させる要因となる。 However, when the base station apparatus is switched to the stopped state, the transmission of the synchronization signal and the reference signal is also stopped, and it becomes difficult for the terminal apparatus to find the stopped base station apparatus. In such a situation, it takes a lot of preparation time when the terminal apparatus is connected to the base station apparatus in a stopped state, which causes a significant deterioration in transmission efficiency.
 本発明は、上記問題を鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、基地局装置と端末装置が通信する通信システムにおいて、伝送効率を向上させることができる基地局装置、端末装置、通信システム、通信方法および集積回路を提供することにある。 The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a base station device, a terminal device, a communication system, and a communication system in which a base station device and a terminal device communicate with each other. To provide a communication method and an integrated circuit.
 (1)上記の目的を達成するために、本発明は、以下のような手段を講じた。すなわち、本実施形態の端末装置は、第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングと、第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングの切り替えに関連する所定の上位層パラメータを受信することを特徴としている。 (1) In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has taken the following measures. That is, the terminal device according to the present embodiment is characterized by receiving a predetermined higher layer parameter related to switching between the first secondary cell activation timing and the second secondary cell activation timing.
 この発明によれば、基地局装置と端末装置が通信する無線通信システムにおいて、伝送効率を向上させることができる。 According to the present invention, transmission efficiency can be improved in a wireless communication system in which a base station device and a terminal device communicate.
本実施形態の無線通信システムの概念図である。It is a conceptual diagram of the radio | wireless communications system of this embodiment. 本実施形態の無線フレームの概略構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the radio | wireless frame of this embodiment. 本実施形態のスロットの構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the slot of this embodiment. 本実施形態の下りリンクサブフレームにおける物理チャネルおよび物理信号の配置の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the physical channel and physical signal in the downlink sub-frame of this embodiment. 本実施形態の上りリンクサブフレームにおける物理チャネルおよび物理信号の配置の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the physical channel and physical signal in the uplink sub-frame of this embodiment. 本実施形態のスペシャルサブフレームにおける物理チャネルおよび物理信号の配置の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the physical channel and physical signal in the special sub-frame of this embodiment. 本実施形態の端末装置1の構成を示す概略ブロック図である。It is a schematic block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal device 1 of this embodiment. 本実施形態の基地局装置3の構成を示す概略ブロック図である。It is a schematic block diagram which shows the structure of the base station apparatus 3 of this embodiment. DRSの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of DRS. CRSの構成および/またはDRSの構成の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of CRS and / or a structure of DRS. DRSの構成の別の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows another example of a structure of DRS. DRSの設定に対するリソースエレメントの指定の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of designation | designated of the resource element with respect to the setting of DRS. 測定のモデルを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the model of a measurement. PDCCHおよびEPDCCHのサーチスペースの数式を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the numerical formula of the search space of PDCCH and EPDCCH.
 以下、本発明の実施形態について説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described.
 本実施形態において、端末装置1は、複数のセルが設定されてもよい。ここで、端末装置1が、複数のセルを介して通信する技術をセルアグリゲーション、キャリアアグリゲーション、またはデュアルコネクティビティと称する。端末装置1に対して設定される複数のセルのそれぞれにおいて、本発明が適用されてもよい。また、設定された複数のセルの一部において、本発明が適用されてもよい。端末装置1に設定されるセルを、サービングセルとも称する。 In the present embodiment, the terminal device 1 may be set with a plurality of cells. Here, a technique in which the terminal device 1 communicates via a plurality of cells is referred to as cell aggregation, carrier aggregation, or dual connectivity. The present invention may be applied to each of a plurality of cells set for the terminal device 1. Further, the present invention may be applied to some of the plurality of set cells. A cell set in the terminal device 1 is also referred to as a serving cell.
 キャリアアグリゲーション(CA)において、設定された複数のサービングセルは、1つのプライマリーセル(PCell: Primary Cell)と1つまたは複数のセカンダリーセル(SCell: Secondary Cell)とを含む。 In carrier aggregation (CA), a plurality of configured serving cells include one primary cell (PCell: Primary Cell) and one or more secondary cells (SCell: Secondary Cell).
 プライマリーセルは、初期コネクション構築(initial connection establishment)プロシージャが行なわれたサービングセル、コネクション再構築(connection re-establishment)プロシージャを開始したサービングセル、または、ハンドオーバプロシージャにおいてプライマリーセルと指示されたセルである。プライマリーセルは、プライマリー周波数でオペレーションする。コネクションが(再)構築された時点、または、その後に、セカンダリーセルが設定されてもよい。セカンダリーセルは、セカンダリー周波数でオペレーションする。なお、コネクションは、RRCコネクションと称されてもよい。 The primary cell is a serving cell in which an initial connection establishment (initial connection establishment) procedure is performed, a serving cell that starts a connection コ ネ ク シ ョ ン re-establishment procedure, or a cell designated as a primary cell in a handover procedure. The primary cell operates at the primary frequency. A secondary cell may be set at the time when the connection is (re) built or afterwards. The secondary cell operates at the secondary frequency. The connection may be referred to as an RRC connection.
 CAをサポートしている端末装置1に対して、1つのプライマリーセルと1つ以上のセカンダリーセルで集約される。 For the terminal device 1 that supports CA, it is aggregated by one primary cell and one or more secondary cells.
 デュアルコネクティビティ(Dual Connectivity)とは、少なくとも二つの異なるネットワークポイント(マスター基地局装置(MeNB: Master eNB)とセカンダリー基地局装置(SeNB: Secondary eNB))から提供される無線リソースを所定の端末装置1が消費するオペレーションである。言い換えると、デュアルコネクティビティは、端末装置1が、少なくとも2つのネットワークポイントでRRC接続を行なうことである。デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、端末装置1は、RRC接続(RRC_CONNECTED)状態で、且つ、非理想的バックホール(non-ideal backhaul)によって接続されてもよい。 Dual connectivity (Dual Connectivity) refers to radio resources provided from at least two different network points (master base station device (MeNB: Master eNB) and secondary base station device (SeNB: Secondary 所 定 eNB)). Is the operation that consumes. In other words, the dual connectivity is that the terminal device 1 performs RRC connection at at least two network points. In the dual connectivity, the terminal device 1 may be connected in a RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state and by a non-ideal backhaul.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、少なくともS1-MME(Mobility Management Entity)に接続され、コアネットワークのモビリティアンカーの役割を果たす基地局装置3をマスター基地局装置と称される。また、端末装置1に対して追加の無線リソースを提供するマスター基地局装置ではない基地局装置3をセカンダリー基地局装置と称される。マスター基地局装置に関連されるサービングセルのグループをマスターセルグループ(MCG: Master Cell Group)、セカンダリー基地局装置に関連されるサービングセルのグループをセカンダリーセルグループ(SCG: Secondary Cell Group)と称される場合もある。 In the dual connectivity, the base station device 3 connected to at least S1-MME (Mobility Management Entity) and serving as a mobility anchor of the core network is referred to as a master base station device. Further, the base station device 3 that is not a master base station device that provides additional radio resources to the terminal device 1 is referred to as a secondary base station device. When the serving cell group related to the master base station device is called a master cell group (MCG: GMaster Cell Group) and the serving cell group related to the secondary base station device is called a secondary cell group (SCG: Secondary Cell Group) There is also.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、プライマリーセルは、MCGに属する。また、SCGにおいて、プライマリーセルに相当するセカンダリーセルをプライマリーセカンダリーセル(pSCell: Primary Secondary Cell)と称する。なお、pSCellをスペシャルセルやスペシャルセカンダリーセル(Special SCell: Special Secondary Cell)と称する場合もある。スペシャルSCell(スペシャルSCellを構成する基地局装置)には、PCell(PCellを構成する基地局装置)と同等の機能(能力、性能)がサポートされてもよい。また、pSCellには、PCellの一部の機能だけがサポートされてもよい。例えば、pSCellには、PDCCHを送信する機能がサポートされてもよい。また、pSCellには、CSSまたはUSSとは異なるサーチスペースを用いて、PDCCH送信を行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。例えば、USSとは異なるサーチスペースは、仕様で規定された値に基づいて決まるサーチスペース、C-RNTIとは異なるRNTIに基づいて決まるサーチスペースなどである。また、pSCellは、常に、起動の状態であってもよい。また、pSCellは、PUCCHを受信できるセルである。 In dual connectivity, the primary cell belongs to the MCG. In SCG, a secondary cell corresponding to a primary cell is referred to as a primary secondary cell (pSCell: “Primary” Secondary ”Cell). The pSCell may be referred to as a special cell or a special secondary cell (Special (SCell: CellSpecial Secondary Cell). The special SCell (base station apparatus configuring the special SCell) may support functions (capability, performance) equivalent to PCell (base station apparatus configuring the PCell). Moreover, only some functions of PCell may be supported by pSCell. For example, the pSCell may support a function of transmitting PDCCH. In addition, the pSCell may support a function of performing PDCCH transmission using a search space different from CSS or USS. For example, a search space different from USS is a search space determined based on a value defined in the specification, a search space determined based on an RNTI different from C-RNTI, and the like. Further, the pSCell may always be in an activated state. Moreover, pSCell is a cell which can receive PUCCH.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、無線ベアラ(データ無線ベアラ(DRB: Data Radio Bearer)および/またはシグナリング無線ベアラ(SRB: Signalling Radio Bearer))は、MeNBとSeNBで個別に割り当てられてもよい。 In dual connectivity, radio bearers (Data Radio Bearer (DRB) and / or Signaling Radio Bearer (SRB)) may be individually allocated in the MeNB and SeNB.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、MCGとSCGまたはPCellとpSCellでは、それぞれ個別にデュプレックスモードが設定されてもよい。 In dual connectivity, duplex mode may be set individually for MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell, respectively.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、MCGとSCGまたはPCellとpSCellで、同期されなくてもよい。 In dual connectivity, MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell need not be synchronized.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、MCGとSCG(またはPCellとpSCell)それぞれにおいて、複数のタイミング調整のためのパラメータ(TAG: Timing Advance Group)が設定されてもよい。つまり、MCGとSCG間において、同期されなくてもよい。 In dual connectivity, a plurality of timing adjustment parameters (TAG: “Timing” Advance ”Group) may be set in each of MCG and SCG (or PCell and pSCell). That is, there is no need to synchronize between the MCG and the SCG.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、端末装置1は、MCG内のセルに対応するUCIは、MeNB(PCell)のみに送信し、SCG内のセルに対応するUCIは、SeNB(pSCell)のみに送信する。例えば、UCIはSR、HARQ-ACK、および/またはCSIである。また、それぞれのUCIの送信において、PUCCHおよび/またはPUSCHを用いた送信方法はそれぞれのセルグループで適用される。 In dual connectivity, the terminal apparatus 1 transmits the UCI corresponding to the cell in the MCG only to the MeNB (PCell), and transmits the UCI corresponding to the cell in the SCG only to the SeNB (pSCell). For example, UCI is SR, HARQ-ACK, and / or CSI. Further, in each UCI transmission, a transmission method using PUCCH and / or PUSCH is applied to each cell group.
 プライマリーセルでは、すべての信号が送受信可能であるが、セカンダリーセルでは、送受信できない信号がある。例えば、PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control Channel)は、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。また、PRACH(Physical Random Access Channel)は、セル間で、複数のTAG(Timing Advance Group)が設定されない限り、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。また、PBCH(Physical Broadcast Channel)は、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。また、MIB(Master Information Block)は、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。 In the primary cell, all signals can be transmitted / received, but in the secondary cell, there are signals that cannot be transmitted / received. For example, PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. Also, PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell unless a plurality of TAGs (Timing Advance Group) are set between cells. Also, PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. MIB (Master Information Block) is transmitted only in the primary cell.
 プライマリーセカンダリーセルでは、プライマリーセルで送受信可能な信号が送受信される。例えば、PUCCHは、プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されてもよい。また、PRACHは、複数のTAGが設定されているかにかかわらず、プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されてもよい。また、PBCHやMIBがプライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されてもよい。 In the primary secondary cell, signals that can be transmitted and received in the primary cell are transmitted and received. For example, PUCCH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell. Moreover, PRACH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell irrespective of whether several TAG is set. Moreover, PBCH and MIB may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell.
 プライマリーセルでは、RLF(Radio Link Failure)が検出される。セカンダリーセルでは、RLFが検出される条件が整ってもRLFが検出されたと認識しない。プライマリーセカンダリーセルでは、条件を満たせば、RLFが検出される。プライマリーセカンダリーセルにおいて、RLFが検出された場合、プライマリーセカンダリーセルの上位層は、プライマリーセルの上位層へRLFが検出されたことを通知する。 In the primary cell, RLF (Radio Link Failure) is detected. The secondary cell does not recognize that RLF has been detected even if the conditions for detecting RLF are met. In the primary secondary cell, the RLF is detected if the condition is satisfied. When the RLF is detected in the primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the primary secondary cell notifies the upper layer of the primary cell that the RLF has been detected.
 プライマリーセルおよび/またはプライマリーセカンダリーセルでは、SPS(Semi-Persistent Scheduling)やDRX(Discontinuous Transmission)を行なってもよい。SPS設定とDRX設定の総数は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルの総数で決定されてもよい。セカンダリーセルでは、同じセルグループのプライマリーセルまたはプライマリーセカンダリーセルと同じDRXを行なってもよい。 In the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell, SPS (Semi-Persistent Scheduling) or DRX (Discontinuous Transmission) may be performed. The total number of SPS settings and DRX settings may be determined by the total number of primary cells and primary secondary cells. The secondary cell may perform the same DRX as the primary cell or primary secondary cell of the same cell group.
 セカンダリーセルにおいて、MACの設定に関する情報/パラメータは、基本的に、同じセルグループのプライマリーセル/プライマリーセカンダリーセルと共有している。一部のパラメータ(例えば、sTAG-Id)は、セカンダリーセル毎に設定されてもよい。 In the secondary cell, information / parameters related to MAC settings are basically shared with the primary cell / primary secondary cell of the same cell group. Some parameters (for example, sTAG-Id) may be set for each secondary cell.
 一部のタイマーやカウンタが、プライマリーセルおよび/またはプライマリーセカンダリーセルに対してのみ適用されてもよい。セカンダリーセルに対してのみ、適用されるタイマーやカウンタが設定されてもよい。 Some timers and counters may be applied only to the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell. A timer or counter that is applied only to the secondary cell may be set.
 本実施形態の無線通信システムは、FDD(Frequency Division Duplex)またはTDD(Time Division Duplex)方式のフレーム構成タイプ(Frame Structure Type)が適用される。なお、フレーム構成タイプは、フレーム構造タイプやデュプレックスモードと称される場合もある。セルアグリゲーションの場合には、複数のセルの全てに対してTDD方式が適用されてもよい。また、セルアグリゲーションの場合には、TDD方式が適用されるセルとFDD方式が適用されるセルが集約されてもよい。TDDが適用されるセルとFDDが適用されるセルとが集約される場合に、TDDが適用されるセルに対して本発明を適用することができる。 In the wireless communication system according to the present embodiment, a FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) or TDD (Time Division Duplex) scheme frame configuration type (Frame Structure Type) is applied. The frame configuration type may be referred to as a frame structure type or a duplex mode. In the case of cell aggregation, the TDD scheme may be applied to all of a plurality of cells. In the case of cell aggregation, cells to which the TDD scheme is applied and cells to which the FDD scheme is applied may be aggregated. When cells to which TDD is applied and cells to which FDD is applied are aggregated, the present invention can be applied to cells to which TDD is applied.
 FDDが適用されるセルにおいて、半二重(half-duplex)FDD方式または全二重(full-duplex)FDD方式が適用されてもよい。 In a cell to which FDD is applied, a half-duplex FDD scheme or a full-duplex FDD scheme may be applied.
 TDDが適用される複数のセルがアグリゲートされる場合には、半二重(half-duplex)TDD方式または全二重(full-duplex)TDD方式が適用されてもよい。 When a plurality of cells to which TDD is applied are aggregated, a half-duplex TDD scheme or a full-duplex TDD scheme may be applied.
 端末装置1は、端末装置1によってキャリアアグリゲーションがサポートされているバンドの組合せを示す情報を、基地局装置3に送信する。端末装置1は、バンドの組合せのそれぞれに対して、異なる複数のバンドにおける前記複数のサービングセルにおける同時送信および受信をサポートしているかどうかを指示する情報を、基地局装置3に送信する。 The terminal apparatus 1 transmits information indicating a combination of bands for which carrier aggregation is supported by the terminal apparatus 1 to the base station apparatus 3. The terminal device 1 transmits to the base station device 3 information indicating whether or not simultaneous transmission and reception in the plurality of serving cells in a plurality of different bands are supported for each combination of bands.
 本実施形態において、“X/Y”は、“XまたはY”の意味を含む。本実施形態において、“X/Y”は、“XおよびY”の意味を含む。本実施形態において、“X/Y”は、“Xおよび/またはY”の意味を含む。 In this embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meaning of “X or Y”. In the present embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meanings of “X and Y”. In the present embodiment, “X / Y” includes the meaning of “X and / or Y”.
 図1は、本実施形態の無線通信システムの概念図である。図1において、無線通信システムは、端末装置1A~1C、および基地局装置3を具備する。以下、端末装置1A~1Cを端末装置1という。 FIG. 1 is a conceptual diagram of the wireless communication system of the present embodiment. In FIG. 1, the radio communication system includes terminal apparatuses 1A to 1C and a base station apparatus 3. Hereinafter, the terminal devices 1A to 1C are referred to as the terminal device 1.
 本実施形態の物理チャネルおよび物理信号について説明する。 The physical channel and physical signal of this embodiment will be described.
 図1において、端末装置1から基地局装置3への上りリンクの無線通信では、上りリンク物理チャネルが用いられる。上りリンク物理チャネルは、上位層から出力された情報を送信するために使用できる。上りリンク物理チャネルは、PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control Channel)、PUSCH(Physical Uplink Shared Channel)、PRACH(Physical Random Access Channel)などを含む。 In FIG. 1, an uplink physical channel is used in uplink wireless communication from the terminal device 1 to the base station device 3. The uplink physical channel can be used to transmit information output from an upper layer. Uplink physical channels include PUCCH (Physical-Uplink-Control Channel), PUSCH (Physical-Uplink Shared Channel), PRACH (Physical-Random Access Channel), and the like.
 PUCCHは、上りリンク制御情報(Uplink Control Information: UCI)を送信するために用いられる物理チャネルである。上りリンク制御情報は、下りリンクのチャネル状態情報(Channel State Information: CSI)、PUSCHリソースの要求を示すスケジューリング要求(Scheduling Request: SR)、下りリンクデータ(Transport block: TB, Downlink-Shared Channel: DL-SCH)に対するACK(acknowledgement)/NACK(negative-acknowledgement)を含む。ACK/NACKを、HARQ-ACK、HARQフィードバック、または、応答情報とも称する。 PUCCH is a physical channel used for transmitting uplink control information (Uplink Control Information: UCI). Uplink control information includes downlink channel state information (Channel State Information: CSI), scheduling request (Scheduling Request: SR) indicating a PUSCH resource request, downlink data (Transport block: TB, Downlink-Shared Channel, DL -SCH) includes ACK (acknowledgement) / NACK (negative-acknowledgement). ACK / NACK is also referred to as HARQ-ACK, HARQ feedback, or response information.
 PUSCHは、上りリンクデータ(Uplink-Shared Channel: UL-SCH)を送信するために用いられる物理チャネルである。また、PUSCHは、上りリンクデータと共にHARQ-ACKおよび/またはチャネル状態情報を送信するために用いられてもよい。また、PUSCHはチャネル状態情報のみ、または、HARQ-ACKおよびチャネル状態情報のみを送信するために用いられてもよい。 The PUSCH is a physical channel used to transmit uplink data (Uplink-Shared Channel: UL-SCH). The PUSCH may also be used to transmit HARQ-ACK and / or channel state information along with uplink data. Also, the PUSCH may be used to transmit only channel state information or only HARQ-ACK and channel state information.
 PRACHは、ランダムアクセスプリアンブルを送信するために用いられる物理チャネルである。PRACHは、端末装置1が基地局装置3と時間領域の同期をとることを主な目的とする。その他に、PRACHは、初期コネクション構築(initial connection establishment)プロシージャ、ハンドオーバプロシージャ、コネクション再構築(connection re-establishment)プロシージャ、上りリンク送信に対する同期(タイミング調整)、およびPUSCHリソースの要求を示すためにも用いられる。 PRACH is a physical channel used to transmit a random access preamble. The main purpose of the PRACH is that the terminal device 1 synchronizes with the base station device 3 in the time domain. In addition, PRACH is also used to indicate initial connection establishment (initial connection establishment) procedure, handover procedure, connection reestablishment (connection re-establishment) procedure, synchronization for uplink transmission (timing adjustment), and PUSCH resource requirements. Used.
 図1において、上りリンクの無線通信では、上りリンク物理信号が用いられる。上りリンク物理信号は、上りリンク参照信号(Uplink Reference Signal: UL RS)などを含む。上りリンク参照信号は、DMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal)、SRS(Sounding Reference Signal)などが用いられる。DMRSは、PUSCHまたはPUCCHの送信に関連する。DMRSは、PUSCHまたはPUCCHと時間多重される。基地局装置3は、PUSCHまたはPUCCHの伝搬路補正を行なうためにDMRSを使用する。以下、PUSCHとDMRSを共に送信することを、単にPUSCHを送信すると称する。以下、PUCCHとDMRSを共に送信することを、単にPUCCHを送信すると称する。なお、上りリンクのDMRSは、UL-DMRSとも呼称される。SRSは、PUSCHまたはPUCCHの送信に関連しない。基地局装置3は、上りリンクのチャネル状態を測定するためにSRSを使用する。 In FIG. 1, uplink physical signals are used in uplink wireless communication. The uplink physical signal includes an uplink reference signal (Uplink Reference Signal: UL RS) and the like. As the uplink reference signal, DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal), SRS (Sounding Reference Signal), or the like is used. DMRS relates to transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH. DMRS is time-multiplexed with PUSCH or PUCCH. The base station apparatus 3 uses DMRS to perform propagation channel correction for PUSCH or PUCCH. Hereinafter, transmitting both PUSCH and DMRS is simply referred to as transmitting PUSCH. Hereinafter, transmitting both PUCCH and DMRS is simply referred to as transmitting PUCCH. The uplink DMRS is also referred to as UL-DMRS. SRS is not related to PUSCH or PUCCH transmission. The base station apparatus 3 uses SRS to measure the uplink channel state.
 SRSは、2つのトリガータイプのSRS(トリガータイプ0SRS、トリガータイプ1SRS)がある。トリガータイプ0SRSは、上位層シグナリングによって、トリガータイプ0SRSに関するパラメータが設定される場合に送信される。トリガータイプ1SRSは、上位層シグナリングによって、トリガータイプ1SRSに関するパラメータが設定され、DCIフォーマット0/1A/2B/2C/2D/4に含まれるSRSリクエストによって送信が要求された場合に送信される。なお、SRSリクエストは、DCIフォーマット0/1A/4についてはFDDとTDDの両方に含まれ、DCIフォーマット2B/2C/2DについてはTDDにのみ含まれる。同じサービングセルの同じサブフレームでトリガータイプ0SRSの送信とトリガータイプ1SRSの送信が生じる場合、トリガータイプ1SRSの送信が優先される。 There are two trigger type SRS (trigger type 0 SRS, trigger type 1 SRS). The trigger type 0 SRS is transmitted when parameters related to the trigger type 0 SRS are set by higher layer signaling. The trigger type 1 SRS is transmitted when parameters related to the trigger type 1 SRS are set by higher layer signaling and transmission is requested by an SRS request included in the DCI format 0 / 1A / 2B / 2C / 2D / 4. The SRS request is included in both FDD and TDD for the DCI format 0 / 1A / 4, and is included only in TDD for the DCI format 2B / 2C / 2D. When transmission of trigger type 0 SRS and transmission of trigger type 1 SRS occur in the same subframe of the same serving cell, transmission of trigger type 1 SRS is prioritized.
 図1において、基地局装置3から端末装置1への下りリンクの無線通信では、下りリンク物理チャネルが用いられる。下りリンク物理チャネルは、上位層から出力された情報を送信するために使用される。下りリンク物理チャネルは、PBCH(Physical Broadcast Channel)、PCFICH(Physical Control Format Indicator Channel)、PHICH(Physical Hybrid automatic repeat request Indicator Channel)、PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel)、EPDCCH(Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel)、PDSCH(Physical Downlink Shared Channel)、PMCH(Physical Multicast Channel)などを含む。 In FIG. 1, a downlink physical channel is used in downlink radio communication from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1. The downlink physical channel is used for transmitting information output from an upper layer. The downlink physical channels are PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel), PCFICH (Physical Control Format Indicator Channel), PHICH (Physical Hybrid automatic repeat request Indicator Channel), PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel), EPDCCH (Enhanced Physical Channel 、 Control) PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel), PMCH (Physical Multicast Channel) and the like are included.
 PBCHは、端末装置1で共通に用いられるマスターインフォメーションブロック(Master Information Block: MIB, Broadcast Channel: BCH)を報知するために用いられる。MIBは、40ms間隔で更新できる。PBCHは10ms周期で繰り返し送信される。具体的には、SFN mod 4 = 0を満たす無線フレームにおけるサブフレーム0においてMIBの初期送信が行なわれ、他の全ての無線フレームにおけるサブフレーム0においてMIBの再送信(repetition)が行なわれる。SFN(system frame number)は無線フレームの番号(システムフレーム番号)である。MIBはシステム情報である。例えば、MIBは、SFNを示す情報を含む。 The PBCH is used to broadcast a master information block (Master Information Block: MIB, Broadcast Channel: BCH) commonly used in the terminal device 1. The MIB can be updated at 40 ms intervals. The PBCH is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 10 ms. Specifically, the MIB is initially transmitted in subframe 0 in a radio frame satisfying SFN mod 4 = 0, and the MIB is retransmitted in subframe 0 in all other radio frames. SFN (system frame number) is a radio frame number (system frame number). MIB is system information. For example, the MIB includes information indicating SFN.
 PCFICHは、PDCCHの送信に用いられる領域(OFDMシンボル)を指示する情報を送信するために用いられる。 PCFICH is used for transmitting information indicating a region (OFDM symbol) used for transmission of PDCCH.
 PHICHは、基地局装置3が受信した上りリンクデータ(Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH)に対するACK(ACKnowledgement)またはNACK(Negative ACKnowledgement)を示すHARQインディケータ(HARQフィードバック、応答情報)を送信するために用いられる。例えば、端末装置1がACKを示すHARQインディケータを受信した場合は、対応する上りリンクデータを再送しない。例えば、端末装置1がNACKを示すHARQインディケータを受信した場合は、対応する上りリンクデータを再送する。単一のPHICHは、単一の上りリンクデータに対するHARQインディケータを送信する。基地局装置3は、同一のPUSCHに含まれる複数の上りリンクデータに対するHARQインディケータのそれぞれを複数のPHICHを用いて送信する。 The PHICH is used to transmit an HARQ indicator (HARQ feedback, response information) indicating ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) received by the base station apparatus 3. It is done. For example, when the terminal device 1 receives a HARQ indicator indicating ACK, the corresponding uplink data is not retransmitted. For example, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a HARQ indicator indicating NACK, the corresponding uplink data is retransmitted. A single PHICH transmits a HARQ indicator for a single uplink data. The base station apparatus 3 transmits each of the HARQ indicators for a plurality of uplink data included in the same PUSCH using a plurality of PHICHs.
 PDCCHおよびEPDCCHは、下りリンク制御情報(Downlink Control Information: DCI)を送信するために用いられる。下りリンク制御情報を、DCIフォーマットとも称する。下りリンク制御情報は、下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)および上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を含む。下りリンクグラントは、下りリンクアサインメント(downlink assignment)または下りリンク割り当て(downlink allocation)とも称する。 PDCCH and EPDCCH are used to transmit downlink control information (Downlink Control Information: DCI). The downlink control information is also referred to as a DCI format. The downlink control information includes a downlink grant (downlink grant) and an uplink grant (uplink grant). The downlink grant is also referred to as downlink assignment (downlink allocation) or downlink assignment (downlink allocation).
 PDCCHは、連続する1つまたは複数のCCE(Control Channel Element)の集合によって送信される。CCEは、9つのREG(Resource Element Group)で構成される。REGは、4つのリソースエレメントで構成される。n個の連続するCCEで構成されるPDCCHは、imodn=0を満たすCCEから始まる。ここで、iはCCE番号である。 The PDCCH is transmitted by a set of one or more continuous CCEs (Control Channel Element). The CCE is composed of nine REGs (Resource Element Group). The REG is composed of four resource elements. A PDCCH composed of n consecutive CCEs starts with a CCE that satisfies imodn = 0. Here, i is a CCE number.
 EPDCCHは、連続する1つまたは複数のECCE(Enhanced Control Channel Element)の集合によって送信される。ECCEは、複数のEREG(Enhanced Resource Element Group)で構成される。 The EPDCCH is transmitted by a set of one or more continuous ECCE (Enhanced Control Channel Element). The ECCE is composed of a plurality of EREGs (Enhanced Resource Resource Element Group).
 下りリンクグラントは、単一のセル内の単一のPDSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる。下りリンクグラントは、該下りリンクグラントが送信されたサブフレームと同じサブフレーム内のPDSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる。上りリンクグラントは、単一のセル内の単一のPUSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる。上りリンクグラントは、該上りリンクグラントが送信されたサブフレームより4つ以上後のサブフレーム内の単一のPUSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる。 The downlink grant is used for scheduling a single PDSCH within a single cell. The downlink grant is used for scheduling the PDSCH in the same subframe as the subframe in which the downlink grant is transmitted. The uplink grant is used for scheduling a single PUSCH within a single cell. The uplink grant is used for scheduling a single PUSCH in a subframe that is four or more after the subframe in which the uplink grant is transmitted.
 DCIフォーマットには、CRC(Cyclic Redundancy Check)パリティビットが付加される。CRCパリティビットは、RNTI(Radio Network Temporary Identifier)でスクランブルされる。RNTIは、DCIの目的などに応じて、規定または設定できる識別子である。RNTIは、仕様で予め規定される識別子、セルに固有の情報として設定される識別子、端末装置1に固有の情報として設定される識別子、または、端末装置1に属するグループに固有の情報として設定される識別子である。例えば、CRCパリティビットは、C-RNTI(Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、または、SPS C-RNTI(Semi Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)でスクランブルされる。C-RNTIおよびSPS C-RNTIは、セル内における端末装置1を識別するための識別子である。C-RNTIは、単一のサブフレームにおけるPDSCHまたはPUSCHを制御するために用いられる。SPS C-RNTIは、PDSCHまたはPUSCHのリソースを周期的に割り当てるために用いられる。 A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) parity bit is added to the DCI format. The CRC parity bit is scrambled by RNTI (Radio Network Temporary Identifier). The RNTI is an identifier that can be defined or set according to the purpose of the DCI. The RNTI is set as an identifier preliminarily defined in the specification, an identifier set as information specific to a cell, an identifier set as information specific to the terminal device 1, or information specific to a group belonging to the terminal device 1. Identifier. For example, the CRC parity bit is scrambled by C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier) or SPS C-RNTI (Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier). C-RNTI and SPS C-RNTI are identifiers for identifying the terminal device 1 in the cell. C-RNTI is used to control PDSCH or PUSCH in a single subframe. The SPS C-RNTI is used to periodically allocate PDSCH or PUSCH resources.
 PDSCHは、下りリンクデータ(Downlink Shared Channel: DL-SCH)を送信するために用いられる。また、PDSCHは、上位層の制御情報を送信するためにも用いられる。 PDSCH is used to transmit downlink data (Downlink Shared Channel: DL-SCH). The PDSCH is also used for transmitting higher layer control information.
 PMCHは、マルチキャストデータ(Multicast Channel: MCH)を送信するために用いられる。 PMCH is used to transmit multicast data (Multicast Channel: MCH).
 図1において、下りリンクの無線通信では、以下の下りリンク物理信号が用いられる。下りリンク物理信号は、同期信号(Synchronization signal: SS)、下りリンク参照信号(Downlink Reference Signal: DL RS)などを含む。 In FIG. 1, the following downlink physical signals are used in downlink wireless communication. The downlink physical signal includes a synchronization signal (Synchronization signal: SS), a downlink reference signal (Downlink Reference Signal: DL RS), and the like.
 同期信号は、端末装置1が下りリンクの周波数領域および時間領域の同期をとるために用いられる。同期信号は無線フレーム内の所定のサブフレームに配置される。例えば、TDD方式において、同期信号は無線フレーム内のサブフレーム0、1、5、6に配置される。FDD方式において、同期信号は無線フレーム内のサブフレーム0と5に配置される。 The synchronization signal is used for the terminal device 1 to synchronize the downlink frequency domain and time domain. The synchronization signal is arranged in a predetermined subframe in the radio frame. For example, in the TDD scheme, the synchronization signal is arranged in subframes 0, 1, 5, and 6 in a radio frame. In the FDD scheme, the synchronization signal is arranged in subframes 0 and 5 in the radio frame.
 同期信号には、プライマリー同期信号(PSS: Primary Synchronization Signal)とセカンダリー同期信号(SSS: Secondary Synchronization Signal)がある。PSSは、粗いフレーム/シンボルタイミング同期(時間領域の同期)やセルグループの同定に用いられる。SSSは、より正確なフレームタイミング同期やセルの同定に用いられる。つまり、PSSとSSSを用いることによって、フレームタイミング同期とセル識別を行なうことができる。 The synchronization signal includes a primary synchronization signal (PSS: Primary Synchronization Signal) and a secondary synchronization signal (SSS: Secondary Synchronization Signal). The PSS is used for coarse frame / symbol timing synchronization (time domain synchronization) and cell group identification. SSS is used for more accurate frame timing synchronization and cell identification. That is, frame timing synchronization and cell identification can be performed by using PSS and SSS.
 下りリンク参照信号は、端末装置1が下りリンク物理チャネルの伝搬路補正を行なうために用いられる。下りリンク参照信号は、端末装置1が下りリンクのチャネル状態情報を算出するために用いられる。下りリンク参照信号は、端末装置1が自装置の地理的な位置を測定するために用いられる。 The downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to correct the propagation path of the downlink physical channel. The downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information. The downlink reference signal is used for the terminal device 1 to measure the geographical position of the own device.
 下りリンク参照信号は、CRS(Cell-specific Reference Signal)、PDSCHに関連するURS(UE-specific Reference Signal)、EPDCCHに関連するDMRS(Demodulation Reference Signal)、NZP CSI-RS(Non-Zero Power Chanel StateInformation - Reference Signal)、MBSFN RS(Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service over Single Frequency Network Reference signal)、PRS(Positioning Reference Signal)、NCT CRS(New Carrier Type Cell-specific Reference Signal)、そして、DRS(Discovery Reference Signal)などを含む。また、下りリンクのリソースは、ZP CSI-RS(Zero Power Chanel State Information - Reference Signal)、CSI-IM(Channel State Information - Interference Measurement)などを含む。 The downlink reference signal includes CRS (Cell-specific Reference Signal), URS (UE-specific Reference Signal) related to PDSCH, DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal) related to EPDCCH, NZP CSI-RS (Non-Zero Power Chanel State Information). -Reference Reference Signal), MBSFN RS (Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service Service over Single Single Frequency Network Reference Signal), PRS (Positioning Reference Signal), NCT CRS (New Carrier Type Type Cell-specific Reference Signal), and DRS (Discovery Reference Signal) including. Also, downlink resources include ZP CSI-RS (Zero Power Channel State Information Information-Reference Signal), CSI-IM (Channel State Information-Interference Measurement), and the like.
 CRSは、サブフレームの全帯域で送信される。CRSは、PBCH/PDCCH/PHICH/PCFICH/PDSCHの復調を行なうために用いられる。CRSは、端末装置1が下りリンクのチャネル状態情報を算出するために用いられてもよい。PBCH/PDCCH/PHICH/PCFICHは、CRSの送信に用いられるアンテナポートで送信される。 CRS is transmitted in the entire bandwidth of the subframe. CRS is used to demodulate PBCH / PDCCH / PHICH / PCFICH / PDSCH. The CRS may be used for the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information. PBCH / PDCCH / PHICH / PCFICH is transmitted through an antenna port used for CRS transmission.
 PDSCHに関連するURSは、URSが関連するPDSCHの送信に用いられるサブフレームおよび帯域で送信される。URSは、URSが関連するPDSCHの復調を行なうために用いられる。 URS related to PDSCH is transmitted in a subframe and a band used for transmission of PDSCH related to URS. URS is used to demodulate the PDSCH with which the URS is associated.
 PDSCHは、送信モードおよびDCIフォーマットに基づいて、CRSまたはURSの送信に用いられるアンテナポートで送信される。DCIフォーマット1Aは、CRSの送信に用いられるアンテナポートで送信されるPDSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる。DCIフォーマット2Dは、URSの送信に用いられるアンテナポートで送信されるPDSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる。 PDSCH is transmitted by an antenna port used for transmission of CRS or URS based on the transmission mode and the DCI format. The DCI format 1A is used for scheduling of PDSCH transmitted through an antenna port used for CRS transmission. The DCI format 2D is used for scheduling of the PDSCH transmitted through the antenna port used for URS transmission.
 EPDCCHに関連するDMRSは、DMRSが関連するEPDCCHの送信に用いられるサブフレームおよび帯域で送信される。DMRSは、DMRSが関連するEPDCCHの復調を行なうために用いられる。EPDCCHは、DMRSの送信に用いられるアンテナポートで送信される。 DMRS related to EPDCCH is transmitted in subframes and bands used for transmission of EPDCCH related to DMRS. DMRS is used to demodulate the EPDCCH with which DMRS is associated. The EPDCCH is transmitted through an antenna port used for DMRS transmission.
 NZP CSI-RSは、設定されたサブフレームで送信される。NZP CSI-RSが送信されるリソースは、基地局装置3によって設定される。NZP CSI-RSは、端末装置1が下りリンクのチャネル状態情報を算出するために用いられる。端末装置1は、NZP CSI-RSを用いて信号測定(チャネル測定)を行なう。 NZP CSI-RS is transmitted in the set subframe. The resource for transmitting the NZP CSI-RS is set by the base station apparatus 3. The NZP CSI-RS is used by the terminal device 1 to calculate downlink channel state information. The terminal device 1 performs signal measurement (channel measurement) using NZP CSI-RS.
 ZP CSI-RSのリソースは、基地局装置3によって設定される。基地局装置3は、ZP CSI-RSをゼロ出力で送信する。つまり、基地局装置3は、ZP CSI-RSを送信しない。基地局装置3は、ZP CSI-RSの設定したリソースにおいて、PDSCHおよびEPDCCHを送信しない。 ZP CSI-RS resources are set by the base station device 3. The base station apparatus 3 transmits ZP CSI-RS with zero output. That is, the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit ZP CSI-RS. The base station apparatus 3 does not transmit PDSCH and EPDCCH in the resource set by ZP CSI-RS.
 CSI-IMのリソースは、基地局装置3によって設定される。CSI-IMのリソースは、ZP CSI-RSのリソースの一部と重複(オーバーラップ)して設定される。すなわち、CSI-IMのリソースは、ZP CSI-RSと同等の特徴を有し、基地局装置3は、CSI-IMとして設定されたリソースではゼロ出力で送信する。つまり、基地局装置3は、CSI-IMを送信しない。基地局装置3は、CSI-IMの設定したリソースにおいて、PDSCHおよびEPDCCHを送信しない。あるセルにおいてNZP CSI-RSが対応するリソースにおいて、端末装置1は、CSI-IMとして設定されたリソースで干渉を測定することができる。 The CSI-IM resource is set by the base station apparatus 3. The CSI-IM resource is set to overlap (overlap) with a part of the ZP CSI-RS resource. That is, the CSI-IM resource has the same characteristics as the ZP CSI-RS, and the base station apparatus 3 transmits the resource set as CSI-IM with zero output. That is, the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit CSI-IM. The base station apparatus 3 does not transmit PDSCH and EPDCCH in resources set by CSI-IM. In a resource supported by the NZP CSI-RS in a certain cell, the terminal device 1 can measure interference with the resource set as the CSI-IM.
 チャネル状態情報(CSI)には、CQI(Channel Quality Indicator)、PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)、RI(Rank Indicator)、PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)があり、CSI-RSまたはCRSを用いて、測定される。 The channel state information (CSI) includes CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI (Rank Indicator), and PTI (Precoding Type Indicator), and is measured using CSI-RS or CRS. .
 MBSFN RSは、PMCHの送信に用いられるサブフレームの全帯域で送信される。MBSFN RSは、PMCHの復調を行なうために用いられる。PMCHは、MBSFN RSの送信用いられるアンテナポートで送信される。 The MBSFN RS is transmitted in the entire band of the subframe used for PMCH transmission. The MBSFN RS is used for PMCH demodulation. PMCH is transmitted through an antenna port used for transmission of MBSFN RS.
 PRSは、端末装置1が、自装置の地理的な位置を測定するために用いられる。 PRS is used for the terminal device 1 to measure the geographical position of the device itself.
 NCT CRSは、所定のサブフレームにマッピングできる。例えば、NCT CRSは、サブフレーム0および5にマッピングされる。また、NCT CRSは、CRSの一部と同様の構成を用いることができる。例えば、リソースブロックのそれぞれにおいて、NCT CRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメントの位置は、アンテナポート0のCRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメントの位置と同じにすることができる。また、NCT CRSに用いられる系列(値)は、PBCH、PDCCH、EPDCCHまたはPDSCH(RRCシグナリング)を通じて設定された情報に基づいて決定できる。NCT CRSに用いられる系列(値)は、セルID(例えば、物理レイヤセル識別子)、スロット番号などのパラメータに基づいて決定できる。NCT CRSに用いられる系列(値)は、アンテナポート0のCRSに用いられる系列(値)とは異なる方法(式)によって決定できる。なお、NCT CRSは、TRS(Tracking Reference Signal)と称されてもよい。 NCT CRS can be mapped to a predetermined subframe. For example, NCT CRS is mapped to subframes 0 and 5. The NCT CRS can use the same configuration as a part of the CRS. For example, in each resource block, the position of the resource element to which the NCT CRS is mapped can be the same as the position of the resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped. Also, the sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined based on information set through PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, or PDSCH (RRC signaling). A sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined based on parameters such as a cell ID (for example, a physical layer cell identifier) and a slot number. The sequence (value) used for NCT CRS can be determined by a method (expression) different from the sequence (value) used for CRS of antenna port 0. The NCT CRS may be referred to as TRS (Tracking Reference Signal).
 下りリンク物理チャネルおよび下りリンク物理信号を総称して、下りリンク信号と称する。上りリンク物理チャネルおよび上りリンク物理信号を総称して、上りリンク信号と称する。下りリンク物理チャネルおよび上りリンク物理チャネルを総称して、物理チャネルと称する。下りリンク物理信号および上りリンク物理信号を総称して、物理信号と称する。 The downlink physical channel and the downlink physical signal are collectively referred to as a downlink signal. The uplink physical channel and the uplink physical signal are collectively referred to as an uplink signal. The downlink physical channel and the uplink physical channel are collectively referred to as a physical channel. The downlink physical signal and the uplink physical signal are collectively referred to as a physical signal.
 BCH、MCH、UL-SCHおよびDL-SCHは、トランスポートチャネルである。媒体アクセス制御(Medium Access Control: MAC)層で用いられるチャネルをトランスポートチャネルと称する。MAC層で用いられるトランスポートチャネルの単位を、トランスポートブロック(transport block: TB)またはMAC PDU(Protocol Data Unit)とも称する。MAC層においてトランスポートブロック毎にHARQ(Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest)の制御が行なわれる。トランスポートブロックは、MAC層が物理層に渡す(deliver)データの単位である。物理層において、トランスポートブロックはコードワードにマップされ、コードワード毎に符号化処理が行なわれる。 BCH, MCH, UL-SCH and DL-SCH are transport channels. A channel used in a medium access control (Medium Access Control: MAC) layer is referred to as a transport channel. A transport channel unit used in the MAC layer is also referred to as a transport block (transport block: TB) or a MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit). In the MAC layer, HARQ (HybridbrAutomatic Repeat reQuest) is controlled for each transport block. The transport block is a unit of data that the MAC layer delivers to the physical layer. In the physical layer, the transport block is mapped to a code word, and an encoding process is performed for each code word.
 基地局装置3から端末装置1に対する制御情報のシグナリング(通知、報知)の方法として、PDCCHを通じたシグナリングであるPDCCHシグナリング、RRC層(レイヤー)を通じたシグナリングであるRRCシグナリング、および、MAC層(レイヤー)を通じたシグナリングであるMACシグナリングなどが用いられる。また、RRCシグナリングは、端末装置1に固有の制御情報を通知する専用のRRCシグナリング(Dedicated RRC signaling)、または、基地局装置3に固有の制御情報を通知する共通のRRCシグナリング(Common RRC signaling)である。なお、以下の説明において、単にRRCシグナリングと記載した場合は、RRCシグナリングは専用のRRCシグナリングおよび/または共通のRRCシグナリングである。RRCシグナリングやMAC CEなど、物理層から見て上位の層が用いるシグナリングを上位層シグナリングと称する場合もある。 As a method of control information signaling (notification and notification) from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1, PDCCH signaling that is signaling through PDCCH, RRC signaling that is signaling through RRC layer (layer), and MAC layer (layer MAC signaling which is signaling through) is used. The RRC signaling is dedicated RRC signaling (DedicatedDeRRC signaling) for notifying control information unique to the terminal device 1 or common RRC signaling (Common RRC signaling) for notifying control information unique to the base station device 3. It is. In the following description, when simply described as RRC signaling, RRC signaling is dedicated RRC signaling and / or common RRC signaling. Signaling used by higher layers as viewed from the physical layer, such as RRC signaling and MAC CE, may be referred to as upper layer signaling.
 以下、本実施形態の無線フレーム(radio frame)の構成について説明する。 Hereinafter, the configuration of a radio frame according to the present embodiment will be described.
 図2は、本実施形態の無線フレームの概略構成を示す図である。無線フレームのそれぞれは、10ms長である。また、無線フレームのそれぞれは2つのハーフフレームから構成される。ハーフフレームのそれぞれは、5ms長である。ハーフフレームのそれぞれは、5のサブフレームから構成される。サブフレームのそれぞれは、1ms長であり、2つの連続するスロットによって定義される。スロットのそれぞれは、0.5ms長である。無線フレーム内のi番目のサブフレームは、(2×i)番目のスロットと(2×i+1)番目のスロットとから構成される。つまり、無線フレームのそれぞれにおいて、10個のサブフレームが規定される。 FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a radio frame according to the present embodiment. Each radio frame is 10 ms long. Each radio frame is composed of two half frames. Each half frame is 5 ms long. Each half frame is composed of 5 subframes. Each subframe is 1 ms long and is defined by two consecutive slots. Each of the slots is 0.5 ms long. The i-th subframe in the radio frame is composed of a (2 × i) th slot and a (2 × i + 1) th slot. That is, 10 subframes are defined in each radio frame.
 サブフレームは、下りリンクサブフレーム(第1のサブフレーム)、上りリンクサブフレーム(第2のサブフレーム)、スペシャルサブフレーム(第3のサブフレーム)などを含む。 The subframe includes a downlink subframe (first subframe), an uplink subframe (second subframe), a special subframe (third subframe), and the like.
 下りリンクサブフレームは下りリンク送信のためにリザーブされるサブフレームである。上りリンクサブフレームは上りリンク送信のためにリザーブされるサブフレームである。スペシャルサブフレームは3つのフィールドから構成される。該3つのフィールドは、DwPTS(Downlink Pilot Time Slot)、GP(Guard Period)、およびUpPTS(Uplink Pilot Time Slot)である。DwPTS、GP、およびUpPTSの合計の長さは1msである。DwPTSは下りリンク送信のためにリザーブされるフィールドである。UpPTSは上りリンク送信のためにリザーブされるフィールドである。GPは下りリンク送信および上りリンク送信が行なわれないフィールドである。なお、スペシャルサブフレームは、DwPTSおよびGPのみによって構成されてもよいし、GPおよびUpPTSのみによって構成されてもよい。スペシャルサブフレームは、TDDにおいて下りリンクサブフレームと上りリンクサブフレームとの間に配置され、下りリンクサブフレームから上りリンクサブフレームに切り替えるために用いられる。 The downlink subframe is a subframe reserved for downlink transmission. The uplink subframe is a subframe reserved for uplink transmission. The special subframe is composed of three fields. The three fields are DwPTS (Downlink Pilot Time Slot), GP (Guard Period), and UpPTS (Uplink Pilot Time Slot). The total length of DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS is 1 ms. DwPTS is a field reserved for downlink transmission. UpPTS is a field reserved for uplink transmission. GP is a field in which downlink transmission and uplink transmission are not performed. Note that the special subframe may be configured only by DwPTS and GP, or may be configured only by GP and UpPTS. The special subframe is arranged between the downlink subframe and the uplink subframe in TDD, and is used for switching from the downlink subframe to the uplink subframe.
 単一の無線フレームは、下りリンクサブフレーム、上りリンクサブフレーム、および/またはスペシャルサブフレームから構成される。つまり、無線フレームは、下りリンクサブフレームだけで構成されてもよい。また、無線フレームは、上りリンクサブフレームだけで構成されてもよい。 A single radio frame is composed of a downlink subframe, an uplink subframe, and / or a special subframe. That is, the radio frame may be configured with only downlink subframes. Further, the radio frame may be composed of only uplink subframes.
 本実施形態の無線通信システムは、5msと10msの下りリンク‐上りリンク・スイッチポイント周期(downlink-to-uplink switch-point periodicity)をサポートする。下りリンク‐上りリンク・スイッチポイント周期が5msの場合には、無線フレーム内の両方のハーフフレームにスペシャルサブフレームが含まれる。下りリンク‐上りリンク・スイッチポイント周期が10msの場合には、無線フレーム内の最初のハーフフレームのみにスペシャルサブフレームが含まれる。 The wireless communication system of this embodiment supports 5 ms and 10 ms downlink-uplink-switch-point-periodicity. When the downlink-uplink switch point period is 5 ms, a special subframe is included in both half frames in the radio frame. When the downlink-uplink switch point period is 10 ms, a special subframe is included only in the first half frame in the radio frame.
 以下、本実施形態のスロットの構成について説明する。 Hereinafter, the configuration of the slot of this embodiment will be described.
 図3は、本実施形態のスロットの構成を示す図である。本実施形態では、OFDMシンボルに対してノーマルCP(normal Cyclic Prefix)が適用される。なお、OFDMシンボルに対して拡張CP(extended Cyclic Prefix)が適用されてもよい。スロットのそれぞれにおいて送信される物理信号または物理チャネルは、リソースグリッドによって表現される。下りリンクにおいて、リソースグリッドは、周波数方向に対する複数のサブキャリアと、時間方向に対する複数のOFDMシンボルによって定義される。上りリンクにおいて、リソースグリッドは、周波数方向に対する複数のサブキャリアと、時間方向に対する複数のSC-FDMAシンボルによって定義される。サブキャリアまたはリソースブロックの数は、セルの帯域幅に依存する。1つのスロットを構成するOFDMシンボルまたはSC-FDMAシンボルの数は、ノーマルCPの場合は7であり、拡張CPの場合は6である。リソースグリッド内のエレメントのそれぞれをリソースエレメントと称する。リソースエレメントは、サブキャリアの番号とOFDMシンボルまたはSC-FDMAシンボルの番号とを用いて識別される。 FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the slot according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, normal CP (normal Cyclic Prefix) is applied to the OFDM symbol. An extended CP (extendedexCyclic Prefix) may be applied to the OFDM symbol. The physical signal or physical channel transmitted in each of the slots is represented by a resource grid. In the downlink, the resource grid is defined by a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency direction and a plurality of OFDM symbols in the time direction. In the uplink, the resource grid is defined by a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency direction and a plurality of SC-FDMA symbols in the time direction. The number of subcarriers or resource blocks depends on the cell bandwidth. The number of OFDM symbols or SC-FDMA symbols constituting one slot is 7 for normal CP and 6 for extended CP. Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a resource element. Resource elements are identified using subcarrier numbers and OFDM symbol or SC-FDMA symbol numbers.
 リソースブロックは、ある物理チャネル(PDSCHまたはPUSCHなど)のリソースエレメントにマッピングするために用いられる。リソースブロックは、仮想リソースブロックと物理リソースブロックが定義される。ある物理チャネルは、まず仮想リソースブロックにマップされる。その後、仮想リソースブロックは、物理リソースブロックにマップされる。1つの物理リソースブロックは、時間領域において7個の連続するOFDMシンボルまたはSC-FDMAシンボルと周波数領域において12個の連続するサブキャリアとから定義される。ゆえに、1つの物理リソースブロックは(7×12)個のリソースエレメントから構成される。また、1つの物理リソースブロックは、時間領域において1つのスロットに対応し、周波数領域において180kHzに対応する。物理リソースブロックは周波数領域において0から番号が付けられる。また、同一の物理リソースブロック番号が対応する、1つのサブフレーム内の2つのリソースブロックは、物理リソースブロックペア(PRBペア、RBペア)として定義される。 The resource block is used for mapping to a resource element of a certain physical channel (PDSCH or PUSCH). As resource blocks, virtual resource blocks and physical resource blocks are defined. A physical channel is first mapped to a virtual resource block. Thereafter, the virtual resource block is mapped to the physical resource block. One physical resource block is defined by 7 consecutive OFDM symbols or SC-FDMA symbols in the time domain and 12 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. Therefore, one physical resource block is composed of (7 × 12) resource elements. One physical resource block corresponds to one slot in the time domain and corresponds to 180 kHz in the frequency domain. Physical resource blocks are numbered from 0 in the frequency domain. Further, two resource blocks in one subframe corresponding to the same physical resource block number are defined as physical resource block pairs (PRB pair, RB pair).
 以下、サブフレームのそれぞれにおいて送信される物理チャネルおよび物理信号について説明する。 Hereinafter, physical channels and physical signals transmitted in each subframe will be described.
 図4は、本実施形態の下りリンクサブフレームにおける物理チャネルおよび物理信号の配置の一例を示す図である。基地局装置3は、下りリンクサブフレームにおいて、下りリンク物理チャネル(PBCH、PCFICH、PHICH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、PDSCH)、および/または下りリンク物理信号(同期信号、下りリンク参照信号)を送信できる。なお、PBCHは無線フレーム内のサブフレーム0のみで送信される。なお、下りリンク参照信号は周波数領域および時間領域において分散するリソースエレメントに配置される。説明の簡略化のため、図4において下りリンク参照信号は図示しない。 FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the downlink subframe according to the present embodiment. The base station apparatus 3 can transmit a downlink physical channel (PBCH, PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH) and / or a downlink physical signal (synchronization signal, downlink reference signal) in the downlink subframe. PBCH is transmitted only in subframe 0 in the radio frame. Note that the downlink reference signal is arranged in resource elements distributed in the frequency domain and the time domain. For simplicity of explanation, the downlink reference signal is not shown in FIG.
 PDCCH領域において、複数のPDCCHが周波数、時間、および/または、空間多重されてもよい。EPDCCH領域において、複数のEPDCCHが周波数、時間、および/または、空間多重されてもよい。PDSCH領域において、複数のPDSCHが周波数、時間、および/または、空間多重されてもよい。PDCCH、PDSCHおよび/またはEPDCCHは周波数、時間、および/または、空間多重されてもよい。 In the PDCCH region, a plurality of PDCCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed. In the EPDCCH region, a plurality of EPDCCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed. In the PDSCH region, a plurality of PDSCHs may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed. PDCCH, PDSCH and / or EPDCCH may be frequency, time and / or spatially multiplexed.
 図5は、本実施形態の上りリンクサブフレームにおける物理チャネルおよび物理信号の配置の一例を示す図である。端末装置1は、上りリンクサブフレームにおいて、上りリンク物理チャネル(PUCCH、PUSCH、PRACH)、および上りリンク物理信号(UL-DMRS、SRS)を送信してもよい。PUCCH領域において、複数のPUCCHが周波数、時間、空間および/またはコード多重される。PUSCH領域において、複数のPUSCHが周波数、時間、空間および/またはコード多重されてもよい。PUCCHおよびPUSCHは周波数、時間、空間および/またはコード多重されてもよい。PRACHは単一のサブフレームまたは2つのサブフレームにわたって配置されてもよい。また、複数のPRACHが符号多重されてもよい。 FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the uplink subframe according to the present embodiment. The terminal device 1 may transmit an uplink physical channel (PUCCH, PUSCH, PRACH) and an uplink physical signal (UL-DMRS, SRS) in the uplink subframe. In the PUCCH region, a plurality of PUCCHs are frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed. In the PUSCH region, a plurality of PUSCHs may be frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed. PUCCH and PUSCH may be frequency, time, space and / or code multiplexed. The PRACH may be arranged over a single subframe or two subframes. A plurality of PRACHs may be code-multiplexed.
 SRSは上りリンクサブフレーム内の最後のSC-FDMAシンボルを用いて送信される。つまり、SRSは上りリンクサブフレーム内の最後のSC-FDMAシンボルに配置される。端末装置1は、単一のセルの単一のSC-FDMAシンボルにおいて、SRSと、PUCCH/PUSCH/PRACHとの同時送信を制限できる。端末装置1は、単一のセルの単一の上りリンクサブフレームにおいて、該上りリンクサブフレーム内の最後のSC-FDMAシンボルを除くSC-FDMAシンボルを用いてPUSCHおよび/またはPUCCHを送信し、該上りリンクサブフレーム内の最後のSC-FDMAシンボルを用いてSRSを送信することができる。つまり、単一のセルの単一の上りリンクサブフレームにおいて、端末装置1は、SRSと、PUSCHおよびPUCCHと、を送信することができる。なお、DMRSはPUCCHまたはPUSCHと時間多重される。説明の簡略化のため、図5においてDMRSは図示しない。 SRS is transmitted using the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. That is, the SRS is arranged in the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. The terminal device 1 can restrict simultaneous transmission of SRS and PUCCH / PUSCH / PRACH in a single SC-FDMA symbol of a single cell. In a single uplink subframe of a single cell, the terminal apparatus 1 transmits PUSCH and / or PUCCH using an SC-FDMA symbol excluding the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe, The SRS can be transmitted using the last SC-FDMA symbol in the uplink subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 can transmit SRS, PUSCH, and PUCCH in a single uplink subframe of a single cell. DMRS is time-multiplexed with PUCCH or PUSCH. For simplicity of explanation, DMRS is not shown in FIG.
 図6は、本実施形態のスペシャルサブフレームにおける物理チャネルおよび物理信号の配置の一例を示す図である。図6において、DwPTSはスペシャルサブフレーム内の1番目から10番目のSC-FDMAシンボルから構成され、GPはスペシャルサブフレーム内の11番目と12番目のSC-FDMAシンボルから構成され、UpPTSはスペシャルサブフレーム内の13番目と14番目のSC-FDMAシンボルから構成される。 FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of physical channels and physical signals in the special subframe of the present embodiment. In FIG. 6, DwPTS is composed of the first to tenth SC-FDMA symbols in the special subframe, GP is composed of the eleventh and twelfth SC-FDMA symbols in the special subframe, and UpPTS is the special subframe. It consists of the 13th and 14th SC-FDMA symbols in the frame.
 基地局装置3は、スペシャルサブフレームのDwPTSにおいて、PCFICH、PHICH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、PDSCH、同期信号、および、下りリンク参照信号を送信してもよい。基地局装置3は、スペシャルサブフレームのDwPTSにおいて、PBCHの送信を制限できる。端末装置1は、スペシャルサブフレームのUpPTSにおいて、PRACH、およびSRSを送信してもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、スペシャルサブフレームのUpPTSにおいて、PUCCH、PUSCH、およびDMRSの送信を制限できる。 The base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PCFICH, PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, synchronization signal, and downlink reference signal in the DwPTS of the special subframe. The base station apparatus 3 can restrict PBCH transmission in the DwPTS of the special subframe. The terminal device 1 may transmit PRACH and SRS in the UpPTS of the special subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 can restrict transmission of PUCCH, PUSCH, and DMRS in the UpPTS of the special subframe.
 図7は、本実施形態の端末装置1の構成を示す概略ブロック図である。図示するように、端末装置1は、上位層処理部101、制御部103、受信部105、送信部107、および送受信アンテナ109を含んで構成される。また、上位層処理部101は、無線リソース制御部1011、サブフレーム設定部1013、スケジューリング情報解釈部1015、および、チャネル状態情報(CSI)報告制御部1017を含んで構成される。また、受信部105は、復号化部1051、復調部1053、多重分離部1055、無線受信部1057、およびチャネル測定部1059を含んで構成される。また、送信部107は、符号化部1071、変調部1073、多重部1075、無線送信部1077、および上りリンク参照信号生成部1079を含んで構成される。 FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal device 1 of the present embodiment. As illustrated, the terminal device 1 includes an upper layer processing unit 101, a control unit 103, a receiving unit 105, a transmitting unit 107, and a transmission / reception antenna 109. The higher layer processing unit 101 includes a radio resource control unit 1011, a subframe setting unit 1013, a scheduling information interpretation unit 1015, and a channel state information (CSI) report control unit 1017. The reception unit 105 includes a decoding unit 1051, a demodulation unit 1053, a demultiplexing unit 1055, a radio reception unit 1057, and a channel measurement unit 1059. The transmission unit 107 includes an encoding unit 1071, a modulation unit 1073, a multiplexing unit 1075, a radio transmission unit 1077, and an uplink reference signal generation unit 1079.
 上位層処理部101は、ユーザの操作等により生成された上りリンクデータ(トランスポートブロック)を、送信部107に出力する。また、上位層処理部101は、媒体アクセス制御(MAC: Medium Access Control)層、パケットデータ統合プロトコル(Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP)層、無線リンク制御(Radio Link Control: RLC)層、無線リソース制御(Radio Resource Control: RRC)層の処理を行なう。上位層処理部101は、キャリアアグリゲーションを行う場合、セルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションを行うために物理層の制御を行う機能及び上りリンクの送信タイミングを管理するために物理層の制御を行う機能を備えている。上位層処理部101は、受信部105で計算する測定の指示、および、受信部105で計算された測定結果を報告するか否かを判断する機能を備えている。 The upper layer processing unit 101 outputs uplink data (transport block) generated by a user operation or the like to the transmission unit 107. The upper layer processing unit 101 includes a medium access control (MAC: Medium Access Control) layer, a packet data integration protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP) layer, a radio link control (Radio Link Control: RLC) layer, and radio resource control. Process the (Radio Resource Control: RRC) layer. When performing carrier aggregation, the upper layer processing unit 101 has a function of controlling the physical layer to perform cell activation / deactivation and a function of controlling the physical layer to manage uplink transmission timing. I have. The upper layer processing unit 101 has a function of determining whether to report a measurement instruction calculated by the receiving unit 105 and a measurement result calculated by the receiving unit 105.
 上位層処理部101が備える無線リソース制御部1011は、自装置の各種設定情報の管理をする。また、無線リソース制御部1011は、上りリンクの各チャネルに配置される情報を生成し、送信部107に出力する。 The radio resource control unit 1011 included in the upper layer processing unit 101 manages various setting information of the own device. Also, the radio resource control unit 1011 generates information arranged in each uplink channel and outputs the information to the transmission unit 107.
 上位層処理部101が備えるサブフレーム設定部1013は、基地局装置3により設定される情報に基づいて、基地局装置3および/または基地局装置3とは異なる基地局装置(例えば、基地局装置3A)におけるサブフレーム設定を管理する。例えば、サブフレーム設定は、サブフレームに対する上りリンクまたは下りリンクの設定である。サブフレーム設定は、サブフレームパターン設定(Subframe pattern configuration)、上りリンク-下りリンク設定(Uplink-downlink configuration)、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定(Uplink reference configuration)、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定(Downlink reference configuration)、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定(transmission direction configuration)を含む。サブフレーム設定部1013は、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定をセットする。また、サブフレーム設定部1013は、少なくとも2つのサブフレームセットをセットできる。なお、サブフレームパターン設定は、EPDCCHサブフレーム設定を含む。なお、サブフレーム設定部1013は、端末サブフレーム設定部とも呼称される。 The subframe setting unit 1013 included in the higher layer processing unit 101 is based on information set by the base station device 3, and is different from the base station device 3 and / or the base station device 3 (for example, the base station device). The subframe setting in 3A) is managed. For example, the subframe setting is an uplink or downlink setting for the subframe. Subframe configuration includes subframe pattern configuration (Subframe pattern configuration), uplink-downlink configuration (Uplink-downlink configuration), uplink reference UL-DL configuration (Uplink reference configuration), and downlink reference UL-DL configuration (Downlink). reference configuration) and / or transmission direction UL-DL configuration (transmission direction configuration). The subframe setting unit 1013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL-DL setting. set. Also, the subframe setting unit 1013 can set at least two subframe sets. The subframe pattern setting includes EPDCCH subframe setting. The subframe setting unit 1013 is also referred to as a terminal subframe setting unit.
 上位層処理部101が備えるスケジューリング情報解釈部1015は、受信部105を介して受信したDCIフォーマット(スケジューリング情報)の解釈をし、前記DCIフォーマットを解釈した結果に基づいて、受信部105および送信部107の制御を行なうために制御情報を生成し、制御部103に出力する。 The scheduling information interpretation unit 1015 included in the upper layer processing unit 101 interprets the DCI format (scheduling information) received via the reception unit 105, and based on the interpretation result of the DCI format, the reception unit 105 and the transmission unit Control information is generated in order to perform the control of 107 and output to the control unit 103.
 スケジューリング情報解釈部1015は、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定に基づいて、送信処理および受信処理を行うタイミングを決定する。 The scheduling information interpretation unit 1015 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL-DL setting. Based on this, the timing for performing the transmission process and the reception process is determined.
 CSI報告制御部1017は、CSI参照リソースを特定する。CSI報告制御部1017は、チャネル測定部1059に、CSI参照リソースに関連するCQIを導き出すよう指示する。CSI報告制御部1017は、送信部107に、CQIを送信するよう指示をする。CSI報告制御部1017は、チャネル測定部1059がCQIを算出する際に用いる設定をセットする。 The CSI report control unit 1017 specifies a CSI reference resource. The CSI report control unit 1017 instructs the channel measurement unit 1059 to derive the CQI related to the CSI reference resource. The CSI report control unit 1017 instructs the transmission unit 107 to transmit CQI. The CSI report control unit 1017 sets a setting used when the channel measurement unit 1059 calculates CQI.
 制御部103は、上位層処理部101からの制御情報に基づいて、受信部105および送信部107の制御を行なう制御信号を生成する。制御部103は、生成した制御信号を受信部105および送信部107に出力して、受信部105および送信部107の制御を行なう。 The control unit 103 generates a control signal for controlling the receiving unit 105 and the transmitting unit 107 based on the control information from the higher layer processing unit 101. Control unit 103 outputs the generated control signal to receiving unit 105 and transmitting unit 107 to control receiving unit 105 and transmitting unit 107.
 受信部105は、制御部103から入力された制御信号に基づいて、送受信アンテナ109が基地局装置3から受信した受信信号を、分離、復調、復号する。受信部105は、復号した情報を上位層処理部101に出力する。 The reception unit 105 separates, demodulates, and decodes the reception signal received by the transmission / reception antenna 109 from the base station apparatus 3 based on the control signal input from the control unit 103. The receiving unit 105 outputs the decoded information to the upper layer processing unit 101.
 無線受信部1057は、送受信アンテナ109が受信した下りリンクの信号を、中間周波数に変換し(ダウンコンバート: down convert)、不要な周波数成分を除去し、信号レベルが適切に維持されるように増幅レベルを制御し、受信した信号の同相成分および直交成分に基づいて、直交復調し、直交復調されたアナログ信号をディジタル信号に変換する。無線受信部1057は、変換したディジタル信号からガードインターバル(Guard Interval: GI)に相当する部分を除去し、ガードインターバルを除去した信号に対して高速フーリエ変換(Fast Fourier Transform: FFT)を行ない、周波数領域の信号を抽出する。 The radio reception unit 1057 converts the downlink signal received by the transmission / reception antenna 109 into an intermediate frequency (down-conversion: down convert), removes unnecessary frequency components, and amplifies the signal level so that the signal level is appropriately maintained. The level is controlled, quadrature demodulation is performed based on the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the received signal, and the analog signal that has been demodulated is converted into a digital signal. The radio reception unit 1057 removes a portion corresponding to a guard interval (Guard Interval: GI) from the converted digital signal, performs a fast Fourier transform (FFT Fourier Transform: FFT) on the signal from which the guard interval is removed, Extract the region signal.
 多重分離部1055は、抽出した信号から、PHICH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、PDSCH、および/または下りリンク参照信号を、それぞれ分離する。また、多重分離部1055は、チャネル測定部1059から入力された伝搬路の推定値から、PHICH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、および/またはPDSCHの伝搬路の補償を行なう。また、多重分離部1055は、分離した下りリンク参照信号をチャネル測定部1059に出力する。 The demultiplexer 1055 separates the PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, and / or downlink reference signal from the extracted signal. Further, demultiplexing section 1055 compensates the propagation path of PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and / or PDSCH from the estimated value of the propagation path input from channel measurement section 1059. Also, the demultiplexing unit 1055 outputs the demultiplexed downlink reference signal to the channel measurement unit 1059.
 復調部1053は、PHICHに対して対応する符号を乗算して合成し、合成した信号に対してBPSK(Binary Phase Shift Keying)変調方式の復調を行ない、復号化部1051へ出力する。復号化部1051は、自装置宛てのPHICHを復号し、復号したHARQインディケータを上位層処理部101に出力する。復調部1053は、PDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHに対して、QPSK変調方式の復調を行ない、復号化部1051へ出力する。復号化部1051は、PDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHの復号を試み、復号に成功した場合、復号した下りリンク制御情報と下りリンク制御情報が対応するRNTIとを上位層処理部101に出力する。 The demodulating unit 1053 multiplies the PHICH by a corresponding code and synthesizes the signal, demodulates the synthesized signal using a BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Shift Keying) modulation method, and outputs the demodulated signal to the decoding unit 1051. Decoding section 1051 decodes the PHICH addressed to the own apparatus, and outputs the decoded HARQ indicator to higher layer processing section 101. Demodulation section 1053 performs QPSK modulation demodulation on PDCCH and / or EPDCCH, and outputs the result to decoding section 1051. Decoding section 1051 attempts to decode PDCCH and / or EPDCCH, and outputs the decoded downlink control information and the RNTI corresponding to the downlink control information to higher layer processing section 101 when the decoding is successful.
 復調部1053は、PDSCHに対して、QPSK(Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)、16QAM(Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)、64QAM等の下りリンクグラントで通知された変調方式の復調を行ない、復号化部1051へ出力する。復号化部1051は、下りリンク制御情報で通知された符号化率に関する情報に基づいて復号を行ない、復号した下りリンクデータ(トランスポートブロック)を上位層処理部101へ出力する。 The demodulation unit 1053 demodulates the modulation scheme notified by the downlink grant such as QPSK (Quadrature Shift Keying), 16QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM, and the like to the decoding unit 1051. Decoding section 1051 performs decoding based on the information regarding the coding rate notified by the downlink control information, and outputs the decoded downlink data (transport block) to higher layer processing section 101.
 チャネル測定部1059は、多重分離部1055から入力された下りリンク参照信号から下りリンクのパスロスやチャネルの状態を測定し、測定したパスロスやチャネルの状態を上位層処理部101へ出力する。また、チャネル測定部1059は、下りリンク参照信号から下りリンクの伝搬路の推定値を算出し、多重分離部1055へ出力する。チャネル測定部1059は、CQIの算出のために、チャネル測定、および/または、干渉測定を行なう。チャネル測定部1059は、多重分離部1055から入力された下りリンク参照信号から上位層へ通知する測定を行う。チャネル測定部1059は、RSRPおよびRSRQの計算を行い、上位層処理部101へ出力する。 The channel measurement unit 1059 measures the downlink path loss and channel state from the downlink reference signal input from the demultiplexing unit 1055, and outputs the measured path loss and channel state to the upper layer processing unit 101. Also, channel measurement section 1059 calculates an estimated value of the downlink propagation path from the downlink reference signal, and outputs it to demultiplexing section 1055. The channel measurement unit 1059 performs channel measurement and / or interference measurement in order to calculate CQI. The channel measurement unit 1059 performs measurement notified from the downlink reference signal input from the demultiplexing unit 1055 to the upper layer. Channel measurement section 1059 calculates RSRP and RSRQ and outputs the result to upper layer processing section 101.
 送信部107は、制御部103から入力された制御信号に従って、上りリンク参照信号を生成し、上位層処理部101から入力された上りリンクデータ(トランスポートブロック)を符号化および変調し、PUCCH、PUSCH、および生成した上りリンク参照信号を多重し、送受信アンテナ109を介して基地局装置3に送信する。 The transmission unit 107 generates an uplink reference signal in accordance with the control signal input from the control unit 103, encodes and modulates the uplink data (transport block) input from the higher layer processing unit 101, PUCCH, The PUSCH and the generated uplink reference signal are multiplexed and transmitted to the base station apparatus 3 via the transmission / reception antenna 109.
 符号化部1071は、上位層処理部101から入力された上りリンク制御情報を畳込み符号化、ブロック符号化等の符号化を行なう。また、符号化部1071は、PUSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる情報に基づいてターボ符号化を行なう。 The encoding unit 1071 performs encoding such as convolutional encoding and block encoding on the uplink control information input from the higher layer processing unit 101. The encoding unit 1071 performs turbo encoding based on information used for PUSCH scheduling.
 変調部1073は、符号化部1071から入力された符号化ビットをBPSK、QPSK、16QAM、64QAM等の下りリンク制御情報で通知された変調方式または、チャネル毎に予め定められた変調方式で変調する。変調部1073は、PUSCHのスケジューリングに用いられる情報に基づき、空間多重されるデータの系列の数を決定し、MIMO SM(Multiple Input Multiple Output Spatial Multiplexing)を用いることにより同一のPUSCHで送信される複数の上りリンクデータを、複数の系列にマッピングし、この系列に対してプレコーディング(precoding)を行なう。 The modulation unit 1073 modulates the coded bits input from the coding unit 1071 using a modulation method notified by downlink control information such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, or a modulation method predetermined for each channel. . Modulation section 1073 determines the number of spatially multiplexed data sequences based on information used for PUSCH scheduling, and uses MIMO SM (Multiple Input Multiple Output Spatial Multiplexing) to transmit a plurality of data transmitted on the same PUSCH. Are mapped to a plurality of sequences, and precoding is performed on the sequences.
 上りリンク参照信号生成部1079は、基地局装置3を識別するための物理層セル識別子(physical cell identity: PCI、Cell IDなどと称する。)、上りリンク参照信号を配置する帯域幅、上りリンクグラントで通知されたサイクリックシフト、DMRSシーケンスの生成に対するパラメータの値などを基に、予め定められた規則(式)で求まる系列を生成する。多重部1075は、制御部103から入力された制御信号に従って、PUSCHの変調シンボルを並列に並び替えてから離散フーリエ変換(Discrete Fourier Transform: DFT)する。また、多重部1075は、PUCCHとPUSCHの信号と生成した上りリンク参照信号を送信アンテナポート毎に多重する。つまり、多重部1075は、PUCCHとPUSCHの信号と生成した上りリンク参照信号を送信アンテナポート毎にリソースエレメントに配置する。 The uplink reference signal generation unit 1079 is a physical layer cell identifier for identifying the base station device 3 (referred to as physical cell identity: PCI, Cell ID, etc.), a bandwidth for arranging the uplink reference signal, and an uplink grant. A sequence determined by a predetermined rule (formula) is generated on the basis of the cyclic shift and the parameter value for generating the DMRS sequence notified in (1). The multiplexing unit 1075 rearranges the PUSCH modulation symbols in parallel according to the control signal input from the control unit 103, and then performs a discrete Fourier transform (Discrete-Fourier-Transform: DFT). Also, multiplexing section 1075 multiplexes the PUCCH and PUSCH signals and the generated uplink reference signal for each transmission antenna port. That is, multiplexing section 1075 arranges the PUCCH and PUSCH signals and the generated uplink reference signal in the resource element for each transmission antenna port.
 無線送信部1077は、多重された信号を逆高速フーリエ変換(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform: IFFT)して、SC-FDMA方式の変調を行い、SC-FDMA変調されたSC-FDMAシンボルにガードインターバルを付加し、ベースバンドのディジタル信号を生成し、ベースバンドのディジタル信号をアナログ信号に変換し、アナログ信号から中間周波数の同相成分および直交成分を生成し、中間周波数帯域に対する余分な周波数成分を除去し、中間周波数の信号を高周波数の信号に変換(アップコンバート: up convert)し、余分な周波数成分を除去し、電力増幅し、送受信アンテナ109に出力して送信する。 The radio transmission unit 1077 performs inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) on the multiplexed signal, performs SC-FDMA modulation, and adds a guard interval to the SC-FDMA-modulated SC-FDMA symbol. Generating a baseband digital signal, converting the baseband digital signal to an analog signal, generating an in-phase component and a quadrature component of an intermediate frequency from the analog signal, removing an extra frequency component for the intermediate frequency band, The intermediate frequency signal is converted to a high frequency signal (up-conversion: up convert), an extra frequency component is removed, the power is amplified, and output to the transmission / reception antenna 109 for transmission.
 図8は、本実施形態の基地局装置3の構成を示す概略ブロック図である。図示するように、基地局装置3は、上位層処理部301、制御部303、受信部305、送信部307、および、送受信アンテナ309、を含んで構成される。また、上位層処理部301は、無線リソース制御部3011、サブフレーム設定部3013、スケジューリング部3015、および、CSI報告制御部3017を含んで構成される。また、受信部305は、復号化部3051、復調部3053、多重分離部3055、無線受信部3057とチャネル測定部3059を含んで構成される。また、送信部307は、符号化部3071、変調部3073、多重部3075、無線送信部3077、および、下りリンク参照信号生成部3079を含んで構成される。 FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram showing the configuration of the base station apparatus 3 of the present embodiment. As illustrated, the base station apparatus 3 includes an upper layer processing unit 301, a control unit 303, a reception unit 305, a transmission unit 307, and a transmission / reception antenna 309. The higher layer processing unit 301 includes a radio resource control unit 3011, a subframe setting unit 3013, a scheduling unit 3015, and a CSI report control unit 3017. The reception unit 305 includes a decoding unit 3051, a demodulation unit 3053, a demultiplexing unit 3055, a wireless reception unit 3057, and a channel measurement unit 3059. The transmission unit 307 includes an encoding unit 3071, a modulation unit 3073, a multiplexing unit 3075, a radio transmission unit 3077, and a downlink reference signal generation unit 3079.
 上位層処理部301は、媒体アクセス制御(MAC: Medium Access Control)層、パケットデータ統合プロトコル(Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP)層、無線リンク制御(Radio Link Control: RLC)層、無線リソース制御(Radio Resource Control: RRC)層の処理を行なう。また、上位層処理部301は、受信部305、および送信部307の制御を行なうために制御情報を生成し、制御部303に出力する。また、上位層処理部301は、報告された測定結果を取得する機能を備えている。 The upper layer processing unit 301 includes a medium access control (MAC: Medium Access Control) layer, a packet data integration protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol: PDCP) layer, a radio link control (Radio Link Control: RLC) layer, a radio resource control (Radio). Resource (Control: RRC) layer processing. Further, upper layer processing section 301 generates control information for controlling receiving section 305 and transmitting section 307 and outputs the control information to control section 303. The upper layer processing unit 301 has a function of acquiring the reported measurement result.
 上位層処理部301が備える無線リソース制御部3011は、下りリンクのPDSCHに配置される下りリンクデータ(トランスポートブロック)、システムインフォメーション、RRCメッセージ、MAC CE(Control Element)などを生成し、又は上位ノードから取得し、送信部307に出力する。また、無線リソース制御部3011は、端末装置1各々の各種設定情報の管理をする。 The radio resource control unit 3011 included in the higher layer processing unit 301 generates downlink data (transport block), system information, RRC message, MAC CE (Control Element), etc. arranged in the downlink PDSCH, or higher level. Obtained from the node and output to the transmission unit 307. The radio resource control unit 3011 manages various setting information of each terminal device 1.
 上位層処理部301が備えるサブフレーム設定部3013は、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定の管理を、端末装置1のそれぞれに対して行なう。サブフレーム設定部3013は、端末装置1のそれぞれに対して、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定をセットする。サブフレーム設定部3013は、サブフレーム設定に関する情報を端末装置1に送信する。なお、サブフレーム設定部3013は、基地局サブフレーム設定部とも呼称される。 The subframe setting unit 3013 included in the higher layer processing unit 301 includes subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or Management of the transmission direction UL-DL setting is performed for each terminal device 1. The subframe setting unit 3013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or for each terminal apparatus 1. Alternatively, the transmission direction UL-DL setting is set. The subframe setting unit 3013 transmits information related to subframe setting to the terminal device 1. The subframe setting unit 3013 is also referred to as a base station subframe setting unit.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対する、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定を決定してもよい。また、基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対する、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定を上位ノードから指示されてもよい。 The base station apparatus 3 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission direction UL for the terminal apparatus 1. -DL settings may be determined. Also, the base station apparatus 3 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink reference UL-DL setting, and / or transmission to the terminal apparatus 1. The direction UL-DL setting may be instructed from an upper node.
 例えば、サブフレーム設定部3013は、上りリンクのトラフィック量および下りリンクのトラフィック量に基づいて、サブフレーム設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定を決定してもよい。 For example, the subframe setting unit 3013 performs subframe setting, subframe pattern setting, uplink-downlink setting, uplink reference UL-DL setting, downlink based on the uplink traffic volume and the downlink traffic volume. A reference UL-DL configuration and / or a transmission direction UL-DL configuration may be determined.
 サブフレーム設定部3013は、少なくとも2つのサブフレームセットの管理を行なうことができる。サブフレーム設定部3013は、端末装置1のそれぞれに対して、少なくとも2つのサブフレームセットをセットしてもよい。サブフレーム設定部3013は、サービングセルのそれぞれに対して、少なくとも2つのサブフレームセットをセットしてもよい。サブフレーム設定部3013は、CSIプロセスのそれぞれに対して、少なくとも2つのサブフレームセットをセットしてもよい。サブフレーム設定部3013は、少なくとも2つのサブフレームセットを示す情報を、送信部307を介して、端末装置1に送信できる。 The subframe setting unit 3013 can manage at least two subframe sets. The subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the terminal devices 1. The subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the serving cells. The subframe setting unit 3013 may set at least two subframe sets for each of the CSI processes. The subframe setting unit 3013 can transmit information indicating at least two subframe sets to the terminal device 1 via the transmission unit 307.
 上位層処理部301が備えるスケジューリング部3015は、受信したチャネル状態情報およびチャネル測定部3059から入力された伝搬路の推定値やチャネルの品質などから、物理チャネル(PDSCHおよびPUSCH)を割り当てる周波数およびサブフレーム、物理チャネル(PDSCHおよびPUSCH)の符号化率および変調方式および送信電力などを決定する。スケジューリング部3015は、フレキシブルサブフレームにおいて下りリンク物理チャネルおよび/または下りリンク物理信号をスケジュールするか、上りリンク物理チャネルおよび/または上りリンク物理信号をスケジュールするかを決定する。スケジューリング部3015は、スケジューリング結果に基づき、受信部305、および送信部307の制御を行なうために制御情報(例えば、DCIフォーマット)を生成し、制御部303に出力する。 The scheduling unit 3015 included in the upper layer processing unit 301 uses the received channel state information and the channel allocation information, the channel estimation value, the channel quality, the channel quality, and the like to assign physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH). The coding rate and modulation scheme and transmission power of the frame and physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH) are determined. The scheduling unit 3015 determines whether to schedule a downlink physical channel and / or downlink physical signal or schedule an uplink physical channel and / or uplink physical signal in a flexible subframe. Based on the scheduling result, scheduling section 3015 generates control information (for example, DCI format) for controlling receiving section 305 and transmitting section 307 and outputs the control information to control section 303.
 スケジューリング部3015は、スケジューリング結果に基づき、物理チャネル(PDSCHおよびPUSCH)のスケジューリングに用いられる情報を生成する。スケジューリング部3015は、UL-DL設定、サブフレームパターン設定、上りリンク-下りリンク設定、上りリンク参照UL-DL設定、下りリンク参照UL-DL設定、および/または、送信方向UL-DL設定に基づいて、送信処理および受信処理を行うタイミング(サブフレーム)を決定する。 The scheduling unit 3015 generates information used for scheduling of physical channels (PDSCH and PUSCH) based on the scheduling result. The scheduling unit 3015 is based on UL-DL configuration, subframe pattern configuration, uplink-downlink configuration, uplink reference UL-DL configuration, downlink reference UL-DL configuration, and / or transmission direction UL-DL configuration. Thus, the timing (subframe) for performing the transmission process and the reception process is determined.
 上位層処理部301が備えるCSI報告制御部3017は、端末装置1のCSI報告を制御する。CSI報告制御部3017は、端末装置1がCSI参照リソースにおいてCQIを導き出すために想定する、各種設定を示す情報を、送信部307を介して、端末装置1に送信する。 The CSI report control unit 3017 provided in the higher layer processing unit 301 controls the CSI report of the terminal device 1. The CSI report control unit 3017 transmits information indicating various settings assumed by the terminal device 1 to derive the CQI in the CSI reference resource to the terminal device 1 via the transmission unit 307.
 制御部303は、上位層処理部301からの制御情報に基づいて、受信部305、および送信部307の制御を行なう制御信号を生成する。制御部303は、生成した制御信号を受信部305、および送信部307に出力して受信部305、および送信部307の制御を行なう。 The control unit 303 generates a control signal for controlling the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307 based on the control information from the higher layer processing unit 301. The control unit 303 outputs the generated control signal to the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307 and controls the reception unit 305 and the transmission unit 307.
 受信部305は、制御部303から入力された制御信号に従って、送受信アンテナ309を介して端末装置1から受信した受信信号を分離、復調、復号し、復号した情報を上位層処理部301に出力する。無線受信部3057は、送受信アンテナ309を介して受信された上りリンクの信号を、中間周波数に変換し(ダウンコンバート: down convert)、不要な周波数成分を除去し、信号レベルが適切に維持されるように増幅レベルを制御し、受信された信号の同相成分および直交成分に基づいて、直交復調し、直交復調されたアナログ信号をディジタル信号に変換する。 The receiving unit 305 separates, demodulates and decodes the received signal received from the terminal device 1 via the transmission / reception antenna 309 according to the control signal input from the control unit 303, and outputs the decoded information to the higher layer processing unit 301. . The radio reception unit 3057 converts an uplink signal received via the transmission / reception antenna 309 into an intermediate frequency (down-conversion: down convert), removes unnecessary frequency components, and appropriately maintains the signal level. In this way, the amplification level is controlled, and based on the in-phase and quadrature components of the received signal, quadrature demodulation is performed, and the quadrature demodulated analog signal is converted into a digital signal.
 無線受信部3057は、変換したディジタル信号からガードインターバル(Guard Interval: GI)に相当する部分を除去する。無線受信部3057は、ガードインターバルを除去した信号に対して高速フーリエ変換(Fast Fourier Transform: FFT)を行い、周波数領域の信号を抽出し多重分離部3055に出力する。 The wireless receiver 3057 removes a portion corresponding to a guard interval (Guard Interval: GI) from the converted digital signal. The radio reception unit 3057 performs fast Fourier transform (FFT) on the signal from which the guard interval is removed, extracts a frequency domain signal, and outputs the signal to the demultiplexing unit 3055.
 多重分離部1055は、無線受信部3057から入力された信号をPUCCH、PUSCH、上りリンク参照信号などの信号に分離する。なお、この分離は、予め基地局装置3が無線リソース制御部3011で決定し、各端末装置1に通知した上りリンクグラントに含まれる無線リソースの割り当て情報に基づいて行なわれる。また、多重分離部3055は、チャネル測定部3059から入力された伝搬路の推定値から、PUCCHとPUSCHの伝搬路の補償を行なう。また、多重分離部3055は、分離した上りリンク参照信号をチャネル測定部3059に出力する。 The demultiplexing unit 1055 demultiplexes the signal input from the radio receiving unit 3057 into signals such as PUCCH, PUSCH, and uplink reference signal. This separation is performed based on radio resource allocation information included in the uplink grant that is determined in advance by the base station apparatus 3 using the radio resource control unit 3011 and notified to each terminal apparatus 1. In addition, demultiplexing section 3055 compensates for the propagation paths of PUCCH and PUSCH from the propagation path estimation value input from channel measurement section 3059. Further, the demultiplexing unit 3055 outputs the separated uplink reference signal to the channel measurement unit 3059.
 復調部3053は、PUSCHを逆離散フーリエ変換(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform: IDFT)し、変調シンボルを取得し、PUCCHとPUSCHの変調シンボルそれぞれに対して、BPSK(Binary Phase Shift Keying)、QPSK、16QAM、64QAM等の予め定められた、または自装置が端末装置1各々に上りリンクグラントで予め通知した変調方式を用いて受信信号の復調を行なう。復調部3053は、端末装置1各々に上りリンクグラントで予め通知した空間多重される系列の数と、この系列に対して行なうプリコーディングを指示する情報に基づいて、MIMO SMを用いることにより同一のPUSCHで送信された複数の上りリンクデータの変調シンボルを分離する。 The demodulator 3053 performs inverse discrete Fourier transform (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform: IDFT) on the PUSCH, acquires modulation symbols, and performs BPSK (Binary Shift Keying), QPSK, 16QAM, The received signal is demodulated using a predetermined modulation scheme such as 64QAM, or the modulation method notified by the own device to each terminal device 1 in advance using an uplink grant. The demodulator 3053 uses the MIMO SM based on the number of spatially multiplexed sequences notified in advance to each terminal device 1 using an uplink grant and information indicating precoding performed on the sequences. A plurality of uplink data modulation symbols transmitted on the PUSCH are separated.
 復号化部3051は、復調されたPUCCHとPUSCHの符号化ビットを、予め定められた符号化方式の、予め定められた、又は自装置が端末装置1に上りリンクグラントで予め通知した符号化率で復号を行ない、復号した上りリンクデータと、上りリンク制御情報を上位層処理部101へ出力する。PUSCHが再送信の場合は、復号化部3051は、上位層処理部301から入力されるHARQバッファに保持している符号化ビットと、復調された符号化ビットを用いて復号を行なう。チャネル測定部309は、多重分離部3055から入力された上りリンク参照信号から伝搬路の推定値、チャネルの品質などを測定し、多重分離部3055および上位層処理部301に出力する。 The decoding unit 3051 encodes the demodulated PUCCH and PUSCH encoding bits in a predetermined encoding scheme, or a coding rate at which the device itself notifies the terminal device 1 in advance with an uplink grant. And the decoded uplink data and the uplink control information are output to the upper layer processing unit 101. When PUSCH is retransmitted, decoding section 3051 performs decoding using the encoded bits held in the HARQ buffer input from higher layer processing section 301 and the demodulated encoded bits. Channel measurement section 309 measures an estimated channel value, channel quality, and the like from the uplink reference signal input from demultiplexing section 3055 and outputs the result to demultiplexing section 3055 and higher layer processing section 301.
 送信部307は、制御部303から入力された制御信号に従って、下りリンク参照信号を生成し、上位層処理部301から入力されたHARQインディケータ、下りリンク制御情報、下りリンクデータを符号化、および変調し、PHICH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、PDSCH、および下りリンク参照信号を多重して、送受信アンテナ309を介して端末装置1に信号を送信する。 The transmission unit 307 generates a downlink reference signal according to the control signal input from the control unit 303, encodes and modulates the HARQ indicator, downlink control information, and downlink data input from the higher layer processing unit 301. Then, the PHICH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, PDSCH, and downlink reference signal are multiplexed, and the signal is transmitted to the terminal device 1 via the transmission / reception antenna 309.
 符号化部3071は、上位層処理部301から入力されたHARQインディケータ、下りリンク制御情報、および下りリンクデータを、ブロック符号化、畳込み符号化、ターボ符号化等の予め定められた符号化方式を用いて符号化を行なう、または無線リソース制御部3011が決定した符号化方式を用いて符号化を行なう。変調部3073は、符号化部3071から入力された符号化ビットをBPSK、QPSK、16QAM、64QAM等の予め定められた、または無線リソース制御部3011が決定した変調方式で変調する。 The encoding unit 3071 is a predetermined encoding method such as block encoding, convolutional encoding, turbo encoding, and the like for the HARQ indicator, downlink control information, and downlink data input from the higher layer processing unit 301 Or is encoded using the encoding method determined by the radio resource control unit 3011. The modulation unit 3073 modulates the coded bits input from the coding unit 3071 with a modulation scheme determined in advance by the radio resource control unit 3011 such as BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
 下りリンク参照信号生成部3079は、基地局装置3を識別するための物理レイヤセル識別子(PCI)などを基に予め定められた規則で求まる、端末装置1が既知の系列を下りリンク参照信号として生成する。多重部3075は、変調された各チャネルの変調シンボルと生成された下りリンク参照信号を多重する。つまり、多重部3075は、変調された各チャネルの変調シンボルと生成された下りリンク参照信号をリソースエレメントに配置する。 The downlink reference signal generation unit 3079 generates a known sequence as a downlink reference signal, which is obtained by a predetermined rule based on a physical layer cell identifier (PCI) for identifying the base station apparatus 3 and the like. To do. The multiplexing unit 3075 multiplexes the modulated modulation symbol of each channel and the generated downlink reference signal. That is, multiplexing section 3075 arranges the modulated modulation symbol of each channel and the generated downlink reference signal in the resource element.
 無線送信部3077は、多重された変調シンボルなどを逆高速フーリエ変換(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform: IFFT)して、OFDM方式の変調を行い、OFDM変調されたOFDMシンボルにガードインターバルを付加し、ベースバンドのディジタル信号を生成し、ベースバンドのディジタル信号をアナログ信号に変換し、アナログ信号から中間周波数の同相成分および直交成分を生成し、中間周波数帯域に対する余分な周波数成分を除去し、中間周波数の信号を高周波数の信号に変換(アップコンバート: up convert)し、余分な周波数成分を除去し、電力増幅し、送受信アンテナ309に出力して送信する。 The wireless transmission unit 3077 performs inverse fast Fourier transform (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform: IFFT) on the multiplexed modulation symbols and the like, performs modulation in the OFDM scheme, adds a guard interval to the OFDM symbol that has been OFDM-modulated, and baseband The baseband digital signal is converted to an analog signal, the in-phase and quadrature components of the intermediate frequency are generated from the analog signal, the extra frequency components for the intermediate frequency band are removed, and the intermediate-frequency signal Is converted to a high-frequency signal (up-conversion: up convert), an extra frequency component is removed, power is amplified, and output to the transmission / reception antenna 309 for transmission.
 ここで、PDCCHまたはEPDCCHは、下りリンク制御情報(DCI)を端末装置へ通知(指定)するために使用される。例えば、下りリンク制御情報には、PDSCHのリソース割り当てに関する情報、MCS(Modulation and Coding scheme)に関する情報、スクランブリングアイデンティティ(スクランブリング識別子とも呼称される)に関する情報、参照信号系列アイデンティティ(ベースシーケンスアイデンティティ、ベースシーケンス識別子、ベースシーケンスインデックスとも呼称される)に関する情報などが含まれる。 Here, PDCCH or EPDCCH is used for notifying (designating) downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device. For example, in the downlink control information, information on PDSCH resource allocation, information on MCS (Modulation and coding Coding scheme), information on scrambling identity (also called scrambling identifier), reference signal sequence identity (base sequence identity, Information on a base sequence identifier and a base sequence index).
 以下では、小セルについて説明する。 In the following, small cells will be described.
 小セルとは、マクロセルに比べて低送信電力の基地局装置3によって構成される、カバレッジが小さなセルの総称である。小セルは、カバレッジが小さく設定することが可能となるため、密に配置して運用することができる。小セルの基地局装置3は、マクロセルの基地局装置と異なる場所に配置される。密に配置される小セル同士は同期され、小セルクラスター(Small cell Cluster)として構成することができる。小セルクラスター内の小セル間は、バックホール(光ファイバー、X2インターフェース、S1インターフェース)で接続され、小セルクラスター内の小セルでは、eICIC(enhanced Inter-Cell Interference Coordination)、FeICIC(Further enhanced Inter-Cell Interference Coordination)、CoMP(Coordinated Multi-Point transmission/reception)などの干渉抑制技術を適用することができる。小セルはマクロセルと異周波数帯で運用されてもよいし、同周波数帯で運用されてもよい。特に、伝搬路減衰(パスロス)の観点から、小セルをマクロセルに比べて高周波数帯で運用することで、より小カバレッジで構成することが容易である。 “Small cell” is a generic term for a cell having a small coverage, which is configured by the base station apparatus 3 having a lower transmission power than a macro cell. Since small cells can be set to have a small coverage, they can be operated densely. The small cell base station apparatus 3 is arranged at a different location from the macro cell base station apparatus. The closely arranged small cells are synchronized and can be configured as a small cell cluster. The small cells in the small cell cluster are connected by backhaul (optical fiber, X2 interface, S1 interface). In the small cells in the small cell cluster, eICIC (enhanced Inter-Cell Interference Coordination), FeICIC (Further enhanced Inter Inter- Interference suppression techniques such as Cell Interference Coordination and CoMP (Coordinated Multi-Point transmission / reception) can be applied. The small cell may be operated in a different frequency band from that of the macro cell, or may be operated in the same frequency band. In particular, from the viewpoint of propagation path attenuation (path loss), it is easy to configure a smaller cell by operating a small cell in a higher frequency band than a macro cell.
 異周波数帯で運用される小セルは、マクロセルとキャリアアグリゲーション技術またはデュアルコネクティビティ技術を用いて運用される。 Small cells operated in different frequency bands are operated using macro cells and carrier aggregation technology or dual connectivity technology.
 また、小セルは、マクロセルと同一周波数で運用されてもよい。小セルは、マクロセルのカバレッジ外で運用されてもよい。また、小セルの基地局装置3は、マクロセルの基地局装置と同一の場所に配置されてもよい。 Also, the small cell may be operated at the same frequency as the macro cell. Small cells may be operated outside the coverage of macro cells. The small cell base station apparatus 3 may be arranged at the same location as the macro cell base station apparatus.
 また、あるセルがマクロセルか小セルかは、基地局装置3で認識するものであり、端末装置1が認識する必要はない。例えば、基地局装置3は端末装置1に対して、マクロセルをPcellとして設定し、小セルをScellまたはpSCellとして設定することができる。いずれの場合においても、端末装置1はPCell、SCellまたはpSCellとして認識するだけでよく、マクロセルまたは小セルとして認識する必要はない。 Also, whether a certain cell is a macro cell or a small cell is recognized by the base station device 3, and the terminal device 1 does not need to recognize it. For example, the base station apparatus 3 can set the macro cell as Pcell and the small cell as Scell or pSCell for the terminal apparatus 1. In any case, the terminal device 1 only needs to recognize as PCell, SCell, or pSCell, and does not need to be recognized as a macro cell or a small cell.
 以下では、キャリアアグリゲーション技術およびデュアルコネクティビティ技術の詳細について説明する。 Below, the details of the carrier aggregation technology and dual connectivity technology will be explained.
 端末装置1の能力(性能、機能)に依存して、セカンダリーセルはプライマリーセルと一緒にサービングセルのセットを構成して設定される。端末装置1に設定される下りリンクのコンポーネントキャリアの数は端末装置1に設定される上りリンクコンポーネントキャリアの数よりも多いか同じでなければならず、上りリンクコンポーネントキャリアのみをセカンダリーセルとして設定することはできない。 Depending on the capability (performance and function) of the terminal device 1, the secondary cell is configured by configuring a serving cell set together with the primary cell. The number of downlink component carriers set in the terminal device 1 must be greater than or equal to the number of uplink component carriers set in the terminal device 1, and only the uplink component carrier is set as a secondary cell. It is not possible.
 端末装置1は、PUCCHの送信に常にプライマリーセルおよびプライマリーセカンダリーセルを用いる。言い換えると、端末装置1は、プライマリーセルおよびプライマリーセカンダリーセル以外のセカンダリーセルで、PUCCHを送信することを期待しない。 The terminal device 1 always uses a primary cell and a primary secondary cell for transmission of PUCCH. In other words, the terminal device 1 does not expect to transmit the PUCCH in a secondary cell other than the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 セカンダリーセルの再設定/追加/削除はRRCによって行われる。新しいセカンダリーセルを追加するとき、専用RRCシグナリングによって新しいセカンダリーセルが必要とされる全てのシステム情報を送信する。すなわち、RRCコネクテッドモードにおいては、報知によってシステム情報をセカンダリーセルから直接得る必要はない。 The reconfiguration / addition / deletion of the secondary cell is performed by RRC. When adding a new secondary cell, it sends all system information needed for the new secondary cell by dedicated RRC signaling. That is, in the RRC connected mode, it is not necessary to obtain system information directly from the secondary cell by notification.
 キャリアアグリゲーションが設定されたとき、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションの仕組みがサポートされる。プライマリーセルはアクティベーション/デアクティベーションは適用されない。セカンダリーセルがデアクティベーションされたとき、端末装置1は関連するPDCCHまたはPDSCHを受信する必要がなく、関連する上りリンクで送信できず、そしてCQI測定を行なう必要がない。反対に、セカンダリーセルがアクティベーションされたとき、端末装置1はPDSCHとPDCCHを受信するため、CQI測定を行なうことができると期待する。 When the carrier aggregation is set, the activation / deactivation mechanism of the secondary cell is supported. Primary cells are not activated / deactivated. When the secondary cell is deactivated, the terminal device 1 does not need to receive the associated PDCCH or PDSCH, cannot transmit on the associated uplink, and does not need to perform CQI measurement. On the other hand, when the secondary cell is activated, the terminal device 1 receives the PDSCH and the PDCCH, and therefore expects to be able to perform CQI measurement.
 アクティベーション/デアクティベーションの仕組みはMAC CEとデアクティベーションタイマーの組み合わせに基づく。MAC CEはセカンダリーセルのアクティベーションとデアクティベーションの情報をビットマップで通知する。1がセットされたビットは、関連するセカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを示し、0がセットされたビットは、関連するセカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを示す。 Activation / deactivation mechanism is based on the combination of MAC CE and deactivation timer. MAC CE notifies secondary cell activation and deactivation information in bitmap format. Bits that are set to 1 indicate activation of the associated secondary cell, and bits that are set to 0 indicate deactivation of the associated secondary cell.
 なお、端末装置1に設定されたセカンダリーセルは、初期状態としてデアクティベーションが設定されている。つまり、端末装置1に対して、セカンダリーセルに対する種々のパラメータが設定されたとしても、すぐにそのセカンダリーセルを用いて通信が行なえるとは限らない。 Note that the secondary cell set in the terminal device 1 is set to be deactivated as an initial state. That is, even if various parameters for the secondary cell are set for the terminal device 1, it is not always possible to perform communication using the secondary cell.
 次に、MAC CEの一例について説明する。 Next, an example of MAC CE will be described.
 アクティベーション/デアクティベーションMAC CEの構成の一例を説明する。MAC CEは、固定サイズであって、7つのCiフィールドと1つのRフィールドで構成されていて、次のように定義される。Ciは、セカンダリーセルインデックス(SCellIndex)iに設定されたセカンダリーセルがある場合、Ciフィールドはセカンダリーセルインデックスiを伴うセカンダリーセルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションの状態を示す。セカンダリーセルインデックスiが設定されたセカンダリーセルがない場合、端末装置1はCiフィールドを無視する。Ciフィールドが“1”にセットされている場合、セカンダリーセルインデックスiを伴うセカンダリーセルがアクティベートされることを示す。Ciフィールドが“0”にセットされている場合、セカンダリーセルインデックスiを伴うセカンダリーセルがデアクティベートされていることを示す。また、Rは、リザーブされたビットであり、“0”にセットされている。 An example of the configuration of the activation / deactivation MAC CE will be described. The MAC CE has a fixed size and is composed of seven Ci fields and one R field, and is defined as follows. When Ci is a secondary cell set to secondary cell index (SCellIndex) i, the Ci field indicates the activation / deactivation state of the secondary cell with secondary cell index i. When there is no secondary cell in which the secondary cell index i is set, the terminal device 1 ignores the Ci field. When the Ci field is set to “1”, it indicates that the secondary cell with the secondary cell index i is activated. When the Ci field is set to “0”, it indicates that the secondary cell with the secondary cell index i has been deactivated. R is a reserved bit and is set to “0”.
 次に、セカンダリーセルに対するデアクティベーションタイマー(DeactivationTimer)の一例について説明する。 Next, an example of a deactivation timer (DeactivationTimer) for the secondary cell will be described.
 デアクティベーションタイマーがセカンダリーセルに対して設定される場合、セカンダリーセルの維持時間に関連するタイマーである。端末装置1は、セカンダリーセル毎にデアクティベーションタイマーを保持し、デアクティベーションタイマーが満了すると、満了したデアクティベーションタイマーに関連するセカンダリーセルをデアクティベーションする。 When the deactivation timer is set for the secondary cell, it is a timer related to the maintenance time of the secondary cell. The terminal device 1 holds a deactivation timer for each secondary cell, and when the deactivation timer expires, the terminal device 1 deactivates the secondary cell related to the expired deactivation timer.
 セカンダリーセルに対するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値は、上位層(RRC層)からパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10を用いて設定される。セカンダリーセルに対するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値は、例えば、無線フレームの数に関連する値であるrf2、rf4、rf8、rf16、rf32、rf64、rf128の内から1つが設定される。ここで、rf2は、2無線フレームに対応し、rf4は、4無線フレームに対応し、rf8は、8無線フレームに対応し、rf16は、16無線フレームに対応し、rf32は、32無線フレームに対応し、rf64は、64無線フレームに対応し、rf128は、128無線フレームに対応する。 The initial value of the deactivation timer for the secondary cell is set from the upper layer (RRC layer) using the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10. As the initial value of the deactivation timer for the secondary cell, for example, one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which is a value related to the number of radio frames, is set. Here, rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames, rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames, rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames, and rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames. Correspondingly, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames and rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.
 なお、セカンダリーセルに対するデアクティベーションタイマーに関連するフィールド(パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10)は、1つ以上のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1のみに設定される。 Note that the field related to the deactivation timer for the secondary cell (parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10) is set only in the terminal device 1 in which one or more secondary cells are set.
 なお、デアクティベーションタイマーに関連するフィールドが存在しない場合、端末装置1は、デアクティベーションタイマーに関連するフィールドの既存の値を削除し、値として無限大(infinity)が設定されていると仮定する。 If there is no field related to the deactivation timer, the terminal device 1 deletes the existing value of the field related to the deactivation timer and assumes that infinity is set as the value.
 なお、端末装置1に対して、セカンダリーセルに対するデアクティベーションタイマーに関連するフィールドが1つだけ設定される場合には、各セカンダリーセルに同じデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値が適応される(デアクティベーションタイマーに関連する機能は各セカンダリーセルで独立に実行される)。 When only one field related to the deactivation timer for the secondary cell is set for the terminal device 1, the same initial value of the deactivation timer is applied to each secondary cell (deactivation timer). Related functions are performed independently in each secondary cell).
 アクティベーション/デアクティベーションの仕組みの一例について説明する。 An example of the activation / deactivation mechanism will be described.
 セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、端末装置1は、MAC CEによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルをアクティベーションとして設定する。ここで、端末装置1は、MAC CEによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに対して、以下のオペレーションを行なうことができる。そのオペレーションは、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタである。 When receiving the MAC CE instructing the activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 sets the secondary cell whose activation is set by the MAC CE as the activation. Here, the terminal device 1 can perform the following operations on the secondary cell for which activation is set by the MAC CE. The operation includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell Data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
 セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、端末装置1は、MAC CEによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをスタートまたはリスタートする。なお、スタートとは、値を保持してタイマーのカウントが開始することである。なお、リスタートとは、値を初期値に設定してタイマーのカウントが開始することである。 When receiving the MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts a deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the MAC CE. The term “start” means that the timer starts counting while holding the value. Note that restarting means setting a value to an initial value and starting a timer count.
 セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、端末装置1は、送信電力余力(パワーヘッドルーム(PHR: Power head room))の送信をトリガする。 When receiving the MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 triggers transmission of transmission power remaining capacity (power headroom (PHR: Power head room)).
 セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、もしくは、セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマーが満了した場合、端末装置1は、MAC CEによってデアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルをデアクティベーションとして設定する。 When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 deactivates the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Set as a tivat.
 セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、もしくは、セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマーが満了した場合、端末装置1は、MAC CEによってデアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをストップする。 When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received, or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 relates to the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Stop the deactivation timer.
 セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CEを受信した場合、もしくは、セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマーが満了した場合、端末装置1は、MAC CEによってデアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連する全てのHARQバッファをフラッシュする。 When the MAC CE instructing the deactivation of the secondary cell is received, or when the deactivation timer associated with the secondary cell expires, the terminal device 1 relates to the secondary cell for which the deactivation is set by the MAC CE. Flush all HARQ buffers
 アクティベーションされたセカンダリーセルにおけるPDCCHが、下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)または上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示す場合、もしくは、アクティベーションされたセカンダリーセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおけるPDCCHが、アクティベーションされたセカンダリーセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはアクティベーションされたセカンダリーセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示す場合、端末装置1は、アクティベーションされたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをリスタートする。 When the activated PDCCH in the secondary cell indicates a downlink grant (uplink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the activated secondary cell is activated When the downlink grant for the cell (downlink セ ル grant) or the uplink grant for the activated secondary cell (uplink ア ク テ ィ ベ ー grant) is indicated, the terminal device 1 restarts the deactivation timer related to the activated secondary cell.
 セカンダリーセルがデアクティベートされた場合、端末装置1は、デアクティベートされたセカンダリーセルに対して、以下のオペレーションを行なわない。そのオペレーションは、セカンダリーセルでSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI/PMI/RI/PTIの報告、セカンダリーセルで上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタである。 When the secondary cell is deactivated, the terminal device 1 does not perform the following operation on the deactivated secondary cell. The operation includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI reporting to the secondary cell, uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in the secondary cell, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, and PDCCH transmission in the secondary cell. It is a PDCCH monitor for a monitor and a secondary cell.
 ランダムアクセスプロシージャ(Random Access procedure)を実行中のセカンダリーセルに対してデアクティベーションが設定された場合、端末装置1は、実行中のランダムアクセスプロシージャを中止する。 When the deactivation is set for the secondary cell that is executing the random access procedure (Random Access procedure), the terminal device 1 stops the random access procedure that is being executed.
 セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例について説明する。なお、説明のため、ここで説明するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例は、第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミング、または、従来のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングと称する。 An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is the first secondary cell activation / deactivation timing or the conventional secondary cell activation / deactivation timing. Called.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンド(例えば、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、上述したアクティベートに対応する動作のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作と該セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)に関係する動作を除く動作が、定義されている最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく適用されなければならない。また、上述したアクティベートに対応する動作のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作と該セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)に関係する動作は、サブフレームn+8において適用されなければならない。 When receiving an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting among the operations corresponding to the activation described above. The operations excluding the related operations and the operations related to the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell are defined as a minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes). )) And not earlier than subframe n + 8. Of the operations corresponding to the activation described above, operations related to CSI reporting and operations related to a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell must be applied in subframe n + 8.
 すなわち、端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告、アクティベーションコマンドによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをスタートまたはリスタートを適用しなければならない。そして、最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行うことができる。すなわち、最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅く、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早く、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行うことはできない。 That is, when the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, CQI (ChannelCQualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command must be started or restarted. SRS transmission in the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell is not slower than the minimum requirement (minimummrequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and not earlier than subframe n + 8 Transmission of link data (UL-SCH), transmission of RACH in the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and monitoring of PDCCH for the secondary cell can be performed. That is, SRS transmission in the secondary cell, uplink data in the secondary cell, which is later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and earlier than subframe n + 8 (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell cannot be performed.
 なお、デアクティベーションタイマーのスタートとは、値を保持してタイマーのカウントが開始することである。なお、デアクティベーションタイマーのリスタートとは、値を初期値に設定してタイマーのカウントが開始することである。 Note that starting the deactivation timer means holding the value and starting the timer count. The deactivation timer is restarted when the value is set to an initial value and the timer starts counting.
 なお、最小要件(minimum requirement)は、FDD(E-UTRA FDD)とTDD(E-UTRA TDD)で異なる値であってもよい。すなわち、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信した端末装置1は、該セカンダリーセルがFDDであるかTDDであるかによって異なる最小要件(minimum requirement)を適用(設定)してもよい。 Note that the minimum requirement may be different for FDD (E-UTRA FDD) and TDD (E-UTRA TDD). That is, the terminal device 1 that has received the activation command for the secondary cell may apply (set) a different minimum requirement depending on whether the secondary cell is FDD or TDD.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンド(セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、または、該セカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)が満了したとき、上述したデアクティベートに対応する動作のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作を除く動作が、定義されている最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく適用されなければならない。また、上述したデアクティベートに対応する動作のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作は、サブフレームn+8において適用されなければならない。すなわち、定義されている最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅く、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早く適用されない。 In the subframe n, the terminal device 1 receives the deactivation command for the secondary cell (MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) or the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) related to the secondary cell is received. Among the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations other than the operations related to CSI reporting are defined as the minimum requirements (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes) ) And not earlier than subframe n + 8. Of the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations related to CSI reporting must be applied in subframe n + 8. That is, it is applied later than the defined minimum requirement (minimum requirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and earlier than subframe n + 8.
 すなわち、端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンド(セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告を行わない。そして、最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタを行わず、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行わない。 That is, when receiving the deactivation command for the secondary cell (MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 receives the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) for the secondary cell in the subframe n + 8. ) / PMI (Precoding / Matrix / Indicator) / RI (Rank / Indicator) / PTI (Precoding / Type / Indicator) is not reported. And it is not later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and is not earlier than subframe n + 8, and does not transmit SRS in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell In this case, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted, RACH is not transmitted in the secondary cell, PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.
 セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例について説明する。なお、説明のため、ここで説明するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例は、第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングと称する。 An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a second secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.
 本例におけるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用することで、デアクティベーション状態からアクティベーション状態への遷移時間(もしくは、OFF状態からON状態への遷移時間)を短くすることが可能となる。従って、端末装置1は基地局装置3との通信開始を前倒しすることが可能となり、効率的な通信が可能となる。 By applying the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in this example, the transition time from the deactivation state to the activation state (or the transition time from the OFF state to the ON state) can be shortened. . Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンド(例えば、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、上述したアクティベートに対応する動作(もしくは、ON状態に対応する動作)が、サブフレームn+8において適用されなければならない。 When the terminal device 1 receives an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 enters the operation corresponding to the activation described above (or enters the ON state). The corresponding action) must be applied in subframe n + 8.
 すなわち、端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告、アクティベーションコマンドによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをスタートまたはリスタートを適用し、かつ、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行うことができる。 That is, when the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, CQI (ChannelCQualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, start or restart deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command, SRS transmission in the secondary cell, secondary It is possible to perform uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in a cell, RACH transmission in a secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in a secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for a secondary cell.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルが所定のセカンダリーセルである場合に適用してもよい。例えば、所定のセカンダリーセルは、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)によって運用されるセルであってもよいし、TDDで運用されるセルの内の一部のセルであってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンド(例えば、セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、または、該セカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)が満了したとき、上述したデアクティベートに対応する動作(もしくは、OFF状態に対応する動作)が、サブフレームn+8において適用されなければならない。 The terminal device 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, or a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell) ) Has expired, the operation corresponding to the deactivation described above (or the operation corresponding to the OFF state) must be applied in subframe n + 8.
 すなわち、端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告を行わず、かつ、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタを行わず、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行わない。 That is, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported, SRS is not transmitted in the secondary cell, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell is not transmitted. The RACH is not transmitted, the PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and the PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルが所定のセカンダリーセルである場合に適用してもよい。例えば、所定のセカンダリーセルは、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)によって運用されるセルであってもよいし、TDDで運用されるセルの内の一部のセルであってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
 なお、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1は、設定された全てのセカンダリーセルにおいて本例のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよく、設定された複数のセカンダリーセルのうち少なくとも1つのセカンダリーセルにおいて本例のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。すなわち、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1は、設定された全てのセカンダリーセルにおいて共通のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよく、設定された複数のセカンダリーセルそれぞれにおいて異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells. The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.
 セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例について説明する。なお、説明のため、ここで説明するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例は、第3のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングと称する。 An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a third secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.
 本例におけるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用することで、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション(もしくは、ON状態)が指示されてから該セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ開始および/または該セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタ開始までの時間を短くすることが可能となる。従って、端末装置1は基地局装置3との通信開始を前倒しすることが可能となり、効率的な通信が可能となる。 By applying the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in this example, the secondary cell activation (or ON state) is instructed and then PDCCH monitoring starts in the secondary cell and / or for the secondary cell It is possible to shorten the time until the start of monitoring of the PDCCH. Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンド(例えば、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、上述したアクティベートに対応する動作(もしくは、ON状態に対応する動作)のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作と該セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)に関係する動作とセカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを除く動作が、定義されている最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく適用されなければならない。また、上述したアクティベートに対応する動作のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作と該セカンダリーセルに関連付けられているデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)に関係する動作とセカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタは、サブフレームn+8において適用されなければならない。 When the terminal device 1 receives an activation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing activation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, the terminal device 1 enters the operation corresponding to the activation described above (or enters the ON state). Operations corresponding to CSI reporting, operations related to the deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell, operations other than PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell Must be applied no later than the defined minimum requirements (minimum requirement, eg 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and no earlier than subframe n + 8 There. Of the operations corresponding to the activation described above, operations related to CSI reporting, operations related to a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer) associated with the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and PDCCH for the secondary cell Must be applied in subframe n + 8.
 すなわち、端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告、アクティベーションコマンドによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをスタートまたはリスタート、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを適用しなければならない。そして、最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信を行うことができる。 That is, when the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, CQI (ChannelCQualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, start or restart deactivation timer related to secondary cell for which activation is set by activation command, monitor PDCCH in secondary cell, monitor PDCCH for secondary cell Must be applied. SRS transmission in the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell is not slower than the minimum requirement (minimummrequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)) and not earlier than subframe n + 8 Transmission of link data (UL-SCH) and transmission of RACH in the secondary cell can be performed.
 なお、サブフレームn+8においてセカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを適用する例を説明したが、サブフレームn+8において適用されるオペレーションは、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタの何れであってもよい。 Although an example in which PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell are applied in subframe n + 8 has been described, operations applied in subframe n + 8 are SRS transmission in the secondary cell and secondary cell. Uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルが所定のセカンダリーセルである場合に適用してもよい。例えば、所定のセカンダリーセルは、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)によって運用されるセルであってもよいし、TDDで運用されるセルの内の一部のセルであってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンド(例えば、セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーションを指示するMAC CE)を受信したとき、または、該セカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマー(sCellDeactivationTimer)が満了したとき、上述したデアクティベートに対応する動作(もしくは、OFF状態に対応する動作)のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作とセカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタに関係する動作と、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタに関係する動作を除く動作が、定義されている最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく適用されなければならない。また、上述したデアクティベートに対応する動作のうち、CSIレポーティングに関係する動作は、サブフレームn+8において適用されなければならない。 The terminal device 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell (for example, MAC CE instructing deactivation of the secondary cell) in the subframe n, or a deactivation timer (sCellDeactivationTimer related to the secondary cell) ) Expires, among the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above (or the operations corresponding to the OFF state), the operation related to CSI reporting, the operation related to monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell Operations other than those related to monitoring of the PDCCH are not slower than the defined minimum requirements (minimumminirequirement, eg, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and subframe n It must be applied no earlier than 8. Of the operations corresponding to the deactivation described above, operations related to CSI reporting must be applied in subframe n + 8.
 すなわち、端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告を行わず、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタを行わず、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行わない。そして、最小要件(minimum requirement、例えば24ms(24サブフレーム)、34ms(34サブフレーム))よりも遅くなく、かつ、サブフレームn+8より早くなく、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信を行わず、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信を行わない。 That is, when the terminal apparatus 1 receives a deactivation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, in subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank) for the secondary cell is received. Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported, PDCCH is not monitored in the secondary cell, and PDCCH is not monitored for the secondary cell. And it is not later than the minimum requirement (minimum requirement, for example, 24 ms (24 subframes), 34 ms (34 subframes)), and is not earlier than subframe n + 8, and does not transmit SRS in the secondary cell, and the secondary cell The uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted on the secondary cell, and the RACH is not transmitted on the secondary cell.
 なお、サブフレームn+8においてセカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行わない例を説明したが、サブフレームn+8において行わない動作は、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタの何れであってもよい。 In addition, although the example which does not monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell and the PDCCH for the secondary cell in the subframe n + 8 has been described, the operations not performed in the subframe n + 8 are the SRS transmission in the secondary cell, Any of transmission of uplink data (UL-SCH), transmission of RACH in the secondary cell, monitoring of PDCCH in the secondary cell, and monitoring of PDCCH for the secondary cell may be used.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルが所定のセカンダリーセルである場合に適用してもよい。例えば、所定のセカンダリーセルは、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)によって運用されるセルであってもよいし、TDDで運用されるセルの内の一部のセルであってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
 なお、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1は、設定された全てのセカンダリーセルにおいて本例のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよく、設定された複数のセカンダリーセルのうち少なくとも1つのセカンダリーセルにおいて本例のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。すなわち、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1は、設定された全てのセカンダリーセルにおいて共通のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよく、設定された複数のセカンダリーセルそれぞれにおいて異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells. The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.
 セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例について説明する。なお、説明のため、ここで説明するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの一例は、第4のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングと称する。 An example of secondary cell activation / deactivation timing will be described. For the sake of explanation, an example of the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing described here is referred to as a fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timing.
 本例におけるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用することで、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション(もしくは、ON状態)が指示されてから該セカンダリーセルでのアクティベーションに対応するオペレーション開始までの時間を短くすることが可能となる。従って、端末装置1は基地局装置3との通信開始を前倒しすることが可能となり、効率的な通信が可能となる。 By applying the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in this example, the time from the activation of the secondary cell (or ON state) to the start of the operation corresponding to the activation in the secondary cell It can be shortened. Therefore, the terminal device 1 can advance the start of communication with the base station device 3, and efficient communication is possible.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告、アクティベーションコマンドによってアクティベーションが設定されたセカンダリーセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーをスタートまたはリスタートを適用しなければならない。そして、サブフレームn+Aにおいて、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信を行うことができる。そして、サブフレームn+Bにおいて、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信を行うことができる。そして、サブフレームn+Cにおいて、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信を行うことができる。そして、サブフレームn+Dにおいて、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタを行うことができる。そして、サブフレームn+Eにおいて、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行うことができる。 When receiving an activation command for the secondary cell in subframe n, terminal apparatus 1 receives CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) for the secondary cell in subframe n + 8. / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) report, Deactivation timer related to the secondary cell for which activation is set by the activation command must be started or restarted. And in sub-frame n + A, transmission of SRS in a secondary cell can be performed. Then, in subframe n + B, uplink data (UL-SCH) can be transmitted in the secondary cell. Then, in the subframe n + C, the RACH can be transmitted in the secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + D, PDCCH can be monitored in a secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + E, the PDCCH with respect to a secondary cell can be monitored.
 なお、A、B、C、D、Eは、基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から設定(信号により送信または報知)されてもよいし、予め設定されている値であってもよいし、端末装置1の能力に関連する値であってもよいし、仕様書などで定められる所定の値でもよい。 A, B, C, D, and E may be set (transmitted or notified by a signal) from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer), or may be preset values. The value may be a value related to the capability of the terminal device 1 or may be a predetermined value determined by a specification or the like.
 なお、A、B、C、D、Eは、基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から1つの値(もしくはパラメータ)を用いて送信または報知されてもよいし、基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から複数の値(もしくはパラメータ)を用いて送信または報知されてもよい。 A, B, C, D, and E may be transmitted or broadcast from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer (Higher layer) using one value (or parameter), or may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer. It may be transmitted or notified from a layer (Higher layer) using a plurality of values (or parameters).
 なお、A、B、C、D、Eは、それぞれ個別に設定されてもよいし、一部または全部が共通に設定されてもよい。また、A、B、C、D、Eは、動作に対して共通に設定されてもよい、例えば、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタと、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタに対して共通の値が設定されてもよい。 Note that A, B, C, D, and E may be set individually, or some or all may be set in common. A, B, C, D, and E may be commonly set for the operation. For example, a common value is set for the PDCCH monitor in the secondary cell and the PDCCH monitor for the secondary cell. May be.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell for which activation (or ON) is instructed is FDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、アクティベート(もしくはON)が指示されたセカンダリーセルが所定のセカンダリーセルである場合に適用してもよい。例えば、所定のセカンダリーセルは、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)によって運用されるセルであってもよいし、TDDで運用されるセルの内の一部のセルであってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be activated (or turned on) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
 端末装置1は、サブフレームnにおいて、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンドを受信したとき、サブフレームn+8において、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告を行わない。そして、サブフレームn+Aにおいて、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信を行わない。そして、サブフレームn+Bにおいて、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信を行わない。そして、サブフレームn+Cにおいて、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信を行わない。そして、サブフレームn+Dにおいて、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタを行わない。そして、サブフレームn+Eにおいて、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行わない。 When the terminal apparatus 1 receives the deactivation command for the secondary cell in the subframe n, in the subframe n + 8, the CQI (Channel QualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) for the secondary cell is received. / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is not reported. And in sub-frame n + A, transmission of SRS in a secondary cell is not performed. Then, in subframe n + B, uplink data (UL-SCH) is not transmitted in the secondary cell. Then, in subframe n + C, RACH is not transmitted in the secondary cell. And in sub-frame n + D, PDCCH monitoring in a secondary cell is not performed. And in sub-frame n + E, PDCCH monitoring with respect to a secondary cell is not performed.
 なお、A、B、C、D、Eは、基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から設定(信号により送信または報知)されてもよいし、予め設定されている値であってもよいし、端末装置1の能力に関連する値であってもよいし、仕様書などで定められる所定の値でもよい。 A, B, C, D, and E may be set (transmitted or notified by a signal) from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer), or may be preset values. The value may be a value related to the capability of the terminal device 1 or may be a predetermined value determined by a specification or the like.
 なお、A、B、C、D、Eは、基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から1つの値(もしくはパラメータ)を用いて送信または報知されてもよいし、基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から複数の値(もしくはパラメータ)を用いて送信または報知されてもよい。 A, B, C, D, and E may be transmitted or broadcast from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer (Higher layer) using one value (or parameter), or may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 or higher layer. It may be transmitted or notified from a layer (Higher layer) using a plurality of values (or parameters).
 なお、移動局装置1は基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から送信または報知される1つの値(もしくはパラメータ)に基づいてA、B、C、D、Eを設定してもよいし、移動局装置1は基地局装置3または上位層(Higher layer)から送信または報知される複数の値(もしくはパラメータ)に基づいてA、B、C、D、Eを設定してもよい。 The mobile station device 1 may set A, B, C, D, and E based on one value (or parameter) transmitted or broadcast from the base station device 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer). The mobile station apparatus 1 may set A, B, C, D, and E based on a plurality of values (or parameters) transmitted or notified from the base station apparatus 3 or the higher layer (Higher layer).
 なお、A、B、C、D、Eは、それぞれ個別に設定されてもよいし、一部または全部が共通に設定されてもよい。また、A、B、C、D、Eは、動作に対して共通に設定されてもよい、例えば、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタと、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタに対して共通の値が設定されてもよい。 Note that A, B, C, D, and E may be set individually, or some or all may be set in common. A, B, C, D, and E may be commonly set for the operation. For example, a common value is set for the PDCCH monitor in the secondary cell and the PDCCH monitor for the secondary cell. May be.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがTDDである場合に適用してもよい。すなわち、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルがFDDである場合に上記動作は適用されなくてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is TDD. That is, the above operation may not be applied when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is FDD.
 なお、端末装置1は、上記動作を、デアクティベート(もしくはOFF)が指示されたセカンダリーセルが所定のセカンダリーセルである場合に適用してもよい。例えば、所定のセカンダリーセルは、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)によって運用されるセルであってもよいし、TDDで運用されるセルの内の一部のセルであってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may apply the above operation when the secondary cell instructed to be deactivated (or OFF) is a predetermined secondary cell. For example, the predetermined secondary cell may be a cell operated by an unlicensed band (unlicensed band) or may be a part of cells operated by TDD.
 なお、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1は、設定された全てのセカンダリーセルにおいて本例のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよく、設定された複数のセカンダリーセルのうち少なくとも1つのセカンダリーセルにおいて本例のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。すなわち、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1は、設定された全てのセカンダリーセルにおいて共通のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよく、設定された複数のセカンダリーセルそれぞれにおいて異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of the present example to all the set secondary cells. The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing of this example may be applied to at least one secondary cell. That is, the terminal device 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may apply the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing in all the set secondary cells, and in each of the set secondary cells. Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied.
 なお、セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングとは、端末装置1がセカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信してから、アクティベート/デアクティベートに対応する動作の一部または全部を適用するタイミングであることが好ましい。 The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is the timing at which a part or all of the operations corresponding to activation / deactivation are applied after the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell. Preferably there is.
 なお、セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングとは、端末装置1がセカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信してから、ON状態/OFF状態に対応する動作の一部または全部を適用するタイミングであることが好ましい。 The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is the timing at which a part or all of the operations corresponding to the ON state / OFF state are applied after the terminal device 1 receives the activation command for the secondary cell. It is preferable that
 なお、セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングは、端末装置1に複数適用されてもよい(複数設定されてもよい)。 Note that a plurality of secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied to the terminal device 1 (a plurality of timings may be set).
 なお、セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドは、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション(またはON)を指示するMAC CEであってもよいし、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション(またはON)を指示に関連するL1の信号(所定のDCI、所定のDCI format、所定のDCI formatにおける所定のフィールド)であってもよいし、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション(またはON)を指示に関連するL2の信号(所定のMAC CE)であってもよいし、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション(またはON)を指示に関連する何れの信号であってもよい。 The activation command for the secondary cell may be a MAC CE that instructs activation (or ON) of the secondary cell, or an L1 signal related to the instruction for activation (or ON) of the secondary cell. (A predetermined DCI, a predetermined DCI format, a predetermined field in the predetermined DCI format) or an L2 signal (predetermined MAC CE) related to the activation (or ON) of the secondary cell. It may be any signal related to the instruction to activate (or turn on) the secondary cell.
 なお、セカンダリーセルのためのデアクティベーションコマンドは、セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーション(またはOFF)を指示するMAC CEであってもよいし、セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーション(またはOFF)を指示に関連するL1の信号(所定のDCI、所定のDCI format、所定のDCI formatにおける所定のフィールド)であってもよいし、セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーション(またはOFF)を指示に関連するL2の信号(所定のMAC CE)であってもよいし、セカンダリーセルのデアクティベーション(またはOFF)を指示に関連する何れの信号であってもよい。 The deactivation command for the secondary cell may be a MAC CE for instructing the deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell, or an L1 signal related to the instruction for the deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell. (Predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format, predetermined field in predetermined DCI format) or L2 signal (predetermined MAC CE) related to the instruction of deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell There may be any signal related to the instruction of deactivation (or OFF) of the secondary cell.
 なお、セカンダリーセルのON状態は、アクティベートに対応する動作が可能な状態であってもよいし、アクティベートに対応する動作の一部が可能な状態であってもよいし、アクティベートに対応する動作に加えて何れの動作が可能なもしくは不可能な状態であってもよい。 The ON state of the secondary cell may be a state where an operation corresponding to activation may be possible, a state where a part of the operation corresponding to activation may be possible, or an operation corresponding to activation. In addition, any operation may be possible or impossible.
 なお、セカンダリーセルのOFF状態は、デアクティベートに対応する動作が可能な状態であってもよいし、デアクティベートに対応する動作の一部が可能な状態であってもよいし、デアクティベートに対応する動作に加えて何れの動作が可能なもしくは不可能な状態であってもよい。 Note that the secondary cell OFF state may be a state in which an operation corresponding to the deactivation can be performed, or a part of the operation corresponding to the deactivation may be possible. In addition to the operation to be performed, any operation may be possible or impossible.
 なお、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1は最小要件(minimum requirement)が8ms(8サブフレーム)である端末装置1であってもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 whose minimum requirement is 8 ms (8 subframes).
 なお、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1は最小要件(minimum requirement)を持たない端末装置1であってもよい。 The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 that does not have a minimum requirement.
 なお、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1は所定の端末能力(UE capability)を持つ端末装置1であってもよい。また、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1は所定の端末能力(UE capability)を示す情報を送信または報告した端末装置1であってもよい。ここで、所定の端末能力は、所定のアクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連する能力、所定のセカンダリーセルに関連する能力、セルのON/OFF(起動/停止)に関連する能力、DRSに関連する能力、セルのON/OFFに関連するRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)に関連する能力、セルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連するRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)に関連する能力、DRSに関連する能力、セルのON/OFFに関連するL1信号(所定のDCI、所定のDCI format、所定のDCI formatにおける所定のフィールド)に関連する能力、セルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連するL1信号(所定のDCI、所定のDCI format、所定のDCI formatにおける所定のフィールド)に関連する能力、セルのON/OFFに関連するL2信号(所定のMAC CE)に関連する能力、セルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連するL2信号(所定のMAC CE)に関連する能力、などであってもよい。 The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 having a predetermined terminal capability (UE (capability). Further, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be the terminal device 1 that has transmitted or reported information indicating a predetermined terminal capability (UE capability). Here, the predetermined terminal capability includes a capability related to a predetermined activation / deactivation, a capability related to a predetermined secondary cell, a capability related to ON / OFF (start / stop) of a cell, and a capability related to DRS. , Capability related to RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell ON / OFF, capability related to RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell activation / deactivation, DRS L1 signal related to cell activation / deactivation, L1 signal related to cell ON / OFF (capacity related to predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format, predetermined field in predetermined DCI format) Signal (predetermined DCI, predetermined DCI format , A capability related to a predetermined field in a predetermined DCI format, a capability related to an L2 signal related to ON / OFF of a cell (predetermined MAC CE), an L2 signal related to cell activation / deactivation (predetermined) May be related to MAC CE).
 なお、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1は、ON/OFFが適用可能なセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1であってもよく、所定のアクティベーション/デアクティベーションが適用可能なセカンダリーセルが設定された端末装置1であってもよく、アクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連するRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)が設定された端末装置1であってもよく、セルのON/OFF(起動/停止)に関連するRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)が設定された端末装置1であってもよく、セルのON/OFFに関連するL1信号(所定のDCI、所定のDCI format、所定のDCI formatにおける所定のフィールド)を受信した端末装置1であってもよく、セルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連するL1信号(所定のDCI、所定のDCI format、所定のDCI formatにおける所定のフィールド)を受信した端末装置1であってもよく、セルのON/OFFに関連するL2信号(所定のMAC CE)を受信した端末装置1であってもよく、セルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションに関連するL2信号(所定のMAC CE)を受信した端末装置1であってもよい。 The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 in which a secondary cell to which ON / OFF can be applied is set, and a predetermined activation / deactivation is performed. May be a terminal device 1 in which a secondary cell to which is applicable is set, or a terminal device 1 in which RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to activation / deactivation is set, It may be a terminal device 1 in which RS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) related to cell ON / OFF (start / stop) is set, and L1 signal (predetermined DCI) related to cell ON / OFF , The predetermined DCI format, the predetermined format in the predetermined DCI format Terminal device 1 that has received the L1 signal (a predetermined field in a predetermined DCI, a predetermined DCI format, or a predetermined DCI format) may be used. 1 may be a terminal device 1 that has received an L2 signal (predetermined MAC CE) related to cell ON / OFF, and may be an L2 signal (predetermined predetermined) related to cell activation / deactivation. It may be the terminal device 1 that has received (MAC CE).
 なお、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1は、DRSが設定された端末装置1であってもよく、DRSに関連する機能が設定された端末装置1であってもよい。DRSに関連する機能は、DRSに基づく下りリンクの時間領域の同期(time synchronization)、DRSに基づく下りリンクの周波数の同期(frequency synchronization)、DRSに基づくセル/送信ポイントの特定(cell/transmission point identification)、DRSに基づくRSRPの測定(RSRP measurement)、DRSに基づくRSRQの測定(RSRQ measurement)、DRSに基づく端末装置1の地理的な位置の測定(UE Positioning)、DRSに基づくCSIの測定(CSI measurement)などであってもよい。 The terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be a terminal device 1 in which DRS is set, or a terminal device 1 in which a function related to DRS is set. Also good. Functions related to DRS include downlink time domain synchronization based on DRS (time synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization based on DRS (frequency synchronization), and cell / transmission point identification based on DRS (cell / transmission point) identification), measurement of RSRP based on DRS (RSRP measurement), measurement of RSRQ based on DRS (RSRQ measurement), measurement of geographical location of UE 1 based on DRS (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI based on DRS ( CSI measurement).
 なお、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1はアクティベーションコマンドを受信することで、所定の通信がトリガされてもよい。例えば、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1はアクティベーションコマンドを受信することで、ランダムアクセスの開始(RACHの送信)をトリガされてもよい。例えば、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1はアクティベーションコマンドを受信することで、SRSの送信をトリガされてもよい。例えば、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1はアクティベーションコマンドを受信することで、CSIの送信をトリガされてもよい。例えば、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが適用される端末装置1はアクティベーションコマンドを受信することで、DRSに基づく(DRSに基づいて算出された)CSIの送信をトリガされてもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may receive the activation command to trigger a predetermined communication. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to start random access (RACH transmission) by receiving an activation command. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to receive an SRS by receiving an activation command. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to receive CSI by receiving an activation command. For example, the terminal device 1 to which the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied may be triggered to transmit CSI based on DRS (calculated based on DRS) by receiving an activation command. .
 端末装置1は、適用するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを、条件に応じて切り換えてもよい。例えば、端末装置1は、条件に応じて、適用するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを第1から第4のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの何れかに切り換えてもよい。 The terminal device 1 may switch the timing of the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation according to the conditions. For example, the terminal device 1 may switch the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation timing to any of the first to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timings according to conditions.
 端末装置1は、初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが設定され、条件に応じて、適用するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを切り換えてもよい。例えば、端末装置1は、第1の(従来の)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングとして設定され、条件に応じて、適用するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを第2から第4のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの何れかに切り換えてもよい。 The terminal device 1 may be set with a default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, and may switch the applied secondary cell activation / deactivation timing according to conditions. For example, in the terminal device 1, the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, and is applied according to conditions. The secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be switched to any of the second to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation timings.
 端末装置1は、初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが設定され、条件に応じて、初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングと同時にL1シグナリングを用いたセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)が適用されてもよい。例えば、端末装置1は、第1の(従来の)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングとして設定され、条件に応じて、第1の(従来の)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングと同時にL1シグナリングを用いたセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)が適用されてもよい。 The terminal device 1 has initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing set, and, depending on conditions, the initial (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing and L1 signaling at the same time Cell ON / OFF (start / stop) may be applied. For example, in the terminal device 1, the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, The ON / OFF (start / stop) of the cell using L1 signaling may be applied simultaneously with the timing of 1 (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation.
 端末装置1は、初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが設定され、条件に応じて、異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミング、または、L1シグナリングを用いたセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)が適用されてもよい。例えば、端末装置1は、第1の(従来の)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングが初期設定の(デフォルトの)セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングとして設定され、条件に応じて、第2から第4のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングの何れか、または、L1シグナリングを用いたセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)が適用されてもよい。 The terminal device 1 has a default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing set, and depending on conditions, a different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, or a cell using L1 signaling ON / OFF (start / stop) may be applied. For example, in the terminal device 1, the first (conventional) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is set as the default (default) secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, Any one of timings of second to fourth secondary cell activation / deactivation, or cell ON / OFF (start / stop) using L1 signaling may be applied.
 なお、移動局装置1に複数のセルが設定されている場合(1つのプライマリーセルと、1つまたは複数のセカンダリーセルが設定されている場合)は、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングはセカンダリーセルに対してのみ適用されることが好ましい。すなわち、上記セカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングはプライマリーセルに適用されないことが好ましい。 When a plurality of cells are set in the mobile station apparatus 1 (one primary cell and one or more secondary cells are set), the timing of the secondary cell activation / deactivation is as follows. It is preferably applied only to the secondary cell. That is, the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is preferably not applied to the primary cell.
 なお、移動局装置1に複数のセルが設定されている場合(1つのプライマリーセルと、1つまたは複数のセカンダリーセルが設定されている場合)は、移動局装置1に設定されているセル毎に異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。すなわち、複数のセルが設定されている移動局装置1は、セル毎にセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを切り換えてもよい。 When a plurality of cells are set in the mobile station apparatus 1 (when one primary cell and one or a plurality of secondary cells are set), each cell set in the mobile station apparatus 1 Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings may be applied. That is, the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a plurality of cells are set may switch the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing for each cell.
 なお、移動局装置1に複数のセカンダリーセルが設定されている場合は、移動局装置1に設置されている複数のセカンダリーセルに対して共通のセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。すなわち、複数のセカンダリーセルが設定されている移動局装置1は、複数のセカンダリーセルに対するセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを切り換えてもよい。 In addition, when a plurality of secondary cells are set in the mobile station device 1, the same secondary cell activation / deactivation timing is applied to the plurality of secondary cells installed in the mobile station device 1. Also good. That is, the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a plurality of secondary cells are set may switch the timing of secondary cell activation / deactivation for the plurality of secondary cells.
 なお、移動局装置1に複数のセルグループ(1つのセルグループは、少なくとも1つのプライマリーセルと1つのプライマリーセカンダリーセルを含んで構成されることが好ましい)が設定されている場合は、移動局装置1に設定されているセルグループ毎に異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを適用してもよい。すなわち、複数のセルグループが設定されている移動局装置1は、セルグループ毎にセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングを切り換えてもよい。 When a plurality of cell groups (one cell group is preferably configured to include at least one primary cell and one primary secondary cell) is set in the mobile station device 1, the mobile station device Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing may be applied for each cell group set to 1. That is, the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a plurality of cell groups are set may switch the secondary cell activation / deactivation timing for each cell group.
 以下では、プライマリーセカンダリーセルの詳細を説明する。 The details of the primary / secondary cell will be described below.
 プライマリーセカンダリーセルは、デュアルコネクティビティにおいて用いられるセルである。デュアルコネクティビティとは、少なくとも二つの異なるネットワークポイント(マスター基地局装置(MeNB:Master eNB)とセカンダリー基地局装置(SeNB:Secondary eNB))から提供される無線リソースを所定の端末装置が消費するオペレーションである。言い換えると、デュアルコネクティビティは、端末装置が、少なくとも2つのネットワークポイントでRRC接続を行なうことである。デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、端末装置は、RRC接続(RRC_CONNECTED)状態で、且つ、非理想的バックホール(non-ideal backhaul)によって接続されてもよい。 The primary / secondary cell is a cell used in dual connectivity. The dual connectivity is an operation in which a predetermined terminal device consumes radio resources provided from at least two different network points (a master base station device (MeNB: Master eNB) and a secondary base station device (SeNB: Secondary eNB)). is there. In other words, dual connectivity is that a terminal device makes an RRC connection at at least two network points. In dual connectivity, the terminal devices may be connected in a RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state and by a non-ideal backhaul.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、少なくともS1-MMEに接続され、コアネットワークのモビリティアンカーの役割を果たす基地局装置をマスター基地局装置と称される。また、端末装置に対して追加の無線リソースを提供するマスター基地局装置ではない基地局装置をセカンダリー基地局装置と称される。マスター基地局装置に関連されるサービングセルのグループをマスターセルグループ(MCG:Master Cell Group)、セカンダリー基地局装置に関連されるサービングセルのグループをセカンダリーセルグループ(SCG:Secondary Cell Group)と称される場合もある。なお、セルグループは、サービングセルグループであってもよい。 In the dual connectivity, a base station device connected to at least the S1-MME and serving as a mobility anchor of the core network is referred to as a master base station device. A base station device that is not a master base station device that provides additional radio resources to the terminal device is referred to as a secondary base station device. When the serving cell group associated with the master base station device is referred to as a master cell group (MCG), and the serving cell group associated with the secondary base station device is referred to as a secondary cell group (SCG). There is also. The cell group may be a serving cell group.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、プライマリーセルは、MCGに属する。また、SCGにおいて、プライマリーセルに相当するセカンダリーセルをプライマリーセカンダリーセル(pSCell:Primary Secondary Cell)と称する。なお、pSCellをスペシャルセルやスペシャルセカンダリーセル(Special SCell:Special Secondary Cell)と称する場合もある。スペシャルSCell(スペシャルSCellを構成する基地局装置)には、PCell(PCellを構成する基地局装置)の機能の一部(例えば、PUCCHを送受信する機能など)がサポートされてもよい。また、pSCellには、PCellの一部の機能だけがサポートされてもよい。例えば、pSCellには、PDCCHを送信する機能がサポートされてもよい。また、pSCellには、CSSまたはUSSとは異なるサーチスペースを用いて、PDCCH送信を行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。例えば、USSとは異なるサーチスペースは、仕様で規定された値に基づいて決まるサーチスペース、C-RNTIとは異なるRNTIに基づいて決まるサーチスペース、RNTIとは異なる上位レイヤーで設定される値に基づいて決まるサーチスペースなどである。また、pSCellは、常に、起動の状態であってもよい。また、pSCellは、PUCCHを受信できるセルである。 In dual connectivity, the primary cell belongs to the MCG. In the SCG, a secondary cell corresponding to the primary cell is referred to as a primary secondary cell (pSCell: Primary Secondary Cell). Note that the pSCell may be referred to as a special cell or a special secondary cell (Special SCell: Special Secondary Cell). The special SCell (base station apparatus configuring the special SCell) may support a part of the function of the PCell (base station apparatus configuring the PCell) (for example, a function of transmitting and receiving PUCCH). Moreover, only some functions of PCell may be supported by pSCell. For example, the pSCell may support a function of transmitting PDCCH. In addition, the pSCell may support a function of performing PDCCH transmission using a search space different from CSS or USS. For example, a search space different from USS is based on a search space determined based on a value defined in the specification, a search space determined based on an RNTI different from C-RNTI, and a value set in an upper layer different from RNTI. Search space determined by Further, the pSCell may always be in an activated state. Moreover, pSCell is a cell which can receive PUCCH.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、データ無線ベアラ(DRB:Data Radio Bearer)は、MeNBとSeNBで個別に割り当てられてもよい。一方、シグナリング無線ベアラ(SRB:Signalling Radio Bearer)はMeNBだけに割り当てられてもよい。デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、MCGとSCGまたはPCellとpSCellでは、それぞれ個別にデュプレックスモードが設定されてもよい。デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、MCGとSCGまたはPCellとpSCellで、同期されなくてもよい。デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、MCGとSCGそれぞれにおいて、複数のタイミング調整のためのパラメータ(TAG:Timing Advance Group)が設定されてもよい。つまり、端末装置は、各CG内において、異なる複数のタイミングでの上りリンク送信が可能である。 In dual connectivity, a data radio bearer (DRB: Data Radio Bearer) may be individually allocated in the MeNB and SeNB. On the other hand, a signaling radio bearer (SRB: Signaling Radio Bearer) may be allocated only to the MeNB. In dual connectivity, duplex modes may be set individually for MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell, respectively. In dual connectivity, MCG and SCG or PCell and pSCell may not be synchronized. In the dual connectivity, a plurality of timing adjustment parameters (TAG: Timing Advance Group) may be set in each of the MCG and the SCG. That is, the terminal device can perform uplink transmission at different timings in each CG.
 デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、端末装置は、MCG内のセルに対応するUCIは、MeNB(PCell)のみに送信し、SCG内のセルに対応するUCIは、SeNB(pSCell)のみに送信することができる。例えば、UCIはSR、HARQ-ACK、および/またはCSIである。また、それぞれのUCIの送信において、PUCCHおよび/またはPUSCHを用いた送信方法はそれぞれのセルグループで適用される。 In the dual connectivity, the terminal device can transmit the UCI corresponding to the cell in the MCG only to the MeNB (PCell), and the UCI corresponding to the cell in the SCG can be transmitted only to the SeNB (pSCell). For example, UCI is SR, HARQ-ACK, and / or CSI. Further, in each UCI transmission, a transmission method using PUCCH and / or PUSCH is applied to each cell group.
 プライマリーセルでは、すべての信号が送受信可能であるが、セカンダリーセルでは、送受信できない信号がある。例えば、PUCCH(Physical Uplink Control Channel)は、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。また、PRACH(Physical Random Access Channel)は、セル間で、複数のTAG(Timing Advance Group)が設定されない限り、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。また、PBCH(Physical Broadcast Channel)は、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。また、MIB(Master Information Block)は、プライマリーセルでのみ送信される。プライマリーセカンダリーセルでは、プライマリーセルで送受信可能な信号が送受信される。例えば、PUCCHは、プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されてもよい。また、PRACHは、複数のTAGが設定されているかにかかわらず、プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されてもよい。また、PBCHやMIBがプライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されてもよい。 In the primary cell, all signals can be transmitted / received, but in the secondary cell, there are signals that cannot be transmitted / received. For example, PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. Further, PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell unless a plurality of TAGs (Timing Advance Group) are set between cells. Also, PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel) is transmitted only in the primary cell. Also, the MIB (Master Information Block) is transmitted only in the primary cell. In the primary secondary cell, signals that can be transmitted and received in the primary cell are transmitted and received. For example, PUCCH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell. Moreover, PRACH may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell irrespective of whether several TAG is set. Moreover, PBCH and MIB may be transmitted by a primary secondary cell.
 プライマリーセルでは、RLF(Radio Link Failure)が検出される。セカンダリーセルでは、RLFが検出される条件が整ってもRLFが検出されたと認識しない。プライマリーセカンダリーセルでは、条件を満たせば、RLFが検出される。プライマリーセカンダリーセルにおいて、RLFが検出された場合、プライマリーセカンダリーセルの上位層は、プライマリーセルの上位層へRLFが検出されたことを通知する。プライマリーセルでは、SPS(Semi-Persistent Scheduling)やDRX(Discontinuous Reception)を行なってもよい。セカンダリーセルでは、プライマリーセルと同じDRXを行なってもよい。セカンダリーセルにおいて、MACの設定に関する情報/パラメータは、基本的に、同じセルグループのプライマリーセル/プライマリーセカンダリーセルと共有している。一部のパラメータ(例えば、sTAG-Id)は、セカンダリーセル毎に設定されてもよい。一部のタイマーやカウンタが、プライマリーセルおよび/またはプライマリーセカンダリーセルに対してのみ適用されてもよい。セカンダリーセルに対してのみ、適用されるタイマーやカウンタが設定されてもよい。 In the primary cell, RLF (Radio Link Failure) is detected. The secondary cell does not recognize that RLF has been detected even if the conditions for detecting RLF are met. In the primary secondary cell, the RLF is detected if the condition is satisfied. When the RLF is detected in the primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the primary secondary cell notifies the upper layer of the primary cell that the RLF has been detected. In the primary cell, SPS (Semi-Persistent Scheduling) or DRX (Discontinuous Reception) may be performed. The secondary cell may perform the same DRX as the primary cell. In the secondary cell, information / parameters related to MAC settings are basically shared with the primary cell / primary secondary cell of the same cell group. Some parameters (for example, sTAG-Id) may be set for each secondary cell. Some timers and counters may be applied only to the primary cell and / or the primary secondary cell. A timer or counter that is applied only to the secondary cell may be set.
 異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミング、または、L1シグナリングを用いたセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)への切り換え(適用)条件について説明する。 Different secondary cell activation / deactivation timings or conditions for switching (applying) cells to ON / OFF (start / stop) using L1 signaling will be described.
 条件は、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されること/されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 The condition is preferably that a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set / not set. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set performs the switching.
 条件は、バンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定され、かつ、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されること/設定されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、バンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定され、かつ、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、バンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定され、かつ、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 It is preferable that the condition is that DRS is set for the carrier frequency for the band, and that a predetermined higher layer parameter is set / not set. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band and a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band and a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set performs the switching.
 条件は、バンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定されること/設定されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、バンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、DRSが設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 It is preferable that the condition is that DRS is set / not set to the carrier frequency for the band. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 for which DRS is not set performs the switching.
 条件は、LAA(Licensed assisted access)に用いられるバンド(ライセンスバンドとセルアグリゲーションされるアンライセンスバンド)に対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定されること/設定されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 It is preferable that the condition is that DRS is set / not set to the carrier frequency for a band (licensed band assisted access) used for LAA (licensed band and cell-unaggregated unlicensed band). For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is not set as the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA performs the switching.
 条件は、非LAAに用いられるバンド(LAAに用いられないバンド、従来のバンド、ライセンスドバンド)に対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定されること/設定されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、非LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、非LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数にDRSが設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 The condition is preferably that DRS is set / not set for the carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is set as a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which DRS is not set to the carrier frequency for the band used for non-LAA performs the switching.
 条件は、LAA(Licensed assisted access)に用いられるバンド(ライセンスバンドとセルアグリゲーションされるアンライセンスバンド)において(LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数に)所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されること/されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、LAAに用いられるバンドにおいて(LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数に)所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、LAAに用いられるバンドにおいて(LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数に)所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 The condition is that a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set (in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) in the band used for LAA (Licensed assisted access) (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with the license band). Preferably / not. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in the band used for LAA (for the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set in the band used for LAA (in the carrier frequency for the band used for LAA) performs the switching.
 条件は、非LAAに用いられるバンド(LAAに用いられないバンド、従来のバンド、ライセンスドバンド)において(非LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数に)所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されること/されないことであることが好ましい。例えば、非LAAに用いられるバンドにおいて(非LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数に)所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定された移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。例えば、非LAAに用いられるバンドにおいて(非LAAに用いられるバンドに対するキャリア周波数に)所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)が設定されなかった移動局装置1が、前記切り替えを行うことが好ましい。 As a condition, a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) in a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). Preferably / not. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is set in a band used for non-LAA (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) performs the switching. For example, it is preferable that the mobile station apparatus 1 in which a predetermined higher layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is not set in a band used for non-LAA (in a carrier frequency for a band used for non-LAA) performs the switching.
 なお、前記切り替えは、バンドに対するキャリア周波数に対応するセル(セカンダリーセル)に対して行われる(適用される)ことが好ましい。 Note that the switching is preferably performed (applied) to a cell (secondary cell) corresponding to a carrier frequency for a band.
 条件は、LAA(Licensed assisted access)に用いられるバンド(ライセンスバンドとセルアグリゲーションされるアンライセンスバンド)に対してセルフキャリアスケジューリングまたはクロスキャリアスケジュールングが設定されること/されないことであることが好ましい。すなわち、LAAに用いられるバンドに対応するセルでのPDCCHまたはLAAに用いられるバンドに対応するセルに対するPDCCHが検出(デコード)されること/されないことであることが好ましい。 The condition is preferably that self-carrier scheduling or cross-carrier scheduling is / are not set for a band (unlicensed band that is cell-aggregated with a license band) used for LAA (Licensed assisted access). That is, it is preferable that PDCCH in a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA or PDCCH for a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA is detected (decoded).
 条件は、非LAAに用いられるバンド(LAAに用いられないバンド、従来のバンド、ライセンスドバンド)に対してセルフキャリアスケジューリングまたはクロスキャリアスケジュールングが設定されること/されないことであることが好ましい。すなわち、非LAAに用いられるバンドに対応するセルでのPDCCHまたはLAAに用いられるバンドに対応するセルに対するPDCCHが検出(デコード)されること/されないことであることが好ましい。 The condition is preferably that self carrier scheduling or cross carrier scheduling is / is not set for a band used for non-LAA (a band not used for LAA, a conventional band, a licensed band). That is, it is preferable that PDCCH in a cell corresponding to a band used for non-LAA or PDCCH for a cell corresponding to a band used for LAA is detected (decoded).
 なお、所定の上位層パラメータ(higher layer parameter)は、異なるセカンダリーセルアクティベーション/デアクティベーションのタイミングへの切り換え(適用)に関連するパラメータ、または、L1シグナリングを用いたセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)への切り換え(適用)に関連するパラメータであってもよい。例えば、切り換え(適用)を指示することに関連する情報、もしくは、切り換え(適用)を指示しないことに関連する情報であってもよい。 The predetermined upper layer parameter (higher layer parameter) is a parameter related to switching (application) to a different secondary cell activation / deactivation timing, or ON / OFF (activation / deactivation) of a cell using L1 signaling. It may be a parameter related to switching (application) to (stop). For example, it may be information related to instructing switching (application) or information related to not instructing switching (application).
 なお、DRSが設定されることはDRSに関連するパラメータが設定されることであり、例えば、DRSに関連する物理セル識別子(PCID: physical cell ID, physCellID, physical layer cell ID)、DRSに関連する仮想セル識別子(VCID: virtual cell ID)、DRSに関連するCSI-RSリソースエレメント設定(CSI-RS RE configuration)、DRSに関連するCSI-RSサブフレーム設定(CSI-RS subframe configuration)の何れが設定されることでもよい。ここで、DRSに関連するCSI-RSサブフレーム設定とは、DRS機会(DRS occasion)におけるSSS(secondary synchronization signal)とCSI-RSとの間のサブフレームオフセットに等しいことが好ましい。 Setting DRS means setting parameters related to DRS. For example, physical cell identifiers related to DRS (PCID: physical cell ID, physCellID, physical layer cell ID) and DRS are related. Any of virtual cell identifier (VCID: virtual cell ID), CSI-RS resource element configuration (CSI-RSRE configuration) related to DRS, and CSI-RS subframe configuration (CSI-RS subframeSIconfiguration) related to DRS is set It may be done. Here, the CSI-RS subframe setting related to DRS is preferably equal to the subframe offset between the SSS (secondary synchronization signal) and the CSI-RS in the DRS opportunity (DRS occasion).
 なお、DRSの機能は、DRSに基づく下りリンクの時間領域の同期(time synchronization)、DRSに基づく下りリンクの周波数の同期(frequency synchronization)、DRSに基づくセル/送信ポイントの特定(cell/transmission point identification)、DRSに基づくRSRPの測定(RSRP measurement)、DRSに基づくRSRQの測定(RSRQ measurement)、DRSに基づく端末装置1の地理的な位置の測定(UE Positioning)、DRSに基づくCSIの測定(CSI measurement)などであってもよい。 The DRS functions include downlink time domain synchronization based on DRS (time (synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization based on DRS (frequency synchronization), and cell / transmission point identification based on DRS (cell / transmission point). identification), measurement of RSRP based on DRS (RSRP measurement), measurement of RSRQ based on DRS (RSRQ measurement), measurement of geographical location of UE 1 based on DRS (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI based on DRS ( CSI measurement).
 DRSは、複数の信号により構成される。一例として、DRSは、PSS、SSSおよびCRSにより構成される。また、移動局装置1にCSI-RSに基づくDRS測定(CSI-RS-based DRS measurement)が設定された場合、DRSは、PSS、SSS、CRSおよびCSI-RSにより構成されることが好ましい。 DRS is composed of multiple signals. As an example, DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CRS. In addition, when DRS measurement based on CSI-RS (CSI-RS-based DRS measurement) is set in the mobile station apparatus 1, the DRS is preferably configured by PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS.
 DRSは、DRS測定タイミング設定(DMTC: DRS measurement timing configurations)内のDRS機会(DRS occasion)において送信されることが好ましい。なお、DMTCは周期とオフセットによって通知される(設定される)ことが好ましい。DMTCの通知(設定)には、更に最大許容測定帯域幅(Maximum allowed measurement bandwidth)、隣接セルのMBSFNサブフレーム設定、隣接セルのTDD UL-DL configurationを用いてもよい。 The DRS is preferably transmitted in a DRS opportunity (DRS occasion) within a DRS measurement timing setting (DMTC: TCDRS measurement timing configurations). The DMTC is preferably notified (set) by the period and the offset. For DMTC notification (setting), the maximum allowed measurement bandwidth (Maximum allowed measurement) bandwidth, the MBSFN subframe setting of the neighboring cell, and the TDD UL-DL configuration of the neighboring cell may be used.
 なお、移動局装置1にCSI-RSに基づくDRS測定(CSI-RS-based DRS measurement)が設定された場合、DMTCの通知(設定)に加えて、隣接送信ポイントリスト(neighbour TPs list)が通知されてもよい。隣接送信ポイントリストは、各送信ポイントの識別に関する情報、各送信ポイントの同期を補助するための情報が含まれることが好ましい。 In addition, when DRS measurement based on CSI-RS (CSI-RS-based DRS measurement) is set in the mobile station apparatus 1, a neighbor transmission point list (neighbour TPs list) is notified in addition to DMTC notification (setting). May be. The adjacent transmission point list preferably includes information on identification of each transmission point and information for assisting synchronization of each transmission point.
 なお、移動局装置1にCRSに基づくDRS測定(CRS-based DRS measurement)が設定された場合、DMTCの通知(設定)に加えて、隣接セルリスト(neighbour cells list)が通知されてもよい。隣接セルリストは、隣接セルの物理セル識別子(PCID: physical cell ID, physCellID, physical layer cell ID)に関する情報を含むことが好ましい。 In addition, when the CRS-based DRS measurement (CRS-based DRS measurement) is set in the mobile station apparatus 1, a neighbor cell list (neighbour cells list) may be notified in addition to the DMTC notification (setting). The neighbor cell list preferably includes information on physical cell identifiers (PCIDs: “physical cell ID”, “physCell ID”, “physical cell layer ID”) of the adjacent cell.
 以下、免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)について説明する。 The following describes the unlicensed band (unlicensed band).
 免許バンド(ライセンスバンド)とは、政府または周波数管理者によって免許が与えられるバンドであって、電気通信業務用に使用されるバンドである。免許不要バンド(アンライセンスバンド)とは、無線LAN等の特定小電力無線局で使用される免許を必要としないバンドである。例えば、アンライセンスバンドは2.4GHz、および/または、5GHz(5150-5350MHz、5470-5725MHz、5725-5850MHz)であってもよい。 A license band is a band that is licensed by the government or frequency manager, and is used for telecommunication business. An unlicensed band (unlicensed band) is a band that does not require a license used in a specific low-power radio station such as a wireless LAN. For example, the unlicensed band may be 2.4 GHz and / or 5 GHz (5150-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, 5725-5850 MHz).
 例えば、アンライセンスバンドにおいてLTEに基づく通信を可能とし、ライセンスバンドのセルとアンライセンスバンドのセルでセルアグリゲーションを行うことで、効率的な通信が可能となる。なお、ライセンスバンドのセルとアンライセンスバンドのセルでセルアグリゲーションを行うことをLTE-U(LTE-Unlicensed)、LAA(Licensed assisted access)またはライセンスバンドを支援するアクセスと称する。 For example, communication based on LTE is possible in the unlicensed band, and efficient communication is possible by performing cell aggregation between the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell. Note that performing cell aggregation in a license band cell and an unlicensed band cell is referred to as LTE-U (LTE-Unlicensed), LAA (Licensed assisted access), or access supporting a license band.
 ライセンスバンドのセルとアンライセンスバンドのセルのセルアグリゲーションは、ライセンスバンドのセルをプライマリーセルに設定し、アンライセンスバンドのセルをセカンダリーセルに設定することが好ましい。 In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, it is preferable to set the license band cell as the primary cell and the unlicensed band cell as the secondary cell.
 ライセンスバンドのセルとアンライセンスバンドのセルのセルアグリゲーションにおいて、ライセンスバンドのセルとアンライセンスバンドのセルは非同期で運用されてもよい。すなわち、ライセンスバンドのセルとアンライセンスバンドのセルはデュアルコネクティビティで運用されてもよい。 In the cell aggregation of the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell, the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may be operated asynchronously. That is, the license band cell and the unlicensed band cell may be operated in dual connectivity.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは独立して(Standaloneで)利用されないことが好ましい。 It is preferable that the cell of the unlicensed band is not used independently (in Standalone).
 ライセンスバンドのセルは制御データとユーザーデータの通信に用いられ、アンライセンスバンドのセルはユーザーデータの通信に用いられることが好ましい。尚、アンライセンスバンドのセルは下りリンクの通信に使用される無線リソースのみが存在することが好ましい、換言すると、アンライセンスバンドのセルは上りリンクの通信に使用される無線リソースが存在しないことが好ましい。すなわち、アンライセンスバンドのセルは下りリンクのユーザーデータ送信のみに使用されることが好ましい。 The license band cell is preferably used for control data and user data communication, and the unlicensed band cell is preferably used for user data communication. Note that it is preferable that an unlicensed band cell has only radio resources used for downlink communication. In other words, an unlicensed band cell may not have radio resources used for uplink communication. preferable. That is, the cell of the unlicensed band is preferably used only for downlink user data transmission.
 ライセンスバンドのセルは、FDD方式、または、上りリンク-下りリンク設定0~6を用いるTDD方式が適用されることが好ましい。 It is preferable that the license band cell adopts the FDD method or the TDD method using uplink-downlink settings 0 to 6.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、FDD方式、または、上りリンク-下りリンク設定0~6を用いるTDD方式が適用されることが好ましい。 It is preferable that the FDD method or the TDD method using the uplink-downlink settings 0 to 6 is applied to the cell of the unlicensed band.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、下りリンクの通信に使用される無線リソース(下りリンクキャリア)のみが存在するFDD方式、または、上りリンク-下りリンク設定7を用いるTDD方式が適用されることが好ましい。 It is preferable that an FDD scheme in which only radio resources (downlink carriers) used for downlink communication exist or a TDD scheme using the uplink-downlink setting 7 is applied to the cell in the unlicensed band.
 なお、上りリンク-下りリンク設定が7は、無線フレーム内のサブフレームが全て下りリンクサブフレームとしてリザーブされている(予約されている)上りリンク-下りリンク設定であることが好ましい。すなわち、無線フレーム内のサブフレーム1は、スペシャルサブフレームではない。すなわち、上りリンク-下りリンク設定が7の場合において、サブフレーム0と5は下りリンク送信のためにリザーブされず、サブフレーム2は上りリンク送信のためにリザーブされない。 Note that the uplink-downlink setting of 7 is preferably an uplink-downlink setting in which all subframes in the radio frame are reserved (reserved) as downlink subframes. That is, subframe 1 in the radio frame is not a special subframe. That is, when the uplink-downlink setting is 7, subframes 0 and 5 are not reserved for downlink transmission, and subframe 2 is not reserved for uplink transmission.
 上りリンク-下りリンク設定が7の場合において、下りリンク-上りリンク・スイッチポイント周期は存在しない。 When the uplink-downlink setting is 7, there is no downlink-uplink switch point period.
 ライセンスバンドのセルは、下りリンクのアクセス方式にOFDM、上りリンクのアクセス方式にSC-FDMAが使用させることが好ましい。 For license band cells, it is preferable to use OFDM for the downlink access method and SC-FDMA for the uplink access method.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、下りリンクのアクセス方式にOFDMまたはSC-FDMAが使用させることが好ましい。なお、下りリンクのアクセス方式にSC-FDMAが使用させる場合は、シングルクラスターのSC-FDMA(周波数領域で離散配置を行わないSC-FDMA)が使用させることが好ましい。 The unlicensed band cell is preferably used by OFDM or SC-FDMA for the downlink access method. When SC-FDMA is used for the downlink access scheme, it is preferable to use single-cluster SC-FDMA (SC-FDMA that does not perform discrete arrangement in the frequency domain).
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、上りリンクのアクセス方式にOFDMまたはSC-FDMAが使用させることが好ましい。なお、上りリンクのアクセス方式にSC-FDMAが使用させる場合は、シングルクラスターのSC-FDMA(周波数領域で離散配置を行わないSC-FDMA)が使用させることが好ましい。 For unlicensed band cells, it is preferable to use OFDM or SC-FDMA for the uplink access method. When SC-FDMA is used for the uplink access method, it is preferable to use single-cluster SC-FDMA (SC-FDMA that does not perform discrete arrangement in the frequency domain).
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、ライセンスバンドのセルと異なるサブキャリア間隔で運用されることが好ましい。例えば、アンライセンスバンドのセルのサブキャリア間隔は312.5kHz、ライセンスバンドのセルのサブキャリア間隔は15kHzとして運用されることが好ましい。 Unlicensed band cells are preferably operated at different subcarrier intervals than license band cells. For example, it is preferable that the subcarrier interval of the unlicensed band cell is 312.5 kHz, and the subcarrier interval of the license band cell is 15 kHz.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、ライセンスバンドのセルと異なる無線フレーム長(サブフレーム長)で運用されることが好ましい。 The cell of the unlicensed band is preferably operated with a radio frame length (subframe length) different from that of the license band cell.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルの上りリンク(または、下りリンク)の最大送信電力は、ライセンスバンドのセルと異なることが好ましい。例えば、アンライセンスバンドのセルの上りリンクの最大送信電力は23dBmより小さいことが好ましい。 The maximum uplink (or downlink) maximum transmission power of the unlicensed band cell is preferably different from that of the license band cell. For example, the maximum uplink transmission power of an unlicensed band cell is preferably less than 23 dBm.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、送信と受信が同時に実施できないことが好ましい。 It is preferable that a cell in an unlicensed band cannot be transmitted and received simultaneously.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルで送信される下りリンクの参照信号は、ライセンスバンドのセルで送信される下りリンクの参照信号と異なることが好ましい。 The downlink reference signal transmitted in the unlicensed band cell is preferably different from the downlink reference signal transmitted in the license band cell.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、PBCH、PSS、SSS、CRS、CSI-RS、SIBのうち一部もしくは全てが送信されないことが好ましい。すなわち、アンライセンスバンドのセルは、PBCH、PSS、SSS、CRS、CSI-RS、SIBのうち一部のみが送信されることが好ましい。 It is preferable that some or all of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB are not transmitted to the unlicensed band cell. That is, it is preferable that only a part of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB is transmitted in the unlicensed band cell.
 アンライセンスバンドのセルは、PBCH、PSS、SSS、CRS、CSI-RS、SIBのうち一部もしくは全ての送信頻度がライセンスバンドのセルと異なることが好ましい。例えば、アンライセンスバンドのセルは、PBCH、PSS、SSS、CRS、CSI-RS、SIBのうち一部もしくは全ての時間領域における送信間隔がライセンスバンドのセルよりも長いことが好ましい。 The cell of the unlicensed band is preferably different from the cell of the license band in the transmission frequency of some or all of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS and SIB. For example, an unlicensed band cell preferably has a longer transmission interval in a part or all of the time domain of PBCH, PSS, SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, and SIB than a license band cell.
 アンライセンスバンドのランダムアクセスのためのリソースが存在しないことが好ましい。 It is preferable that there are no resources for random access of unlicensed bands.
 基地局装置3は、アンライセンスバンドのセルにおける通信と、同一周波数を使用する他の無線通信システムにおける通信との衝突を避けるための衝突回避手段を備えることが好ましい。例えば、基地局装置がアンライセンスバンドのセルにおける通信を開始する前に、送信しようとする周波数(チャネル)の利用状況を検知して、同一周波数で複数の搬送波を送信しないよう、通信中であれば一定時間たってから再度通信を試みる機能(キャリアセンス、LBT: Listen Before Talk)を備えることが好ましい。 The base station device 3 preferably includes collision avoidance means for avoiding a collision between communication in an unlicensed band cell and communication in another wireless communication system using the same frequency. For example, before the base station apparatus starts communication in an unlicensed band cell, it may be in communication so that it detects the usage status of the frequency (channel) to be transmitted and does not transmit multiple carriers at the same frequency. For example, it is preferable to have a function (carrier sense, LBT: Listen Before Talk) for attempting communication again after a certain time.
 基地局装置3と移動局装置1の通信に使用可能なバンド(E-UTRA operating bands)は、基地局装置3と移動局装置1が共有するテーブルによって管理されてもよい。例えば、通信に使用可能なバンド(E-UTRA operating bands)はインデックスで管理され、所定のインデックスに対応するバンドがライセンスバンドであり、所定のインデックスに対応するバンドがアンライセンスバンドであってもよい。尚、通信に使用可能なバンド(E-UTRAoperating bands)のインデックスはFreqBandIndicatorとして端末能力情報(UECapabilityInformation)のメッセージとして移動局装置1から送信されてもよい。尚、通信に使用可能なバンド(E-UTRA operating bands)のインデックスは、上りリンクとして運用されるバンドと下りリンクとして運用されるバンドと多重化モード(FDD方式、または、TDD方式)が関連付けられていることが好ましい。 Bands (E-UTRA operating bands) that can be used for communication between the base station device 3 and the mobile station device 1 may be managed by a table shared by the base station device 3 and the mobile station device 1. For example, bands that can be used for communication (E-UTRA 可能 な operating 通信 bands) may be managed by an index, a band corresponding to a predetermined index may be a license band, and a band corresponding to a predetermined index may be an unlicensed band. . The index of bands (E-UTRAoperatingUbands) that can be used for communication may be transmitted from the mobile station apparatus 1 as a message of terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation) as FreqBandIndicator. In addition, the band (E-UTRA operating band) index usable for communication is associated with a band operated as an uplink, a band operated as a downlink, and a multiplexing mode (FDD system or TDD system). It is preferable.
 移動局装置1がアンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能(能力)をサポートしている場合、アンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能をサポートしているか否かを基地局装置3に通知してもよい。すなわち、アンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能のサポートに関する情報を端末能力情報(UECapabilityInformation)のメッセージとして移動局装置1から送信されてもよい。例えば、アンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能のサポートに関する情報は、物理レイヤーに関するパラメータ(PhyLayerParameters)に含まれてもよい。 When the mobile station apparatus 1 supports a function (capability) related to communication in the unlicensed band, the base station apparatus 3 may be notified whether the function related to communication in the unlicensed band is supported. That is, information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band may be transmitted from the mobile station apparatus 1 as a message of terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation). For example, information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band may be included in parameters (PhyLayerParameters) related to the physical layer.
 移動局装置1がアンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能をサポートしている場合、アンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能のサポートに関する情報はバンド毎に保持(設定)され、かつ、端末能力情報(UECapabilityInformation)のメッセージとして移動局装置1から送信されてもよい。例えば、アンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能のサポートに関する情報は、無線周波数に関するパラメータ(RF-Parameters)に含まれてもよい。 When the mobile station apparatus 1 supports functions related to communication in the unlicensed band, information related to support of functions related to communication in the unlicensed band is held (set) for each band, and terminal capability information (UECapabilityInformation) May be transmitted from the mobile station apparatus 1 as a message. For example, information related to support of functions related to communication in an unlicensed band may be included in parameters (RF-Parameters) related to radio frequencies.
 なお、移動局装置1のアンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能とは、キャリアセンスまたはLBTに関する機能であってもよい。なお、移動局装置1のアンライセンスバンドでの通信に関する機能とは、上りリンク-下りリンク設定が7に関する機能であってもよい。 Note that the function related to communication in the unlicensed band of the mobile station apparatus 1 may be a function related to carrier sense or LBT. Note that the function related to communication in the unlicensed band of the mobile station apparatus 1 may be a function related to the uplink-downlink setting of 7.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1とデータを送受信しない場合であっても、アイドル状態の端末装置1が基地局装置3に接続させるために、PSS/SSS、CRS、PBCH、SIBなどの同期信号、参照信号、報知情報を送信する。そのため、それらの信号はセル間干渉を発生させる。また、それらの信号が常時送信されることによって、基地局装置3の電力が浪費されることになる。 Even if the base station apparatus 3 does not transmit / receive data to / from the terminal apparatus 1, in order for the terminal apparatus 1 in the idle state to connect to the base station apparatus 3, a synchronization signal such as PSS / SSS, CRS, PBCH, SIB, etc. A reference signal and broadcast information are transmitted. Therefore, those signals generate inter-cell interference. Moreover, the power of the base station apparatus 3 is wasted by constantly transmitting these signals.
 そこで、基地局装置3は、ON状態(動作中の状態、起動の状態)とOFF状態(停止の状態)に遷移する。基地局装置3が端末装置1とデータを送受信しない場合、基地局装置3はOFF状態に遷移することができる。基地局装置3が端末装置1とデータを送受信する場合、基地局装置3はON状態に遷移することができる。 Therefore, the base station apparatus 3 transitions to an ON state (operating state, a starting state) and an OFF state (stopping state). When the base station device 3 does not transmit / receive data to / from the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can transition to the OFF state. When the base station device 3 transmits / receives data to / from the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can transition to the ON state.
 例えば、基地局装置3が停止の状態とは、PSS/SSS、CRS、PBCH、PDCCH、PDSCHのうち、少なくとも1つが送信されない状態である。例えば、1ハーフフレーム以上(5サブフレーム以上)PSS/SSSが送信されない状態である。例えば、基地局装置3が停止の状態とは、DRSのみが送信されている状態である。なお、基地局装置3は、停止の状態でも基地局装置の受信部で受信処理を行ってもよい。 For example, the state in which the base station apparatus 3 is stopped is a state in which at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, PBCH, PDCCH, and PDSCH is not transmitted. For example, PSS / SSS is not transmitted for one half frame or more (5 subframes or more). For example, the state where the base station device 3 is stopped is a state where only DRS is transmitted. Note that the base station apparatus 3 may perform reception processing at the receiving unit of the base station apparatus even in a stopped state.
 セル/基地局装置3が起動の状態とは、少なくともPSS/SSS、CRSのうち、少なくとも1つが送信される状態である。例えば、1ハーフフレーム中にPSS/SSSが送信される状態である。 The state in which the cell / base station apparatus 3 is activated is a state in which at least one of PSS / SSS and CRS is transmitted. For example, PSS / SSS is transmitted in one half frame.
 また、基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態は、端末装置1が所定のチャネルまたは所定の信号に対する処理(想定、動作)で関連付けられてもよい。ここで処理は、モニタリング、受信処理または送信処理などである。すなわち、端末装置1は基地局装置3がON状態またはOFF状態であることを認識しなくてもよく、端末装置1は所定のチャネルまたは所定の信号に対する処理を切り替えればよい。本実施形態における説明において、基地局装置3における起動の状態と停止の状態との遷移は、端末装置1における所定のチャネルまたは所定の信号に対する処理の切り替えを含む。基地局装置3における起動の状態は、端末装置1における所定のチャネルまたは所定の信号に対する第1の処理に相当する。基地局装置3における停止の状態は、端末装置1における所定のチャネルまたは所定の信号に対する第2の処理に相当する。 In addition, the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3 may be associated by processing (assuming or operation) of the terminal device 1 with respect to a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal. Here, the processing is monitoring, reception processing, transmission processing, or the like. That is, the terminal device 1 does not need to recognize that the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, and the terminal device 1 may switch processing for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal. In the description of the present embodiment, the transition between the start state and the stop state in the base station device 3 includes switching of processing for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal device 1. The activation state in the base station device 3 corresponds to the first process for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal device 1. The stop state in the base station apparatus 3 corresponds to the second process for a predetermined channel or a predetermined signal in the terminal apparatus 1.
 例えば、基地局装置3のON状態は、端末装置1が従来の端末装置と同様の処理が可能な状態である。基地局装置3のON状態における具体的な例は以下の通りである。端末装置1はPSS、SSSおよびPBCHを受信することを期待する。端末装置1は所定のサブフレームにおいてPDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHのモニタリングをする。端末装置1は設定されたCSI報告モードに基づいてCSI報告を行なう。端末装置1はCSI報告のための参照信号(例えば、CRSまたはCSI-RS)およびCSI参照リソースが存在することを期待する。 For example, the ON state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as a conventional terminal device. A specific example of the base station device 3 in the ON state is as follows. The terminal device 1 expects to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH. The terminal device 1 monitors PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in a predetermined subframe. The terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting based on the set CSI reporting mode. The terminal apparatus 1 expects a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) for CSI reporting and a CSI reference resource to exist.
 例えば、基地局装置3のOFF状態は、端末装置1が従来の端末装置とは異なる処理を行う状態である。基地局装置3のOFF状態における具体的な例は以下の通りである。端末装置1はPSS、SSSおよびPBCHを受信することを期待しない。端末装置1は全てのサブフレームにおいてPDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHのモニタリングをしない。端末装置1は設定されたCSI報告モードに関わらずCSI報告をしない。端末装置1はCSI報告のための参照信号(例えば、CRSまたはCSI-RS)およびCSI参照リソースが存在することを期待しない。 For example, the OFF state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 performs processing different from that of the conventional terminal device. A specific example of the base station device 3 in the OFF state is as follows. The terminal device 1 does not expect to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH. The terminal device 1 does not monitor PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in all subframes. The terminal device 1 does not report CSI regardless of the set CSI report mode. The terminal device 1 does not expect the presence of a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) and a CSI reference resource for CSI reporting.
 基地局装置3における起動の状態と停止の状態との遷移は、例えば、端末装置1の接続状態、前記基地局装置3に接続された端末装置1のデータリクエスト状況、端末装置1からのCSI測定および/またはRRM測定の情報、などに基づいて決定される。 The transition between the start state and the stop state in the base station device 3 includes, for example, the connection state of the terminal device 1, the data request status of the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3, and the CSI measurement from the terminal device 1. And / or RRM measurement information.
 基地局装置3は、基地局装置3における起動の状態と停止の状態との遷移に関する情報(セル状態情報)を、端末装置1に対して、明示的または黙示的に設定または通知することができる。例えば、基地局装置3は、セル状態情報を、RRC、MAC、PDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHを用いて、端末装置1に対して明示的に通知する。基地局装置3は、セル状態情報を、所定のチャネルまたは信号の有無に応じて、端末装置1に対して黙示的に通知する。 The base station apparatus 3 can explicitly or implicitly set or notify the terminal apparatus 1 of information (cell state information) regarding transition between the activated state and the deactivated state in the base station apparatus 3. . For example, the base station apparatus 3 explicitly notifies the terminal apparatus 1 of the cell state information using RRC, MAC, PDCCH and / or EPDCCH. The base station device 3 implicitly notifies the cell state information to the terminal device 1 according to the presence or absence of a predetermined channel or signal.
 起動の状態の基地局装置3が停止の状態へ遷移する手続き(セル状態情報の通知)の一例について説明する。 An example of a procedure (cell state information notification) in which the activated base station apparatus 3 transitions to a stopped state will be described.
 端末装置1が接続している基地局装置3(サービングセル)は、端末装置1の接続状態、端末装置1のデータの状況、端末装置1の測定の情報に基づいて、起動の状態を停止の状態に遷移させるか否かを決定する。停止の状態に遷移させると判断した基地局装置3は、周囲セルの基地局装置3に停止の状態に遷移する情報を送信し、セルの停止準備を行う。なお、起動の状態を停止の状態に遷移させるか否かの決定、および、停止の状態に遷移する情報の送信は、サービングセルで行われなくてもよく、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)、S-GW(Serving Gateway)で決定および送信されてもよい。セルの停止準備では、前記基地局装置3に端末装置1が接続されている場合に、端末装置1に対して周囲セルにハンドオーバーさせる指示を送信、もしくは、デアクティベーションさせる指示を送信、などを行う。セルの停止準備によって接続された端末装置1がいない前記サービングセルは、起動の状態から停止の状態へ遷移する。 The base station device 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal device 1 is connected has its activation state stopped based on the connection state of the terminal device 1, the data state of the terminal device 1, and the measurement information of the terminal device 1. It is determined whether or not to transit to. The base station apparatus 3 that has determined to shift to the stop state transmits information to shift to the stop state to the base station apparatus 3 of the surrounding cells, and prepares for cell stop. Note that the determination as to whether or not to change the activation state to the stop state and the transmission of information that changes to the stop state may not be performed in the serving cell. For example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), S -It may be determined and transmitted by a GW (Serving Gateway). In the cell stop preparation, when the terminal device 1 is connected to the base station device 3, the terminal device 1 is instructed to hand over to the surrounding cell, or the deactivation is transmitted. Do. The serving cell to which no terminal device 1 is connected due to cell stop preparation transitions from a start state to a stop state.
 端末装置1が停止の状態の基地局装置3と通信を行う場合に、前記基地局装置3は、停止の状態から起動の状態に遷移する。なお、停止から起動の状態に遷移するまでの時間および起動から停止の状態に遷移するまでの時間を遷移時間(Transition Time)と称する。遷移時間を短くすることによって、基地局装置3の消費電力や種々の干渉を低減することができる。 When the terminal device 1 communicates with the base station device 3 in a stopped state, the base station device 3 transitions from a stopped state to a started state. The time from the stop to the transition to the start state and the time from the start to the transition to the stop state are referred to as a transition time (Transition Time). By shortening the transition time, the power consumption and various interferences of the base station apparatus 3 can be reduced.
 停止の状態の基地局装置3が起動の状態へ遷移するか否かは、例えば、端末装置1からの上りリンク参照信号、端末装置1からのセルの検出情報、端末装置1からの物理層の測定の情報、などに基づいて決定される。 Whether or not the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state transitions to the activated state includes, for example, an uplink reference signal from the terminal apparatus 1, cell detection information from the terminal apparatus 1, and physical layer information from the terminal apparatus 1. It is determined based on measurement information.
 物理層の測定の情報に基づく停止の状態の基地局装置3が起動の状態へ遷移する手続きの一例について説明する。 An example of a procedure in which the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state transitions to the activated state based on the physical layer measurement information will be described.
 端末装置1が接続している基地局装置3(サービングセル)と停止の状態の基地局装置3(隣接セル)は、バックホールを介してDRSの設定を共有する。また、サービングセルは、前記端末装置1に前記DRSの設定を通知する。隣接セルは、DRSを送信する。端末装置1は、隣接セルから送信されたDRSを、サービングセルから通知されたDRSの設定に基づいて検出する。また、端末装置1は、隣接セルから送信されたDRSを用いて物理層の測定を行なう。端末装置1は、サービングセルに測定の報告を行う。サービングセルは、端末装置1からの測定の報告に基づいて、停止の状態の基地局装置3を起動の状態に遷移させるか否かの決定を行ない、起動の状態に遷移させることが決定した場合はバックホールを介して起動を指示する情報を停止の状態の基地局装置3に通知する。なお、停止の状態を起動の状態に遷移させるか否かの決定、および、起動を指示する情報の送信は、サービングセルで行われなくてもよく、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)、S-GW(Serving Gateway)で決定および送信されてもよい。起動を指示する情報を受けた隣接セルは、停止の状態から起動の状態へ遷移する。 The base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal apparatus 1 is connected and the stopped base station apparatus 3 (adjacent cell) share the DRS settings via the backhaul. Further, the serving cell notifies the terminal device 1 of the setting of the DRS. The neighboring cell transmits DRS. The terminal device 1 detects the DRS transmitted from the neighboring cell based on the DRS setting notified from the serving cell. Further, the terminal device 1 performs physical layer measurement using the DRS transmitted from the adjacent cell. The terminal device 1 reports the measurement to the serving cell. If the serving cell determines whether or not to transition the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state to the activated state based on the measurement report from the terminal device 1, and determines to transition to the activated state Information indicating start-up is notified to the base station apparatus 3 in a stopped state via the backhaul. Note that the determination as to whether or not to change the stop state to the start state and the transmission of information instructing the start may not be performed by the serving cell, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), S-GW (Serving 決定 Gateway) may be determined and transmitted. A neighboring cell that has received information instructing activation transitions from a stopped state to an activated state.
 物理層の測定の情報に基づく停止の状態の基地局装置3が起動の状態へ遷移する手続きの一例が説明される。 An example of a procedure in which the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state based on the physical layer measurement information transitions to the activated state will be described.
 端末装置が接続している基地局装置3(サービングセル)と停止の状態の基地局装置3(隣接セル)は、バックホールを介して端末装置1のSRSの設定を共有する。また、サービングセルは、前記端末装置1に前記SRSの設定を通知する。端末装置1は、前記SRSの設定またはSRS要求の指示に基づいてSRSを送信する。隣接セルは、端末装置1から送信されたSRSを検出する。また、隣接セルは、端末装置1から送信されたSRSを用いて物理層の測定を行う。隣接セルは、SRSによる測定結果に基づいて、基地局装置3を起動の状態に遷移させるか否かの決定を行い、停止の状態から起動の状態へ遷移する。なお、停止の状態を起動の状態に遷移させるか否かの決定は、隣接セルで行われなくてもよく、例えば、サービングセル、MME(Mobility Management Entity)、S-GW(Serving Gateway)で決定および送信されてもよい。この場合、隣接セルは、SRSを用いて物理層の測定を行った後、サービングセル、MME、S-GWに測定結果を送信し、起動を指示する情報を受信する。 The base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) to which the terminal apparatus is connected and the base station apparatus 3 (adjacent cell) in a stopped state share the SRS setting of the terminal apparatus 1 via the backhaul. Further, the serving cell notifies the terminal device 1 of the setting of the SRS. The terminal device 1 transmits the SRS based on the setting of the SRS or the instruction of the SRS request. The neighboring cell detects the SRS transmitted from the terminal device 1. Further, the adjacent cell performs physical layer measurement using the SRS transmitted from the terminal device 1. Based on the measurement result by SRS, the adjacent cell determines whether or not to shift the base station device 3 to the activated state, and transitions from the stopped state to the activated state. The determination as to whether or not to change the stop state to the start state does not have to be performed in the neighboring cell. For example, the determination is performed by the serving cell, MME (Mobility Management Entity), and S-GW (Serving Gateway). May be sent. In this case, the neighboring cell performs measurement of the physical layer using the SRS, and then transmits the measurement result to the serving cell, the MME, and the S-GW, and receives information instructing activation.
 サービングセルは、端末装置1に対して周囲セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報を通知してもよい。端末装置1は、セルの起動の状態または停止の状態を認知することで、端末装置1の振る舞いを切り替える。前記端末装置1の振る舞いは、例えば、干渉の測定方法などである。 The serving cell may notify the terminal device 1 of information indicating the activation / deactivation state of surrounding cells. The terminal device 1 switches the behavior of the terminal device 1 by recognizing the start state or the stop state of the cell. The behavior of the terminal device 1 is, for example, an interference measurement method.
 セル状態情報(セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報)の通知方法の一例について説明する。 An example of a method for notifying cell state information (information indicating a cell start / stop state) will be described.
 対象セルが起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、L1シグナリング(Layer 1 signaling)によって通知される。言い換えると、対象セルが起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、PDCCHもしくはEPDCCHによって通知される。対象セルに対応する1ビットが割り当てられ、0(false、disable)は停止を示し、1(true、enable)は起動を示す。対象セルに対応するビットは、集合するビットマップとして構成し、同時に複数のセルに対して起動/停止の状態を通知されてもよい。ビットと対象セルの紐付けは、専用RRCシグナリングによって通知される。 Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell is notified by L1 signaling (Layer 1 signaling). In other words, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell is notified by PDCCH or EPDCCH. One bit corresponding to the target cell is assigned, 0 (false, disable) indicates stop, and 1 (true, enable) indicates activation. Bits corresponding to the target cell may be configured as an aggregated bitmap, and a plurality of cells may be notified of activation / deactivation states at the same time. The association between the bit and the target cell is notified by dedicated RRC signaling.
 起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、下りリンク制御情報(DCI: Downlink Control Information)フォーマット1Cで通知される。なお、起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、DCIフォーマット3/3Aで通知されてもよい。なお、起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、DCIフォーマット1Cと同じペイロードサイズ(ビット数)のフォーマットで通知されてもよい。 Information indicating the start / stop state is notified in downlink control information (DCI: Downlink Control Information) format 1C. Information indicating the start / stop state may be notified in the DCI format 3 / 3A. Note that the information indicating the start / stop state may be notified in the same payload size (number of bits) format as the DCI format 1C.
 次に、DCIフォーマットについて説明する。 Next, the DCI format will be described.
 DCIフォーマットは、上りリンクスケジューリングに関連するDCIフォーマットと下りリンクスケジューリングに関連するDCIフォーマットがある。上りリンクスケジューリングに関連するDCIフォーマットを上りリンクグラント、下りリンクスケジューリングに関連するDCIフォーマットを下りリンクグラント(下りリンクアサインメント)と称する。また、1つのDCIフォーマットを、複数の端末装置1に対して、送信してもよい。例えば、送信電力制御コマンド(TPC command: Transmission Power Control command)のみを送信する場合には、複数の端末装置1に対してまとめて送信してもよい。そのようなスケジューリング(またはトリガリング)をグループスケジューリング(グループトリガリング)と称する。端末装置1は、個別にインデックスが割り当てられ、そのインデックスに基づくビットを検出する。 The DCI format includes a DCI format related to uplink scheduling and a DCI format related to downlink scheduling. A DCI format related to uplink scheduling is called an uplink grant, and a DCI format related to downlink scheduling is called a downlink grant (downlink assignment). One DCI format may be transmitted to a plurality of terminal devices 1. For example, when transmitting only the transmission power control command (TPC command: “Transmission“ Power Control ”command), the command may be transmitted to a plurality of terminal devices 1 in a batch. Such scheduling (or triggering) is called group scheduling (group triggering). The terminal device 1 is individually assigned an index and detects bits based on the index.
 DCIフォーマット0は、1つの上りリンクセルにおけるPUSCHのスケジューリングに対して用いられる。 DCI format 0 is used for PUSCH scheduling in one uplink cell.
 DCIフォーマット1は、1つのセルにおける1つのPDSCHコードワードのスケジューリングに対して用いられる。 DCI format 1 is used for scheduling one PDSCH codeword in one cell.
 DCIフォーマット1Aは、1つのセルにおける1つのPDSCHコードワードのコンパクトスケジューリングおよびPDCCHオーダーによって開始されるランダムアクセス処理に対して用いられる。なお、PDCCHオーダーに相当するDCIは、PDCCHもしくはEPDCCHによって伝送されてもよい。DCIフォーマット0とDCIフォーマット1Aは、同じビット情報フィールドを用いて送信することができ、あるビットフィールドに示される値に基づいて、端末装置1は、受信したビット情報フィールドにマッピングされたDCIフォーマットがDCIフォーマット0であるかDCIフォーマット1Aであるかを判別する。 DCI format 1A is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell and random access processing started by PDCCH order. DCI corresponding to the PDCCH order may be transmitted by PDCCH or EPDCCH. The DCI format 0 and the DCI format 1A can be transmitted using the same bit information field. Based on the value indicated in a certain bit field, the terminal device 1 has a DCI format mapped to the received bit information field. It is determined whether it is DCI format 0 or DCI format 1A.
 DCIフォーマット1Bは、プレコーディング情報を伴う1つのセルにおける1つのPDSCHコードワードのコンパクトスケジューリングに対して用いられる。 DCI format 1B is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell with precoding information.
 DCIフォーマット1Cは、マルチキャスト制御チャネル(MCCH: Multicast Control Channel)の変化(変更)を通知するため、および、1つのPDSCHコードワードのコンパクトスケジューリングを行なうために用いられる。また、DCIフォーマット1Cは、RA-RNTI(Random Access - Radio Network Temporary Identifier)を用いてスクランブルされることによって、ランダムアクセス応答を通知するために用いられてもよい。ここで、コンパクトスケジューリングとは、例えば、狭帯域幅のPDSCHをスケジューリングすることである。DCIフォーマットサイズは、スケジューリングを行なうPDSCHに用いられる帯域幅に依存して決定される。帯域幅が狭いと、必要なDCIフォーマットサイズも小さくすることができる。また、DCIフォーマット1Cは、ダイナミックTDD(第1のタイプ(モード)のTDD)に関するRNTI(例えば、eIMTA-RNTI)を用いてスクランブルされることによって、TDD UL-DL設定を示す情報がセットされてもよい。ダイナミックTDDを第1のタイプ(モード)のTDDとすると、従来のTDDは、第2のタイプ(モード)のTDDと称する。 The DCI format 1C is used for notifying a change (change) of a multicast control channel (MCCH: “Multicast Control Channel”) and for performing compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword. Further, the DCI format 1C may be used for notifying a random access response by being scrambled using RA-RNTI (Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier). Here, compact scheduling refers to, for example, scheduling a narrow bandwidth PDSCH. The DCI format size is determined depending on the bandwidth used for the PDSCH that performs scheduling. If the bandwidth is narrow, the required DCI format size can also be reduced. Also, the DCI format 1C is scrambled using an RNTI (eg, eIMTA-RNTI) related to dynamic TDD (first type (mode) TDD), so that information indicating the TDD UL-DL setting is set. Also good. If the dynamic TDD is a first type (mode) TDD, the conventional TDD is referred to as a second type (mode) TDD.
 ダイナミックTDDは、上りリンク/下りリンクの通信状況に応じて、TDD UL-DL設定を、L1シグナリングを用いて、切り替えるTDDのことである。また、ダイナミックTDDは、干渉管理およびトラフィックの適応制御を拡張するために用いられる。ダイナミックTDDをeIMTA(enhanced Interference Management and Traffic Adaptation)やTDD-ModeAと称する場合もある。 Dynamic TDD refers to TDD that switches TDD UL-DL settings using L1 signaling according to uplink / downlink communication status. Dynamic TDD is also used to extend interference management and adaptive traffic control. The dynamic TDD may be referred to as eIMTA (enhanced Interference Management and Traffic Management) or TDD-ModeA.
 DCIフォーマット1Dは、プレコーディングおよび電力オフセットに関する情報を伴う1つのセルにおける1つのPDSCHコードワードのコンパクトスケジューリングに対して用いられる。 DCI format 1D is used for compact scheduling of one PDSCH codeword in one cell with information on precoding and power offset.
 DCIフォーマット2/2A/2B/2C/2Dは、1つのPDSCHコードワードだけでなく、2つの(または複数の)PDSCHコードワードのスケジューリングに対して用いられる。 DCI format 2 / 2A / 2B / 2C / 2D is used not only for scheduling one PDSCH codeword but also for scheduling two (or multiple) PDSCH codewords.
 DCIフォーマット3/3Aは、複数の端末装置1に対して、PUSCHまたはPUCCHの送信電力を調整するための送信電力制御コマンドの値を示す。端末装置1は、自局に割り当てられたインデックス(TPC-Index)に対応するビット情報を検出することによって、PUSCHまたはPUCCHに対応する送信電力制御コマンドの値を検出することができる。また、DCIフォーマット3/3Aは、スクランブルされるRNTIの種類に応じて、PUSCHに対する送信電力制御コマンドを示すかPUCCHに対する送信電力制御コマンドを示すかが判別される。 DCI format 3 / 3A indicates the value of a transmission power control command for adjusting the transmission power of PUSCH or PUCCH for a plurality of terminal devices 1. The terminal device 1 can detect the value of the transmission power control command corresponding to the PUSCH or the PUCCH by detecting the bit information corresponding to the index (TPC-Index) assigned to the own station. Also, in DCI format 3 / 3A, it is determined whether a transmission power control command for PUSCH or a transmission power control command for PUCCH is indicated according to the type of scrambled RNTI.
 DCIフォーマット4は、マルチアンテナポート送信モードを伴う1つの上りリンクセルにおけるPUSCHのスケジューリングに対して用いられる。 DCI format 4 is used for PUSCH scheduling in one uplink cell with multi-antenna port transmission mode.
 巡回冗長検査(CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check)は、DCI送信のエラー検出のために用いられる。CRCは、各RNTIでスクランブルされる。 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is used to detect DCI transmission errors. The CRC is scrambled with each RNTI.
 CRCパリティビットは、C-RNTI(Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、SPS C-RNTI(Semi Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、SI-RNTI(System Information-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、P-RNTI(Paging-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、RA-RNTI(Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、TPC-PUCCH-RNTI(Transmit Power Control-Physical Uplink Control Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、TPC-PUSCH-RNTI(Transmit Power Control-Physical Uplink Shared Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、一時的C-RNTI、M-RNTI(MBMS(Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services)-Radio Network Temporary Identifier)、または、TDD-ModeA-RNTIでスクランブルされる。 CRC parity bits include C-RNTI (Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), SPS C-RNTI (Semi-Persistent Scheduling Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), SI-RNTI (System Information Radio Network Temporary Identifier), P-RNTI ( Paging-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), RA-RNTI (Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), TPC-PUCCH-RNTI (Transmit Power Control-Physical Uplink Control Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier), TPC-PUSCH-RNTI (Transmit It is scrambled by Control-Physical Uplink Shared Channel-Radio Network Temporary Identifier, temporary C-RNTI, M-RNTI (MBMS (Multimedia Broadcast Services) -Radio Network Temporary Identifier), or TDD-Mode A-RNTI.
 C-RNTIおよびSPS C-RNTIは、セル内において端末装置1を識別するための識別子である。C-RNTIは、単一のサブフレームにおけるPDSCHまたはPUSCHを制御するために用いられる。 C-RNTI and SPS C-RNTI are identifiers for identifying the terminal device 1 in the cell. C-RNTI is used to control PDSCH or PUSCH in a single subframe.
 SPS C-RNTIは、PDSCHまたはPUSCHのリソースを周期的に割り当てるために用いられる。SI-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、SIB(System Information Block)を制御するために用いられる。 SPS C-RNTI is used to periodically allocate PDSCH or PUSCH resources. A control channel having a CRC scrambled by SI-RNTI is used to control SIB (System Information Block).
 P-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、ページングを制御するために用いられる。 The control channel with CRC scrambled with P-RNTI is used to control paging.
 RA-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、RACHに対するレスポンスを制御するために用いられる。 A control channel having a CRC scrambled with RA-RNTI is used to control a response to RACH.
 TPC-PUCCH-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、PUCCHの電力制御を行うために用いられる。TPC-PUSCH-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、PUSCHの電力制御を行なうために用いられる。 A control channel having a CRC scrambled by TPC-PUCCH-RNTI is used for power control of PUCCH. A control channel having a CRC scrambled by TPC-PUSCH-RNTI is used to perform power control of PUSCH.
 一時的C-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、C-RNTIにより識別されていない端末装置のために用いられる。 A control channel having a CRC scrambled with a temporary C-RNTI is used for a terminal device not identified by the C-RNTI.
 M-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、MBMSを制御するために用いられる。 A control channel having a CRC scrambled with M-RNTI is used to control MBMS.
 TDD-ModeA-RNTIでスクランブルされたCRCを有する制御チャネルは、動的TDDにおいて各TDDサービングセルのTDD UL/DL設定の情報を端末装置1に通知するために用いられる。 The control channel having the CRC scrambled by TDD-ModeA-RNTI is used to notify the terminal device 1 of the TDD UL / DL setting information of each TDD serving cell in dynamic TDD.
 なお、上記のRNTIに限らず、新たなRNTIを用いてDCIフォーマットをスクランブルされてもよい。 Note that the DCI format may be scrambled using a new RNTI, not limited to the above RNTI.
 以下では、PDCCHまたはEPDCCHの詳細について説明する。 Hereinafter, the details of PDCCH or EPDCCH will be described.
 各サービングセルの制御領域は、CCEのセットで構成される。CCEは0からNCCE,k-1で番号付けされる。ここで、NCCE,kは、サブフレームkの制御領域内のCCEの総数である。 The control area of each serving cell is composed of a set of CCEs. CCEs are numbered from 0 to N CCE, k -1. Here, N CCE, k is the total number of CCEs in the control region of subframe k.
 端末装置1は、制御情報に対して上位層シグナリングによって設定された1つまたは複数のアクティベートされたサービングセルのPDCCH候補のセットをモニタする。ここで、モニタリングとは、全てのモニタされるDCIフォーマットに対応するセット内の各PDCCHのデコードを試みることである。 The terminal device 1 monitors a set of PDCCH candidates of one or more activated serving cells set by control layer information through higher layer signaling. Here, monitoring means trying to decode each PDCCH in the set corresponding to all monitored DCI formats.
 モニタするPDCCH候補のセットは、サーチスペースと呼称される。サーチスペースには、共有サーチスペース(CSS)と端末固有サーチスペース(USS)が定義される。 A set of PDCCH candidates to be monitored is called a search space. In the search space, a shared search space (CSS) and a terminal-specific search space (USS) are defined.
 CSS(Common Search Space)は、基地局装置3(セル、送信点)に固有のパラメータおよび/または予め規定されたパラメータを用いて設定されるサーチスペースである。例えば、CSSは、複数の端末装置で共通に用いることができるサーチスペースである。そのため、基地局装置3は、複数の端末装置で共通の制御チャネルをCSSにマッピングすることにより、制御チャネルを送信するためのリソースが低減できる。 CSS (Common Search Space) is a search space set using parameters specific to the base station apparatus 3 (cell, transmission point) and / or parameters defined in advance. For example, CSS is a search space that can be used in common by a plurality of terminal devices. Therefore, the base station apparatus 3 can reduce resources for transmitting a control channel by mapping a common control channel to a CSS in a plurality of terminal apparatuses.
 USS(UE-specific Search Space)は、少なくとも端末装置1に固有のパラメータを用いて設定されるサーチスペースである。そのため、USSは、端末装置1に固有の制御チャネルを個別に送信することができるため、基地局装置3は端末装置1に対して効率的に制御できる。 The USS (UE-specific Search Space) is a search space set using at least parameters specific to the terminal device 1. Therefore, since the USS can individually transmit a control channel specific to the terminal device 1, the base station device 3 can efficiently control the terminal device 1.
 なお、CSSは、端末装置1に固有のパラメータをさらに用いて設定されてもよい。その場合、端末装置1に固有のパラメータは、複数の端末装置の間で同じ値になるように設定されることが好ましい。CSSが端末装置1に固有のパラメータをさらに用いて設定された場合でも、そのCSSは、同じパラメータに設定された複数の端末装置の間で共通になる。例えば、複数の端末装置の間で同じパラメータに設定される単位は、セル、送信点、UEグループなどである。同じパラメータに設定された複数の端末装置は、そのCSSにマッピングされる共通の制御チャネルを受信することができるため、制御チャネルを送信するためのリソースが低減できる。なお、そのようなサーチスペースは、CSSではなく、USSと呼称されてもよい。すなわち、複数の端末装置に共通のサーチスペースであるUSSが設定されてもよい。1つの端末装置に固有のUSSは第1のUSSとも呼称され、複数の端末装置に共通のUSSは第2のUSSとも呼称される。 Note that the CSS may be set by further using parameters unique to the terminal device 1. In that case, it is preferable that the parameters unique to the terminal device 1 are set to have the same value among the plurality of terminal devices. Even when the CSS is set using parameters specific to the terminal device 1, the CSS is common among a plurality of terminal devices set to the same parameter. For example, the unit set to the same parameter among a plurality of terminal devices is a cell, a transmission point, a UE group, and the like. Since a plurality of terminal devices set to the same parameter can receive a common control channel mapped to the CSS, resources for transmitting the control channel can be reduced. Such a search space may be referred to as USS instead of CSS. That is, a USS that is a search space common to a plurality of terminal devices may be set. A USS unique to one terminal device is also referred to as a first USS, and a USS common to a plurality of terminal devices is also referred to as a second USS.
 アグリゲーションレベル毎のサーチスペースS(L) はPDCCH候補のセットによって定義される。1つのPDCCHに用いられるCCEの数は、アグリゲーションレベルとも呼称される。1つのPDCCHに用いられるCCEの数は、1、2、4または8である。PDCCHがモニタされる各サービングセルにおいて、サーチスペースS(L) のPDCCH候補に対応するCCEは図14の式(1)で与えられる。ここで、Yは、サブフレームkにおける値を示す。CSSにおいて、m’=mである。PDCCHのUSSにおいて、PDCCHがモニタされるサービングセルにおいて、モニタする端末装置1にCIFが設定された場合、m’=m+M(L)・nCIであり、それ以外は、m’=mである。ここで、mは0からM(L)-1の値であり、M(L)は所定のサーチスペースでモニタするPDCCH候補の数である。 The search space S (L) k for each aggregation level is defined by a set of PDCCH candidates. The number of CCEs used for one PDCCH is also referred to as an aggregation level. The number of CCEs used for one PDCCH is 1, 2, 4 or 8. In each serving cell where the PDCCH is monitored, the CCE corresponding to the PDCCH candidate of the search space S (L) k is given by Equation (1) in FIG. Here, Y k indicates a value in subframe k. In CSS, m ′ = m. In the serving cell where PDCCH is monitored in USS of PDCCH, when CIF is set in terminal device 1 to be monitored, m ′ = m + M (L) · n CI , otherwise m ′ = m. Here, m is a value from 0 to M (L) −1, and M (L) is the number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored in a predetermined search space.
 CSSにおいて、Yは予め規定された値、または、基地局装置3に固有のパラメータに基づいて決定される値であり、例えばアグリゲーションレベルL=4およびL=8に対して0が設定される。アグリゲーションレベルLの端末固有サーチスペースS(L) において、Yは端末装置1に固有の値であり、例えばY=(A・Yk-1)modDで与えられる。ここで、Yの初期値Y-1は、RNTI(例えばC-RNTI)の値が用いられる。 In CSS, Y k is a value defined in advance or a value determined based on a parameter specific to the base station apparatus 3, and is set to 0 for, for example, the aggregation levels L = 4 and L = 8 . In the terminal-specific search space S (L) k at the aggregation level L, Y k is a value specific to the terminal device 1 and is given by, for example, Y k = (A · Y k−1 ) modD. Here, the initial value Y −1 of Y k is the value of RNTI (eg, C-RNTI).
 アグリゲーションレベルはサーチスペース毎に定義される。例えば、CSSにおいて、アグリゲーションレベル4および8が定義される。例えば、USSにおいて、アグリゲーションレベル1、2、4および8が定義される。 The aggregation level is defined for each search space. For example, in the CSS, aggregation levels 4 and 8 are defined. For example, in USS, aggregation levels 1, 2, 4, and 8 are defined.
 PDCCH候補の数は、各サーチスペースの各アグリゲーションレベルで定義される。例えば、CSSにおいて、アグリゲーションレベル4ではPDCCH候補の数は4であり、アグリゲーションレベル8ではPDCCH候補の数は2である。例えば、USSにおいて、アグリゲーション1ではPDCCH候補の数は6であり、アグリゲーションレベル2ではPDCCH候補の数は6であり、アグリゲーションレベル4ではPDCCH候補の数は2であり、アグリゲーションレベル8ではPDCCH候補の数は2である。 The number of PDCCH candidates is defined at each aggregation level of each search space. For example, in CSS, the number of PDCCH candidates is 4 at aggregation level 4, and the number of PDCCH candidates is 2 at aggregation level 8. For example, in USS, the number of PDCCH candidates is 6 in aggregation 1, the number of PDCCH candidates is 6 in aggregation level 2, the number of PDCCH candidates is 2 in aggregation level 4, and the number of PDCCH candidates is in aggregation level 8. The number is two.
 EPDCCHは、1つ以上のECCE(Enhanced control channel element)の集合を用いて送信される。それぞれのECCEは、複数のEREG(Enhanced resource element group)で構成される。EREGは、EPDCCHのリソースエレメントに対するマッピングを定義するために用いられる。各RBペアにおいて、0から15に番号付けされる、16個のEREGが定義される。すなわち、各RBペアにおいて、EREG0~EREG15が定義される。各RBペアにおいて、EREG0~EREG15は、所定の信号および/またはチャネルがマッピングされるリソースエレメント以外のリソースエレメントに対して、周波数方向を優先して、周期的に定義される。例えば、アンテナポート107~110で送信されるEPDCCHに関連付けられる復調用参照信号がマッピングされるリソースエレメントは、EREGを定義しない。 EPDCCH is transmitted using a set of one or more ECCE (Enhanced control channel element). Each ECCE is composed of a plurality of EREG (Enhanced resource element group). EREG is used to define the mapping of EPDCCH to resource elements. In each RB pair, 16 EREGs, numbered from 0 to 15, are defined. That is, EREG0 to EREG15 are defined in each RB pair. In each RB pair, EREG0 to EREG15 are periodically defined with priority given to the frequency direction with respect to resource elements other than resource elements to which predetermined signals and / or channels are mapped. For example, the resource element to which the demodulation reference signal associated with the EPDCCH transmitted through the antenna ports 107 to 110 is mapped does not define EREG.
 1つのEPDCCHに用いられるECCEの数は、EPDCCHフォーマットに依存し、他のパラメータに基づいて決定される。1つのEPDCCHに用いられるECCEの数は、アグリゲーションレベルとも呼称される。例えば、1つのEPDCCHに用いられるECCEの数は、1つのRBペアにおけるEPDCCH送信に用いることができるリソースエレメントの数、EPDCCHの送信方法などに基づいて、決定される。例えば、1つのEPDCCHに用いられるECCEの数は、1、2、4、8、16または32である。また、1つのECCEに用いられるEREGの数は、サブフレームの種類およびサイクリックプレフィックスの種類に基づいて決定され、4または8である。EPDCCHの送信方法として、分散送信(Distributed transmission)および局所送信(Localized transmission)がサポートされる。 The number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH depends on the EPDCCH format and is determined based on other parameters. The number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is also referred to as an aggregation level. For example, the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is determined based on the number of resource elements that can be used for EPDCCH transmission in one RB pair, the EPDCCH transmission method, and the like. For example, the number of ECCEs used for one EPDCCH is 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32. The number of EREGs used for one ECCE is determined based on the type of subframe and the type of cyclic prefix, and is 4 or 8. Distributed transmission (Distributed transmission) and localized transmission (Localized transmission) are supported as EPDCCH transmission methods.
 EPDCCHは、分散送信または局所送信を用いることができる。分散送信および局所送信は、EREGおよびRBペアに対するECCEのマッピングが異なる。例えば、分散送信において、1つのECCEは、複数のRBペアのEREGを用いて構成される。局所送信において、1つのECCEは、1つのRBペアのEREGを用いて構成される。 EPDCCH can use distributed transmission or local transmission. Distributed transmission and local transmission differ in the mapping of ECCE to EREG and RB pairs. For example, in distributed transmission, one ECCE is configured using EREGs of a plurality of RB pairs. In local transmission, one ECCE is configured using one RB pair of EREGs.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対して、EPDCCHに関する設定を行う。端末装置1は、基地局装置3からの設定に基づいて、複数のEPDCCHをモニタリングする。端末装置1がEPDCCHをモニタリングするRBペアのセットが、設定されることができる。そのRBペアのセットは、EPDCCHセットまたはEPDCCH-PRBセットとも呼称される。1つの端末装置1に対して、1つ以上のEPDCCHセットが設定できる。各EPDCCHセットは、1つ以上のRBペアで構成される。また、EPDCCHに関する設定は、EPDCCHセット毎に個別に行うことができる。 The base station device 3 performs settings related to the EPDCCH for the terminal device 1. The terminal device 1 monitors a plurality of EPDCCHs based on the setting from the base station device 3. A set of RB pairs in which the terminal device 1 monitors the EPDCCH can be set. The set of RB pairs is also referred to as an EPDCCH set or an EPDCCH-PRB set. One or more EPDCCH sets can be set for one terminal device 1. Each EPDCCH set is composed of one or more RB pairs. Moreover, the setting regarding EPDCCH can be performed individually for each EPDCCH set.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対して、所定数のEPDCCHセットを設定できる。例えば、2つまでのEPDCCHセットが、EPDCCHセット0および/またはEPDCCHセット1として、設定できる。EPDCCHセットのそれぞれは、所定数のRBペアで構成できる。各EPDCCHセットは、複数のECCEの1つのセットを構成する。1つのEPDCCHセットに構成されるECCEの数は、そのEPDCCHセットとして設定されるRBペアの数、および、1つのECCEに用いられるEREGの数に基づいて、決定される。1つのEPDCCHセットに構成されるECCEの数がNである場合、各EPDCCHセットは、0~N-1で番号付けされたECCEを構成する。例えば、1つのECCEに用いられるEREGの数が4である場合、4つのRBペアで構成されるEPDCCHセットは16個のECCEを構成する。 The base station device 3 can set a predetermined number of EPDCCH sets for the terminal device 1. For example, up to two EPDCCH sets can be configured as EPDCCH set 0 and / or EPDCCH set 1. Each of the EPDCCH sets can be configured with a predetermined number of RB pairs. Each EPDCCH set constitutes one set of a plurality of ECCEs. The number of ECCEs configured in one EPDCCH set is determined based on the number of RB pairs set as the EPDCCH set and the number of EREGs used for one ECCE. When the number of ECCEs configured in one EPDCCH set is N, each EPDCCH set configures ECCEs numbered from 0 to N-1. For example, when the number of EREGs used for one ECCE is 4, an EPDCCH set composed of four RB pairs constitutes 16 ECCEs.
 端末装置1がモニタリングするEPDCCHの候補は、EPDCCHセットに構成されるECCEに基づいて、定義される。EPDCCHの候補のセットは、サーチスペース(探索領域)として定義される。端末装置1に固有のサーチスペースである端末固有サーチスペース、および、基地局装置3(セル、送信点、UEグループ)に固有のサーチスペースである共通サーチスペースが、定義される。EPDCCHのモニタリングは、モニタリングされるDCIフォーマットに従って、端末装置1がサーチスペース内のEPDCCHの候補のそれぞれに対して復号を試みることを含む。 The EPDCCH candidates monitored by the terminal device 1 are defined based on the ECCE configured in the EPDCCH set. A set of EPDCCH candidates is defined as a search space (search area). A terminal-specific search space that is a search space unique to the terminal device 1 and a common search space that is a search space unique to the base station device 3 (cell, transmission point, UE group) are defined. The monitoring of the EPDCCH includes the terminal device 1 attempting to decode each of the EPDCCH candidates in the search space according to the DCI format to be monitored.
 アグリゲーションレベルL∈{1、2、4、8、16、32}におけるEPDCCHの端末固有サーチスペースES(L) は、EPDCCH候補のセットによって定義される。 The terminal-specific search space ES (L) k of the EPDCCH at the aggregation level Lε {1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32} is defined by a set of EPDCCH candidates.
 EPDCCHセットにおいて、サーチスペースES(L) のEPDCCH候補mに対応するECCEは図14の式(2)で与えられる。 In the EPDCCH set, the ECCE corresponding to the EPDCCH candidate m of the search space ES (L) k is given by Equation (2) in FIG.
 ここで、Yp,kは、EPDCCHセットpおよびサブフレームkにおける値を示す。Yp,kは、サーチスペースによって独立に設定することができる。共通サーチスペースの場合、Yp,kは基地局装置3(セル)に固有の値である。例えば、共通サーチスペースの場合、Yp,kは、予め規定された値、または、基地局装置3に固有のパラメータに基づいて決定される値である。端末固有サーチスペースの場合、Yp,kは、端末装置1に固有の値であり、Yp,k=(A・Yp,k-1)modDで与えられる。例えば、Yp,kは、所定の値、サブフレームkおよび端末装置1のRNTI(例えば、C-RNTI)に基づいて、決定される。なお、複数の共通サーチスペースおよび/または複数の端末固有サーチスペースが、1つのEPDCCHセットに設定されてもよい。 Here, Y p, k represents a value in EPDCCH set p and subframe k. Y p, k can be set independently by the search space. In the case of the common search space, Y p, k is a value unique to the base station apparatus 3 (cell). For example, in the case of the common search space, Y p, k is a value defined in advance or a value determined based on a parameter unique to the base station apparatus 3. In the case of the terminal-specific search space, Y p, k is a value specific to the terminal device 1 and is given by Y p, k = (A · Y p, k−1 ) modD. For example, Y p, k is determined based on a predetermined value, the subframe k, and the RNTI (eg, C-RNTI) of the terminal device 1. A plurality of common search spaces and / or a plurality of terminal-specific search spaces may be set in one EPDCCH set.
 ここで、bは、EPDCCHがモニタされるサービングセルに対するCIFが端末装置1に設定された場合、b=nCIであり、それ以外は、b=0である。 Here, b is b = n CI when the CIF for the serving cell whose EPDCCH is monitored is set in the terminal device 1, and b = 0 otherwise.
 端末装置1がモニタするDCIフォーマットは、サービングセル毎に設定された送信モードに依存する。言い換えると、端末装置1がモニタするDCIフォーマットは、送信モードによって異なる。例えば、下りリンク送信モード1が設定された端末装置1は、DCIフォーマット1AとDCIフォーマット1をモニタする。例えば、下りリンク送信モード4が設定された端末装置1は、DCIフォーマット1AとDCIフォーマット2をモニタする。例えば、下りリンク送信モード10が設定された端末装置1は、DCIフォーマット1AとDCIフォーマット2Dをモニタする。例えば、上りリンク送信モード1が設定された端末装置1は、DCIフォーマット0をモニタする。例えば、上りリンク送信モード2が設定された端末装置1は、DCIフォーマット0とDCIフォーマット4をモニタする。 The DCI format monitored by the terminal device 1 depends on the transmission mode set for each serving cell. In other words, the DCI format monitored by the terminal device 1 varies depending on the transmission mode. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 1 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 1. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 4 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 2. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the downlink transmission mode 10 is set monitors the DCI format 1A and the DCI format 2D. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 1 is set monitors the DCI format 0. For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 2 is set monitors DCI format 0 and DCI format 4.
 端末装置1に対するPDCCHが配置される制御領域は通知されず、端末装置1は、各サーチスペースで定義される全てのアグリゲーションレベルに対する全てのPDCCH候補および送信モードに対応する全てのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。言い換えると、端末装置1は、端末装置1宛に送信される可能性がある全てのアグリゲーションレベル、PDCCH候補、および、DCIフォーマットにおいてデコードを試みる。そして、端末装置1は、デコードが成功したPDCCHを端末装置1宛の制御情報として認識する。これはブラインドデコーディングと称される。 The control region in which the PDCCH for the terminal device 1 is arranged is not notified, and the terminal device 1 decodes all DCI formats corresponding to all PDCCH candidates and transmission modes for all aggregation levels defined in each search space. Try. In other words, the terminal device 1 tries to decode in all aggregation levels, PDCCH candidates, and DCI formats that may be transmitted to the terminal device 1. Then, the terminal device 1 recognizes the PDCCH that has been successfully decoded as control information addressed to the terminal device 1. This is called blind decoding.
 なお、DCIフォーマットが異なっても同じビットサイズであれば、デコード回数は増加しない。例えば、DCIフォーマット0とDCIフォーマット1Aは同じビットサイズであるため、1回のデコード回数で2種類のDCIフォーマットをデコードできる。 Note that even if the DCI format is different, if the bit size is the same, the number of decoding does not increase. For example, since the DCI format 0 and the DCI format 1A have the same bit size, two types of DCI formats can be decoded by one decoding.
 例えば、上りリンク送信モード1が設定された端末装置1は、CSSにおいて、アグリゲーション4において6つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、また、アグリゲーション8において2つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。端末装置1は、USSにおいて、アグリゲーション1において6つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、アグリゲーション2において6つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、アグリゲーション4において2つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、また、アグリゲーション8において2つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。すなわち、端末装置1は、1つのサブフレームにおいてPDCCHのデコードを44回試みる。 For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 1 is set attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size DCI formats in the aggregation 4 and two PDCCH candidates in the aggregation 8 in the CSS. Attempts to decode DCI formats of two bit sizes. In the USS, the terminal apparatus 1 tries to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of DCI formats in aggregation 1 in aggregation 1, and tries to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of bit sizes in DCI format in aggregation 2. In aggregation 4, two PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size DCI formats are tried to be decoded. In aggregation 8, two PDCCH candidates and two types of bit size of DCI formats are tried to be decoded. That is, the terminal device 1 tries to decode PDCCH 44 times in one subframe.
 例えば、上りリンク送信モード2が設定された端末装置1は、CSSにおいて、アグリゲーション4において6つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、また、アグリゲーション8において2つのPDCCH候補と2種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。端末装置1は、USSにおいて、アグリゲーション1において6つのPDCCH候補と3種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、アグリゲーション2において6つのPDCCH候補と3種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、アグリゲーション4において2つのPDCCH候補と3種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、また、アグリゲーション8において2つのPDCCH候補と3種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。すなわち、端末装置1は、1つのサブフレームにおいてPDCCHのデコードを60回試みる。 For example, the terminal device 1 in which the uplink transmission mode 2 is set attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and two types of DCI formats of bit sizes in the aggregation 4 in the CSS, and in the aggregation 8 to the two PDCCH candidates. Attempts to decode DCI formats of two bit sizes. In the USS, the terminal device 1 attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats in aggregation 1 in aggregation 1, and attempts to decode six PDCCH candidates and three types of bit sizes in DCI format in aggregation 2. In aggregation 4, two PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats of bit sizes are tried to be decoded. In aggregation 8, two PDCCH candidates and three types of DCI formats of bit sizes are tried to be decoded. That is, the terminal device 1 tries PDCCH decoding 60 times in one subframe.
 ブラインドデコーディングにより、端末装置1は、符号化率の異なるPDCCHを事前情報無しで復号することが可能となり、基地局装置3と端末装置1間で効率よく制御情報を送信することができる。 By blind decoding, the terminal device 1 can decode PDCCHs having different coding rates without prior information, and can efficiently transmit control information between the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1.
 起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、共有サーチスペースによって通知される。共有サーチスペースとは、セルで共通のサーチスペースである。また、起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、端末グループ共有サーチスペースによって通知される。ここで、端末グループ共有サーチスペースとは、端末グループで共通に割り当てられるRNTI(UE-group C-RNTI、TP-specific-RNTI、SCE-RNTI)を用いてPDCCH候補が配置されるCCEの開始点が決定されるサーチスペースである。端末グループRNTIが設定された複数の端末装置1は、同じサーチスペースに配置されたPDCCHを用いて、DCIフォーマットを検出する。 Information indicating the start / stop status is notified by the shared search space. A shared search space is a search space common to cells. Information indicating the start / stop state is notified by the terminal group shared search space. Here, the terminal group shared search space is a starting point of CCE in which PDCCH candidates are arranged using RNTI (UE-group C-RNTI, TP-specific-RNTI, SCE-RNTI) commonly allocated in the terminal group. Is a search space to be determined. The plurality of terminal devices 1 in which the terminal group RNTI is set detect the DCI format using the PDCCH arranged in the same search space.
 起動/停止の状態を示す情報の通知は、予め規定されたタイミングまたは設定されたタイミングで行なわれる。例えば、その通知のタイミングは1無線フレーム単位である。 The notification of the information indicating the start / stop state is performed at a predetermined timing or a set timing. For example, the notification timing is in units of one radio frame.
 起動/停止の状態を示す情報の通知は、L1シグナリングを受信した次の無線フレームの情報を示す。なお、無線フレーム内で最初のサブフレーム(サブフレーム0)でL1シグナリングを受信した場合は、受信した無線フレームの情報を示してもよい。 The notification of information indicating the start / stop state indicates information of the next radio frame that has received the L1 signaling. When L1 signaling is received in the first subframe (subframe 0) in the radio frame, information on the received radio frame may be indicated.
 セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報の通知方法の一例について説明する。 An example of a method for notifying information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state will be described.
 対象セルの起動/停止の状態は、DRSの構成が変化(変更)することによって、暗示的に示されてもよい。対象セルが起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、DRSの構成が起動の状態と停止の状態とで異なる構成になることによって暗示的に示されてもよい。起動の状態と停止の状態で、対象セルから送信されるDRSの構成が異なって送信されてもよい。端末装置1は、起動の状態で送信されるDRSの構成に関する情報と、停止の状態で送信されるDRSの構成に関する情報をそれぞれ基地局装置3から受信してもよい。 The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by a change (change) in the DRS configuration. Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by the configuration of the DRS being different between the activation state and the deactivation state. The configuration of the DRS transmitted from the target cell may be transmitted differently between the activated state and the deactivated state. The terminal device 1 may receive from the base station device 3 information related to the DRS configuration transmitted in the activated state and information related to the DRS configuration transmitted in the deactivated state.
 対象セルが起動/停止の状態は、DRSのある構成のパラメータ(またはパラメータの値)が変化(変更)することによって示されてもよい。言い換えると、DRSの設定に含まれるあるパラメータが起動の状態と停止の状態で異なってもよい(または個別に設定されてもよい)。例えば、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、リソースエレメントの配置が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、アンテナポートが異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、スクランブル系列が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、スクランブル系列の初期値または初期値を生成するための方法(式)が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、送信電力が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、送信されるサブフレーム間隔が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるDRSと停止の状態で送信されるDRSは、送信帯域幅またはリソースブロック数が異なってもよい。すなわち、起動の状態で送信されるDRSの設定に関する情報と、停止の状態で送信されるDRSの設定に関する情報が、個別にセットされてもよい。それらの情報は、上位層シグナリングを用いて、基地局装置3から端末装置1へ送信されてもよい。つまり、対象セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、DRSの構成に関するパラメータの設定情報であってもよい。言い換えると、あるパラメータが、起動の状態と停止の状態のそれぞれに対して設定される。 The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be indicated by a change (change) in a parameter (or parameter value) of a configuration with DRS. In other words, a certain parameter included in the setting of the DRS may be different between the activated state and the deactivated state (or may be individually set). For example, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different resource element arrangements. Further, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different antenna ports. Further, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different scramble sequences. Further, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different initial values or methods (formulas) for generating the initial value of the scramble sequence. Also, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission power. Also, the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission subframe intervals. Further, the transmission bandwidth or the number of resource blocks may be different between the DRS transmitted in the activated state and the DRS transmitted in the deactivated state. That is, the information regarding the setting of DRS transmitted in the activated state and the information regarding the setting of DRS transmitted in the deactivated state may be individually set. Such information may be transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 using higher layer signaling. That is, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be parameter setting information related to the DRS configuration. In other words, a certain parameter is set for each of the activated state and the deactivated state.
 また、端末装置1は、起動の状態を示すDRSの構成と停止の状態を示すDRSの構成の2通りをモニタしてもよい。端末装置1は、起動の状態を示すDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンと停止の状態を示すDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンを用いて、2通りをモニタしてもよい。この場合、端末装置1に対して、2つのDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンに関する情報が通知される。つまり、1つのDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンに関する情報が通知されなかった場合、2つの構成のDRSを1つのモニタリングパターンに基づいてモニタすることになってもよい。 Further, the terminal device 1 may monitor two types of configurations, that is, a DRS configuration indicating a start state and a DRS configuration indicating a stop state. The terminal device 1 may monitor two types using a DRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a start state and a DRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a stop state. In this case, the terminal device 1 is notified of information regarding the monitoring pattern of the two DRS configurations. That is, when information regarding a monitoring pattern of one DRS configuration is not notified, DRSs of two configurations may be monitored based on one monitoring pattern.
 停止の状態のDRSの測定サブフレーム中において、起動の状態のDRSを測定した場合、端末装置1は、停止の状態の小セルを起動の状態であると認識する。 When measuring the DRS in the activated state during the measurement DRS of the stopped DRS, the terminal device 1 recognizes the small cell in the deactivated state as the activated state.
 また、端末装置1は、DRSを検出したモニタリングパターンによって対象セルの起動/停止の状態の情報を暗示的に取得してもよい。起動の状態を示すDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンと停止の状態を示すDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンは、予め定義されても良い。起動の状態を示すDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンと停止の状態を示すDRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンは、基地局装置3から専用RRCシグナリング(上位層シグナリング)によって通知されても良い。 Further, the terminal device 1 may implicitly acquire the information on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell based on the monitoring pattern in which the DRS is detected. The monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the start state and the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the stop state may be defined in advance. The monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the start state and the monitoring pattern of the DRS configuration indicating the stop state may be notified from the base station apparatus 3 by dedicated RRC signaling (upper layer signaling).
 セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報の通知方法の別の一例について説明する。 A description will be given of another example of a method for notifying information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state.
 対象セルが起動/停止の状態は、対象セルの起動の状態と停止の状態のCRSの構成(CRSの設定)が異なることによって暗示的に示されてもよい。この場合、起動の状態と停止の状態で、対象セルから送信されるCRSの構成が異なって送信される。その際、異なる構成のCRSの設定情報が端末装置1に通知される。 The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be implicitly indicated by the difference between the activation state and the deactivation state CRS configuration (CRS setting) of the target cell. In this case, the configuration of the CRS transmitted from the target cell differs between the activated state and the deactivated state. At that time, CRS setting information of a different configuration is notified to the terminal device 1.
 対象セルが起動/停止の状態は、CRSの構成に係るあるパラメータ(またはパラメータの値)が変化することによって示されてもよい。例えば、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、リソースエレメントの配置が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、アンテナポートが異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、スクランブル系列が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、スクランブル系列の初期値が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、送信電力が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、送信されるサブフレーム間隔が異なってもよい。また、起動の状態で送信されるCRSと停止の状態で送信されるCRSは、送信帯域幅またはリソースブロック数が異なってもよい。つまり、対象セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、CRSの構成に関するパラメータの設定情報であってもよい。その際、あるパラメータが、起動の状態と停止の状態のそれぞれに対して個別に設定される。ここでは、CRSについて例を挙げたが、PSSやSSS、CSI-RS、PRSなどでも同様に示されてもよい。 The activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be indicated by a change of a certain parameter (or parameter value) related to the CRS configuration. For example, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different resource element arrangements. Further, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different antenna ports. Further, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different scramble sequences. In addition, the initial value of the scramble sequence may be different between the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state. Also, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission power. Also, the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state may have different transmission subframe intervals. Also, the transmission bandwidth or the number of resource blocks may be different between the CRS transmitted in the activated state and the CRS transmitted in the deactivated state. That is, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the target cell may be parameter setting information regarding the CRS configuration. At that time, a certain parameter is individually set for each of the activated state and the deactivated state. Here, an example is given for CRS, but PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, PRS, and the like may be similarly indicated.
 端末装置1は、起動の状態を示すCRSの構成と停止の状態を示すCRSの構成の2通りをモニタする。端末装置1は、起動の状態を示すCRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンと停止の状態を示すCRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンを用いて、2通りをモニタする。端末装置1は、CRSを検出したモニタリングパターンによって対象セルの起動/停止の状態の情報を暗示的に取得する。停止の状態を示すCRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンは、予め定義されても良い。停止の状態を示すCRSの構成のモニタリングのパターンは、基地局装置3から専用RRCシグナリングによって通知されても良い。 The terminal device 1 monitors the CRS configuration indicating the start state and the CRS configuration indicating the stop state. The terminal device 1 monitors two types using a CRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a start state and a CRS configuration monitoring pattern indicating a stop state. The terminal device 1 implicitly acquires information on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell based on the monitoring pattern in which the CRS is detected. The monitoring pattern of the CRS configuration indicating the stop state may be defined in advance. The monitoring pattern of the configuration of the CRS indicating the stop state may be notified from the base station apparatus 3 by dedicated RRC signaling.
 セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報の通知方法の別の一例について説明する。 A description will be given of another example of a method for notifying information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state.
 セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、専用RRCシグナリングによって通知されてもよい。セルの起動/停止の状態を示す情報は、中心周波数(キャリア周波数)とセルIDに紐付いてリスト化されて通知されてもよい。 Information indicating the cell activation / deactivation state may be notified by dedicated RRC signaling. Information indicating the activation / deactivation state of the cell may be reported in a list associated with the center frequency (carrier frequency) and the cell ID.
 端末装置1は、上記の通知方法によって対象セルの起動/停止の状態を認知することが可能となる。以下、端末装置1が対象セルの起動/停止の状態によって振る舞いが切り替わる際、上記の通知方法のいずれかが適用される。 The terminal device 1 can recognize the start / stop state of the target cell by the above notification method. Hereinafter, when the behavior of the terminal device 1 is switched depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell, any of the notification methods described above is applied.
 以下では、セル(基地局装置3)の検出について説明する。 Hereinafter, detection of a cell (base station apparatus 3) will be described.
 セルの検出とは、当該セルを構成する基地局装置3から送信された同期信号(PSSやSSSなど)または/および参照信号(CRSやCSI-RSなど)を端末装置1で検出することである。セルの検出に用いられる同期信号または/および参照信号には、セルIDの情報が含まれる。端末装置1は、当該セルのセルIDと同期信号または/および参照信号の検出基準によって、当該セルを検出する。 The cell detection means that the terminal device 1 detects a synchronization signal (such as PSS or SSS) or / and a reference signal (such as CRS or CSI-RS) transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell. . The synchronization signal or / and reference signal used for cell detection includes cell ID information. The terminal device 1 detects the cell based on the cell ID of the cell and the detection standard of the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal.
 セルの検出とは、基地局装置3の検出が含まれてもよい。プライマリーセルの検出には、マスター基地局装置の検出が含まれてもよい。また、プライマリーセカンダリーセルの検出には、セカンダリー基地局装置の検出が含まれてもよい。 The cell detection may include the detection of the base station device 3. Detection of the primary cell may include detection of the master base station device. In addition, detection of the primary secondary cell may include detection of the secondary base station apparatus.
 同期信号または/および参照信号の検出基準の一例について説明する。 An example of synchronization signal or / and reference signal detection criteria will be described.
 端末装置1は、セルからの同期信号または/および参照信号の受信電力強度または/および受信電力品質に基づいて検出を決定する。端末装置1は、同期信号または/および参照信号の受信電力強度または/および受信電力品質と閾値を比較し、受信強度または/および受信品質が高い場合は前記セルを検出したと判断する。受信電力強度は、例えば、RSRPなどである。受信品質は、例えば、干渉量、RSRQ、SINRなどである。また、セルの検出は、後述する測定のイベントによって判断してもよい。 The terminal device 1 determines detection based on the received power intensity or / and received power quality of the synchronization signal or / and reference signal from the cell. The terminal device 1 compares the received power strength or / and received power quality of the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal with a threshold value, and determines that the cell has been detected when the received strength or / and received quality is high. The received power intensity is, for example, RSRP. The reception quality is, for example, an interference amount, RSRQ, SINR, or the like. The cell detection may be determined by a measurement event described later.
 同期信号または/および参照信号の検出基準の一例について説明する。 An example of synchronization signal or / and reference signal detection criteria will be described.
 端末装置1は、セルからの同期信号または/および参照信号の情報の復号成否に基づいて検出を決定する。例えば、セル(セルを構成する基地局装置3)は、同期信号または/および参照信号にCRCなどのパリティ符号を載せて送信する。端末装置1は、同期信号または/および参照信号に含まれた前記パリティ符号を用いて復号を行い、パリティ検出によって正しく復号できたと判断した場合、前記セルを検出したと判断する。 The terminal device 1 determines detection based on the success or failure of decoding of the synchronization signal or / and reference signal information from the cell. For example, the cell (base station apparatus 3 constituting the cell) transmits a synchronization signal or / and a reference signal with a parity code such as CRC. The terminal device 1 performs decoding using the parity code included in the synchronization signal or / and the reference signal, and determines that the cell has been detected when it is determined that the decoding is correctly performed by parity detection.
 端末装置1においてセルを検出した後、端末装置1は、接続/活性化するセルの選択、および、切断/非活性化するセルの選択を行う。 After the cell is detected in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 selects a cell to be connected / activated and a cell to be disconnected / inactivated.
 または、端末装置1においてセルを検出した後、端末装置1は、検出したセルの情報を接続している基地局装置3に報告する。検出したセルの情報は、セルID、測定の情報を含む。 Alternatively, after detecting a cell in the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 reports the detected cell information to the connected base station device 3. The detected cell information includes a cell ID and measurement information.
 以下では、CRSの詳細について説明するCRSは、アンテナポート0~3で送信される。CRSは、非MBSFNサブフレーム(non-MBSFN subframe)である全ての下りリンクサブフレームに配置される。言い換えると、CRSは、MBSFNサブフレームを除く全ての下りリンクサブフレームに配置される。CRSは、物理セル識別子(PCI)に基づいてリソースエレメントおよび信号系列が決定される。 In the following, CRS for explaining the details of CRS is transmitted through antenna ports 0 to 3. The CRS is arranged in all downlink subframes that are non-MBSFN subframes (non-MBSFN subframe). In other words, the CRS is arranged in all downlink subframes except the MBSFN subframe. In CRS, a resource element and a signal sequence are determined based on a physical cell identifier (PCI).
 図10は、CRSの構成の一例を示す図である。CRSの信号は、擬似乱数系列を用いて生成される。前記擬似乱数系列は、例えばGold系列である。前記擬似乱数系列は、物理セル識別子(PCI)に基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、CPのタイプに基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、スロット番号とスロット内のOFDMシンボル番号に基づいて計算される。ノーマルCPの場合のCRSのリソースエレメントは、図10のR0~R3を用いられる。R0はアンテナポート0のCRSの配置に対応し、R1はアンテナポート1のCRSの配置に対応し、R2はアンテナポート2のCRSの配置に対応し、R3はアンテナポート3のCRSの配置に対応する。1つのアンテナポートで送信されるCRSのリソースエレメントは、周波数軸上で6サブキャリアの周期で配置される。アンテナポート0で送信されるCRSとアンテナポート1で送信されるCRSのリソースエレメントは、3サブキャリア離れて配置される。CRSは、セルIDに基づいて周波数上をセル固有にシフトされる。アンテナポート0で送信されるCRSとアンテナポート1で送信されるCRSのリソースエレメントは、ノーマルCPの場合はOFDMシンボル0、4に配置され、拡張CPの場合はOFDMシンボル0、3に配置される。アンテナポート2で送信されるCRSとアンテナポート3で送信されるCRSのリソースエレメントは、OFDMシンボル1に配置される。CRSは下りリンクで設定された帯域幅で、広帯域に送信される。なお、DRSは、CRSと同様の構成であってもよい。 FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the CRS. The CRS signal is generated using a pseudo-random number sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on a physical cell identifier (PCI). The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. R0 to R3 in FIG. 10 are used as resource elements of CRS in the case of normal CP. R0 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 0, R1 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 1, R2 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 2, and R3 corresponds to the CRS arrangement of antenna port 3. To do. Resource elements of CRS transmitted by one antenna port are arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis. Resource elements of CRS transmitted at antenna port 0 and CRS transmitted at antenna port 1 are arranged 3 subcarriers apart. The CRS is shifted cell-specifically on the frequency based on the cell ID. Resource elements of CRS transmitted at antenna port 0 and CRS transmitted at antenna port 1 are arranged in OFDM symbols 0 and 4 in the case of normal CP, and are arranged in OFDM symbols 0 and 3 in the case of extended CP. . Resource elements of CRS transmitted through antenna port 2 and CRS transmitted through antenna port 3 are arranged in OFDM symbol 1. CRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink, and is transmitted over a wide band. Note that the DRS may have the same configuration as the CRS.
 以下では、DRS(Discovery Reference Signal)の詳細について説明する。DRSは、下りリンクの時間領域の同期(time synchronization)、下りリンクの周波数の同期(frequency synchronization)、セル/送信ポイントの特定(cell/transmission point identification)、RSRPの測定(RSRP measurement)、RSRQの測定(RSRQ measurement)、端末装置1の地理的な位置の測定(UE Positioning)、CSIの測定(CSI measurement)など様々な用途を目的として、基地局装置3から送信される。DRSは、基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態をサポートするために用いられる参照信号とすることができる。DRSは、端末装置1がON状態および/またはOFF状態の基地局装置3を検出するために用いられる参照信号とすることができる。 Below, the details of DRS (Discovery Reference Signal) will be described. DRS includes downlink time domain synchronization (time synchronization), downlink frequency synchronization (frequency synchronization), cell / transmission point identification, RSRP measurement (RSRP measurement), RSRQ It is transmitted from the base station device 3 for various purposes such as measurement (RSRQ measurement), measurement of the geographical position of the terminal device 1 (UE Positioning), measurement of CSI (CSI measurement). The DRS may be a reference signal used to support the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3. The DRS can be a reference signal used for detecting the base station device 3 in which the terminal device 1 is in the ON state and / or the OFF state.
 DRSは、複数の信号により構成される。一例として、DRSは、PSS、SSSおよびCRSにより構成される。DRSに含まれるPSSおよびSSSは、時間同期、周波数同期、セルの特定および送信ポイントの特定のために用いられるかもしれない。DRSに含まれるCRSは、RSRPの測定、RSRQの測定およびCSIの測定のために用いられるかもしれない。別の一例として、DRSは、PSS、SSSおよびCSI-RSにより構成される。DRSに含まれるPSSおよびSSSは、時間同期、周波数同期、セルの特定および送信ポイントの特定のために用いられるかもしれない。DRSに含まれるCSI-RSは、送信ポイントの特定、RSRPの測定、RSRQの測定およびCSIの測定のために用いられるかもしれない。なお、複数の信号により構成されるDRSは検出バースト(Discovery burst)と呼称されてもよい。なお、RSRPの測定および/またはRSRQの測定を行なう参照信号がDRSと呼称されてもよい。 DRS is composed of multiple signals. As an example, DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CRS. The PSS and SSS included in the DRS may be used for time synchronization, frequency synchronization, cell identification and transmission point identification. The CRS included in the DRS may be used for RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, and CSI measurement. As another example, DRS is comprised by PSS, SSS, and CSI-RS. The PSS and SSS included in the DRS may be used for time synchronization, frequency synchronization, cell identification and transmission point identification. The CSI-RS included in the DRS may be used for transmission point identification, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, and CSI measurement. A DRS composed of a plurality of signals may be referred to as a detection burst. A reference signal for measuring RSRP and / or RSRQ may be referred to as DRS.
 基地局装置3は、PSS、SSSおよびCRSにより構成される第1のDRSと、PSS、SSSおよびCSI-RSにより構成される第2のDRSとを、切り替えて送信してもよい。その場合、基地局装置3は、端末装置1に第1のDRSまたは第2のDRSを設定する。 The base station apparatus 3 may switch and transmit the first DRS configured by PSS, SSS, and CRS and the second DRS configured by PSS, SSS, and CSI-RS. In that case, the base station apparatus 3 sets the first DRS or the second DRS in the terminal apparatus 1.
 DRSは、下りリンクサブフレームで送信される。DRSは、下りリンクコンポーネントキャリアで送信される。 DRS is transmitted in the downlink subframe. The DRS is transmitted on the downlink component carrier.
 DRSは、基地局装置3が停止の状態(off state, dormant mode, deactivation)で送信される。また、DRSは、基地局装置3が起動の状態(on state, active mode, activation)であっても送信されてもよい。 DRS is transmitted when the base station apparatus 3 is in a stopped state (off state, “dormant” mode, “deactivation”). Further, the DRS may be transmitted even when the base station apparatus 3 is in an activated state (on state, active mode, and activation).
 DRSは、それぞれの基地局装置(セル、送信ポイント)で独立に設定できる。例えば、複数のスモールセルは、互いに異なる設定のDRSを、互いに異なるリソースを用いて送信される。 DRS can be set independently for each base station device (cell, transmission point). For example, a plurality of small cells transmit DRSs having different settings using different resources.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対して、DRSに関するリストと、DRSの測定(検出、モニタリング、送信)タイミングを設定する。DRSに関するリストは、端末装置1が受信する可能性のあるDRSを送信する基地局装置に関連する情報のリストである。例えば、DRSに関するリストは、DRSを送信する送信ポイントの送信ポイントIDのリストである。複数の送信ポイントは、端末装置1に対して設定されたDRSの測定タイミングに基づいて、それぞれの送信ポイントに固有のDRSを送信する。端末装置1は、基地局装置3に設定されたDRSに関するリストと、DRSの測定タイミングに基づいて、DRSの測定を行なう。例えば、端末装置1は、DRSの測定タイミングに基づいて決まるサブフレームまたはリソースで、DRSに関するリストに基づいて決まるDRSを測定する。また、端末装置1は、DRSの測定による測定結果を基地局装置3に報告する。 The base station device 3 sets a DRS list and DRS measurement (detection, monitoring, transmission) timing for the terminal device 1. The DRS-related list is a list of information related to the base station apparatus that transmits the DRS that the terminal apparatus 1 may receive. For example, the list related to DRS is a list of transmission point IDs of transmission points that transmit DRS. The plurality of transmission points transmit DRSs specific to the respective transmission points based on the DRS measurement timing set for the terminal device 1. The terminal device 1 performs DRS measurement based on the DRS-related list set in the base station device 3 and the DRS measurement timing. For example, the terminal device 1 measures DRS determined based on a list related to DRS in a subframe or resource determined based on DRS measurement timing. Further, the terminal device 1 reports the measurement result by the DRS measurement to the base station device 3.
 それぞれの送信ポイントは、DRSを1つのサブフレームで送信する。すなわち、それぞれの送信ポイントは、1つのDRSに関連するPSSと、SSSと、CRSおよび/またはCSI-RSとを、1つのサブフレームで送信する。端末装置1は、1つの送信ポイントに対応するDRSが1つのサブフレームで送信されることを期待する。なお、1つのDRSは、複数のサブフレームで送信されてもよい。 Each transmission point transmits DRS in one subframe. That is, each transmission point transmits PSS related to one DRS, SSS, and CRS and / or CSI-RS in one subframe. The terminal device 1 expects a DRS corresponding to one transmission point to be transmitted in one subframe. One DRS may be transmitted in a plurality of subframes.
 DRSの送信、または、DRSの測定タイミングは、時間軸上で周期的に設定される。また、DRSの送信またはDRSの測定タイミングは、連続のサブフレームで設定されてもよい。言い換えると、DRSは、バースト送信されてもよい。例えば、DRSの送信またはDRSの測定タイミングは、Mサブフレーム周期で、連続するNサブフレームで設定される。周期内でDRSが配置されるサブフレームLが設定されてもよい。M、Nおよび/またはLの値は、上位層で設定される。なお、周期内で連続に送信されるサブフレーム数Nは予め規定されてもよい。サブフレーム周期Mを長期で設定すると、停止の状態の基地局装置3からDRSが送信される回数が減少し、セル間干渉を低減させることができる。なお、M、Nおよび/またはLの値は、停止の状態と起動の状態とで異なる設定が適用されてもよい。また、M、Nおよび/またはLの値に対応するパラメータは、上位層シグナリングによって、通知されてもよい。 DRS transmission or DRS measurement timing is set periodically on the time axis. Also, DRS transmission or DRS measurement timing may be set in successive subframes. In other words, the DRS may be transmitted in bursts. For example, the transmission timing of DRS or the measurement timing of DRS is set in N subframes that are continuous in M subframe periods. A subframe L in which DRS is arranged within a cycle may be set. The values of M, N and / or L are set in the upper layer. Note that the number N of subframes transmitted continuously within a cycle may be defined in advance. If the subframe period M is set to be long, the number of times that the DRS is transmitted from the base station apparatus 3 in the stopped state is reduced, and inter-cell interference can be reduced. Note that different settings may be applied to the values of M, N, and / or L depending on the stop state and the start state. Also, parameters corresponding to the values of M, N and / or L may be notified by higher layer signaling.
 なお、Mに対応するパラメータは、周期だけでなく、サブフレームオフセット(または開始サブフレーム)が示されてもよい。つまり、Mに対応するパラメータは、周期および/またはサブフレームオフセットと対応付けられたインデックスであってもよい。 Note that the parameter corresponding to M may indicate not only the period but also the subframe offset (or start subframe). That is, the parameter corresponding to M may be an index associated with a period and / or a subframe offset.
 なお、Nに対応するパラメータは、テーブル管理されてもよい。Nに対応するパラメータの値がそのままサブフレーム数を表さなくてもよい。また、Nに対応するパラメータは、サブフレーム数だけでなく、開始サブフレームが含まれて示されてもよい。 Note that the parameter corresponding to N may be managed in a table. The value of the parameter corresponding to N may not directly represent the number of subframes. Further, the parameter corresponding to N may be indicated by including not only the number of subframes but also the start subframe.
 なお、Lに対応するパラメータは、テーブル管理されてもよい。Lに対応するパラメータは、周期と対応付けられてもよい。Lに対応するパラメータの値が、そのままサブフレームのオフセットを示さなくてもよい。 Note that the parameter corresponding to L may be managed in a table. The parameter corresponding to L may be associated with the period. The parameter value corresponding to L may not indicate the offset of the subframe as it is.
 DRSが送信される可能性のあるサブフレームまたはDRSの測定サブフレームにおいて、端末装置1は、DRSの測定に加えて、PDCCHのモニタを行なってもよい。例えば、上記Nに対応するパラメータにおいて、端末装置1は、PDCCHをモニタしてもよい。その際、端末装置1には、停止の状態の小セルに対して、PDCCHをモニタする機能をサポートしていることが条件であってもよい。 In a subframe in which DRS may be transmitted or a DRS measurement subframe, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in addition to the DRS measurement. For example, in the parameter corresponding to N, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH. At that time, the terminal device 1 may be required to support a function of monitoring the PDCCH for a small cell in a stopped state.
 DRSは、送信ポイントIDの情報を含んで送信されてもよい。ここで、送信ポイントIDの情報とは、DRSを送信する送信ポイント(セル)を識別するための情報である。例えば、送信ポイントIDは、物理セル識別子(physical cell ID, physCellID, physical layer cell ID)、CGI(Cell Global Identity)、新しいセル識別子(小セルID(small cell ID)、発見ID(Discovery ID)、拡張セルID(extended cell IDなど))である。また、送信ポイントIDは、DRSに含まれるPSSおよびSSSで認識される物理セル識別子とは異なるIDであってもよい。送信ポイントIDは、DRSに含まれるPSSおよびSSSで認識される物理セル識別子に関連付けられるIDであってもよい。例えば、ある送信ポイントIDは、DRSに含まれるPSSおよびSSSで認識される物理セル識別子のいずれか1つに関連付けられてもよい。なお、上記のセルに関するIDをDRSによって複数送信されてもよい。例えば、物理セル識別子では足りない数のセルを配置する環境では、DRSで物理セル識別子と新しいセル識別子を組み合わせて送信することで、実質的に物理セル識別子を拡張させることができる。 DRS may be transmitted including transmission point ID information. Here, the transmission point ID information is information for identifying a transmission point (cell) that transmits DRS. For example, the transmission point ID includes physical cell identifier (physical cell ID, physical cell ID, physical layer cell ID), CGI (Cell Global Identity), new cell identifier (small cell ID), discovery ID (Discovery ID), Extended cell ID (extended cell ID, etc.)). Further, the transmission point ID may be an ID different from the physical cell identifier recognized by the PSS and SSS included in the DRS. The transmission point ID may be an ID associated with a physical cell identifier recognized by the PSS and SSS included in the DRS. For example, a certain transmission point ID may be associated with any one of the physical cell identifiers recognized by the PSS and the SSS included in the DRS. A plurality of IDs related to the cell may be transmitted by DRS. For example, in an environment in which a number of cells that are insufficient for the physical cell identifier is arranged, the physical cell identifier can be substantially expanded by transmitting a combination of the physical cell identifier and the new cell identifier by DRS.
 DRSはアンテナポートp、・・・、p+n-1で送信される。ここで、nはDRSを送信するアンテナポートの総数が示される。p、・・・、p+n-1の値は、0~22、107~110以外の値が適用されてもよい。すなわち、DRSは、他の参照信号に用いられるアンテナポートとは異なるアンテナポートを用いて送信されてもよい。 DRS is transmitted at antenna ports p, ..., p + n-1. Here, n indicates the total number of antenna ports that transmit DRS. Values other than 0 to 22 and 107 to 110 may be applied to the values of p,. That is, the DRS may be transmitted using an antenna port different from the antenna ports used for other reference signals.
 次に、DRSの構成(または設定)の一例について説明する。 Next, an example of the configuration (or setting) of the DRS will be described.
 DRSは、複数の構成(structure)および/または設定(configuration)が適用されてもよい。ここで、複数の構成とは、複数の信号の構成や設定であってもよい。また、複数の構成とは、複数の構成を有する信号であってもよい。言い換えると、DRSは、複数の信号から構成されてもよい。例えば、DRSは、PSSと同様の構成(または設定)が適用されてもよい。また、DRSは、SSSと同様の構成(または設定)が適用されてもよい。また、DRSは、CRSと同様の構成(または設定)が適用されてもよい。また、DRSは、CSI-RSと同様の構成(または設定)が適用されてもよい。つまり、DRSは、第1の信号から第nの信号(nは自然数)の構成(または設定)に基づいてもよい。言い換えると、DRSは、第1の構成の信号から第nの構成の信号に基づいてもよい。なお、信号の構成には、無線リソース配置(リソース設定)やサブフレーム設定が含まれてもよい。 A plurality of structures and / or configurations may be applied to the DRS. Here, the plurality of configurations may be configurations or settings of a plurality of signals. Further, the plurality of configurations may be signals having a plurality of configurations. In other words, the DRS may be composed of a plurality of signals. For example, the same configuration (or setting) as the PSS may be applied to the DRS. In addition, the same configuration (or setting) as SSS may be applied to DRS. Further, the same configuration (or setting) as the CRS may be applied to the DRS. Further, the same configuration (or setting) as CSI-RS may be applied to DRS. That is, DRS may be based on the configuration (or setting) of the first signal to the nth signal (n is a natural number). In other words, the DRS may be based on the first configuration signal to the nth configuration signal. The signal configuration may include radio resource arrangement (resource setting) and subframe setting.
 DRSは、目的に応じて、それぞれの構成の信号(無線リソース)が、使い分けられてもよい。例えば、時間領域や周波数領域の同期と、セル識別、RSRP/RSRQ/RSSI測定(RRM測定)に用いられる信号は、異なる構成の信号を用いて、行なわれてもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、第1の信号を用いて、時間領域や周波数領域の同期を行ない、第2の信号を用いて、セル識別を行ない、第3の信号を用いて、RSRP/RSRQ測定を行なってもよい。また、第1の信号および第2の信号を用いて、時間領域や周波数領域の同期およびセル識別を行ない、第3の信号を用いて、RSRP/RSRQ/RSSI測定(RRM測定)を行なってもよい。 In DRS, signals (radio resources) of each configuration may be properly used according to the purpose. For example, signals used for time domain and frequency domain synchronization, cell identification, and RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI measurement (RRM measurement) may be performed using signals having different configurations. That is, the terminal apparatus 1 performs time domain and frequency domain synchronization using the first signal, performs cell identification using the second signal, and performs RSRP / RSRQ measurement using the third signal. May be performed. Also, time domain and frequency domain synchronization and cell identification are performed using the first signal and the second signal, and RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI measurement (RRM measurement) is performed using the third signal. Good.
 また、DRSが複数の構成に基づく信号から生成される場合、特定の構成の信号が送信されることによって、小セルの起動/停止の状態が示されてもよい。例えば、第4の信号(第4の構成の信号)が送信される場合、小セルは、起動の状態にあると端末装置1は、認識し、処理を行なってもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、第4の信号(第4の構成の信号)を検出することによって、小セルを起動の状態にあると認識してもよい。 In addition, when the DRS is generated from signals based on a plurality of configurations, a signal having a specific configuration may be transmitted to indicate the start / stop state of the small cell. For example, when the fourth signal (the signal having the fourth configuration) is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may recognize that the small cell is in the activated state and perform processing. That is, the terminal device 1 may recognize that the small cell is in the activated state by detecting the fourth signal (the signal having the fourth configuration).
 さらに、第5の信号(第5の構成の信号)を用いて、CSI測定を行なってもよい。端末装置1は、CSI測定を行なった場合、CSI測定を行なったサブフレームから所定のサブフレーム後の最初の上りリンクサブフレームで、CSI報告を行なってもよい。なお、CSI測定は、第5の信号ではなく、他の信号を用いて、行なってもよい。停止の状態で、CSI測定を行なう場合には、基地局装置3から端末装置1に対して、停止の状態でCSI測定/CSI報告を行なうための設定情報が上位層シグナリングを用いて通知される。 Furthermore, CSI measurement may be performed using the fifth signal (the signal having the fifth configuration). When the CSI measurement is performed, the terminal device 1 may perform the CSI report in the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe from the subframe in which the CSI measurement is performed. Note that the CSI measurement may be performed using another signal instead of the fifth signal. When CSI measurement is performed in a stopped state, setting information for performing CSI measurement / CSI report in the stopped state is notified from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 using higher layer signaling. .
 また、小セルの起動の状態と停止の状態で、小セル(小セルを構成する基地局装置3)から送信されるDRSの構成が異なってもよい。例えば、停止の状態であれば、第1の構成から第3の構成の信号を送信し、起動の状態であれば、第1の構成から第4の構成の信号を送信してもよい。また、起動の状態では、第3の構成の信号ではなく、第4の構成の信号が送信されてもよい。また、SSSと同様の構成の信号が複数設定される場合、小セルの停止の状態では、複数の信号が送信されるが、小セルの起動の状態では、1つしか送信されなくてもよい。つまり、DRSは、小セルの状態に応じて、その構成が切り替わってもよい。 In addition, the configuration of the DRS transmitted from the small cell (base station apparatus 3 configuring the small cell) may be different depending on whether the small cell is activated or stopped. For example, the signal of the third configuration may be transmitted from the first configuration if it is in the stopped state, and the signal of the fourth configuration may be transmitted from the first configuration if it is in the activated state. Further, in the activated state, the signal of the fourth configuration may be transmitted instead of the signal of the third configuration. Further, when a plurality of signals having the same configuration as SSS are set, a plurality of signals are transmitted in the small cell stop state, but only one signal may be transmitted in the small cell start state. . That is, the configuration of the DRS may be switched according to the state of the small cell.
 また、DRSは、拡張した物理層セル識別子(PCI: Physical layer Cell Identity)を送信するために、複数の信号から構成されてもよい。また、複数の信号を用いて、物理層セル識別子および送信ポイント識別子(TP ID: Transmission Point Identity)を送信してもよい。ここで、複数の信号とは、複数のSSSまたはSSSと同様の構成の信号であってもよい。ここで、複数の信号とは、PSSとSSSと同様の構成の信号であってもよい。また、複数の信号とは、PSSと複数のSSSと同様の構成の信号であってもよい。なお、TPIDは、仮想セル識別子(VCID: Virtual Cell Identity)であってもよい。TPIDは、送信ポイント、すなわち、基地局装置3を識別するためのIDであってもよい。なお、VCIDは、信号系列に用いられる識別子であってもよい。言い換えると、DRSは、第1の構成の信号によって、セルIDグループが識別され、第1の構成の信号と第2の構成の信号によって、セルIDが識別され、第1の構成の信号、第2の構成の信号、第3の構成の信号によって、TPIDが識別されてもよい。また、第4の構成の信号によって、TPIDが拡張されてもよい。 Also, the DRS may be composed of a plurality of signals in order to transmit an extended physical layer cell identifier (PCI: [Physical] layer [Cell] Identity). Further, a physical layer cell identifier and a transmission point identifier (TP ID: Transmission Point Identity) may be transmitted using a plurality of signals. Here, the plurality of signals may be a plurality of SSSs or signals having the same configuration as the SSS. Here, the plurality of signals may be signals having the same configuration as PSS and SSS. The plurality of signals may be signals having the same configuration as the PSS and the plurality of SSSs. Note that the TPID may be a virtual cell identifier (VCID: “Virtual Cell Identity”). The TPID may be an ID for identifying the transmission point, that is, the base station device 3. The VCID may be an identifier used for a signal sequence. In other words, in the DRS, the cell ID group is identified by the signal of the first configuration, the cell ID is identified by the signal of the first configuration and the signal of the second configuration, the signal of the first configuration, The TPID may be identified by the signal having the second configuration and the signal having the third configuration. Further, the TPID may be extended by the signal of the fourth configuration.
 なお、DRSは、PSS、SSS、CRS、CSI-RSとは、個別に設定されてもよい。すなわち、DRSのリソース設定やサブフレーム設定、アンテナポートインデックス、アンテナポート数、系列生成のためのIDなどは、PSS、SSS、CRS、CSI-RSとは、独立に(個別に)設定されてもよい。 Note that the DRS may be set separately from the PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS. That is, DRS resource setting, subframe setting, antenna port index, number of antenna ports, ID for sequence generation, etc. may be set independently (individually) from PSS, SSS, CRS, and CSI-RS. Good.
 図9は、DRSの構成の一例を示す図である。ここで、DRSに用いられる系列(信号系列、参照信号系列)は、周波数軸上のZadoff-Chu系列によって生成されてもよい。また、DRSは、周波数軸上で連続に配置されてもよい。DRSは、6リソースブロックを用い、そのうちの62サブキャリアを用いて送信されてもよい。DRSは、前記6リソースブロックのうちの10サブキャリアをゼロ電力(Zero power)で送信されてもよい。言い換えると、DRSは、前記6リソースブロックのうちの10サブキャリアを予約し、信号を送信しなくてもよい。DRSは、FDD(フレーム構成タイプ1)の場合にスロット番号0とスロット番号10の最後のOFDMシンボルに配置され、TDD(フレーム構成タイプ2)の場合にサブフレーム1とサブフレーム6の3番目のOFDMシンボルにマップされる。DRSは、セルIDを特定する情報の一部を含んで送信されてもよい。 FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a DRS configuration. Here, a sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) used for DRS may be generated by a Zadoff-Chu sequence on the frequency axis. Moreover, DRS may be arrange | positioned continuously on a frequency axis. The DRS may be transmitted using 62 resource blocks using 6 resource blocks. In DRS, 10 subcarriers of the 6 resource blocks may be transmitted with zero power. In other words, the DRS may reserve 10 subcarriers out of the 6 resource blocks and may not transmit a signal. DRS is arranged in the last OFDM symbol of slot number 0 and slot number 10 in the case of FDD (frame configuration type 1), and the third of subframe 1 and subframe 6 in the case of TDD (frame configuration type 2). Maps to an OFDM symbol. The DRS may be transmitted including a part of information specifying the cell ID.
 なお、DRSは、PSSと異なるリソースブロック(異なる周波数ポジション)に配置されてもよい。なお、DRSは、PSSと異なるリソースブロック数を用いて送信されてもよい。なお、DRSは、PSSと異なるサブキャリア数を用いて送信されてもよい。なお、DRSは、PSSと異なるOFDMシンボルに配置されてもよい。なお、DRSはセルID(PCIやVCID)と異なる情報を含んで送信されてもよい。 Note that the DRS may be arranged in a resource block (different frequency position) different from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of resource blocks from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of subcarriers than the PSS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the PSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted including information different from the cell ID (PCI or VCID).
 DRSの構成の別の一例について説明する。 Another example of the DRS configuration will be described.
 さらに、図9には、DRSの構成の別の一例が示されている。DRSに用いられる系列(信号系列、参照信号系列)は、2つの長さ31のバイナリ系列を連結してインタリーブされてもよい。DRSの系列は、M系列に基づいて生成されてもよい。DRSは、サブフレーム0に配置される信号とサブフレーム5に配置される信号と異なる。DRSは、FDDの場合にスロット番号0とスロット番号10の6番目のOFDMシンボルに配置され、TDDの場合にスロット番号1とスロット番号11の7番目のOFDMシンボルに配置される。言い換えると、FDDの場合にスロット番号0とスロット番号10の最後から2番目のOFDMシンボルに配置され、TDDの場合にスロット番号1とスロット番号11の最後のOFDMシンボルに配置される。その際、DRSは、セルIDを特定する情報の一部を含んで送信されてもよい。 Further, FIG. 9 shows another example of the configuration of the DRS. A sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) used for DRS may be interleaved by concatenating two binary sequences of length 31. The DRS sequence may be generated based on the M sequence. The DRS is different from the signal arranged in subframe 0 and the signal arranged in subframe 5. The DRS is arranged in the sixth OFDM symbol of slot number 0 and slot number 10 in the case of FDD, and is arranged in the seventh OFDM symbol of slot number 1 and slot number 11 in the case of TDD. In other words, in the case of FDD, it is arranged in the second OFDM symbol from the end of slot number 0 and slot number 10, and in the case of TDD, it is arranged in the last OFDM symbol of slot number 1 and slot number 11. At that time, the DRS may be transmitted including a part of information specifying the cell ID.
 なお、DRSは、SSSと異なるリソースブロック(異なる周波数ポジション)に配置されてもよい。なお、DRSは、SSSと異なるリソースブロック数を用いて送信されてもよい。なお、DRSは、SSSと異なるサブキャリア数を用いて送信されてもよい。なお、DRSは、SSSと異なるOFDMシンボルに配置されてもよい。なお、DRSはセルIDと異なる情報を含んで送信されてもよい。 Note that the DRS may be arranged in a resource block (different frequency position) different from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of resource blocks than the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a different number of subcarriers from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the SSS. Note that the DRS may be transmitted including information different from the cell ID.
 なお、前記DRSが送信されるサブフレーム数は限定されない。例えば、前記DRSはサブフレーム0、1、5、6に送信されてもよい。すなわち、SSSの構成に基づく複数のDRSが送信されてもよい。この場合、多くの情報を前記DRSに含めて送信することができる。また、この場合、直交系列数が増加するため、セル間干渉を抑圧する効果がある。 Note that the number of subframes in which the DRS is transmitted is not limited. For example, the DRS may be transmitted in subframes 0, 1, 5, and 6. That is, a plurality of DRSs based on the SSS configuration may be transmitted. In this case, a lot of information can be included in the DRS and transmitted. In this case, since the number of orthogonal sequences increases, there is an effect of suppressing inter-cell interference.
 さらに、図10には、DRSの構成の別の一例が示されている。DRSの信号は、擬似乱数系列(Pseudo-random sequence)を用いて生成される。前記擬似乱数系列は、例えばGold系列である。前記擬似乱数系列は、セルID(PCI、VCID、スクランブル識別子(scramble ID)、スクランブリング識別子(scrambling Identity)、スクランブリング初期化識別子(scrambling initialization ID))に基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、CPのタイプに基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、スロット番号とスロット内のOFDMシンボル番号に基づいて計算される。1つのアンテナポートで送信されるDRSのリソースエレメントは、周波数軸上で6サブキャリアの周期で配置される。アンテナポートpで送信されるDRSとアンテナポートp+1で送信されるDRSのリソースエレメントは、3サブキャリア離れて配置される。DRSは、セルIDに基づいて周波数上をセル固有にシフトされる。アンテナポートpで送信されるDRSとアンテナポートp+1で送信されるDRSのリソースエレメントは、ノーマルCPの場合はOFDMシンボル0、4に配置され、拡張CPの場合はOFDMシンボル0、3に配置される。アンテナポートp+2で送信されるDRSとアンテナポートp+3で送信されるDRSのリソースエレメントは、OFDMシンボル1に配置される。DRSは下りリンクで設定された帯域幅で、広帯域に送信される。なお、DRSの送信帯域幅は、上位層シグナリングを用いて設定されてもよい。DRSの送信帯域幅は、測定帯域幅と同じであるとみなされてもよい。 Furthermore, FIG. 10 shows another example of the configuration of the DRS. The DRS signal is generated using a pseudo-random sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on a cell ID (PCI, VCID, scramble identifier (scramble ID), scrambling identifier (scrambling ID), scrambling initialization ID (scrambling ID)). The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. The resource elements of DRS transmitted by one antenna port are arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis. The DRS resource elements transmitted at antenna port p and the DRS resource elements transmitted at antenna port p + 1 are arranged 3 subcarriers apart. The DRS is shifted in a cell-specific manner on the frequency based on the cell ID. The resource elements of the DRS transmitted through the antenna port p and the DRS transmitted through the antenna port p + 1 are arranged in the OFDM symbols 0 and 4 in the case of the normal CP, and are arranged in the OFDM symbols 0 and 3 in the case of the extended CP. . The resource elements of the DRS transmitted at antenna port p + 2 and the DRS transmitted at antenna port p + 3 are arranged in OFDM symbol 1. DRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink and is transmitted in a wide band. Note that the DRS transmission bandwidth may be set using higher layer signaling. The DRS transmission bandwidth may be considered to be the same as the measurement bandwidth.
 なお、DRSは、CRSと異なる擬似乱数系列を用いて送信されてもよい。なお、DRSは、CRSと異なる系列の計算方法を用いてもよい。なお、DRSは、CRSと異なるサブキャリア周期で周波数上に配置されてもよい。なお、DRSが送信されるアンテナポートpとDRSが送信されるアンテナポートp+1のリソースエレメントの配置関係は、アンテナポート0とアンテナポート1の配置関係と異なってもよい。DRSは、CRSと異なる情報に基づいて周波数上に配置をシフトさせてもよい。なお、DRSは、CRSと異なるOFDMシンボルに配置されてもよい。なお、DRSは、CRSと異なる帯域幅で配置されてもよく、上位層で設定された帯域幅で配置され、狭帯域に送信してもよい。 Note that the DRS may be transmitted using a pseudo-random number sequence different from the CRS. Note that DRS may use a calculation method of a sequence different from CRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged on the frequency with a subcarrier period different from that of the CRS. Note that the arrangement relationship of the resource elements of the antenna port p to which DRS is transmitted and the antenna port p + 1 to which DRS is transmitted may be different from the arrangement relationship of the antenna port 0 and the antenna port 1. The DRS may shift the arrangement on the frequency based on information different from the CRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the CRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the CRS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band.
 さらに、図10には、DRSの構成の別の一例が示されている。DRS(図10のD1,D2)の系列(信号系列、参照信号系列)は、擬似乱数系列を用いて生成される。前記擬似乱数系列は、例えば,Gold系列である。前記擬似乱数系列は、上位層からの情報に基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、上位層からの情報が設定されない場合にセルIDに基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、CPのタイプに基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、スロット番号とスロット内のOFDMシンボル番号に基づいて計算される。DRSが配置されるリソースエレメントは、リソース設定番号(DRS resource configuration index)によって定められ、図12の表を用いて算出されてもよい。ここで、k’はサブキャリア番号、l’はOFDMシンボル番号、nはスロット番号を示し、nmod2はサブフレーム内のスロット番号を示す。例えば、設定番号0の場合、DRSは、スロット番号0、サブキャリア番号9、OFDMシンボル番号5および6のリソースエレメントに配置される。DRSは下りリンクに対して設定された帯域幅で、広帯域に送信される。 Further, FIG. 10 shows another example of the DRS configuration. A sequence (signal sequence, reference signal sequence) of DRS (D1, D2 in FIG. 10) is generated using a pseudo-random number sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on information from an upper layer. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the cell ID when information from an upper layer is not set. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. The resource element in which the DRS is arranged is determined by a resource setting number (DRS resource configuration index), and may be calculated using the table of FIG. Here, k ′ represents a subcarrier number, l ′ represents an OFDM symbol number, n s represents a slot number, and n s mod2 represents a slot number in the subframe. For example, in the case of setting number 0, DRS is arranged in resource elements of slot number 0, subcarrier number 9, OFDM symbol numbers 5 and 6. DRS is a bandwidth set for the downlink, and is transmitted in a wide band.
 なお、DRSの系列は、CSI-RSと異なる擬似乱数系列を用いてもよい。なお、DRSの系列は、CSI-RSと異なる系列の計算方法に基づいて生成されてもよい。なお、DRSは、図12の表に限らず、CSI-RSと異なるリソースエレメントに配置できる。なお、DRSは、CSI-RSと異なる帯域幅で配置されてもよく、上位層で設定された帯域幅で配置され、狭帯域に送信してもよい。 Note that a pseudo-random number sequence different from CSI-RS may be used as the DRS sequence. The DRS sequence may be generated based on a sequence calculation method different from CSI-RS. Note that the DRS is not limited to the table of FIG. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the CSI-RS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band.
 さらに、図10には、DRSの構成の別の一例が示されている。DRSが配置されるリソースエレメントは、リソース設定番号(DRS resource configuration index)によって定められ、図12の表を用いて算出される。ここで、k’はサブキャリア番号、l’はOFDMシンボル番号、nはスロット番号を示し、nmod2はサブフレーム内のスロット番号を示す。例えば、設定番号0の場合、DRSは、スロット番号0、サブキャリア番号9、OFDMシンボル番号5および6のリソースエレメントに配置される。DRSは下りリンクに対して設定された帯域幅で、広帯域に送信される。DRSは、設定されたリソースエレメントにおいてゼロ出力で送信してもよい。言い換えると、基地局装置3は、設定されたリソースエレメントにおいて、DRSを送信しなくてもよい。端末装置1の観点から、基地局装置3からDRSが送信されないリソースエレメントは、隣接セル(または隣接の基地局装置)からの干渉測定に用いることができる。また、DRSは、図11のR6と同様の構成であってもよい。 Further, FIG. 10 shows another example of the DRS configuration. The resource element in which the DRS is arranged is determined by a resource setting number (DRS resource configuration index), and is calculated using the table of FIG. Here, k ′ represents a subcarrier number, l ′ represents an OFDM symbol number, n s represents a slot number, and n s mod2 represents a slot number in the subframe. For example, in the case of setting number 0, DRS is arranged in resource elements of slot number 0, subcarrier number 9, OFDM symbol numbers 5 and 6. DRS is a bandwidth set for the downlink, and is transmitted in a wide band. The DRS may be transmitted with zero output in the configured resource element. In other words, the base station apparatus 3 may not transmit the DRS in the set resource element. From the viewpoint of the terminal device 1, a resource element in which no DRS is transmitted from the base station device 3 can be used for interference measurement from an adjacent cell (or an adjacent base station device). Further, the DRS may have the same configuration as R6 in FIG.
 図11には、DRSの構成の一例が示される。DRSの系列は、擬似乱数系列を用いて生成される。前記擬似乱数系列は、例えばGold系列である。前記擬似乱数系列は、セルIDに基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、CPのタイプに基づいて計算される。前記擬似乱数系列は、スロット番号とスロット内のOFDMシンボル番号に基づいて計算される。1つのアンテナポートで送信されるDRSは、周波数軸上で6サブキャリアの周期で配置される。DRSは、セルIDに基づいて周波数上をセル固有にシフトされる。DRSは、ノーマルCPの場合は、スロット0番目のOFDMシンボル3、5、6に、スロット1番目のOFDシンボル1、2、3、5、6に配置され、拡張CPの場合は、スロット0番目のOFDMシンボル4、5に、スロット1番目のOFDMシンボル1、2、4、5に配置される。DRSのリソースエレメントは、l番目のOFDMシンボルとl+L番目のOFDMシンボルで周波数上にL分シフトして配置される。DRSは下りリンクで設定された帯域幅で、広帯域に送信される。 FIG. 11 shows an example of the DRS configuration. The DRS sequence is generated using a pseudo-random sequence. The pseudo random number sequence is, for example, a Gold sequence. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the cell ID. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the type of CP. The pseudo-random number sequence is calculated based on the slot number and the OFDM symbol number in the slot. The DRS transmitted by one antenna port is arranged with a period of 6 subcarriers on the frequency axis. The DRS is shifted in a cell-specific manner on the frequency based on the cell ID. In the case of normal CP, the DRS is arranged in the OFDM symbol 3, 5, 6 in the slot 0th, and in the OFD symbols 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 in the slot 1 in the slot. OFDM symbols 4 and 5 are allocated to OFDM symbols 1, 2, 4, and 5 in the first slot. The DRS resource elements are arranged such that the frequency is shifted by L by L in the l-th OFDM symbol and the l + L-th OFDM symbol. DRS is a bandwidth set in the downlink and is transmitted in a wide band.
 なお、DRSの系列は、PRSと異なる擬似乱数系列を用いてもよい。なお、DRSの系列は、PRSと異なる系列の計算方法を用いてもよい。なお、DRSは、PRSと異なるサブキャリア周期で周波数上に配置されてもよい。なお、DRSは、PRSと異なるOFDMシンボルに配置されてもよい。なお、DRSは、PRSと異なる帯域幅で配置されてもよく、上位層で設定された帯域幅で配置され、狭帯域に送信してもよい。つまり、DRSの送信帯域幅または測定帯域幅は、上位層で設定されてもよい。 Note that a pseudo-random number sequence different from PRS may be used as the DRS sequence. Note that a DRS sequence may use a sequence calculation method different from PRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged on the frequency with a subcarrier period different from that of the PRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged in an OFDM symbol different from the PRS. Note that the DRS may be arranged with a bandwidth different from that of the PRS, may be arranged with a bandwidth set in an upper layer, and may be transmitted in a narrow band. That is, the DRS transmission bandwidth or measurement bandwidth may be set in the upper layer.
 DRSは、CSI-IMリソースを含んで構成されてもよい。CSI-IMリソースは、端末装置1が干渉を測定するために用いられるリソースである。例えば、端末装置1は、CSI-IMリソースを、CSI測定において干渉を測定するためのリソースまたはRSRQ測定において干渉を測定するためにリソースとして用いる。CSI-IMリソースは、CSI-RSの設定方法と同じ方法を用いて設定される。CSI-IMリソースは、ゼロパワーCSI-RSとして設定されたリソースであるかもしれない。 DRS may be configured to include CSI-IM resources. The CSI-IM resource is a resource used for the terminal device 1 to measure interference. For example, the terminal device 1 uses the CSI-IM resource as a resource for measuring interference in CSI measurement or a resource for measuring interference in RSRQ measurement. The CSI-IM resource is set using the same method as the CSI-RS setting method. The CSI-IM resource may be a resource configured as a zero power CSI-RS.
 以上、DRSの構成について説明したが、上記の一例のみに限らず、DRSは、上記の例を複数組み合わせて構成されてもよい。 As mentioned above, although the structure of DRS was demonstrated, it is not restricted only to said example, DRS may be comprised combining a plurality of said examples.
 好ましい組み合わせの具体的な一例を挙げる。DRSは、Zadoff-Chu系列で構成された信号とM系列に基づいて構成された信号とGold系列に基づいて構成された信号とを組み合わせて構成されてもよい。また、Gold系列に基づいて構成された信号は、Zadoff-Chu系列で構成された信号と比べて広帯域で構成され、Zadoff-Chu系列に基づいて構成された信号は、6リソースブロックを用いて送信され、Gold系列に基づいて構成された信号はサブフレームの全帯域で送信されてもよい。つまり、DRSが送信される帯域幅は、上位層によって設定(configurable)されてもよい。つまり、DRSは、異なる系列で異なる構成を有する信号で構成されることが望ましい。 Specific examples of preferable combinations are given below. The DRS may be configured by combining a signal configured based on a Zadoff-Chu sequence, a signal configured based on an M sequence, and a signal configured based on a Gold sequence. In addition, a signal configured based on the Gold sequence is configured with a wider band than a signal configured based on the Zadoff-Chu sequence, and a signal configured based on the Zadoff-Chu sequence is transmitted using 6 resource blocks. The signal configured based on the Gold sequence may be transmitted in the entire band of the subframe. That is, the bandwidth in which the DRS is transmitted may be configured by the upper layer. In other words, the DRS is preferably composed of signals having different configurations in different series.
 また、DRSは、Zadoff-Chu系列で構成された信号とM系列に基づいて構成された信号とGold系列に基づいて構成された信号とゼロ出力(Zero power)で送信される信号とを組み合わせて構成されてもよい。また、Gold系列に基づいて構成された信号およびゼロ出力で送信される信号は、DRSの設定情報によってリソースエレメントが指定されてもよい。また、Gold系列に基づいて構成された信号は、Zadoff-Chu系列で構成された信号と比べて広帯域で構成され、Zadoff-Chu系列で構成された信号は6リソースブロックを用いて送信され、Gold系列に基づいて構成された信号はサブフレームの全帯域で送信されてもよい。 In addition, DRS combines a signal composed of a Zadoff-Chu sequence, a signal composed based on an M sequence, a signal composed based on a Gold sequence, and a signal transmitted with zero output (Zero power). It may be configured. In addition, a resource element may be specified by DRS setting information for a signal configured based on the Gold sequence and a signal transmitted with zero output. In addition, the signal configured based on the Gold sequence is configured with a wider band than the signal configured with the Zadoff-Chu sequence, and the signal configured with the Zadoff-Chu sequence is transmitted using 6 resource blocks. A signal configured based on the sequence may be transmitted in the entire band of the subframe.
 端末装置1は、DRSの設定を専用RRCシグナリングによって通知される。前記DRSの設定は、RSを送信するセル間で共通の情報と、DRSを送信するセル個別の情報が含まれる。なお、DRSの設定は、後述する測定対象の設定情報に含めて通知されてもよい。 The terminal device 1 is notified of the DRS setting by dedicated RRC signaling. The setting of the DRS includes information common to cells transmitting the RS and information for each cell transmitting the DRS. Note that the DRS setting may be notified by being included in the measurement target setting information described later.
 DRSを送信するセル間で共通の情報には、帯域の中心周波数の情報、帯域幅の情報、サブフレームの情報などが含まれる。 Information common to cells transmitting DRS includes information on the center frequency of the band, information on the bandwidth, information on subframes, and the like.
 DRSを送信するセル個別の情報には、帯域の中心周波数の情報、帯域幅の情報、サブフレームの情報、リソースエレメントを指定する情報、セルを特定する情報(セルID、PCI、VCID)、などが含まれる。 Cell-specific information for transmitting a DRS includes information on the center frequency of the band, information on the bandwidth, information on subframes, information specifying a resource element, information specifying a cell (cell ID, PCI, VCID), etc. Is included.
 端末装置1は、DRSの設定により、DRSが含まれるサブフレームを認知することができるため、DRSが含まれないサブフレームでは、DRSの検出処理を行わなくてもよい。これにより、端末装置1の消費電力を低減することができる。 Since the terminal device 1 can recognize a subframe including a DRS by setting the DRS, the DRS may not be detected in a subframe that does not include the DRS. Thereby, the power consumption of the terminal device 1 can be reduced.
 DRSの設定には、第1の構成の信号の設定から第nの構成の信号の設定が含まれてもよい。例えば、各構成の信号のリソース設定は、個別にセットされてもよい。また、各構成の信号のサブフレーム設定や送信電力は、共通(または共通の値)であってもよい。また、ある構成の信号に対してのみ、セルIDやアンテナポートインデックス、アンテナポート数がセットされてもよい。また、DRSの設定には、ある構成の信号に対して、リソース設定やサブフレーム設定などが複数セットされてもよい。 The DRS setting may include the setting of the first configuration signal to the setting of the nth configuration signal. For example, the signal resource settings for each component may be set individually. Further, the subframe setting and transmission power of the signals of each configuration may be common (or a common value). Further, the cell ID, antenna port index, and number of antenna ports may be set only for a signal having a certain configuration. Also, in the DRS setting, a plurality of resource settings, subframe settings, and the like may be set for a signal having a certain configuration.
 DRSの設定には、DRSが送信される周波数を示す情報(パラメータ)が含まれてもよい。 The DRS setting may include information (parameter) indicating the frequency at which the DRS is transmitted.
 また、DRSの設定には、DRSが送信される可能性のあるサブフレームのオフセット(オフセットの値)を示す情報が含まれてもよい。 In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating an offset (offset value) of a subframe in which the DRS may be transmitted.
 また、DRSの設定には、DRSが送信される可能性のあるサブフレーム周期を示す情報が含まれてもよい。 In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating a subframe period in which the DRS may be transmitted.
 また、DRSの設定には、DRSの系列を生成するための識別子が含まれてもよい。 Also, the DRS settings may include an identifier for generating a DRS sequence.
 また、DRSの設定には、DRSが送信されるアンテナポートを示す情報が含まれてもよい。 In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating an antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted.
 また、DRSの設定には、DRSのバースト送信期間を示す情報が含まれてもよい。 Also, the DRS setting may include information indicating the DRS burst transmission period.
 また、DRSの設定には、DRSをサブフレーム周期中に一度に測定するサブフレーム期間を示す情報が含まれてもよい。 In addition, the DRS setting may include information indicating a subframe period in which the DRS is measured at a time during the subframe period.
 つまり、DRSの設定には、DRSの送信に必要な情報、および/または、DRSの受信に必要な情報、および/または、DRSの測定に必要な情報が含まれてもよい。 That is, the DRS setting may include information necessary for transmitting the DRS and / or information necessary for receiving the DRS and / or information necessary for measuring the DRS.
 上記のDRSの設定に含まれる情報は、各構成の信号毎にセットされてもよい。つまり、異なる構成の信号毎に、上記の情報が設定されてもよい。 The information included in the above DRS settings may be set for each signal of each configuration. That is, the above information may be set for each signal having a different configuration.
 DRSの設定は、上位層シグナリングを用いて通知されてもよい。また、DRSの設定は、システムインフォメーションを用いて通知されてもよい。また、DRSの設定の一部の情報は、L1シグナリング(DCIフォーマット)やL2シグナリング(MAC CE)を用いて通知されてもよい。 The DRS setting may be notified using higher layer signaling. The DRS setting may be notified using system information. Also, some information on the DRS settings may be notified using L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE).
 DRSは、同一周波数における無線インターフェースによる基地局装置間同期(ネットワークリスニング:network listening)のための参照信号(リスニングRS:listeningRS)に用いられてもよい。 DRS may be used for a reference signal (listening RS) for synchronization (network listening) between base station apparatuses via a radio interface at the same frequency.
 以下、DRSを用いた無線インターフェースによる基地局装置間同期について説明する。 Hereinafter, synchronization between base station apparatuses using a radio interface using DRS will be described.
 基地局装置間で送信タイミングが同期されることで、TDDシステムの適用、eICIC、CoMPなどのセル間干渉抑圧技術の適用、送信ポイントが異なる基地局間のキャリアアグリゲーションの適用が可能となる。しかしながら、スモールセルがバックホールの遅延が大きい環境、かつ、建物内に配置される場合、バックホールや衛星測位システム(GSNN:Global Navigation Satellite System)による時刻同期を行うことが困難である。そのため、下りリンクの送信タイミングの同期を行うために、無線インターフェースを用いる。 By synchronizing the transmission timing between base station apparatuses, it is possible to apply a TDD system, apply inter-cell interference suppression techniques such as eICIC and CoMP, and apply carrier aggregation between base stations with different transmission points. However, when a small cell is placed in an environment with a large backhaul delay and in a building, it is difficult to perform time synchronization by a backhaul or a satellite positioning system (GSNN: Global Navigation Satellite System). Therefore, a wireless interface is used to synchronize downlink transmission timing.
 無線インターフェースによる基地局装置間同期の手順について説明する。初めに、バックホールにより、送信タイミングの基準となる基地局装置3の決定、および、リスニングRSの送信タイミングの指定が行われる。また同時に、バックホールにより、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3の決定、および、リスニングRSの受信タイミングの指定が行われる。送信タイミングの基準となる基地局装置3、送信タイミングの同期を行なう基地局装置3、およびリスニングRSの送信/受信タイミングの決定は、基地局装置、MME、またはS-GWが行ってもよい。送信タイミングの基準となる基地局装置3は、バックホールによって通知された送信タイミングに基づいて下りリンクコンポーネントキャリアまたは下りリンクサブフレームでリスニングRSの送信を行う。送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3は、通知された受信タイミングでリスニングRSの受信を行い、送信タイミングの同期を行う。なお、リスニングRSは、送信タイミングの基準となる基地局装置3が停止の状態であっても送信してもよい。なお、リスニングRSは、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3が起動/停止の状態であっても受信してもよい。 The procedure for synchronization between base station devices using a wireless interface will be described. First, the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for the transmission timing is determined and the transmission timing of the listening RS is designated by the backhaul. At the same time, the base station apparatus 3 that performs synchronization of transmission timing and the reception timing of the listening RS are designated by the backhaul. The base station apparatus 3, MME, or S-GW may determine the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for the transmission timing, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing, and the transmission / reception timing of the listening RS. The base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing transmits the listening RS in the downlink component carrier or the downlink subframe based on the transmission timing notified by the backhaul. The base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing receives the listening RS at the notified reception timing, and synchronizes the transmission timing. Note that the listening RS may be transmitted even when the base station apparatus 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing is in a stopped state. The listening RS may be received even when the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in the activated / stopped state.
 TDDにおいて、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3は、リスニングRSを受信する間は下りリンク信号の送信を停止し、無線信号の受信処理を行う。言い換えると、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3は、リスニングRSを受信する間は上りリンクサブフレームで設定される。ここで、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3に接続される端末装置1は、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3がリスニングRSを受信する間は停止の状態だと認識する。すなわち、端末装置1は、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3からPSS/SSS、PBCH、CRS、PCFICH、PHICHおよびPDCCHが送信されないと認識する。端末装置1は、基地局装置3よりリスニングRSを受信するタイミングが通知される。言い換えると、端末装置1は、基地局装置3より停止の状態が通知される。端末装置1は、リスニングRSを受信するタイミングにおいて、基地局装置3に対する測定を行わない。なお、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3に接続される端末装置1は、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3がリスニングRSを受信する間は上りリンクサブフレームと認識してもよい。 In TDD, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes transmission timing stops transmission of a downlink signal and receives a radio signal while receiving a listening RS. In other words, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is set in the uplink subframe while receiving the listening RS. Here, the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing recognizes that the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in a stopped state while receiving the listening RS. That is, the terminal device 1 recognizes that PSS / SSS, PBCH, CRS, PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH are not transmitted from the base station device 3 that performs transmission timing synchronization. The terminal device 1 is notified of the timing of receiving the listening RS from the base station device 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 is notified of the stop state from the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 does not measure the base station device 3 at the timing of receiving the listening RS. Note that the terminal apparatus 1 connected to the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing may be recognized as an uplink subframe while the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing receives the listening RS.
 FDDにおいて、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3は、リスニングRSを受信する間は下りリンク信号の送信を停止し、下りリンクコンポーネントキャリアで受信処理を行う。ここで、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3に接続される端末装置1は、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3がリスニングRSを受信する間は停止の状態だと認識する。すなわち、端末装置1は、送信タイミングの同期を行う基地局装置3からPSS/SSS、PBCH、CRS、PCFICH、PHICHおよびPDCCHが送信されないと認識する。端末装置1は、基地局装置3よりリスニングRSを受信するタイミングが通知される。言い換えると、端末装置1は、基地局装置3より停止の状態が通知される。端末装置1は、リスニングRSを受信するタイミングにおいて、基地局装置3に対する測定を行なわない。 In FDD, the base station apparatus 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing stops transmission of the downlink signal while receiving the listening RS, and performs reception processing using the downlink component carrier. Here, the terminal device 1 connected to the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing recognizes that the base station device 3 that synchronizes the transmission timing is in a stopped state while receiving the listening RS. That is, the terminal device 1 recognizes that PSS / SSS, PBCH, CRS, PCFICH, PHICH, and PDCCH are not transmitted from the base station device 3 that performs transmission timing synchronization. The terminal device 1 is notified of the timing of receiving the listening RS from the base station device 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 is notified of the stop state from the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 does not measure the base station device 3 at the timing of receiving the listening RS.
 なお、端末装置1は、送信タイミングの基準となる基地局装置3から送信されたリスニングRSを用いて、セルの検出を行なってもよい。 In addition, the terminal device 1 may detect a cell using the listening RS transmitted from the base station device 3 serving as a reference for transmission timing.
 次に、物理層の測定の詳細について説明する。端末装置1は、上位層に報告する物理層の測定を行なう。物理層の測定には、RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power)、RSSI(Received Signal Strength Indicator)、RSRQ(Reference Signal Received Quality)などがある。 Next, details of physical layer measurement will be described. The terminal device 1 measures the physical layer reported to the upper layer. Physical layer measurements include RSRP (Reference Signal-Received Power), RSSI (Received Signal-Strength Indicator), and RSRQ (Reference Signal-Received Quality).
 次に、RSRPの詳細について説明する。RSRPは参照信号の受信電力として定義される。RSRQは、参照信号の受信品質として定義される。 Next, details of RSRP will be described. RSRP is defined as the received power of the reference signal. RSRQ is defined as the reception quality of the reference signal.
 RSRPの一例について説明する。 An example of RSRP will be described.
 RSRPは、考慮される測定周波数帯域幅の中に含まれるCRSが送信されるリソースエレメントの電力を線形平均した値として定義される。RSRPの決定において、アンテナポート0のCRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメントが用いられる。端末装置がアンテナポート1のCRSを検出可能であれば、RSRPの決定のためにアンテナポート0のCRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメント(アンテナポート0に割り当てられたリソースエレメントにマッピングされた無線リソース)に加えてアンテナポート1のCRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメント(アンテナポート1に割り当てられたリソースエレメントにマッピングされた無線リソース)も用いることができる。以下、アンテナポート0のCRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメントを用いて計算されたRSRPをCRSベースRSRPまたは第1のRSRPと称する。 RSRP is defined as a value obtained by linearly averaging the powers of resource elements to which CRS included in the considered measurement frequency bandwidth is transmitted. In determining RSRP, a resource element to which CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped is used. If the terminal device can detect the CRS of antenna port 1, the resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 0 is mapped (the radio resource mapped to the resource element assigned to antenna port 0) for RSRP determination In addition, a resource element to which the CRS of antenna port 1 is mapped (a radio resource mapped to the resource element assigned to antenna port 1) can also be used. Hereinafter, the RSRP calculated using the resource element to which the CRS of the antenna port 0 is mapped is referred to as a CRS base RSRP or a first RSRP.
 端末装置1は、RRCアイドル(RRC_IDLE)状態でイントラ周波数のセルおよび/またはインター周波数のセルのRSRPを測定する。ここで、RRCアイドル状態のイントラ周波数のセルとは、端末装置がブロードキャストによってシステム情報が受信されたセルと同じ周波数帯域のセルである。ここで、RRCアイドル状態のインター周波数のセルとは、端末装置1がブロードキャストによってシステム情報が受信されたセルと異なる周波数帯域のセルである。端末装置1は、RRC接続(RRC_CONNECTED)状態でイントラ周波数のセルおよび/またはインター周波数のセルのRSRPを測定する。ここで、RRC接続状態のイントラ周波数のセルとは、端末装置1がRRCシグナリングまたはブロードキャストによってシステム情報が受信されたセルと同じ周波数帯域のセルである。ここで、RRC接続状態のインター周波数のセルとは、端末装置1がRRCシグナリングまたはブロードキャストによってシステム情報が受信されたセルと異なる周波数帯域のセルである。 The terminal device 1 measures the RSRP of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle (RRC_IDLE) state. Here, the intra-frequency cell in the RRC idle state is a cell in the same frequency band as the cell from which the terminal apparatus broadcasts system information. Here, the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle state is a cell in a frequency band different from the cell in which the terminal device 1 receives the system information by broadcasting. The terminal device 1 measures RSRP of an intra-frequency cell and / or an inter-frequency cell in an RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state. Here, the intra-frequency cell in the RRC connection state is a cell in the same frequency band as the cell from which the terminal device 1 has received system information by RRC signaling or broadcast. Here, the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection state is a cell in a frequency band different from the cell in which the terminal device 1 receives the system information by RRC signaling or broadcast.
 RSRPの一例について説明する。 An example of RSRP will be described.
 RSRPは、考慮される測定周波数帯域幅の中に含まれるDRSが送信されるリソースエレメントの電力を線形平均した値として定義される。RSRPの決定において、DRSがマッピングされるリソースエレメントが用いられる。DRSが送信されるリソースエレメントおよびアンテナポートは、上位層で通知される。 RSRP is defined as a value obtained by linearly averaging the power of the resource elements to which the DRS included in the considered measurement frequency bandwidth is transmitted. In determining RSRP, a resource element to which DRS is mapped is used. The resource element and antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted are notified in the upper layer.
 端末装置1は、RRC接続(RRC_CONNECTED)状態でイントラ周波数のセルおよび/またはインター周波数のセルのRSRPを測定する。 The terminal device 1 measures the RSRP of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection (RRC_CONNECTED) state.
 RSSIの詳細について説明する。RSSIは、受信アンテナを用いて観測される総受信電力で定義される。 Details of RSSI will be described. RSSI is defined by the total received power observed using the receiving antenna.
 RSSIの一例について説明する。 An example of RSSI will be described.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、アンテナポート0に対する参照信号を含んでいると想定したOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。言い換えると、RSSIは、アンテナポート0のCRSを含んでいるOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that are assumed to include the reference signal for antenna port 0. In other words, the RSSI is configured with a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
 RSSIの一例について説明する。 An example of RSSI will be described.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、全てのOFDMシンボルを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing all OFDM symbols. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
 RSSIの一例について説明する。 An example of RSSI will be described.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、DRSを含んでいないOFDMシンボルを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成される。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。DRSが送信されるリソースエレメントおよび/またはアンテナポートは、上位層で通知される。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing OFDM symbols not including DRS. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like. The resource element and / or antenna port to which the DRS is transmitted is notified in the upper layer.
 RSSIの一例について説明する。 An example of RSSI will be described.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)を含まないOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。言い換えると、RSSIは、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)を含まないOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS). In other words, the RSSI is configured by a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS). RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
 RSSIの一例について説明する。 An example of RSSI will be described.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)を含まないOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値と、RSRPの値との合計値で構成する。言い換えると、RSSIは、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)を含まないOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値と、RSRPの値との合計値で構成する。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS), and the RSRP value. In other words, RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) and the value of RSRP. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
 以下では、RSRQの詳細について説明する。RSRQは、RSRPとRSSIの比で定義され、通信品質の指標である測定対象セルの信号対干渉雑音比(SINR)と同等の目的で用いられる。RSRQにおける、RSRPとRSSIの組み合わせは以下の限りではないが、本実施形態において、RSRQにおける、RSRPとRSSIの好ましい組み合わせについて記載する。 Hereinafter, details of RSRQ will be described. RSRQ is defined by the ratio of RSRP and RSSI, and is used for the same purpose as the signal-to-interference noise ratio (SINR) of the measurement target cell, which is an indicator of communication quality. Although the combination of RSRP and RSSI in RSRQ is not limited to the following, this embodiment describes a preferable combination of RSRP and RSSI in RSRQ.
 RSRQの一例について説明する。 An example of RSRQ will be described.
 RSRQは、N×RSRP/RSSIの式で計算される比として定義される。ここで、Nは、RSSIの測定帯域幅に相当するリソースブロック数であり、RSRQの分子と分母は、同じリソースブロックのセットで構成される。ここで、RSRPは、第1のRSRPである。以下、第1のRSRPを用いて計算されたRSRQを用いて計算されたRSRQをCRSベースRSRQまたは第1のRSRQと呼称する。 RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N × RSRP / RSSI. Here, N is the number of resource blocks corresponding to the measurement bandwidth of RSSI, and the numerator and denominator of RSRQ are configured by the same set of resource blocks. Here, RSRP is the first RSRP. Hereinafter, the RSRQ calculated using the RSRQ calculated using the first RSRP is referred to as a CRS-based RSRQ or a first RSRQ.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、アンテナポート0に対する参照信号を含んでいるOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成される。言い換えると、RSSIは、アンテナポート0のCRS(アンテナポート0にマップされた無線リソース)を含んでいるOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。RSRQの測定を行うための所定のサブフレームが上位層のシグナリングから指定された場合、RSSIは前記指定されたサブフレームにおける全てのOFDMシンボルから測定される。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the reference signal for antenna port 0. In other words, the RSSI is configured by a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0 (the radio resource mapped to the antenna port 0). RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like. When a predetermined subframe for performing RSRQ measurement is designated from higher layer signaling, RSSI is measured from all OFDM symbols in the designated subframe.
 端末装置1は、RRCアイドル状態でイントラ周波数のセルおよび/またはインター周波数のセルのRSRQを測定する。端末装置1は、RRC接続状態でイントラ周波数のセルおよび/またはインター周波数のセルのRSRQを測定する。 The terminal device 1 measures the RSRQ of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC idle state. The terminal device 1 measures RSRQ of an intra-frequency cell and / or an inter-frequency cell in an RRC connection state.
 RSRQの一例について説明する。 An example of RSRQ will be described.
 RSRQは、N×RSRP/RSSIの式で計算される比として定義される。ここでNはRSSIの測定帯域幅のリソースブロック数であり、RSRQの分子と分母は同じリソースブロックのセットで構成されなければならない。ここで、RSRPは、第2のRSRPである。以下、第2のRSRPを用いて計算されたRSRQを用いて計算されたRSRQを第2のRSRQと呼称する。 RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N × RSRP / RSSI. Here, N is the number of resource blocks in the RSSI measurement bandwidth, and the RSRQ numerator and denominator must be composed of the same set of resource blocks. Here, RSRP is the second RSRP. Hereinafter, the RSRQ calculated using the RSRQ calculated using the second RSRP is referred to as a second RSRQ.
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、アンテナポート0に対する参照信号を含んでいると想定したOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。言い換えると、RSSIは、アンテナポート0のCRSを含んでいるOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値で構成する。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。RSRQの測定を行うための所定のサブフレームが上位層のシグナリングから指定された場合、RSSIは前記指定されたサブフレームにおける全てのOFDMシンボルから測定される。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that are assumed to include the reference signal for antenna port 0. In other words, the RSSI is configured with a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only the OFDM symbol including the CRS of the antenna port 0. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like. When a predetermined subframe for performing RSRQ measurement is designated from higher layer signaling, RSSI is measured from all OFDM symbols in the designated subframe.
 RSRQの一例について説明する。 An example of RSRQ will be described.
 RSRQは、N×RSRP/RSSIの式で計算される比として定義される。ここで、Nは、RSSIの測定帯域幅に相当するリソースブロック数であり、RSRQの分子と分母は、同じリソースブロックのセットで構成される。ここで、RSRPは、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)に基づいて測定される。 RSRQ is defined as the ratio calculated by the formula N × RSRP / RSSI. Here, N is the number of resource blocks corresponding to the measurement bandwidth of RSSI, and the numerator and denominator of RSRQ are configured by the same set of resource blocks. Here, RSRP is measured based on DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS).
 RSSI(E-UTRA carrier RSSI)は、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)を含まないOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値と、RSRPの値との合計値で構成する。言い換えると、RSSIは、DRS(CRSおよび/またはCSI-RS)を含まないOFDMシンボルのみを観測した総受信電力を線形平均した値と、RSRPの値との合計値で構成する。RSSIは、リソースブロック数Nの帯域幅で観測される。RSSIの総受信電力は、同一チャネルのサービングセルや非サービングセルからの電力、隣接チャネルからの干渉電力、熱雑音電力、などを含む。 RSSI (E-UTRA carrier RSSI) is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols not including DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS), and the RSRP value. In other words, RSSI is composed of a total value of a value obtained by linearly averaging the total received power obtained by observing only OFDM symbols that do not include DRS (CRS and / or CSI-RS) and the value of RSRP. RSSI is observed with a bandwidth of N resource blocks. The total received power of RSSI includes power from serving cells and non-serving cells on the same channel, interference power from adjacent channels, thermal noise power, and the like.
 また、RSRQに用いられるRSSIは、RSRPと、測定帯域幅内のDRSを含まないOFDMシンボルで得られた総受信電力の線形平均値に基づいて得られてもよい。 Also, the RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained based on RSRP and a linear average value of total received power obtained by OFDM symbols not including DRS within the measurement bandwidth.
 また、RSRQに用いられるRSSIは、測定帯域幅のすべてのOFDMシンボルで得られた総受信電力の線形平均値から得られてもよい。 Also, RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from a linear average value of total received power obtained for all OFDM symbols of the measurement bandwidth.
 また、RSRQに用いられるRSSIは、測定帯域幅内のDRSを含まないOFDMシンボルで得られた総受信電力の線形平均値から得られてもよい。 Also, RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from a linear average value of total received power obtained by OFDM symbols not including DRS within the measurement bandwidth.
 また、RSRQに用いられるRSSIは、DRSを構成するCRSに対するRSSI測定から得られてもよい。 Also, RSSI used for RSRQ may be obtained from RSSI measurement for CRS constituting DRS.
 測定帯域幅は、DRSがCSI-RSと同様の構成である場合には、5MHz以上で設定されてもよい。 The measurement bandwidth may be set at 5 MHz or more when the DRS has the same configuration as the CSI-RS.
 測定帯域幅は、DRSがCSI-RSと同様の構成である場合には、6RBsおよび/または15RBsで設定されてもよい。 The measurement bandwidth may be set at 6 RBs and / or 15 RBs when the DRS has the same configuration as the CSI-RS.
 DRSの測定帯域幅は、上位層シグナリングを用いて、設定されてもよい。 DRS measurement bandwidth may be set using higher layer signaling.
 端末装置1は、RRC接続状態でイントラ周波数のセルおよび/またはインター周波数のセルのRSRQを測定する。 The terminal device 1 measures the RSRQ of the intra-frequency cell and / or the inter-frequency cell in the RRC connection state.
 第1の測定の手続き(first measurement procedure)について説明する。第1の測定とは、第1のRSRPや第1のRSRQの測定である。なお、第1の測定とは、第1の信号(第1の構成の信号)の測定(RRM測定、RSRP測定、RSRQ測定、RSSI測定)であってもよい。 The first measurement procedure will be described. The first measurement is a measurement of the first RSRP or the first RSRQ. The first measurement may be measurement of the first signal (the signal having the first configuration) (RRM measurement, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, RSSI measurement).
 端末装置1は、物理セル識別子(PCI)から、アンテナポート0で送信されるCRSが配置されるリソースエレメントを認知する。そして、アンテナポート0で送信されるCRSが配置されるリソースエレメントから第1のRSRPを測定する。なお、測定に用いられるサブフレーム数は限定されず、複数のサブフレームにまたがって測定し、平均値を報告してもよい。次に、アンテナポート0が含まれるOFDMシンボルを認知し、RSSIの測定を行う。そして、第1のRSRPとRSSIから、第1のRSRQの計算を行う。なお、第1のRSRPとRSSIの測定サブフレームは異なってもよい。 The terminal device 1 recognizes the resource element in which the CRS transmitted by the antenna port 0 is arranged from the physical cell identifier (PCI). And 1st RSRP is measured from the resource element by which CRS transmitted by the antenna port 0 is arrange | positioned. Note that the number of subframes used for measurement is not limited, and measurement may be performed across a plurality of subframes, and an average value may be reported. Next, an OFDM symbol including antenna port 0 is recognized, and RSSI is measured. Then, the first RSRQ is calculated from the first RSRP and RSSI. Note that the first RSRP and RSSI measurement subframes may be different.
 なお、第1の測定の手続きに基づいて得られた結果(第1のRSRP、第1のRSRQ)を第1の測定結果と呼称する。 The results (first RSRP and first RSRQ) obtained based on the first measurement procedure are referred to as first measurement results.
 第2の測定の手続き(second measurement procedure)について説明する。第2の測定とは、第2のRSRPや第2のRSRQの測定である。 The second measurement procedure (second measurement procedure) will be described. The second measurement is a measurement of the second RSRP or the second RSRQ.
 端末装置1は、DRSの設定情報から、DRSが配置されるリソースエレメントを認知する。そして、DRSが配置されるリソースエレメントから第2のRSRPを測定する。なお、測定に用いられるサブフレーム数は限定されず、複数のサブフレームを測定し、それらの平均値を報告してもよい。次に、RSSIの測定を行う。そして、第2のRSRPとRSSIから、第2のRSRQの計算を行う。 The terminal device 1 recognizes the resource element in which the DRS is arranged from the DRS setting information. And 2nd RSRP is measured from the resource element by which DRS is arrange | positioned. Note that the number of subframes used for the measurement is not limited, and a plurality of subframes may be measured and the average value thereof may be reported. Next, RSSI is measured. Then, the second RSRQ is calculated from the second RSRP and RSSI.
 なお、第2の測定の手続きに基づいて得られた結果(第2のRSRP、第2のRSRQ、第2のRSSI、第2のRRM)を第2の測定結果と呼称する。なお、第2の測定とは、第2の信号(第2の構成の信号)の測定(RRM測定、RSRP測定、RSRQ測定、RSSI測定)であってもよい。 In addition, the results (second RSRP, second RSRQ, second RSSI, second RRM) obtained based on the second measurement procedure are referred to as second measurement results. Note that the second measurement may be measurement of a second signal (signal of the second configuration) (RRM measurement, RSRP measurement, RSRQ measurement, RSSI measurement).
 次に、端末装置1で測定された測定値を上位層へ報告する仕組みを説明する。 Next, a mechanism for reporting the measured value measured by the terminal device 1 to the upper layer will be described.
 測定のモデルについて説明する。図13は、測定のモデルの一例を示す図である。 Explain the measurement model. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a measurement model.
 測定部1301は、第1層フィルタリング部13011、第3層フィルタリング部13012、およびリポート基準の評価部13013を含んで構成されてもよい。なお、測定部1301は、受信部105および上位層処理部101の一部の機能を含んで構成されてもよい。具体的には、第1層フィルタリング部13011は受信部105に含まれており、第3層フィルタリング部13012、およびリポート基準の評価13013は上位層処理部101に含まれて構成されてもよい。 The measurement unit 1301 may include a first layer filtering unit 13011, a third layer filtering unit 13012, and a report criterion evaluation unit 13013. Note that the measurement unit 1301 may be configured to include some functions of the reception unit 105 and the upper layer processing unit 101. Specifically, the first layer filtering unit 13011 may be included in the receiving unit 105, and the third layer filtering unit 13012 and the report criterion evaluation 13013 may be included in the upper layer processing unit 101.
 物理層から入力された測定値(サンプル)は、第1層フィルタリング(Layer 1 filtering)部13011によってフィルターが掛けられる。第1層フィルタリング部13011は、例えば、複数の入力値の平均、重み付け平均、チャネル特性に追従した平均などが適用され、その他のフィルター方法を適用してもよい。第1層から報告された測定値は第1層フィルタリング部13011のあとに第3層に入力される。第3層フィルタリング(Layer 3 filtering)部13012に入力された測定値はフィルターが掛けられる。第3層フィルタリングの設定はRRCシグナリングから提供される。第3層フィルタリング部13012でフィルタリングされて報告される間隔は、入力された測定間隔と同じである。リポート基準の評価部13013では、実際に測定値の報告が必要かどうかを検査する。評価は1つ以上の測定のフローに基づいている。例えば、異なる測定値間の比較などである。端末装置1は、少なくとも新しい測定結果が報告された度にリポート基準の評価を行う。リポート基準の設定はRRCシグナリングによって提供される。リポート基準の評価で測定値の報告が必要だと判断された後、端末装置1は、測定報告情報(測定報告メッセージ)を無線インターフェースによって送る。 The measured value (sample) input from the physical layer is filtered by the first layer filtering unit 13011. For example, an average of a plurality of input values, a weighted average, an average following channel characteristics, and the like may be applied to the first layer filtering unit 13011, and other filter methods may be applied. The measurement value reported from the first layer is input to the third layer after the first layer filtering unit 13011. The measurement value input to the third layer filtering unit 13012 is filtered. The configuration of layer 3 filtering is provided from RRC signaling. The interval that is filtered and reported by the third layer filtering unit 13012 is the same as the input measurement interval. The report criterion evaluation unit 13013 checks whether it is actually necessary to report the measurement value. Evaluation is based on one or more measurement flows. For example, comparison between different measured values. The terminal device 1 evaluates the report criteria at least every time a new measurement result is reported. The setting of report criteria is provided by RRC signaling. After it is determined that the report of the measurement value is necessary in the evaluation of the report criteria, the terminal device 1 sends measurement report information (measurement report message) via the wireless interface.
 次に、測定(measurement)について説明する。基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対して、RRCシグナリング(無線リソース制御信号)のRRC接続再設定(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)メッセージを使って、測定設定(Measurement configuration)メッセージを送信する。端末装置1は、測定設定(Measurement configuration)メッセージに含まれるシステム情報を設定するとともに、通知されたシステム情報に従って、サービングセル(serving cell)および隣接セル(リストセル(listed cell)および/または検出セル(detected cell)を含む)に対する測定、イベント評価、測定報告を行う。リストセルは、測定対象(Measurement object)にリストされているセル(基地局装置3から端末装置1へ隣接セルリストとして通知されているセル)であり、検出セルは、測定対象(Measurement object)によって指示された周波数において端末装置1が検出したが、測定対象(Measurement object)にはリストされていないセル(隣接セルリストとして通知されていない端末装置1自身が検出したセル)である。 Next, measurement will be described. The base station device 3 transmits a measurement configuration (Measurement configuration) message to the terminal device 1 using an RRC connection reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message of RRC signaling (radio resource control signal). The terminal device 1 sets the system information included in the measurement configuration (Measurement configuration) message, and serves the serving cell (serving cell) and neighboring cells (listed cell and / or detection cell) according to the notified system information. (including detected cells), measurement, event evaluation, and measurement reports. The list cell is a cell (cell notified from the base station apparatus 3 to the terminal apparatus 1 as an adjacent cell list) listed in the measurement object (Measurement object), and the detected cell depends on the measurement object (Measurement object). A cell that is detected by the terminal device 1 at the instructed frequency but is not listed in the measurement object (Measurement object) (a cell detected by the terminal device 1 itself that is not notified as an adjacent cell list).
 測定(measurement)には、3つのタイプ(周波数内測定(intra-frequency measurements)、周波数間測定(inter-frequency measurements)、無線アクセス技術間測定(inter-RAT measurements))がある。周波数内測定(intra-frequency measurements)は、サービングセルの下りリンク周波数(下りリンク周波数)での測定である。周波数間測定(inter-frequency measurements)は、サービングセルの下りリンク周波数とは異なる周波数での測定である。無線アクセス技術間測定(inter-RAT measurements)は、サービングセルの無線技術(例えばEUTRA)とは異なる無線技術(例えばUTRA、GERAN,CDMA2000など)での測定である。 There are three types of measurements (intra-frequency measurements), inter-frequency measurements (inter-RAT measurements), and inter-RAT measurements (inter-RAT measurements). Intra-frequency measurements are measurements at the serving cell's downlink frequency (downlink frequency). Inter-frequency measurement is a measurement at a frequency different from the downlink frequency of the serving cell. Inter-RAT measurement (inter-RAT measurements) is a measurement using a radio technology (eg, UTRA, GERAN, CDMA2000, etc.) different from the radio technology (eg, EUTRA) of the serving cell.
 測定設定(Measurement configuration)メッセージには、測定識別子(measId)、測定対象(Measurement objects)、報告設定(Reporting configurations)の設定の追加および/または修正および/または削除、物理量設定(quantityConfig)、測定ギャップ設定(measGapConfig)、サービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)などが含まれる。 Measurement setting (Measurement configuration) message includes measurement identifier (measId), measurement object (Measurement objects), reporting setting (Reporting configurations) setting addition and / or modification and / or deletion, physical quantity setting (quantityConfig), measurement gap Settings (measGapConfig), serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), and the like are included.
 物理量設定(quantityConfig)は、測定対象(Measurement objects)がEUTRAの場合、第3層フィルタリング係数(L3 filtering coefficient)を指定する。第3層フィルタリング係数(L3 filtering coefficient)は、最新の測定結果と、過去のフィルタリング測定結果との比(割合)を規定する。フィルタリング結果は、端末装置1でイベント評価に利用される。 The physical quantity setting (quantityConfig) specifies the third layer filtering coefficient (L3 filtering coefficient) when the measurement object (Measurement objects) is EUTRA. The third layer filtering coefficient (L3 filtering coefficient) defines the ratio (ratio) between the latest measurement result and the past filtering measurement result. The filtering result is used for event evaluation in the terminal device 1.
 測定ギャップ設定(measGapConfig)は、測定ギャップパターン(measurement gap pattern)の設定や、測定ギャップ(measurement gap)の活性化(activation)/非活性化(deactivation)を制御するために利用される。測定ギャップ設定(measGapConfig)では、測定ギャップを活性化させる場合の情報として、ギャップパターン(gap pattern)、開始システムフレーム番号(startSFN)、開始サブフレーム番号(startSubframeNumber)が通知される。ギャップパターン(gap pattern)は、測定ギャップ(measurement gap)として、どのパターンを使うかを規定する。開始システムフレーム番号(startSFN)は、測定ギャップ(measurement gap)を開始するシステムフレーム番号(SFN: System Frame Number)を規定する。開始サブフレーム番号(startSubframeNumber)は、測定ギャップ(measurement gap)を開始するサブフレーム番号を規定する。 The measurement gap setting (measGapConfig) is used for setting the measurement gap pattern (measurement gap pattern) and controlling the activation / deactivation of the measurement gap (measurement gap). In the measurement gap setting (measGapConfig), a gap pattern (gap pattern), a start system frame number (startSFN), and a start subframe number (startSubframeNumber) are notified as information when the measurement gap is activated. The gap pattern (gap pattern) defines which pattern is used as the measurement gap (measurement gap). The start system frame number (startSFN) defines a system frame number (SFN: System Frame Number) for starting a measurement gap (measurement gap). The start subframe number (startSubframeNumber) defines the subframe number at which the measurement gap (measurement gap) starts.
 測定ギャップとは、上りリンク/下りリンク送信がスケジュールされていない場合に、端末装置1が測定を行なうために利用する可能性のある期間(時間、サブフレーム)のことである。 The measurement gap is a period (time, subframe) that the terminal device 1 may use to perform measurement when uplink / downlink transmission is not scheduled.
 DRSの測定をサポートしている(またはDRS設定がセットされた)端末装置1に対して、測定ギャップが設定された場合、測定ギャップ設定に基づいて規定されたサブフレームにおいて(つまり、測定ギャップ上で)、DRSの測定を行なってもよい。 When the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports the measurement of DRS (or the DRS setting is set), in the subframe defined based on the measurement gap setting (that is, on the measurement gap) DRS may be measured.
 DRSの測定をサポートしている(またはDRS設定がセットされた)端末装置1に対して、測定ギャップが設定された場合、DRS設定に含まれているサブフレーム設定に基づくDRS送信サブフレームが測定ギャップ設定に基づいて規定されたサブフレームと重複していれば、測定ギャップ上でDRSを測定してもよい。DRS送信サブフレームが測定ギャップ上にあれば、端末装置1は、測定ギャップ上でDRSを測定してもよい。 When the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports the measurement of DRS (or the DRS setting is set), the DRS transmission subframe based on the subframe setting included in the DRS setting is measured. If it overlaps with the subframe defined based on the gap setting, the DRS may be measured on the measurement gap. If the DRS transmission subframe is on the measurement gap, the terminal device 1 may measure the DRS on the measurement gap.
 DRSの測定をサポートしている(またはDRS設定がセットされた)端末装置1に対して、測定ギャップが設定された場合、DCIフォーマットまたはMAC CEで、停止の状態が示されたセルに対してのみ、測定ギャップ上でDRSを測定してもよい。つまり、起動の状態が示されたセルに対して、端末装置1は、測定ギャップ上でDRSの測定を行なわなくてもよい。基地局装置3は、起動の状態のセルでDRSを送信しなくてもよい。 When the measurement gap is set for the terminal device 1 that supports DRS measurement (or the DRS setting is set), the DCI format or MAC CE indicates the cell in which the stop state is indicated. Only DRS may be measured over the measurement gap. That is, the terminal device 1 does not have to perform DRS measurement on the measurement gap for the cell in which the activation state is indicated. The base station apparatus 3 may not transmit the DRS in the activated cell.
 測定ギャップは、DRS毎または起動/停止の状態が示されるセル毎に設定されてもよい。 The measurement gap may be set for each DRS or for each cell in which the start / stop state is indicated.
 サービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)は、サービングセル(serving cell)の品質に関する閾値を表し、端末装置1が測定(measurement)を行う必要があるか否かを制御するために利用される。サービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)は、RSRPに対する値として設定される。 The serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure) represents a threshold related to the quality of the serving cell (serving cell), and is used to control whether or not the terminal device 1 needs to perform measurement. The serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure) is set as a value for RSRP.
 ここで、測定識別子(measId)は、測定対象(Measurement objects)と、報告設定(Reporting configurations)とをリンクさせるために利用され、具体的には、測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)とをリンクさせる。測定識別子(measId)には、一つの測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と一つの報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)が対応付けられる。測定設定(Measurement configuration)メッセージは、測定識別子(measId)、測定対象(Measurement objects)、報告設定(Reporting configurations)の関係に対して追加・修正・削除することが可能である。 Here, the measurement identifier (measId) is used to link the measurement object (Measurement objects) and the reporting configuration (Reporting configurations). Specifically, the measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the report setting identifier (reportConfigId) ). One measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and one report setting identifier (reportConfigId) are associated with the measurement identifier (measId). The measurement setting (Measurement configuration) message can be added / modified / deleted with respect to the relationship between the measurement identifier (measId), the measurement object (Measurement objects), and the reporting setting (Reporting configurations).
 measObjectToRemoveListは、指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)および指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)に対応する測定対象(Measurement objects)を削除するコマンドである。この際、指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)に対応付けられたすべての測定識別子(measId)は、削除される。このコマンドは、同時に複数の測定対象識別子(measObjectId)の指定が可能である。 “MeasObjectToRemoveList” is a command for deleting the measurement object (Measurement objects) corresponding to the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId). At this time, all measurement identifiers (measId) associated with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) are deleted. This command can specify a plurality of measurement object identifiers (measObjectId) at the same time.
 measObjectToAddModifyListは、指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)を指定された測定対象(Measurement objects)に修正、または、指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と指定された測定対象(Measurement objects)を追加するコマンドである。このコマンドは、同時に複数の測定対象識別子(measObjectId)の指定が可能である。 measObjectToAddModifyList is a command that modifies the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) to the specified measurement object (Measurement objects) or adds the specified measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the specified measurement object (Measurement objects) It is. This command can specify a plurality of measurement object identifiers (measObjectId) at the same time.
 reportConfigToRemoveListは、指定された報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)および指定された報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)に対応する報告設定(Reporting configurations)を削除するコマンドである。この際、指定された報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)に対応付けられたすべての測定識別子(measId)は、削除される。このコマンドは、同時に複数の報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)の指定が可能である。 “ReportConfigToRemoveList” is a command for deleting a specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) and a report configuration (Reporting configuration) corresponding to the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId). At this time, all measurement identifiers (measId) associated with the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) are deleted. This command can specify a plurality of report configuration identifiers (reportConfigId) at the same time.
 measIdToRemoveListは、指定された測定識別子(measId)を削除するコマンドである。この際、指定された測定識別子(measId)に対応付けられた測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)は、削除されずに維持される。このコマンドは、同時に複数の測定識別子(measId)の指定が可能である。 “MeasIdToRemoveList” is a command for deleting a specified measurement identifier (measId). At this time, the measurement object identifier (measObjectId) and the report setting identifier (reportConfigId) associated with the designated measurement identifier (measId) are maintained without being deleted. This command can specify a plurality of measurement identifiers (measId) at the same time.
 measIdToAddModifyListは、指定された測定識別子(measId)を指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と指定された報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)に対応付けるように修正、または、指定された測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と指定された報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)を指定された測定識別子(measId)に対応付けし、指定された測定識別子(measId)を追加するコマンドである。このコマンドは、同時に複数の測定識別子(measId)の指定が可能である。 measIdToAddModifyList is modified to associate the specified measurement identifier (measId) with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) and the specified report configuration identifier (reportConfigId), or specified with the specified measurement target identifier (measObjectId) This is a command for associating the designated report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) with the designated measurement identifier (measId) and adding the designated measurement identifier (measId). This command can specify a plurality of measurement identifiers (measId) at the same time.
 測定対象(Measurement objects)は、無線アクセス技術(RAT:Radio Access Technology)および周波数ごとに規定されている。また、報告設定(Reporting configurations)は、EUTRAに対する規定と、EUTRA以外のRATに対する規定がある。 Measurement objects are specified for each radio access technology (RAT: Radio Access Technology) and frequency. Moreover, the reporting configuration (Reporting configuration) has a rule for EUTRA and a rule for RATs other than EUTRA.
 測定対象(Measurement objects)には、測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と対応付けられた測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)などが含まれる。 Measurement objects (Measurement objects) include a measurement object EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) associated with a measurement object identifier (measObjectId).
 測定対象識別子(measObjectId)は、測定対象(Measurement objects)の設定を識別するために使用する識別子である。測定対象(Measurement objects)の設定は、前述のように、無線アクセス技術(RAT)および周波数ごとに規定されている。測定対象(Measurement objects)は、EUTRA、UTRA、GERAN、CDMA2000に対して別途仕様化されている。EUTRAに対する測定対象(Measurement objects)である測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)は、EUTRAの隣接セルに対して適用される情報を規定する。また、測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)のなかで異なる周波数のものは異なる測定対象(Measurement objects)として扱われ、別途、測定対象識別子(measObjectId)が割り当てられる。 The measurement object identifier (measObjectId) is an identifier used for identifying the setting of the measurement object (Measurement objects). As described above, the setting of measurement objects (Measurement objects) is specified for each radio access technology (RAT) and frequency. Measurement objects (Measurement objects) are separately specified for EUTRA, UTRA, GERAN, and CDMA2000. Measurement object EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA), which is a measurement object for EUTRA, defines information to be applied to neighboring cells of EUTRA. In addition, the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) having different frequencies is treated as a different measurement target (Measurement objects), and a measurement target identifier (measObjectId) is assigned separately.
 測定対象の情報の一例について説明する。 An example of information to be measured will be described.
 測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)には、EUTRA搬送波周波数情報(eutra-CarrierInfo)、測定帯域幅(measurementBandwidth)、アンテナポート1存在情報(presenceAntennaPort1)、オフセット周波数(offsetFreq)、隣接セルリスト(neighbour cell list)に関する情報、ブラックリスト(black list)に関する情報が含まれる。 The measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) relates to EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo), measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth), antenna port 1 presence information (presenceAntennaPort1), offset frequency (offsetFreq), neighbor cell list (neighbour cell list) Information, information about black list (black list) is included.
 次に、測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)に含まれる情報について説明する。EUTRA搬送波周波数情報(eutra-CarrierInfo)は、測定対象とする搬送波周波数を指定する。測定帯域幅(measurementBandwidth)は、測定対象とする搬送波周波数で動作する全ての隣接セル共通な測定帯域幅を示す。アンテナポート1存在情報(presenceAntennaPort1)は、測定対象とするセルにおいてアンテナポート1を使用しているか否かを示す。オフセット周波数(offsetFreq)は、測定対象とする周波数において適用される測定オフセット値を示す。 Next, information included in the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) will be described. EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo) specifies a carrier frequency to be measured. The measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth) indicates a measurement bandwidth common to all adjacent cells operating at the carrier frequency to be measured. The antenna port 1 presence information (presenceAntennaPort1) indicates whether the antenna port 1 is used in the measurement target cell. The offset frequency (offsetFreq) indicates a measurement offset value applied at the frequency to be measured.
 測定対象の情報の一例について説明する。 An example of information to be measured will be described.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対して、第2の測定を行なわせるためには、第1の測定とは異なる設定を行なう。例えば、第1の測定と第2の測定とで、測定対象となる信号(または信号の構成、信号の設定)が異なってもよい。また、第1の測定と第2の測定とで、測定対象となる信号にセットされているセルIDが異なってもよい。また、第1の測定と第2の測定とで、測定対象となる信号のアンテナポートが異なってもよい。また、第1の測定と第2の測定とで、測定対象となる信号の測定周期(または測定サブフレームパターン)が異なってもよい。つまり、第1の測定と第2の測定は、個別に設定されてもよい。 The base station apparatus 3 performs a setting different from the first measurement in order to cause the terminal apparatus 1 to perform the second measurement. For example, the signal to be measured (or the signal configuration and the signal setting) may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. The cell ID set in the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. Further, the antenna port of the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. Further, the measurement cycle (or measurement subframe pattern) of the signal to be measured may be different between the first measurement and the second measurement. That is, the first measurement and the second measurement may be set individually.
 測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)には、EUTRA搬送波周波数情報(eutra-CarrierInfo)、測定帯域幅(measurementBandwidth)、DRS設定情報、オフセット周波数(offsetFreq)、隣接セルリスト(neighbour cell list)に関する情報、ブラックリスト(blacklist)に関する情報が含まれる。 The measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) includes EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo), measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth), DRS setting information, offset frequency (offsetFreq), information on neighboring cell list (neighbour cell list), black list ( blacklist).
 次に、測定対象EUTRA(measObjectEUTRA)に含まれる情報ついて説明する。EUTRA搬送波周波数情報(eutra-CarrierInfo)は、測定対象とする搬送波周波数を指定する。測定帯域幅(measurementBandwidth)は、測定対象とする搬送波周波数で動作する全ての隣接セル共通な測定帯域幅を示す。DRS設定情報は、端末装置1にDRS設定を検出するために必要な周波数帯で共通な設定情報を通知するために用いられ、例えば、測定対象とするセルにおいて送信されるサブフレーム番号やサブフレーム周期などを示す。オフセット周波数(offsetFreq)は、測定対象とする周波数において適用される測定オフセット値を示す。 Next, information included in the measurement target EUTRA (measObjectEUTRA) will be described. EUTRA carrier frequency information (eutra-CarrierInfo) specifies a carrier frequency to be measured. The measurement bandwidth (measurementBandwidth) indicates a measurement bandwidth common to all adjacent cells operating at the carrier frequency to be measured. The DRS setting information is used to notify the terminal device 1 of common setting information in a frequency band necessary for detecting the DRS setting. For example, the DRS setting information is a subframe number or subframe transmitted in the measurement target cell. Indicates the period. The offset frequency (offsetFreq) indicates a measurement offset value applied at the frequency to be measured.
 隣接セルリストおよびブラックリストに関する情報の一例について説明する。 An example of information related to the neighboring cell list and the black list will be described.
 隣接セルリスト(neighbour cell list)に関する情報は、イベント評価や、測定報告の対象となる隣接セルに関する情報を含む。隣接セルリスト(neighbour cell list)に関する情報としては、物理セル識別子(physical cell ID)や、セル固有オフセット(cellIndividualOffset、隣接セルに対して適用する測定オフセット値を示す)などが含まれている。この情報は、EUTRAの場合、端末装置1が、既に、報知情報(報知されるシステム情報)から既に取得している隣接セルリスト(neighbour cell list)に対して、追加・修正または削除を行うための情報として利用される。 The information on the neighbor cell list (neighbour cell list) includes information on neighbor cells that are subject to event evaluation and measurement reports. Information on the neighbor cell list (neighbour cell list) includes a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID), a cell-specific offset (cellIndividualOffset, indicating a measurement offset value applied to the neighbor cell), and the like. In the case of EUTRA, this information is for the terminal device 1 to add, modify, or delete the neighboring cell list (neighbour cell list) already acquired from the broadcast information (broadcast system information). It is used as information.
 また、ブラックリスト(black list)に関する情報は、イベント評価や、測定報告の対象とならない隣接セルに関する情報を含む。ブラックリスト(black list)に関する情報としては、物理セル識別子(physical cell ID)などが含まれる。この情報は、EUTRAの場合、端末装置1が、既に、報知情報から取得しているブラックセルリスト(black listed cell list)に対して、追加・修正または削除を行うための情報として利用される。 Also, the information on the black list includes information on neighboring cells that are not subject to event evaluation and measurement reports. The information related to the black list includes a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID). In the case of EUTRA, this information is used as information for the terminal device 1 to add, modify, or delete the black cell list (black listed cell list) already acquired from the broadcast information.
 隣接セルリストおよびブラックリストに関する情報の一例について説明する。 An example of information related to the neighboring cell list and the black list will be described.
 第2の測定を行う場合において、物理セル識別子(PCI)では足りないケースで用いられることが想定される。そのため、物理セル識別子を拡張した新しい隣接セルリストおよび新しいブラックリストが必要となる。 When performing the second measurement, it is assumed that the physical cell identifier (PCI) is used in a case that is insufficient. Therefore, a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the physical cell identifier is extended are required.
 新しい隣接セルリスト(隣接小セルリスト(neighbour small cell list))に関する情報は、イベント評価や、測定報告の対象となる隣接セルに関する情報を含んでもよい。新しい隣接セルリストに関する情報としては、セルIDや、セル固有オフセット(cellIndividualOffset、隣接セルに対して適用する測定オフセット値を示す)、セル固有のDRS設定情報などが含まれてもよい。ここで、セル固有のDRS設定情報とは、セル固有に設定されるDRSの情報であり、例えば、用いられるDRSのリソースエレメントを示す情報などである。この情報は、EUTRAの場合、端末装置1が、既に、報知情報(報知されるシステム情報)から既に取得している新しい隣接セルリストに対して、追加・修正または削除を行うための情報として利用される。 The information related to the new neighbor cell list (neighbor small cell list) may include information related to event evaluation and neighbor cells that are subject to measurement reports. Information on the new neighboring cell list may include a cell ID, a cell-specific offset (cellIndividualOffset, a measurement offset value applied to the neighboring cell), cell-specific DRS setting information, and the like. Here, the cell-specific DRS setting information is DRS information set in a cell-specific manner, for example, information indicating a DRS resource element to be used. In the case of EUTRA, this information is used as information for the terminal device 1 to add, modify or delete the new neighboring cell list that has already been acquired from the broadcast information (broadcast system information). Is done.
 また、新しいブラックリストに関する情報は、イベント評価や、測定報告の対象とならない隣接セルに関する情報を含んでもよい。また、新しいブラックリストに関する情報としては、セルIDなどが含まれてもよい。この情報は、EUTRAの場合、端末装置1が、既に、報知情報から取得している新しいブラックセルリスト(ブラック小セルリスト(black listed small cell list))に対して、追加・修正または削除を行うための情報として利用される。 Further, the information on the new black list may include information on neighboring cells that are not subject to event evaluation or measurement reports. Moreover, cell ID etc. may be contained as information regarding a new black list. In the case of EUTRA, this information is added, corrected, or deleted with respect to a new black cell list (black listed small cell list) that the terminal device 1 has already acquired from the broadcast information. It is used as information for
 ここで、セルIDは、例えば、物理セル識別子(physical cell ID、physical layer cell ID)、CGI(Cell Global Identity/Identifier)、ECGI(E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier/Identity)、発見ID(Discovery ID)、仮想セル識別子(virtual cellID)、送信ポイントIDなどであり、DRSで送信されるセル(送信ポイント)IDの情報に基づいて構成される。また、セルIDではなく、系列生成器(スクランブリング系列生成器、擬似乱数系列生成器)に関連するパラメータであってもよい。 Here, the cell ID is, for example, a physical cell identifier (physical cell ID, physical layer cell ID), CGI (Cell Global Identity / Identifier), ECGI (E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier / Identity), discovery ID (Discovery ID). , A virtual cell identifier (virtual cell ID), a transmission point ID, and the like, which are configured based on cell (transmission point) ID information transmitted by DRS. Further, instead of the cell ID, a parameter related to a sequence generator (scrambling sequence generator, pseudorandom sequence generator) may be used.
 なお、DRSの設定に、セルID(または擬似乱数系列生成器に関連するパラメータ(例えば、スクランブリングID))が含まれる場合、隣接セルリストは、DRSのリストを示してもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、隣接セルリストにセットされているセルIDのDRSの測定を行なってもよい。 In addition, when the cell ID (or a parameter related to the pseudo random number sequence generator (for example, scrambling ID)) is included in the DRS setting, the neighboring cell list may indicate a DRS list. That is, the terminal device 1 may measure the DRS of the cell ID set in the neighboring cell list.
 なお、DRSの設定に、セルIDが含まれる場合、ブラックリストは、DRSのブラックリストを示してもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、ブラックリストにセットされているセルIDのDRSの測定を行なわなくてもよい。 When the cell ID is included in the DRS setting, the black list may indicate the DRS black list. That is, the terminal device 1 does not need to measure the DRS of the cell ID set in the black list.
 次に、報告設定の詳細について説明する。 Next, the details of the report settings will be explained.
 報告設定(Reporting configurations)には、報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)と対応付けられた報告設定EUTRA(reportConfigEUTRA)などが含まれる。 The reporting configuration (Reporting configuration) includes a reporting configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA) associated with a reporting configuration identifier (reportConfigId).
 報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)は、測定に関する報告設定(Reporting configurations)を識別するために使用する識別子である。測定に関する報告設定(Reporting configurations)は、前述のように、EUTRAに対する規定と、EUTRA以外のRAT(UTRA、GERAN、CDMA2000)に対する規定がある。EUTRAに対する報告設定(Reporting configurations)である報告設定EUTRA(reportConfigEUTRA)は、EUTRAにおける測定の報告に利用するイベントのトリガ条件(triggering criteria)を規定する。 The report setting identifier (reportConfigId) is an identifier used to identify a reporting configuration related to measurement (Reporting configuration). As described above, the reporting configuration relating to measurement includes the regulations for EUTRA and the regulations for RATs other than EUTRA (UTRA, GERAN, CDMA2000). Reporting configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA), which is a reporting configuration for EUTRA, defines the triggering criteria (triggering criteria) of events used for reporting of measurements in EUTRA.
 また、報告設定EUTRA(reportConfigEUTRA)には、イベント識別子(eventId)、トリガ量(triggerQuantity)、ヒステリシス(hysteresis)、トリガ時間(timeToTrigger)、報告量(reportQuantity)、最大報告セル数(maxReportCells)、報告間隔(reportInterval)、報告回数(reportAmount)が含まれる。 The report configuration EUTRA (reportConfigEUTRA) includes event identifier (eventId), trigger amount (triggerQuantity), hysteresis (hysteresis), trigger time (timeToTrigger), report amount (reportQuantity), maximum number of report cells (maxReportCells), and report interval. (ReportInterval) and the number of reports (reportAmount) are included.
 イベント識別子(eventId)は、イベントトリガ報告(event triggered reporting)に関する条件(criteria)を選択するために利用される。ここで、イベントトリガ報告(event triggered reporting)とは、イベントトリガ条件を満たした場合に、測定を報告する方法である。この他に、イベントトリガ条件を満たした場合に、一定間隔で、ある回数だけ測定を報告するというイベントトリガ定期報告(event triggered periodic reporting)もある。 The event identifier (eventId) is used to select a condition related to event trigger reporting (event triggered reporting). Here, event trigger reporting (event triggered reporting) is a method for reporting measurement when an event trigger condition is satisfied. In addition to this, there is also an event trigger periodic report (event triggered periodic reporting) in which a measurement is reported a certain number of times at regular intervals when an event trigger condition is satisfied.
 イベント識別子(eventId)によって指定されたイベントトリガ条件を満たした場合、端末装置1は、基地局装置3に対して、測定報告(measurement report)を行なう。トリガ量(triggerQuantity)は、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する量である。すなわち、RSRP、または、RSRQが指定される。すなわち、端末装置1は、このトリガ量(triggerQuantity)によって指定された量を利用して、下りリンク参照信号の測定を行い、イベント識別子(eventId)で指定されたイベントトリガ条件を満たしているか否かを判定する。 When the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied, the terminal device 1 performs a measurement report (measurement report) to the base station device 3. The trigger amount (triggerQuantity) is an amount used for evaluating the event trigger condition. That is, RSRP or RSRQ is designated. That is, the terminal device 1 uses the amount specified by this trigger amount (triggerQuantity) to measure the downlink reference signal, and whether or not the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied. Determine.
 ヒステリシス(hysteresis)は、イベントトリガ条件で利用されるパラメータである。トリガ時間(timeToTrigger)は、イベントトリガ条件を満たすべき期間を示す。報告量(reportQuantity)は、測定報告(measurement report)において報告する量を示す。ここでは、トリガ量(triggerQuantity)で指定した量、または、RSRPおよびRSRQが指定される。 Hysteresis is a parameter used in event trigger conditions. The trigger time (timeToTrigger) indicates a period in which the event trigger condition should be satisfied. The report amount (reportQuantity) indicates the amount reported in the measurement report (measurementmeasurereport). Here, the amount specified by the trigger amount (triggerQuantity), or RSRP and RSRQ are specified.
 最大報告セル数(maxReportCells)は、測定報告(measurement report)に含めるセルの最大数を示す。報告間隔(reportInterval)は、定期報告(periodical reporting)またはイベントトリガ定期報告(eventtriggered periodic reporting)に対して利用され、報告間隔(reportInterval)で示される間隔ごとに定期報告する。報告回数(reportAmount)は、必要に応じて、定期報告(periodical reporting)を行う回数を規定する。 The maximum number of report cells (maxReportCells) indicates the maximum number of cells to be included in the measurement report. The reporting interval (reportInterval) is used for periodic reporting (periodical reporting) or event trigger periodic reporting (eventtriggered periodic reporting), and is periodically reported for each interval indicated by the reporting interval (reportInterval). The number of reports (reportAmount) defines the number of times that periodic reporting is performed as necessary.
 なお、後述のイベントトリガ条件で利用する閾値パラメータやオフセットパラメータは、報告設定において、イベント識別子(eventId)と一緒に、端末装置1へ通知される。 Note that threshold parameters and offset parameters used in event trigger conditions described later are notified to the terminal device 1 together with the event identifier (eventId) in the report setting.
 なお、基地局装置3は、サービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)を通知する場合と通知しない場合がある。基地局装置3がサービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)を通知する場合、端末装置1は、サービングセル(serving cell)のRSRPがサービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)よりも低いときに、隣接セルの測定と、イベント評価(イベントトリガ条件を満たすか否か、報告条件(Reporting criteria)の評価とも言う)を行う。一方、基地局装置3がサービングセル品質閾値(s-Measure)を通知しない場合、端末装置1は、サービングセル(serving cell)のRSRPによらず、隣接セルの測定と、イベント評価を行う。 Note that the base station apparatus 3 may or may not notify the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure). When the base station apparatus 3 notifies the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), the terminal apparatus 1 performs the measurement of the neighboring cell when the RSRP of the serving cell (serving cell) is lower than the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure). , Perform event evaluation (whether or not event trigger condition is satisfied, also referred to as reporting condition evaluation). On the other hand, when the base station apparatus 3 does not notify the serving cell quality threshold (s-Measure), the terminal apparatus 1 performs measurement of the adjacent cell and event evaluation regardless of the RSRP of the serving cell (serving cell).
 次に、イベントおよびイベントトリガ条件の詳細について説明する。 Next, details of events and event trigger conditions will be described.
 イベントトリガ条件を満たした端末装置1は、基地局装置3に対して、測定報告(Measurement report)を送信する。測定報告(Measurement report)には、測定結果(Measurement result)が含まれる。 The terminal device 1 that satisfies the event trigger condition transmits a measurement report to the base station device 3. The measurement report (Measurement report) includes a measurement result (Measurement result).
 測定報告(measurement report)をするためのイベントトリガ条件には、複数定義されており、それぞれ加入条件と離脱条件がある。すなわち、基地局装置3から指定されたイベントに対する加入条件を満たした端末装置1は、基地局装置3に対して測定報告(measurement report)を送信する。一方、イベント加入条件を満たして測定報告(measurement report)を送信していた端末装置1は、イベント離脱条件を満たした場合、測定報告(measurement report)の送信を停止する。 A plurality of event trigger conditions for performing measurement reports (measurement reports) are defined, and there are a subscription condition and a withdrawal condition, respectively. That is, the terminal device 1 that satisfies the subscription condition for the event specified by the base station device 3 transmits a measurement report (measurement report) to the base station device 3. On the other hand, the terminal device 1 that has transmitted the measurement report (measurement report) while satisfying the event subscription condition stops transmitting the measurement report (measurement report) when the event leaving condition is satisfied.
 以下で説明されるイベントおよびイベントトリガ条件の一例は、第1の測定結果または第2の測定結果のどちらかが用いられる。 As an example of the event and event trigger condition described below, either the first measurement result or the second measurement result is used.
 以下では、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類の指定方法の一例について説明する。 Below, an example of a method for specifying the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition will be described.
 報告設定によって、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類が指定される。パラメータによって第1の測定結果または第2の測定結果のどちらかを用いてイベントトリガ条件を評価する。 The report settings specify the type of measurement results used to evaluate event trigger conditions. Depending on the parameter, the event trigger condition is evaluated using either the first measurement result or the second measurement result.
 具体的な一例としては、第1の測定結果か第2の測定結果かは、トリガ物理量(triggerQuantity)によって指定される。トリガ物理量では、{第1のRSRP、第1のRSRQ、第2のRSRP、第2のRSRQ}と4つの選択欄によって規定されてもよい。端末装置1は、このトリガ物理量(triggerQuantity)によって指定された物理量を利用して、下りリンク参照信号の測定を行ない、イベント識別子(eventId)で指定されたイベントトリガ条件を満たしているか否かを判定する。 As a specific example, whether the first measurement result or the second measurement result is specified by a trigger physical quantity (triggerQuantity). The trigger physical quantity may be defined by {first RSRP, first RSRQ, second RSRP, second RSRQ} and four selection fields. The terminal device 1 measures the downlink reference signal using the physical quantity specified by the trigger physical quantity (triggerQuantity), and determines whether the event trigger condition specified by the event identifier (eventId) is satisfied. To do.
 具体的な一例としては、第1の測定結果か第2の測定結果かは、トリガ物理量の他にイベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類を指定する新しいパラメータ(triggerMeasType)が規定されてもよい。前記新しいパラメータは、第1の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件を評価することを示す情報、または、第2の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件を評価することを示す情報がセットされる。例えば、前記新しいパラメータに第2の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件を評価することを示す情報がセットされた場合、端末装置1は、第2の測定を行ない、第2の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件を評価する。なお、前記パラメータは、報告する測定結果の種類を指定するパラメータ(reportMeasType)と共有してもよい。 As a specific example, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is defined by a new parameter (triggerMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result used for evaluating the event trigger condition in addition to the trigger physical quantity. May be. The new parameter is set with information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result or information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result. For example, when information indicating that the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result is set in the new parameter, the terminal device 1 performs the second measurement and uses the second measurement result. Evaluate event trigger conditions. The parameter may be shared with a parameter (reportMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result to be reported.
 なお、サービングセルの測定結果と周辺セルの測定結果との比較などの、1つの条件式に2つ以上の測定結果を用いるイベントトリガ条件においては、それぞれにイベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類を指定してもよい。例えば、サービングセルの測定結果用の新しいパラメータ(triggerMeasTypeServ)と周辺セルの測定結果用の新しいパラメータ(triggerMeasTypeNeigh)が規定されてもよい。 In the event trigger conditions that use two or more measurement results in one conditional expression, such as comparison between the measurement result of the serving cell and the measurement result of the neighboring cell, the measurement used to evaluate the event trigger condition for each. You may specify the type of result. For example, a new parameter (triggerMeasTypeServ) for the measurement result of the serving cell and a new parameter (triggerMeasTypeNeigh) for the measurement result of the neighboring cell may be defined.
 以下では、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類の指定方法の一例について説明する。 Below, an example of a method for specifying the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition will be described.
 報告設定によって、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類は、測定を指定する条件に依存して決定される。 報告 Depending on the report settings, the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the condition that specifies the measurement.
 具体的な一例としては、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類は、対象セルの起動/停止の状態に依存して決定される。例えば、対象セルが起動の状態であれば、第1の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件が評価され、対象セルが停止の状態であれば、第2の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件が評価される。 As a specific example, the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell. For example, if the target cell is in the activated state, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result, and if the target cell is in the stopped state, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the second measurement result. Is done.
 具体的な一例としては、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類は、参照信号の検出に依存して決定される。例えば、CRSが検出されて、DRSが検出されなかった場合、第1の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件が評価され、CRSが検出されず、DRSが検出された場合、第2の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件が評価されてもよい。また、CRSとDRSの両方が検出された場合、受信電力の高い方の測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件が評価されてもよい。また、CRSとDRSの両方が検出された場合、両方の受信電力を平均化した測定結果を用いてイベントトリガ条件が評価されてもよい。また、CRSとDRSの両方が検出されなかった場合、イベントトリガ条件は評価されなくてもよい。 As a specific example, the type of measurement result used to evaluate the event trigger condition is determined depending on the detection of the reference signal. For example, when CRS is detected and DRS is not detected, the event trigger condition is evaluated using the first measurement result, and when CRS is not detected and DRS is detected, the second measurement result is Event trigger conditions may be evaluated. Further, when both CRS and DRS are detected, the event trigger condition may be evaluated using the measurement result with the higher received power. When both CRS and DRS are detected, the event trigger condition may be evaluated using a measurement result obtained by averaging both received powers. Further, when both CRS and DRS are not detected, the event trigger condition may not be evaluated.
 次に、測定結果の詳細について説明する。 Next, the details of the measurement results will be described.
 この測定結果(Measurement result)は、測定識別子(measId)、サービングセル測定結果(measResultServing)、EUTRA測定結果リスト(measResultListEUTRA)で構成される。ここで、EUTRA測定結果リスト(measResultListEUTRA)には、物理セル識別子(physicalCellIdentity)、EUTRAセル測定結果(measResultEUTRA)が含まれる。ここで、測定識別子(measId)とは、前述のように、測定対象識別子(measObjectId)と報告設定識別子(reportConfigId)とのリンクに利用されていた識別子である。また、物理セル識別子(physicalCellIdentity)は、セルを識別するために利用する。EUTRAセル測定結果(measResultEUTRA)は、EUTRAセルに対する測定結果である。隣接セルの測定結果は関連するイベントの発生時にのみ含まれる。 This measurement result (Measurement result) includes a measurement identifier (measId), a serving cell measurement result (measResultServing), and an EUTRA measurement result list (measResultListEUTRA). Here, the EUTRA measurement result list (measResultListEUTRA) includes a physical cell identifier (physicalCellIdentity) and an EUTRA cell measurement result (measResultEUTRA). Here, the measurement identifier (measId) is an identifier used for the link between the measurement target identifier (measObjectId) and the report configuration identifier (reportConfigId) as described above. The physical cell identifier (physicalCellIdentity) is used to identify the cell. The EUTRA cell measurement result (measResultEUTRA) is a measurement result for the EUTRA cell. The measurement result of the adjacent cell is included only when the related event occurs.
 測定結果の一例について説明する。 An example of the measurement result will be described.
 端末装置1は、測定結果に、対象セルに対するRSRPおよびRSRQの結果を含んで報告してもよい。1回で報告されるRSRPおよびRSRQは、第1の測定結果または第2の測定結果のどちらか1つであってもよい。なお、第1の測定結果は、第1の測定から得られる測定結果であってもよい。また、第2の測定結果は、第2の測定から得られる測定結果であってもよい。言い換えると、第1の測定結果は、第1の測定に関する設定情報に基づいて得られた測定結果であり、第2の測定結果は、第2の測定に関する設定情報に基づいて得られた測定結果である。 The terminal device 1 may report the measurement result including the RSRP and RSRQ results for the target cell. The RSRP and RSRQ reported at one time may be either one of the first measurement result or the second measurement result. Note that the first measurement result may be a measurement result obtained from the first measurement. Further, the second measurement result may be a measurement result obtained from the second measurement. In other words, the first measurement result is a measurement result obtained based on the setting information related to the first measurement, and the second measurement result is a measurement result obtained based on the setting information related to the second measurement. It is.
 具体的な一例を挙げると、第1の測定結果か第2の測定結果かを決定するパラメータに基づいて、測定結果が報告される。第1の測定結果か第2の測定結果かを決定する基準は、例えば、新しいパラメータ(reportMeasType)である。前記新しいパラメータは、第1の測定結果を報告することを示す情報、または、第2の測定結果を報告することを示す情報がセットされてもよい。例えば、前記新しいパラメータに第2の測定結果を報告することを示す情報がセットされた場合、端末装置1は、前記新しいパラメータを認識し、第2の測定を行ない、第2の測定結果を測定報告メッセージに載せて送信を行ない、第1の測定結果は送信しない。また、前記新しいパラメータは、第1の測定結果および第2の測定結果を報告することを示す情報がセットされてもよい。 As a specific example, the measurement result is reported based on a parameter that determines whether the measurement result is the first measurement result or the second measurement result. The criterion for determining whether the measurement result is the first measurement result or the second measurement result is, for example, a new parameter (reportMeasType). The new parameter may be set with information indicating that the first measurement result is reported or information indicating that the second measurement result is reported. For example, when information indicating that the second measurement result is reported is set in the new parameter, the terminal device 1 recognizes the new parameter, performs the second measurement, and measures the second measurement result. Transmission is carried out in the report message, and the first measurement result is not transmitted. The new parameter may be set with information indicating that the first measurement result and the second measurement result are reported.
 なお、前記新しいパラメータは、イベントトリガ条件を評価するために利用する測定結果の種類を指定するパラメータ(triggerMeasType)と共有してもよい。なお、前記パラメータは、測定方法を指定する上位層パラメータと共有してもよい。 The new parameter may be shared with a parameter (triggerMeasType) that specifies the type of measurement result used for evaluating the event trigger condition. The parameter may be shared with an upper layer parameter that specifies a measurement method.
 なお、報告物理量を示すパラメータ(reportQuantity)は、RSRPに対するパラメータ(reportQuantityRSRP)とRSRQに対するパラメータ(reportQuantityRSRQ)として、測定する種類ごとに設定してもよい。例えばreportQuantityRSRPは第1のRSRPと設定され、reportQuantityRSRQは第2のRSRQと設定された場合、端末装置1は、第1のRSRPと第2のRSRQを送信し、第2のRSRPと第1のRSRQは送信しない。 The parameter (reportQuantity) indicating the report physical quantity may be set for each type to be measured as a parameter (reportQuantityRSRP) for RSRP and a parameter (reportQuantityRSRQ) for RSRQ. For example, when reportQuantityRSRP is set as the first RSRP and reportQuantityRSRQ is set as the second RSRQ, the terminal device 1 transmits the first RSRP and the second RSRQ, and the second RSRP and the first RSRQ. Will not send.
 具体的な一例を挙げると、測定を指定する条件に依存して報告されてもよい。 To give a specific example, it may be reported depending on the conditions for specifying the measurement.
 例えば、報告される測定結果の種類は、対象セルの起動/停止の状態に依存して決定されてもよい。 For example, the type of the measurement result to be reported may be determined depending on the activation / deactivation state of the target cell.
 例えば、報告される測定結果の種類は、参照信号の検出に依存して決定される。例えば、CRSが検出されてDRSが検出されなかった場合、第1の測定結果が報告され、CRSが検出されずDRSが検出された場合、第2の測定結果が報告される。CRSとDRSの両方が検出された場合、受信電力の高い方の測定結果が報告される。CRSとDRSの両方が検出されなかった場合、報告されない、または、最低値が報告される。 For example, the type of measurement result to be reported is determined depending on the detection of the reference signal. For example, when CRS is detected and DRS is not detected, the first measurement result is reported, and when CRS is not detected and DRS is detected, the second measurement result is reported. If both CRS and DRS are detected, the measurement result with the higher received power is reported. If both CRS and DRS are not detected, they are not reported or the lowest value is reported.
 なお、端末装置1は報告された測定結果が第1の測定によって計算された結果か第2の測定によって計算された結果かを基地局装置3に認知させるために、測定結果にどの測定の種類がセットされたかを明示するパラメータが追加されてもよい。 Note that the terminal apparatus 1 determines which type of measurement in the measurement result in order to make the base station apparatus 3 recognize whether the reported measurement result is the result calculated by the first measurement or the result calculated by the second measurement. A parameter may be added that specifies whether is set.
 上記では、イベント、イベントトリガ条件、および測定結果の報告の一例について説明した。これらの組み合わせによって、端末装置1は、基地局装置3に対して第1の測定結果および/または第2の測定結果を報告する。本実施形態は、イベント、イベントトリガ条件、および測定結果の報告の組み合わせは限定されないが、好ましい組み合わせの一例を以下で説明する。 In the above, an example of event, event trigger condition, and measurement result reporting has been described. With these combinations, the terminal device 1 reports the first measurement result and / or the second measurement result to the base station device 3. In this embodiment, a combination of an event, an event trigger condition, and a measurement result report is not limited, but an example of a preferable combination will be described below.
 イベント、イベントトリガ条件、および測定結果の報告の組み合わせの一例について説明される。 An example of a combination of event, event trigger condition, and measurement result report is explained.
 第1の測定を行う場合には、物理セル識別子が設定される隣接セルリストやブラックリストを含んだ測定対象(measObject)が設定され、また、第1の測定によってトリガされるイベントおよびイベントトリガ条件が設定される報告設定(reportConfig)が設定され、それらがIDによって紐付けられることで第1の測定結果(measResults)を含んだ測定報告メッセージが送信される。更に、第2の測定を行う場合には、拡張されたセルIDが設定される新しい隣接セルリストや新しいブラックリストを含んだ測定対象(measObject)が設定され、また、第2の測定によってトリガされるイベントおよびイベントトリガ条件が設定される報告設定(reportConfig)が設定され、それらがIDによって紐付けられることで第2の測定結果(measResults)を含んだ測定報告メッセージが送信される。 When performing the first measurement, a measurement object (measObject) including a neighbor cell list or a black list in which a physical cell identifier is set is set, and an event triggered by the first measurement and an event trigger condition Is set, and the measurement report message including the first measurement results (measResults) is transmitted by associating them with the ID. Furthermore, when the second measurement is performed, a measurement object (measObject) including a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the extended cell ID is set is set, and triggered by the second measurement. A report setting (reportConfig) in which events and event trigger conditions are set is set, and a measurement report message including the second measurement results (measResults) is transmitted by associating them with an ID.
 すなわち、端末装置1に、第1の測定用の測定対象、報告設定、測定結果と、第2の測定用の測定対象、報告設定、測定結果が設定される。すなわち、第1の測定結果に対する報告設定と第2の測定結果に対する報告設定がそれぞれ独立に設定される。 That is, the measurement object, report setting, and measurement result for the first measurement and the measurement object, report setting, and measurement result for the second measurement are set in the terminal device 1. That is, the report setting for the first measurement result and the report setting for the second measurement result are set independently.
 イベント、イベントトリガ条件、および測定結果の報告の組み合わせの一例について説明する。 An example of a combination of event, event trigger condition, and measurement result report will be described.
 第1の測定を行う場合には、物理セル識別子が設定される隣接セルリストやブラックリストを含んだ測定対象(measObject)が設定され、また、第1の測定によってトリガされるイベントおよびイベントトリガ条件が設定される報告設定(reportConfig)が設定され、それらが測定結果(measResults)とIDによって紐付けられる。第2の測定を行う場合には、拡張されたセルIDが設定される新しい隣接セルリストや新しいブラックリストを含んだ測定対象(measObject)が設定され、また、第2の測定によってトリガされるイベントおよびイベントトリガ条件が設定される報告設定(reportConfig)が設定され、それらが前記測定結果(measResults)とIDによって紐付けられる。第1の測定によってトリガされるイベントが発生した場合、測定結果に第1の測定結果が代入され、測定報告メッセージによって送信される。第2の測定によってトリガされるイベントが発生した場合、測定結果に第2の測定結果が代入され、測定報告メッセージによって送信される。 When performing the first measurement, a measurement object (measObject) including a neighbor cell list or a black list in which a physical cell identifier is set is set, and an event triggered by the first measurement and an event trigger condition The report setting (reportConfig) is set, and these are linked by the measurement result (measResults) and the ID. In the case of performing the second measurement, a measurement object (measObject) including a new neighbor cell list and a new black list in which the extended cell ID is set is set, and an event triggered by the second measurement is set. In addition, a report configuration (reportConfig) in which event trigger conditions are set is set, and these are associated with the measurement results (measResults) and ID. When an event triggered by the first measurement occurs, the first measurement result is substituted into the measurement result and transmitted by the measurement report message. When an event triggered by the second measurement occurs, the second measurement result is substituted into the measurement result and transmitted by the measurement report message.
 すなわち、第1の測定用の測定対象、報告設定と、第2の測定用の測定対象、報告設定が設定され、測定結果は第1の測定と第2の測定でフィールドが共有される。イベントによって第1の測定結果または第2の測定結果が送信される。 That is, the measurement object and report setting for the first measurement and the measurement object and report setting for the second measurement are set, and the field of the measurement result is shared between the first measurement and the second measurement. Depending on the event, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is transmitted.
 これにより、端末装置1は、第1の測定結果と第2の測定結果を基地局装置3に報告することができる。 Thereby, the terminal device 1 can report the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the base station device 3.
 本実施形態の端末装置1は、基地局装置3と通信する端末装置1であって、第1のRS(CRS)に基づいて第1の測定を行ない、第2のRS(DRS)に基づいて第2の測定を行う受信部105と、前記第1の測定結果と前記第2の測定結果を前記基地局装置3に報告する上位層処理部101と、を備え、第1の状態では、前記第1の測定結果を前記基地局装置3に報告し、第2の状態では、前記第1の測定結果または前記第2の測定結果を前記基地局装置3に報告する。 The terminal device 1 according to the present embodiment is a terminal device 1 that communicates with the base station device 3, and performs the first measurement based on the first RS (CRS), and based on the second RS (DRS). A receiving unit 105 that performs a second measurement, and an upper layer processing unit 101 that reports the first measurement result and the second measurement result to the base station device 3, and in the first state, The first measurement result is reported to the base station apparatus 3, and in the second state, the first measurement result or the second measurement result is reported to the base station apparatus 3.
 一例として、前記第2の状態では、前記第1の測定結果を報告するイベントと前記第2の測定結果を報告するイベントと、が前記基地局装置3によって設定される。また、一例として、前記第2の状態では、前記第2の測定を報告するイベントのみが前記基地局装置3によって設定される。前記第2の測定結果を報告するイベントトリガ条件は、第2の測定結果を用いて規定される。 As an example, in the second state, the base station apparatus 3 sets an event for reporting the first measurement result and an event for reporting the second measurement result. Further, as an example, in the second state, only the event reporting the second measurement is set by the base station device 3. The event trigger condition for reporting the second measurement result is defined using the second measurement result.
 一例として、前記第1の状態は、前記第2のRSの設定情報が通知されていない状態であり、前記第2の状態は、前記第2のRSの設定情報が前記基地局装置3から通知された状態である。また、一例として、前記第1の状態は、前記第2の測定情報が設定されていない状態であり、前記第2の状態は、前記第2の測定情報が前記基地局装置3から設定された状態である。また、一例として、前記第2の状態は、前記第1のRSが送信されない状態である。 As an example, the first state is a state in which the setting information of the second RS is not notified, and the second state is a state in which the setting information of the second RS is notified from the base station apparatus 3. It is the state that was done. Further, as an example, the first state is a state where the second measurement information is not set, and the second state is the case where the second measurement information is set from the base station apparatus 3. State. As an example, the second state is a state in which the first RS is not transmitted.
 DRSに対する報告設定は、CRSやCSI-RSに対する報告設定とは、個別にセットされてもよい。 The report settings for DRS may be set separately from the report settings for CRS and CSI-RS.
 送信電力やPHR(Power Headroom)では、パスロスに依存して値が決定される。以下では、パスロス(伝搬路減衰値)を推定する方法の一例について説明する。 In transmission power and PHR (Power Headroom), the value is determined depending on the path loss. Hereinafter, an example of a method for estimating a path loss (a propagation path attenuation value) will be described.
 サービングセルcの下りリンクパスロス推定値は、PLc = referenceSignalPower - higher layer filtered RSRPの式で端末装置1によって計算される。ここで、referenceSignalPowerは上位層で与えられる。referenceSignalPowerは、CRSの送信電力に基づいた情報である。ここで、higher layer filtered RSRPは上位層でフィルタリングされた参照サービングセルの第1のRSRPである。 The downlink path loss estimated value of the serving cell c is calculated by the terminal device 1 by the following formula: PLc = referenceSignalPower-higher layer filtered RSRP. Here, referenceSignalPower is given by the upper layer. ReferenceSignalPower is information based on the transmission power of CRS. Here, higher layer filtered RSRP is the first RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.
 もしサービングセルcがプライマリーセルを含んだTAG(pTAG)に所属している場合、上りリンクプライマリーセルに対して、referenceSignalPowerとhigher layer filtered RSRPの参照サービングセルにはプライマリーセルが用いられる。上りリンクセカンダリーセルに対して、referenceSignalPowerとhigher layer filtered RSRPの参照サービングセルには上位層のパラメータpathlossReferenceLinkingによって設定されたサービングセルが用いられる。もしサービングセルcがプライマリーセルを含まないTAG(例えば、sTAG)に所属している場合、referenceSignalPowerとhigher layer filtered RSRPの参照サービングセルにはサービングセルcが用いられる。 If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG (pTAG) including the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for referenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered for the uplink primary cell. For the uplink secondary cell, the serving cell set by the upper layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking is used as the reference serving cell of referenceSignalPower and higherhighlayer filtered RSRP. If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG (eg, sTAG) that does not include a primary cell, the serving cell c is used as a reference serving cell of referenceSignalPower and higherhighlayer filtered RSRP.
 パスロスを推定する方法の一例について説明する。 An example of a method for estimating the path loss will be described.
 サービングセルcの下りリンクパスロス推定値は、上位層によって設定された場合PLc = discoveryReferenceSignalPower - higher layer filtered RSRP2の式で、そうでなければPLc = referenceSignalPower - higher layer filtered RSRPの式を用いて端末装置1によって計算される。ここで、referenceSignalPowerは上位層で与えられる。referenceSignalPowerは、CRSの送信電力に基づいた情報である。ここで、higher layer filtered RSRPは、上位層でフィルタリングされた参照サービングセルの第1のRSRPである。ここで、discoveryReferenceSignalPowerは、DRSの送信電力に関連するパラメータであり、上位層で与えられる。また、higher layer filtered RSRP2は、上位層でフィルタリングされた参照サービングセルの第2のRSRPである。 The downlink path loss estimated value of serving cell c is PLcPL = 端末 discoveryReferenceSignalPower-higher layer filtered RSRP2 if set by higher layer, otherwise PLcPL = referenceSignalPower-higher layer filtered RSRP2 Calculated. Here, referenceSignalPower is given by the upper layer. ReferenceSignalPower is information based on the transmission power of CRS. Here, higher layer filtered RSRP is the first RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer. Here, discoveryReferenceSignalPower is a parameter related to DRS transmission power, and is given by the upper layer. Also, higher layer filtered RSRP2 is the second RSRP of the reference serving cell filtered in the upper layer.
 ここで、上位層によって設定された場合とは、例えば、上位層シグナリングを用いて通知されたDRSの設定に基づく場合であってもよい。上位層によって設定された場合とは、例えば、上位層シグナリングを用いて通知された測定の設定に基づく場合であってもよい。上位層によって設定された場合とは、例えば、上位層シグナリングを用いて通知された上りリンク送信電力制御の設定に基づく場合であってもよい。つまり、上位層によって設定された場合とは、上位層シグナリングを用いて、パラメータまたは情報が通知され、端末装置1に設定された場合が含まれてもよい。 Here, the case of being set by the upper layer may be, for example, a case based on the setting of the DRS notified using upper layer signaling. The case where it is set by the upper layer may be a case where it is based on the measurement setting notified using upper layer signaling, for example. The case of being set by the upper layer may be, for example, a case based on the setting of uplink transmission power control notified using upper layer signaling. That is, the case where it is set by the higher layer may include a case where a parameter or information is notified using higher layer signaling and is set in the terminal device 1.
 もしサービングセルcがプライマリーセルを含んだTAGに所属している場合、上りリンクプライマリーセルに対して、discoveryReferenceSignalPowerとhigher layer filtered RSRP2の参照サービングセルにはプライマリーセルが用いられる。上りリンクセカンダリーセルに対して、discoveryReferenceSignalPowerとhigher layer filtered RSRP2の参照サービングセルには上位層のパラメータpathlossReferenceLinkingによって設定されたサービングセルが用いられる。もしサービングセルcがプライマリーセルを含まないTAGに所属している場合、discoveryReferenceSignalPowerとhigher layer filtered RSRP2の参照サービングセルにはサービングセルcが用いられる。 If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG including the primary cell, the primary cell is used as the reference serving cell for the discoveryReferenceSignalPower and the higher layer filtered for the uplink primary cell. For the uplink secondary cell, the serving cell set by the upper layer parameter pathlossReferenceLinking is used as the reference serving cell of discoveryReferenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered RSRP2. If the serving cell c belongs to a TAG that does not include a primary cell, the serving cell c is used as a reference serving cell for discoveryReferenceSignalPower and higher layer filtered RSRP2.
 セカンダリーセルが停止の状態である場合、端末装置1は、以下の処理を行なわなくてもよい。その処理は、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告、セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタである。 When the secondary cell is in a stopped state, the terminal device 1 may not perform the following process. The processing includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for the secondary cell, uplink in the secondary cell Data (UL-SCH) transmission, RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell, and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
 セカンダリーセルが小セルである場合には、セカンダリーセルが停止の状態であっても、端末装置1は、以下の処理を行なってもよい。その処理は、セカンダリーセルでのSRSの送信、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI/PMI/RI/PTIの報告、(セカンダリーセルでの上りリンクデータ(UL-SCH)の送信)、セカンダリーセルでのRACHの送信、セカンダリーセルでのPDCCHのモニタ、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタである。 When the secondary cell is a small cell, the terminal device 1 may perform the following process even if the secondary cell is in a stopped state. The processing includes SRS transmission in the secondary cell, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI report to the secondary cell, (uplink data (UL-SCH) transmission in the secondary cell), RACH transmission in the secondary cell, PDCCH monitoring in the secondary cell and PDCCH monitoring for the secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、端末装置1は、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、セカンダリーセルに対するSRS送信の要求がある(SRSリクエストが送信される)とすれば、セカンダリーセルでSRSを送信してもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、SRSを受信することを期待する。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, the terminal device 1 makes a request for SRS transmission to the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If there is (SRS request is transmitted), SRS may be transmitted in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive SRS.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、セカンダリーセルに対するCSI報告の要求がある(CSIリクエストが送信される)とすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI/PMI/RI/PTIをプライマリーセルのPUSCHを用いて送信してもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、プライマリーセルのPUSCHでセカンダリーセルに対するCQI/PMI/RI/PTIを受信することを期待する。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, there is a request for CSI reporting to the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross-carrier scheduling (CSI request is Terminal device 1 may transmit CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell using the PUSCH of the primary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell on the PUSCH of the primary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、PDCCHオーダーによるランダムアクセスレスポンスグラント(RARグラント)が送信されるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで、RACH送信を行なってもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、セカンダリーセルでRACHを受信することを期待する。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, a random access response grant (RAR grant) according to the PDCCH order is transmitted from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If so, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive the RACH in the secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、セカンダリーセルに対して、RA-RNTIがスクランブルされたCRCを伴うDCIフォーマットを検出できるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで、RACH送信を行なってもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、セカンダリーセルでRACHを受信することを期待する。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, the RA-RNTI is scrambled from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. If the DCI format with CRC can be detected, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive the RACH in the secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、セカンダリーセルに対して、EPDCCHセットの設定(またはEPDCCH設定)がセットされていなければ、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルでPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、停止の状態の小セルにおいて、PDCCHを送信してもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, if the setting of the EPDCCH set (or EPDCCH setting) is not set for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell. . That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))からセカンダリーセルに対して、下りリンクグラントや上りリンクグラント、CSIリクエストやSRSリクエスト、ランダムアクセスレスポンスグラントなどが送信される場合、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。その際、EPDCCHセット(またはEPDCCH設定)の設定が端末装置1に対してされていない、または、端末装置1にEPDCCHを用いてDCIを受信する機能がサポートされていない場合にのみ、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行なってもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、停止の状態の小セルにおいて、PDCCHを送信してもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, the downlink grant or the uplink grant from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling, When a CSI request, an SRS request, a random access response grant, or the like is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is set only when the EPDCCH set (or EPDCCH setting) is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. May monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the PDCCH in the stopped small cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルが小セルである場合、セカンダリーセルに対して、上りリンクスケジューリングに関する情報が送信されても、端末装置1は、上りリンクスケジューリングに関する情報に基づく、上りリンク送信を行なわなくてもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、停止の状態の小セルにおいて、上りリンク送信が行なわれることを期待しない。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a small cell, even if information related to uplink scheduling is transmitted to the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 does not perform uplink transmission based on information related to uplink scheduling. Also good. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 does not expect uplink transmission to be performed in a small cell in a stopped state.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセル(スペシャルセカンダリーセル)である場合、端末装置1は、セルフスケジューリングで、セカンダリーセルに対するSRS送信の要求がある(SRSリクエストが送信される)とすれば、セカンダリーセルでSRSを送信してもよい。つまり、この場合、基地局装置3は、SRSを受信することを期待する。 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell (special secondary cell), the terminal device 1 is secondary if it has a request for SRS transmission to the secondary cell (SRS request is transmitted) by self-scheduling. SRS may be transmitted in the cell. That is, in this case, the base station apparatus 3 expects to receive SRS.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セルフスケジューリングで、セカンダリーセルに対するCSI報告の要求がある(CSIリクエストが送信される)とすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI/PMI/RI/PTIをセカンダリーセルのPUSCHを用いて送信してもよい。 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, if there is a CSI report request for the secondary cell (a CSI request is transmitted) in the self-scheduling, the terminal apparatus 1 performs CQI / PMI for the secondary cell. / RI / PTI may be transmitted using the PUSCH of the secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セルフスケジューリングで、PDCCHオーダーによるランダムアクセスレスポンスグラント(RARグラント)が送信されるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで、RACH送信を行なってもよい。 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if a random access response grant (RAR grant) according to the PDCCH order is transmitted by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 performs RACH transmission in the secondary cell. May be.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セルフスケジューリングで、セカンダリーセルに対して、RA-RNTIがスクランブルされたCRCを伴うDCIフォーマットを検出できるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで、RACH送信を行なってもよい。 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, if the DCI format with the CRC in which the RA-RNTI is scrambled can be detected for the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 Then, RACH transmission may be performed.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セカンダリーセルに対して、EPDCCHセットの設定がされていなければ、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルでPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、プライマリーセカンダリーセルに対して、EPDCCHセットの設定を受信していなければ、セカンダリーセルでPDCCHをモニタする。また、基地局装置3は、プライマリーセカンダリーセルに対して、EPDCCHセットの設定をセットしていなければ、端末装置1に対するPDCCHを、セカンダリーセルで送信してもよい。 When the stopped secondary cell is the primary secondary cell, if the EPDCCH set is not set for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell. That is, if the terminal device 1 has not received the setting of the EPDCCH set for the primary secondary cell, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the secondary cell. Moreover, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit PDCCH with respect to the terminal device 1 by a secondary cell, if the setting of an EPDCCH set is not set with respect to the primary secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セルフスケジューリングで、セカンダリーセルに対して、下りリンクグラントや上りリンクグラント、CSIリクエストやSRSリクエスト、ランダムアクセスレスポンスグラントなどが送信される場合、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。その際、EPDCCHセットの設定が端末装置1に対してされていない、または、端末装置1にEPDCCHを用いてDCIを受信する機能がサポートされていない場合にのみ、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行なってもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, when a downlink grant, an uplink grant, a CSI request, an SRS request, a random access response grant, etc. are transmitted to the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal The apparatus 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is only connected to the secondary cell when the EPDCCH set is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. PDCCH may be monitored.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セルフスケジューリングで、セカンダリーセルに対して、上りリンクスケジューリングに関する情報(PUSCHグラント、CSIリクエスト、SRSリクエスト)が送信されるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで上りリンクスケジューリングに関する情報に基づく上りリンク送信を行なってもよい。例えば、セカンダリーセルに対して、DCIフォーマット0を検出した場合、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルでPUSCH送信を行なってもよい。 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if information on uplink scheduling (PUSCH grant, CSI request, SRS request) is transmitted to the secondary cell by self-scheduling, the terminal device 1 May perform uplink transmission based on information related to uplink scheduling in the secondary cell. For example, when DCI format 0 is detected for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may perform PUSCH transmission in the secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセル(スペシャルセカンダリーセル)である場合、端末装置1は、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、セカンダリーセルに対するSRS送信の要求がある(SRSリクエストが送信される)とすれば、セカンダリーセルでSRSを送信してもよい。その際、端末装置1は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルとのクロスキャリアスケジューリングを行なう機能をサポートしていてもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell (special secondary cell), the terminal device 1 uses the secondary cell from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If there is a request for SRS transmission for (SRS request is transmitted), the SRS may be transmitted in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、セカンダリーセルに対するCSI報告の要求がある(CSIリクエストが送信される)とすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するCQI/PMI/RI/PTIをプライマリーセルのPUSCHを用いて送信してもよい。その際、端末装置1は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルとのクロスキャリアスケジューリングを行なう機能をサポートしていてもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, there is a request for CSI reporting from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell (CSI request) by cross carrier scheduling. Terminal apparatus 1 may transmit CQI / PMI / RI / PTI for the secondary cell using the PUSCH of the primary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、PDCCHオーダーによるランダムアクセスレスポンスグラント(RARグラント)が送信されるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで、RACH送信を行なってもよい。その際、端末装置1は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルとのクロスキャリアスケジューリングを行なう機能をサポートしていてもよい。この場合、基地局装置3は、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルに対して、PDCCHオーダーによるランダムアクセスレスポンスグラント(RARグラント)を送信してもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, a random access response grant (RAR grant) according to the PDCCH order is generated from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) by cross carrier scheduling. If it is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. In this case, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit the random access response grant (RAR grant) by the PDCCH order to the secondary cell in the stopped state by cross carrier scheduling.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))から、セカンダリーセルに対して、RA-RNTIがスクランブルされたCRCを伴うDCIフォーマットを検出できるとすれば、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルで、RACH送信を行なってもよい。その際、端末装置1は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルとのクロスキャリアスケジューリングを行なう機能をサポートしていてもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, RA-RNTI is scrambled from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. If the DCI format with CRC is detected, the terminal device 1 may perform RACH transmission in the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、セカンダリーセルに対して、EPDCCHセットの設定がされていなければ、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルでPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。 When the stopped secondary cell is the primary secondary cell, if the EPDCCH set is not set for the secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセル(プライマリーセルで送信されるPDCCH/EPDCCH(DCIフォーマット))からセカンダリーセルに対して、下りリンクグラントや上りリンクグラント、CSIリクエストやSRSリクエスト、ランダムアクセスレスポンスグラントなどが送信される場合、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。その際、EPDCCHセットの設定が端末装置1に対してされていない、または、端末装置1にEPDCCHを用いてDCIを受信する機能がサポートされていない場合にのみ、端末装置1は、セカンダリーセルに対するPDCCHのモニタを行なってもよい。 When the secondary cell in the stopped state is the primary secondary cell, the downlink grant or the uplink grant is performed from the primary cell (PDCCH / EPDCCH (DCI format) transmitted in the primary cell) to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling. When a CSI request, an SRS request, a random access response grant, or the like is transmitted, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH for the secondary cell. At that time, the terminal device 1 is only connected to the secondary cell when the EPDCCH set is not set for the terminal device 1 or when the terminal device 1 does not support the function of receiving DCI using the EPDCCH. PDCCH may be monitored.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルに対して、クロスキャリアスケジューリングが無効である場合、端末装置1は、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルでPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。 When the cross carrier scheduling is invalid for the secondary cell in the stopped state, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the secondary cell in the stopped state.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルに対して、クロスキャリアスケジューリングが無効であり、且つ、EPDCCHに関する種々の設定が受信されていない場合には、端末装置1は、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルでPDCCHをモニタしてもよい。 When the cross carrier scheduling is invalid for the secondary cell in the stopped state and various settings regarding the EPDCCH are not received, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the secondary cell in the stopped state. May be.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルに対して、EPDCCH設定および/またはEPDCCHセットの設定がなければ、端末装置1は、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルで、PDCCHをモニタしてもよい。また、基地局装置3は、端末装置1に、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルに対するEPDCCH設定および/またはEPDCCHセットの設定をセットしたか否かに応じて、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルでPDCCHを送信するか否かを決定してもよい。 If there is no EPDCCH setting and / or EPDCCH set setting for the stopped secondary cell, the terminal device 1 may monitor the PDCCH in the stopped secondary cell. Further, the base station apparatus 3 transmits the PDCCH in the stopped secondary cell to the terminal apparatus 1 depending on whether or not the EPDCCH setting and / or the EPDCCH set setting for the stopped secondary cell is set. It may be determined whether or not.
 停止の状態のセカンダリーセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルである場合、クロスキャリアスケジューリングによって、プライマリーセルからセカンダリーセルに対して、上りリンクスケジューリングに関する情報が送信されるとすれば、端末装置1は、上りリンクスケジューリングに関する情報に基づく、上りリンク送信を行なってもよい。その際、端末装置1は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルとのクロスキャリアスケジューリングを行なう機能をサポートしていてもよい。 If the secondary cell in the stopped state is a primary secondary cell, if information on uplink scheduling is transmitted from the primary cell to the secondary cell by cross carrier scheduling, the terminal device 1 relates to uplink scheduling. Uplink transmission based on information may be performed. At that time, the terminal device 1 may support a function of performing cross-carrier scheduling between the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 あるサービングセルに対して、端末装置1が、上位層シグナリングによって、送信モード1~9に応じたPDSCHデータ送信を受信することを設定され、且つ、端末装置1が、EPDCCHをモニタすることを設定されたとすれば、端末装置1は、ドップラーシフト、ドップラースプレッド、平均遅延、遅延スプレッドに関して、サービングセルのアンテナポート0~3、107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定する。 For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to transmission modes 1 to 9 by higher layer signaling, and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH. For example, the terminal device 1 assumes that the antenna ports 0 to 3 and 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.
 あるサービングセルに対して、端末装置1が、上位層シグナリングによって、送信モード10に応じたPDSCHデータ送信を受信することを設定され、且つ、各EPDCCH-PRBセットに対して、端末装置1が、EPDCCHをモニタすることを設定された場合、さらに、端末装置1は、擬似共有配置(QCL: Quasi Co-Location)タイプAに応じたPDSCHを復号することを上位層によって設定されるとすれば、端末装置1は、ドップラーシフト、ドップラースプレッド、平均遅延、遅延スプレッドに関して、サービングセルのアンテナポート0~3とアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定する。一方、端末装置1は、擬似共有配置タイプBに応じたPDSCHを復号することを上位層によって設定されるとすれば、端末装置1は、ドップラーシフト、ドップラースプレッド、平均遅延、遅延スプレッドに関して、上位層パラメータ(qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId)に対応するアンテナポート15~22とアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定する。 For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to the transmission mode 10 by higher layer signaling, and for each EPDCCH-PRB set, the terminal device 1 If the terminal device 1 is set by the higher layer to further decode the PDSCH corresponding to the pseudo shared arrangement (QCL: Quasi Co-Location) type A, The apparatus 1 assumes that antenna ports 0 to 3 and antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged with respect to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. On the other hand, if the terminal device 1 is set by the upper layer to decode the PDSCH according to the pseudo-shared arrangement type B, the terminal device 1 is higher in terms of Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. Assume that the antenna ports 15 to 22 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to the layer parameter (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
 QCLタイプAは、端末装置1が、ドップラーシフト、ドップラースプレッド、平均遅延、遅延スプレッドに関して、サービングセルのアンテナポート0~3とアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定するかもしれない。 QCL type A may assume that the terminal device 1 has a pseudo shared arrangement of the antenna ports 0 to 3 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell with regard to Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread.
 QCLタイプBは、端末装置1が、ドップラーシフト、ドップラースプレッド、平均遅延、遅延スプレッドに関して、上位層パラメータ(qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId)に対応するアンテナポート15~22とアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定するかもしれない。 In the QCL type B, the terminal device 1 has antenna ports 15 to 22 and antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to upper layer parameters (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) regarding Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread. You may assume that it is a pseudo-shared arrangement.
 つまり、端末装置1は、上位層パラメータQCLオペレーションに基づいて、タイプAがセットされている場合には、サービングセルのアンテナポート0~3とアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定し、タイプBがセットされている場合には、上位層パラメータ(qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId)に対応するアンテナポート15~22とアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定する。言い換えると、EPDCCHをモニタすることが設定された端末装置1は、上位層パラメータQCLオペレーションに基づいて、タイプAがセットされている場合には、CRSとEPDCCHが擬似共有配置されていると仮定し、タイプBがセットされている場合には、CSI-RSとEPDCCHが擬似共有配置されていると仮定する。 That is, the terminal device 1 assumes that the antenna ports 0 to 3 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 of the serving cell are quasi-sharedly arranged when the type A is set based on the higher layer parameter QCL operation. When type B is set, it is assumed that the antenna ports 15 to 22 and the antenna ports 107 to 110 corresponding to the upper layer parameter (qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId) are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner. In other words, the terminal device 1 set to monitor the EPDCCH assumes that the CRS and the EPDCCH are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner when the type A is set based on the higher layer parameter QCL operation. When Type B is set, it is assumed that CSI-RS and EPDCCH are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
 あるサービングセルに対して、端末装置1が、上位層シグナリングによって、送信モード10に応じたPDSCHデータ送信を受信することを設定され、且つ、各EPDCCH-PRBセットに対して、端末装置1が、EPDCCHをモニタすることを設定された場合、EPDCCHリソースエレメントマッピングとEPDCCHアンテナポート擬似共有配置を決定するために、上位層パラメータ(re-MappingQCL-ConfigId, PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-ConfigId)によって指示されたパラメータセット(PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-Config)を用いる。EPDCCHリソースエレメントマッピングとEPDCCHアンテナポート擬似共有配置を決定するための、種々のパラメータ(crs-PortsCount, crs-FreqShift, mbsfn-SubframeConfigList, csi-RS-ConfigZPId, pdsch-Start, qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId)は、そのパラメータセットに含まれる。 For a certain serving cell, the terminal device 1 is set to receive PDSCH data transmission according to the transmission mode 10 by higher layer signaling, and for each EPDCCH-PRB set, the terminal device 1 Parameters set by higher layer parameters (re-MappingQCL-ConfigId, PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-ConfigId) to determine EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement Set (PDSCH-RE-MappingQCL-Config) is used. Various parameters (crs-PortsCount, crs-FreqShift, mbsfn-SubframeConfigList, csi-RS-ConfigZPId, pdsch-Start, qcl-CSI-RS-ConfigNZPId for determining EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement ) Is included in the parameter set.
 あるサービングセル(セカンダリーセル)において、端末装置1が、上位層シグナリングによって、DRSを受信することが設定され、且つ、端末装置1が、EPDCCHをモニタすることを設定された場合、DRSとEPDCCHリソースエレメントマッピングとEPDCCHアンテナポート擬似共有配置を決定するための、上位層パラメータ(qcl-DRS-ConfigId)が設定されてもよい。 In a certain serving cell (secondary cell), when the terminal device 1 is set to receive DRS by higher layer signaling and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH, the DRS and EPDCCH resource elements An upper layer parameter (qcl-DRS-ConfigId) for determining the mapping and the EPDCCH antenna port pseudo shared arrangement may be set.
 あるサービングセル(セカンダリーセル)において、端末装置1が、上位層シグナリングによって、DRSを受信することが設定され、且つ、端末装置1が、EPDCCHをモニタすることを設定された場合、端末装置1は、上位層パラメータ(qcl-DRS-ConfigId)に対応する1つ以上のアンテナポートとアンテナポート107~110が擬似共有配置されていると仮定する。 In a certain serving cell (secondary cell), when the terminal device 1 is set to receive DRS by higher layer signaling, and the terminal device 1 is set to monitor EPDCCH, the terminal device 1 It is assumed that one or more antenna ports corresponding to the upper layer parameter (qcl-DRS-ConfigId) and the antenna ports 107 to 110 are arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
 DRSに対する、EPDCCHリソースエレメントマッピングとEPDCCHアンテナポート擬似共有配置を決定するための、種々のパラメータ(drs-PortsCount, drs-FreqShift, drs-ConfigZPId, qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId, qcl-DRS-ConfigIdなど)がセットされてもよい。つまり、EPDCCHとDRSの擬似共有配置の設定に、DRSのアンテナポート数(drs-PortsCount)が含まれてもよい。また、EPDCCHとDRSの擬似共有配置の設定に、DRSの周波数シフト(drs-FreqShift)が含まれてもよい。また、EPDCCHとDRSの擬似共有配置の設定に、ゼロパワーDRS-ID(drs-ConfigZPId)が含まれてもよい。また、EPDCCHとDRSの擬似共有配置の設定に、擬似共有配置されるノンゼロパワーDRSのID(qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId)が含まれてもよい。 Various parameters (drs-PortsCount, drs-FreqShift, drs-ConfigZPId, qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId, qcl-DRS-ConfigId, etc.) for determining the EPDCCH resource element mapping and EPDCCH antenna port pseudo-shared arrangement for DRS It may be set. That is, the number of DRS antenna ports (drs-PortsCount) may be included in the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS. Further, the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS may include DRS frequency shift (drs-FreqShift). Further, zero power DRS-ID (drs-ConfigZPId) may be included in the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS. Further, the setting of the pseudo-shared arrangement of EPDCCH and DRS may include the ID (qcl-DRS-ConfigNZPId) of the non-zero power DRS arranged in a pseudo-shared manner.
 EPDCCHとの擬似共有配置は、サービングセル(セカンダリーセル)の起動/停止の状態によって、対象となる信号が変わってもよい。例えば、端末装置1は、サービングセルの停止の状態では、DRSとEPDCCHで擬似共有配置されていると仮定し、サービングセルの起動の状態では、CRSとEPDCCHで擬似共有配置されていると仮定してもよい。また、端末装置1は、サービングセルの停止の状態では、CSI-RSとEPDCCHで擬似共有配置されていると仮定し、サービングセルの起動の状態では、CRSとEPDCCHで擬似共有配置されていると仮定してもよい。また、端末装置1は、サービングセルの停止の状態では、CSI-RSとEPDCCHで擬似共有配置されていると仮定し、サービングセルの起動の状態では、CSI-RSとCRSとEPDCCHで擬似共有配置されていると仮定してもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、セットされた設定情報に基づいて、EPDCCHの擬似共有配置(リソースエレメントマッピングとアンテナポート)を決定する。基地局装置3は、起動の状態と停止の状態で、EPDCCHの擬似共有配置を変更する場合、複数のQCL設定に関する情報を送信してもよい。 In the pseudo-shared arrangement with the EPDCCH, the target signal may be changed depending on the start / stop state of the serving cell (secondary cell). For example, it is assumed that the terminal apparatus 1 is pseudo-shared with the DRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is assumed to be pseudo-shared with the CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. Good. Further, it is assumed that the terminal device 1 is quasi-shared with CSI-RS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is quasi-shared with CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. May be. Further, it is assumed that the terminal device 1 is pseudo-shared with CSI-RS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is stopped, and is pseudo-shared with CSI-RS, CRS and EPDCCH when the serving cell is activated. You may assume that That is, the terminal device 1 determines the pseudo shared arrangement (resource element mapping and antenna port) of the EPDCCH based on the set setting information. The base station apparatus 3 may transmit information regarding a plurality of QCL settings when changing the pseudo-shared arrangement of the EPDCCH in the activated state and the deactivated state.
 次に、間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)について説明する。 Next, discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) will be described.
 端末装置1は、DRXを、端末装置1のC-RNTI、TPC-PUCCH-RNTI、TPC-PUSCH-RNTI、SPS-RNTIに対する端末装置1のPDCCHモニタリングの活性化(PDCCHモニタリングを行なうか否か)を制御するために、DRX機能を伴うRRCによって設定されるかもしれない。端末装置1は、DRXが設定されていなければ、PDCCHを連続でモニタし続ける。DRXを行なうために、複数のタイマー(onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimerなど)が端末装置1に設定される。また、周期(longDRX-Cycle, shortDRX-Cycle)と開始オフセット(drxStartOffset)が設定されることによって、DRX中に、PDCCHをモニタリングするサブフレームが設定される。ショートDRXに関するパラメータ(drxShortCycleTimer, shortDRX-Cycle)は、オプションとして設定されてもよい。(ブロードキャストプロセスを除く)DL HARQプロセス毎にHARQ RTTタイマーが定義される。なお、DRX中に、PDCCHをモニタリングできる期間をアクティブタイム(Active Time)と称する。 The terminal device 1 activates PDCCH monitoring of the terminal device 1 for the C-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, and SPS-RNTI of the terminal device 1 (whether or not to perform PDCCH monitoring). May be set by RRC with DRX function to control. If DRX is not set, the terminal device 1 continues to monitor the PDCCH continuously. In order to perform DRX, a plurality of timers (onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, etc.) are set in the terminal device 1. Also, by setting the period (longDRX-Cycle, shortDRX-Cycle) and the start offset (drxStartOffset), a subframe for monitoring the PDCCH is set during DRX. Parameters related to short DRX (drxShortCycleTimer, shortDRX-Cycle) may be set as options. A HARQ RTT timer is defined for each DL HARQ process (excluding broadcast processes). Note that a period during which the PDCCH can be monitored during DRX is referred to as an active time.
 アクティブタイムとは、複数のタイマー(onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, mac-ContentionResolutionTimer)のうち、少なくとも1つのタイマーが起動している時間であってもよい。また、アクティブタイムとは、スケジューリングリクエストがPUCCHで送信され、ペンディングされている時間であってもよい。また、アクティブタイムとは、ペンディングしているHARQ送信に対する上りリンクグラントがあり、対応するHARQバッファにデータがある時間であってもよい。また、アクティブタイムとは、端末装置1によって選択されないプリアンブルに対するランダムアクセスレスポンスの受信成功後に、端末装置1のC-RNTIに係る新しい送信を指示するPDCCHが受信されない時間であってもよい。また、アクティブタイムとは、DRXアクティブタイム(drx-Activetime)として設定されたサブフレーム数であってもよい。 The active time may be a time when at least one of the timers (onDurationTimer, drx-InactivityTimer, drx-RetransmissionTimer, mac-ContentionResolutionTimer) is active. The active time may be a time during which a scheduling request is transmitted on the PUCCH and is pending. The active time may be an uplink grant for pending HARQ transmission, and may be a time when data is in the corresponding HARQ buffer. Further, the active time may be a time during which the PDCCH instructing new transmission related to the C-RNTI of the terminal device 1 is not received after successful reception of a random access response for a preamble that is not selected by the terminal device 1. The active time may be the number of subframes set as DRX active time (drx-Activetime).
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、このサブフレームでHARQ RTTタイマーが満了するか、対応するHARQプロセスのデータの復号に成功しなかったとすれば、対応するHARQプロセスに対するDRX再送タイマー(drx-RetransmissionTimer)をスタートする。 If DRX is set, the terminal apparatus 1 will, for each subframe, if the HARQ RTT timer expires in this subframe or if the corresponding HARQ process data has not been successfully decoded, the corresponding HARQ Start a DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) for the process.
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、DRXコマンドMAC制御エレメント(MAC CE)が受信されるとすれば、継続時間タイマー(onDurationTimer)およびDRX不活性タイマー(drx-InactivityTimer)を停止する。 If DRX is set, the terminal device 1 may receive a DRX command MAC control element (MAC CE) for each subframe, and a duration timer (onDurationTimer) and a DRX inactivity timer (drx− InactivityTimer).
 継続時間タイマー(onDurationTimer)は、DRXサイクルの初めに、連続したPDCCHサブフレームを規定するために用いられる。 The duration timer (onDurationTimer) is used to define continuous PDCCH subframes at the beginning of the DRX cycle.
 DRX不活性タイマー(drx-InactivityTimer)は、ある端末装置1に対する初期上りリンク/下りリンクユーザデータ送信を指示するPDCCHが送信されたサブフレームの後に、連続したPDCCHサブフレームの数を規定するために用いられる。 The DRX inactivity timer (drx-InactivityTimer) is for specifying the number of consecutive PDCCH subframes after the subframe in which the PDCCH instructing the initial uplink / downlink user data transmission to a certain terminal apparatus 1 is transmitted. Used.
 DRX再送タイマー(drx-RetransmissionTimer)は、下りリンク送信が受信されるまでの連続したPDCCHサブフレームの最大数を規定するために用いられる。 The DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimer) is used to specify the maximum number of consecutive PDCCH subframes until a downlink transmission is received.
 HARQ RTTタイマーは、下りリンクHARQ送信が端末装置1によって期待される前のサブフレームの最小数(最小量)を規定するために用いられる。 The HARQ RTT timer is used to specify the minimum number (minimum amount) of subframes before downlink HARQ transmission is expected by the terminal device 1.
 MACコンテンションレゾリューションタイマー(mac-ContentionResolutionTimer)は、メッセージ3(ランダムアクセスレスポンスグラントに対応するPUSCH)が送信された後の端末装置1がPDCCHをモニタする連続したサブフレームの数を規定するために用いられる。 The MAC contention resolution timer (mac-ContentionResolutionTimer) specifies the number of consecutive subframes in which the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH after the message 3 (PUSCH corresponding to the random access response grant) is transmitted. Used for.
 DRXショートサイクルタイマー(drxShortCycleTimer)は、端末装置1がショートDRXサイクルをフォローする連続したサブフレームの数を規定するために用いられる。 DRX short cycle timer (drxShortCycleTimer) is used to define the number of consecutive subframes in which the terminal device 1 follows the short DRX cycle.
 DRX開始オフセット(drxStartOffset)は、DRXサイクルがスタートするサブフレームを規定するために用いられる。 DRX start offset (drxStartOffset) is used to define the subframe in which the DRX cycle starts.
 アクティブタイムは、DRXオペレーションに関連する時間であり、端末装置1がPDCCHモニタリングサブフレームにおいてPDCCHをモニタする期間(時間)を定義している。 The active time is a time related to the DRX operation, and defines a period (time) during which the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH in the PDCCH monitoring subframe.
 PDCCHモニタリングサブフレームは、基本的に、PDCCHサブフレームと同じである。ただし、端末装置1が、あるサービングセルにおいてeIMTAが可能な場合、PDCCHモニタリングサブフレームは、eIMTAに関するL1シグナリング(例えば、eIMTA-RNTIがスクランブルされたDCIフォーマット)によって指示されたTDD UL-DL設定に応じて、決定された下りリンクサブフレームおよびDwPTSを含むサブフレームのことである。 The PDCCH monitoring subframe is basically the same as the PDCCH subframe. However, when the terminal device 1 is capable of eIMTA in a certain serving cell, the PDCCH monitoring subframe is in accordance with the TDD UL-DL setting indicated by the L1 signaling related to eIMTA (for example, the DCI format in which eIMTA-RNTI is scrambled). Thus, it is a subframe including the determined downlink subframe and DwPTS.
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、DRX不活性タイマーが満了する、または、このサブフレームでDRXコマンドMAC CEが受信され、さらに、ショートDRXサイクルが設定されているとすれば、DRXショートサイクルタイマー(drxShortCycleTimer)をスタート(再スタート)し、ショートDRXサイクルを利用する。それ以外では、ロングDRXサイクルを利用する。 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 expires the DRX inactivity timer for each subframe or receives a DRX command MAC CE in this subframe, and further sets a short DRX cycle. If so, start (restart) the DRX short cycle timer (drxShortCycleTimer) and use the short DRX cycle. Otherwise, the long DRX cycle is used.
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、DRXショートサイクルタイマーが満了すれば、ロングDRXサイクルを利用する。 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 uses the long DRX cycle when the DRX short cycle timer expires for each subframe.
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、システムフレーム番号、サブフレーム番号、ショートDRXサイクル(および/またはロングDRXサイクル)、DRX開始オフセット(drxStartOffset)に基づく式が所定の条件を満たす場合、継続時間タイマーをスタートする。 When DRX is set, the terminal apparatus 1 has a predetermined formula for each subframe based on a system frame number, a subframe number, a short DRX cycle (and / or a long DRX cycle), and a DRX start offset (drxStartOffset). If the condition is satisfied, the duration timer is started.
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、アクティブタイム中であって、PDCCHサブフレームに対して、そのサブフレームがハーフデュプレックスFDD端末装置オペレーションに対する上りリンク送信に対して必要ではない、または、そのサブフレームが設定された測定ギャップの一部でないとすれば、PDCCHをモニタする。さらに、PDCCHが下りリンク送信を指示しているとすれば、もしくは、下りリンクアサインメントがこのサブフレームに対して設定されているとすれば、対応するHARQプロセスに対するHARQ RTTタイマーをスタートし、対応するHARQプロセスに対するDRX再送タイマーを停止する。また、PDCCHが新しい送信(下りリンクまたは上りリンク)を指示している場合、DRX不活性タイマーをスタート(または再スタート)する。 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 is in active time for each subframe, and for the PDCCH subframe, the subframe is for uplink transmission for half-duplex FDD terminal device operation. If it is not necessary or if the subframe is not part of the configured measurement gap, the PDCCH is monitored. Furthermore, if the PDCCH indicates downlink transmission, or if downlink assignment is set for this subframe, the HARQ RTT timer for the corresponding HARQ process is started and Stop the DRX retransmission timer for the HARQ process to perform. If the PDCCH indicates a new transmission (downlink or uplink), the DRX inactivity timer is started (or restarted).
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、最新のサブフレームnにおいて、端末装置1が、すべてのDRXアクティブタイム条件を評価している(サブフレームn-5を含む)サブフレームn-5までに送信されたスケジューリングリクエストおよび受信したグラント/アサインメント/DRXコマンドMAC CEを考慮しているアクティブタイム中でないとすれば、トリガータイプ0SRSは送信されない。 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 evaluates all DRX active time conditions in the latest subframe n for each subframe (including subframe n-5). ) Trigger type 0 SRS is not transmitted if it is not in the active time considering the scheduling request transmitted up to subframe n-5 and the received grant / assignment / DRX command MAC CE.
 DRXが設定されると、端末装置1は、各サブフレームに対して、CQIマスキング(cqi-Mask)が上位層によってセットアップされているとすれば、最新のサブフレームnにおいて、継続期間タイマーが、すべてのDRXアクティブタイム条件を評価している(サブフレームn-5を含む)サブフレームn-5までに受信したグラント/アサインメント/DRXコマンドMAC CEを考慮しているアクティブタイム中でないとすれば、PUCCHでCQI/PMI/RI/PTIは報告されない。それ以外には、最新のサブフレームnにおいて、端末装置1が、すべてのDRXアクティブタイム条件を評価している(サブフレームn-5を含む)サブフレームn-5までに受信したグラント/アサインメント/DRXコマンドMAC CEを考慮しているアクティブタイム中でないとすれば、PUCCHでCQI/PMI/RI/PTI(つまり、CSI)は報告されない。 When DRX is set, the terminal device 1 sets the duration timer in the latest subframe n, assuming that CQI masking (cqi-Mask) is set up by the upper layer for each subframe. Assume that all DRX active time conditions are being evaluated (including subframe n-5) and that it is not within the active time considering the grant / assignment / DRX command MAC CE received by subframe n-5 , CQI / PMI / RI / PTI is not reported on PUCCH. Otherwise, in the latest subframe n, the terminal apparatus 1 has evaluated all DRX active time conditions and has received the grant / assignment received by subframe n-5 (including subframe n-5). If it is not during the active time considering / DRX command MAC CE, CQI / PMI / RI / PTI (that is, CSI) is not reported in PUCCH.
 端末装置1は、PDCCHをモニタしているか否かによらず、端末装置1は、生じる可能性があるとすれば、HARQフィードバックを受信/送信し、トリガータイプ1SRSを送信してもよい。 The terminal apparatus 1 may receive / transmit HARQ feedback and transmit the trigger type 1 SRS if there is a possibility that the terminal apparatus 1 may occur regardless of whether or not the terminal apparatus 1 is monitoring the PDCCH.
 同じアクティブタイムは、すべての活性サービングセル(activated serving cell(s))に対して適用されてもよい。 The same active time may be applied to all activated serving cells (activated serving cell (s)).
 下りリンク空間多重の場合、HARQ RTTタイマーが起動中および同じトランスポートブロックの前の送信が最新のサブフレームから少なくともNサブフレーム前のサブフレームで受信される間に、トランスポートブロックが受信されたとすれば、端末装置1は、それを処理し、HARQ RTTタイマーを再スタートしてもよい。ここで、Nは、HARQ RTTタイマーまたはHARQ RTTタイマーにセットされた値に相当する。 In the case of downlink spatial multiplexing, if the transport block is received while the HARQ RTT timer is running and the previous transmission of the same transport block is received in the subframe at least N subframes before the latest subframe If so, the terminal device 1 may process it and restart the HARQ RTT timer. Here, N corresponds to a value set in the HARQ RTT timer or the HARQ RTT timer.
 プライマリーセルにおいて、DRXが設定され、且つ、セカンダリーセルに対するDRSの設定がセットされている場合、端末装置1は、DRSの設定に基づいてセットされる測定サブフレームとDRXの設定に基づいてセットされるPDCCHサブフレームが重複する場合、重複するサブフレームにおいて、停止の状態のセカンダリーセルにおいて、DRSの測定およびPDCCHのモニタリングを行なってもよい。DRXのアクティブタイムは、活性サービングセル、つまり、起動の状態のすべてのサービングセルに対して適用されるが、不活性サービングセル、つまり、停止の状態のサービングセルには適用されなかった。DRS設定がセットされる場合、そのサービングセル(またはセカンダリーセル)においては、不活性(off state, deactivation, dormant mode)であってもDRXのアクティブタイムが適用されてもよい。その際、DRS設定には、サブフレーム設定が含まれなくてもよい。つまり、基地局装置3は、DRXアクティブタイムに基づいて、DRSを送信してもよい。 When DRX is set in the primary cell and the DRS setting for the secondary cell is set, the terminal apparatus 1 is set based on the measurement subframe set based on the DRS setting and the DRX setting. When PDCCH subframes to be overlapped with each other, DRS measurement and PDCCH monitoring may be performed in the stopped secondary cell in the overlapping subframe. The active time of DRX applies to all active serving cells, i.e. all serving cells in the activated state, but not to inactive serving cells, i.e. serving cells in the deactivated state. When the DRS setting is set, the DRX active time may be applied to the serving cell (or secondary cell) even if it is inactive (off state, deactivation, and dormant mode). In this case, the DRS setting may not include the subframe setting. That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS based on the DRX active time.
 全ての活性サービングセルにおいて、DRXが設定された場合、DRSの設定がセットされた停止状態のスモールセルにおいては、端末装置1は、DRXによってアクティブタイムとなるサブフレームで、DRSを測定してもよい。 When DRX is set in all active serving cells, in a small cell in a stopped state in which DRS setting is set, the terminal apparatus 1 may measure DRS in a subframe that becomes an active time by DRX. .
 DRX不活性タイマーまたは継続時間タイマーが満了した場合には、端末装置1は、満了後のサブフレームに対して、DRS測定サブフレームに基づいて測定可能であっても、DRSの測定は行なわなくてもよい。つまり、端末装置1は、DRX不活性タイマーまたは継続時間タイマーが満了した場合には、以降のDRS測定サブフレームで、DRSが送信されることを期待しない。 When the DRX inactivity timer or the duration timer expires, the terminal apparatus 1 does not perform DRS measurement even if measurement is possible based on the DRS measurement subframe with respect to the subframe after expiration. Also good. That is, when the DRX inactivity timer or the duration timer expires, the terminal device 1 does not expect the DRS to be transmitted in the subsequent DRS measurement subframe.
 DRXが設定された端末装置1において、(スモールセルとして)停止の状態のセカンダリーセルに対するDRS設定が上位層シグナリングを用いて通知された(提供された、与えられた)場合、端末装置1は、DRXのアクティブタイムと重複するセカンダリーセルのDRS送信サブフレームにおいて、DRSのRRM(RSRP/RSRQ/RSSI)測定を行なってもよい。 In the terminal device 1 in which DRX is configured, when the DRS configuration for the secondary cell in a stopped state (as a small cell) is notified (provided or given) using higher layer signaling, the terminal device 1 In the DRS transmission subframe of the secondary cell that overlaps with the DRX active time, DRS RRM (RSRP / RSRQ / RSSI) measurement may be performed.
 DRXの設定(drx-Config)は、MCGとSCGまたはプライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルまたはMeNBとSeNBで個別にセットされてもよい。SCGにおけるDRXは、プライマリーセカンダリーセルの起動/停止の状態が示されてもよい。SCGに対して、DRXが設定された場合、DRXサブフレームで、DRSとPDCCHが送信されてもよい。 DRX configuration (drx-Config) may be individually set in MCG and SCG, primary cell and primary secondary cell, or MeNB and SeNB. DRX in the SCG may indicate a start / stop state of the primary secondary cell. When DRX is set for SCG, DRS and PDCCH may be transmitted in the DRX subframe.
 ここでは、DRXの設定としているが、DRXの設定にセットされる種々のパラメータは、DTX(Discontinuous Transmission)の設定としてセットされてもよい。 Here, the DRX setting is used, but various parameters set in the DRX setting may be set as a DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) setting.
 次に、無線リンクモニタリングについて説明する。無線リンクモニタリングとは、上位層に同期内(in-sync)か同期外れ(out-of-sync)かを示すために、端末装置1によって、プライマリーセルの下りリンク無線リンク品質がモニタされる。 Next, radio link monitoring will be described. In the radio link monitoring, the downlink radio link quality of the primary cell is monitored by the terminal device 1 in order to indicate whether the upper layer is in-sync or out-of-sync.
 ノンDRXオペレーションにおいて、端末装置1の物理層は、無線フレーム(無線フレームを構成するサブフレーム数)毎に、無線リンクモニタリングに関連するテストに基づいて定義された閾値(Qin, Qout)に対して、過去の(前までの)時間周期(previous time period)にわたって評価された、無線リンク品質を評価する。 In the non-DRX operation, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 has a threshold (Q in , Q out ) defined based on a test related to radio link monitoring for each radio frame (number of subframes constituting the radio frame). On the other hand, it evaluates the radio link quality, evaluated over the past (previous) time period.
 DRXオペレーションにおいて、端末装置1の物理層は、少なくとも1つのDRX周期(DRX周期を構成するサブフレーム数)毎に、無線リンクモニタリングに関連するテストに基づいて定義された閾値(Qin, Qout)に対して、過去の(前までの)時間周期(previous time period)にわたって評価された、無線リンク品質を評価する。 In the DRX operation, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 has a threshold value (Q in , Q out) defined based on a test related to radio link monitoring for each DRX cycle (the number of subframes constituting the DRX cycle). ) For the radio link quality evaluated over the past (previous) time period.
 上位層シグナリングが、無線リンクモニタリングを制限するために、あるサブフレームを指示するとすれば、無線リンク品質は、上位層シグナリングによって指示されたサブフレーム以外のサブフレームではモニタされない。つまり、端末装置1は、上位層シグナリングによって、無線リンクモニタリングを行なうサブフレームが制限された場合、制限されたサブフレームにおいてのみ、無線リンクモニタリングを行なう。 If higher layer signaling indicates a subframe to limit radio link monitoring, the radio link quality is not monitored in subframes other than the subframe indicated by higher layer signaling. That is, when the subframe in which radio link monitoring is performed is restricted by higher layer signaling, terminal apparatus 1 performs radio link monitoring only in the restricted subframe.
 端末装置1の物理層は、無線リンク品質が評価される無線フレームにおいて、無線リンク品質が閾値Qoutよりも悪い場合、上位層に同期外れであることを示す。また、無線リンク品質が閾値Qinよりも良い場合、端末装置1の物理層は無線リンク品質が評価される無線フレームにおいて、上位層に同期内であることを示す。 When the radio link quality is worse than the threshold value Qout in the radio frame in which the radio link quality is evaluated, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 indicates that it is out of synchronization with the upper layer. Further, when the radio link quality is better than the threshold value Q in , it indicates that the physical layer of the terminal device 1 is in synchronization with the upper layer in the radio frame in which the radio link quality is evaluated.
 デュアルコネクティビティをサポートしている端末装置1の物理層は、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルそれぞれに対して、無線リンクモニタリングを行なってもよい。また、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルそれぞれに対して、無線リンク品質に係る閾値が定義されてもよい。 The physical layer of the terminal device 1 that supports dual connectivity may perform radio link monitoring for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. Further, a threshold value related to radio link quality may be defined for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 デュアルコネクティビティをサポートしている端末装置1の物理層は、無線リンク品質(同期外れ、同期内)をプライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルとで、個別に評価してもよい。 The physical layer of the terminal device 1 that supports dual connectivity may individually evaluate the radio link quality (out of synchronization, within synchronization) for the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 デュアルコネクティビティをサポートしている端末装置1の物理層は、無線リンク品質を評価する時に、同期外れが所定の回数続いた場合、保護タイマーを起動させる。この保護タイマーが満了した場合、端末装置1の物理層は、上位層に、そのセルで同期外れが発生している(言い換えると、物理層問題が検出された)ことを通知する。端末装置1の上位層は、物理層問題が検出されたセルがプライマリーセルの場合には、無線リンク障害(RLF: Radio Link Failure)が検出されたと、認識する。その際、端末装置1の上位層は、基地局装置3に、プライマリーセルでRLFが検出されたことを通知してもよい。なお、端末装置1の上位層は、物理層問題が検出されたセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルの場合には、RLFと認識しなくてもよい。また、端末装置1の上位層は、物理層問題が検出されたセルがプライマリーセカンダリーセルの場合、プライマリーセルと同様の処理を行なってもよい。 The physical layer of the terminal device 1 supporting dual connectivity activates a protection timer when the synchronization loss continues for a predetermined number of times when evaluating the radio link quality. When this protection timer expires, the physical layer of the terminal device 1 notifies the upper layer that a loss of synchronization has occurred in the cell (in other words, a physical layer problem has been detected). When the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary cell, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 recognizes that a radio link failure (RLF: “Radio” Link “Failure”) has been detected. At that time, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may notify the base station device 3 that the RLF has been detected in the primary cell. Note that the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may not recognize the RLF when the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary secondary cell. Moreover, when the cell in which the physical layer problem is detected is a primary secondary cell, the upper layer of the terminal device 1 may perform the same process as that of the primary cell.
 次に、セミパーシステントスケジューリング(SPS)について説明する。RRC層(上位層シグナリング、上位層)によって、セミパーシステントスケジューリングが有効であると設定された場合、端末装置1に、以下の情報が提供される。その情報は、セミパーシステントスケジューリングC-RNTI、セミパーシステントスケジューリングが上りリンクに対して、有効である場合、上りリンクセミパーシステントスケジューリングインターバル(semiPersistSchedIntervalUL)とインプリシットにリリースする前の空送信の数(implicitReleaseAfter)、TDDに対してのみ、2つのインターバル設定(twoIntervalsConfig)が上りリンクに対して有効か否か、セミパーシステントスケジューリングが下りリンクに対して有効である場合、下りリンクセミパーシステントスケジューリングインターバル(semiPersistSchedIntervalDL)とセミパーシステントスケジューリングに対して設定されたHARQプロセスの数(numberOfConfSPS-Processes)である。 Next, semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) will be described. When semi-persistent scheduling is set to be effective by the RRC layer (upper layer signaling, upper layer), the following information is provided to the terminal device 1. The information includes the semi-persistent scheduling C-RNTI, if semi-persistent scheduling is enabled for the uplink, the uplink semi-persistent scheduling interval (semiPersistSchedIntervalUL) and the number of empty transmissions before the implicit release. (ImplicitReleaseAfter), only for TDD, whether two interval settings (twoIntervalsConfig) are valid for the uplink, or if the semi-persistent scheduling is valid for the downlink, the downlink semi-persistent scheduling interval (SemiPersistSchedIntervalDL) and the number of HARQ processes (numberOfConfSPS-Processes) set for semi-persistent scheduling.
 上りリンクもしくは下りリンクに対するセミパーシステントスケジューリングがRRC層(上位層シグナリング、上位層)によって無効と設定された場合、対応する設定されたグラントもしくは設定されたアサインメントは無視される。 When the semi-persistent scheduling for uplink or downlink is set to invalid by the RRC layer (upper layer signaling, upper layer), the corresponding set grant or set assignment is ignored.
 セミパーシステントスケジューリングは、プライマリーセルにだけサポートされる。 Semi-persistent scheduling is supported only for the primary cell.
 セミパーシステントスケジューリングは、RNサブフレーム設定を伴うコンビネーションのE-UTRANのRN通信に対してサポートされない。 Semi-persistent scheduling is not supported for RN communication in combination E-UTRAN with RN subframe configuration.
 セミパーシステント下りリンクアサインメントが設定された後で、端末装置1は、ある条件を満たすシステムフレーム番号とサブフレームにおいて、第Nのアサインメントが生じると、連続しているとみなす。ここで、ある条件とは、端末装置1に設定された下りリンクアサインメントが初期化(または再初期化)された時のシステムフレーム番号(SFNstart_time)とサブフレーム(subframestart_time)に基づいて決定されてもよい。 After the semi-persistent downlink assignment is set, the terminal device 1 considers that the Nth assignment occurs in the system frame number and the subframe that satisfy a certain condition and is continuous. Here, the certain condition is determined based on the system frame number (SFN start_time ) and the subframe (subframe start_time ) when the downlink assignment set in the terminal device 1 is initialized (or reinitialized). May be.
 セミパーシステント上りリンクグラントが設定された後で、端末装置1は、2つのインターバル設定が、上位層で、有効であると設定されていれば、あるテーブルに基づくサブフレームオフセット(Subframe_Offset)をセットし、それ以外の場合、サブフレームオフセットを0にセットする。 After the semi-persistent uplink grant is set, the terminal apparatus 1 sets a subframe offset (Subframe_Offset) based on a certain table if the two interval settings are set to be valid in the upper layer. Otherwise, the subframe offset is set to zero.
 セミパーシステント上りリンクグラントが設定された後で、端末装置1は、ある条件を満たすシステムフレーム番号とサブフレームにおいて、第Nのグラントが生じると、連続しているとみなす。ここで、ある条件とは、ここで、ある条件とは、端末装置1に設定された上りリンクグラントが初期化(または再初期化)された時のシステムフレーム番号(SFNstart_time)とサブフレーム(subframestart_time)に基づいて決定されてもよい。 After the semi-persistent uplink grant is set, the terminal device 1 considers that the Nth grant occurs in the system frame number and the subframe that satisfy a certain condition and is continuous. Here, a certain condition means that a certain condition is a system frame number (SFN start_time ) and a subframe (when the uplink grant set in the terminal device 1 is initialized (or reinitialized). subframe start_time ).
 端末装置1は、ゼロMAC SDU(Service Data Unit)を含む連続するMAC PDU(Protocol Data Unit)のインプリシットにリリースする前の空送信の数が、エンティティを多重、構成することによって与えられた直後に、設定された上りリンクグラントをクリアする。 Immediately after the number of empty transmissions before the terminal device 1 is released to the consecutive MAC PDU (Protocol Data Unit) including zero MAC SDU (Service Data Unit) is given by multiplexing and configuring the entity And clear the configured uplink grant.
 端末装置1にデュアルコネクティビティを行なう機能がサポートされている場合、SPSはプライマリーセルだけでなく、プライマリーセカンダリーセルで行なわれてもよい。つまり、SPS設定は、プライマリーセルだけでなく、プライマリーセカンダリーセルに対してもセットされてもよい。 When the terminal device 1 supports the function of performing dual connectivity, the SPS may be performed not only in the primary cell but also in the primary secondary cell. That is, the SPS setting may be set not only for the primary cell but also for the primary secondary cell.
 デュアルコネクティビティを行なう機能をサポートしている端末装置1において、1つのSPS設定しかセットされていない場合には、プライマリーセルに対してだけSPSが適用されてもよい。 In the terminal device 1 that supports the function of performing dual connectivity, when only one SPS setting is set, the SPS may be applied only to the primary cell.
 デュアルコネクティビティを行なう機能をサポートしている端末装置1において、1つのSPS設定しかセットされていない場合には、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルにおいて、同じ設定が適用されてもよい。 When only one SPS setting is set in the terminal device 1 that supports the function of performing dual connectivity, the same setting may be applied in the primary cell and the primary secondary cell.
 デュアルコネクティビティを行なう機能をサポートしている端末装置1において、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルそれぞれに対して、下りリンクSPS設定および/または上りリンクSPS設定は、個別にセットされてもよい。つまり、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルに対して、下りリンクSPS設定および/または上りリンクSPS設定が共通であってもよいし、それぞれ個別に設定されてもよい。SPSを下りリンクおよび/または上りリンクで、プライマリーセルとプライマリーセカンダリーセルで個別に行なうか否かは、端末装置1から送信される機能情報に基づいて決定されてもよい。 In the terminal device 1 supporting the function of performing dual connectivity, the downlink SPS setting and / or the uplink SPS setting may be individually set for each of the primary cell and the primary secondary cell. That is, the downlink SPS setting and / or the uplink SPS setting may be common to the primary cell and the primary secondary cell, or may be set individually. Whether or not to perform SPS in the downlink and / or uplink separately in the primary cell and the primary secondary cell may be determined based on the function information transmitted from the terminal device 1.
 以下では、プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されるPDCCHおよびEPDCCHについて説明する。 Hereinafter, PDCCH and EPDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell will be described.
 プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されるPDCCHは、複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータおよび/または予め規定されたパラメータを用いて、スクランブルされてもよい。なお、複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータが設定されない場合は、物理セル識別子を用いてスクランブルされる。 The PDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell may be scrambled using parameters common to a plurality of terminal apparatuses and / or parameters defined in advance. In addition, when a common parameter is not set by a plurality of terminal apparatuses, it is scrambled using a physical cell identifier.
 プライマリーセカンダリーセルで送信されるPDCCHは、複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータおよび/または予め規定されたパラメータに基づいてREG単位でサイクリックシフトされてもよい。なお、複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータが設定されない場合は、物理セル識別子の値に基づいてサイクリックシフトされる。 The PDCCH transmitted in the primary / secondary cell may be cyclically shifted in units of REGs based on parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices and / or parameters defined in advance. In addition, when a common parameter is not set in a plurality of terminal apparatuses, cyclic shift is performed based on the value of the physical cell identifier.
 プライマリーセカンダリーセルには、USSと、USSとは異なるサーチスペースが配置される。USSとは異なるサーチスペースは、複数の端末装置で共通の領域をモニタするサーチスペースである。プライマリーセルに配置されるCSSは第1のCSSとも呼称され、プライマリーセカンダリーセルに配置されるUSSとは異なるサーチスペースは第2のCSSとも呼称される。 In the primary secondary cell, a search space different from USS and USS is arranged. A search space different from USS is a search space for monitoring a common area in a plurality of terminal devices. The CSS arranged in the primary cell is also called a first CSS, and the search space different from the USS arranged in the primary secondary cell is also called a second CSS.
 第2のCSSは、複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータおよび/または予め規定されたパラメータを用いて設定されるサーチスペースである。複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータは、上位層から通知される。複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータの一例として、基地局装置3(セル、送信ポイント)に固有のパラメータが用いられる。例えば、送信ポイント固有のパラメータとして、仮想セル識別子、TPIDなどが用いられる。複数の端末装置で共通のパラメータの一例として、端末装置個別に設定可能なパラメータであるが複数の端末で共通の値が設定されるパラメータである。例えば、複数の端末装置で共通の値が設定されるパラメータとして、RNTIなどが用いられる。 The second CSS is a search space set by using parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices and / or parameters defined in advance. Parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices are notified from an upper layer. As an example of parameters common to a plurality of terminal devices, parameters unique to the base station device 3 (cell, transmission point) are used. For example, a virtual cell identifier, TPID, or the like is used as a parameter specific to the transmission point. As an example of a parameter that is common to a plurality of terminal devices, a parameter that can be set individually for each terminal device, but a parameter that is set to a common value for a plurality of terminals. For example, RNTI or the like is used as a parameter for which a common value is set in a plurality of terminal devices.
 第2のCSSに、PDCCHは配置されてもよい。この場合、第2のCSSは、複数の端末で共通のパラメータおよび/または予め規定されたパラメータを用いて、サーチスペースが開始されるCCEが決定される。具体的には、図14の式(1)で用いられるYの初期値に、複数の端末で共通のRNTI(例えば、UE-group-RNTI、CSS-RNTI)が設定される。また、第2のCSSのサーチスペースが開始されるCCEは、上位層パラメータによって端末共通に指定されてもよい。具体的には、図14の式(1)で用いられるYは、常に固定の値で、かつ、上位層パラメータ(例えば、CCEインデックスを指定するパラメータ)がセットされる。また、Yは常に0がセットされてもよい。 The PDCCH may be arranged in the second CSS. In this case, in the second CSS, a CCE at which a search space is started is determined using a parameter common to a plurality of terminals and / or a parameter defined in advance. Specifically, a common RNTI (eg, UE-group-RNTI, CSS-RNTI) is set for a plurality of terminals as the initial value of Y k used in equation (1) in FIG. Also, the CCE at which the second CSS search space is started may be designated in common by the higher layer parameters. Specifically, Y k used in equation (1) in FIG. 14 is always a fixed value, and an upper layer parameter (for example, a parameter for designating a CCE index) is set. Yk may always be set to 0.
 PDCCHに配置される第2のCSSのアグリゲーションレベルは、4と8をサポートする。また、アグリゲーションレベル4では4つのPDCCH候補、アグリゲーションレベル8では2つのPDCCH候補が定義される。なお、アグリゲーションレベル1、2、16、32をサポートしてもよい。この場合、PDCCH候補数を制限することで第2のCSSでブラインドデコーディング数を増加させない。例えば、第2のCSSのアグリゲーションレベルで2、4、8がサポートされる場合、各アグリゲーションレベルで2つのPDCCH候補が定義される。 The aggregation level of the second CSS arranged in the PDCCH supports 4 and 8. Also, at aggregation level 4, four PDCCH candidates are defined, and at aggregation level 8, two PDCCH candidates are defined. Note that aggregation levels 1, 2, 16, and 32 may be supported. In this case, the blind decoding number is not increased in the second CSS by limiting the number of PDCCH candidates. For example, when 2, 4, and 8 are supported in the second CSS aggregation level, two PDCCH candidates are defined in each aggregation level.
 第2のCSSに、EPDCCHは配置されてもよい。この場合、第2のCSSは、複数の端末で共通のパラメータおよび/または予め規定されたパラメータを用いて、サーチスペースが開始されるECCEが決定される。具体的には、図14の式(2)で用いられるYp,kの初期値に、複数の端末で共通のRNTI(例えば、UE-group-RNTI、CSS-RNTI)が設定される。また、第2のCSSのサーチスペースが開始されるECCEは、上位層パラメータによって端末共通に指定されてもよい。具体的には、図14の式(2)で用いられるYp,kは、常に固定の値で、かつ、上位層パラメータ(例えば、ECCEインデックスを指定するパラメータ)がセットされる。また、Yp,kは常に0がセットされてもよい。 The EPDCCH may be arranged in the second CSS. In this case, in the second CSS, the ECCE at which the search space is started is determined using a parameter common to a plurality of terminals and / or a parameter defined in advance. Specifically, an RNTI (for example, UE-group-RNTI, CSS-RNTI) common to a plurality of terminals is set as the initial value of Y p, k used in Equation (2) in FIG. In addition, the ECCE at which the second CSS search space is started may be designated in common by the upper layer parameters. Specifically, Y p, k used in equation (2) in FIG. 14 is always a fixed value, and an upper layer parameter (for example, a parameter for specifying an ECCE index) is set. Yp , k may always be set to 0.
 第2のCSSにEPDCCHが配置される場合、第2のCSSに配置されるEPDCCHセットが設定されてもよい。例えば、EPDCCHセット0がUSSに配置され、EPDCCHセット1が第2のCSSに配置されてもよい。また、1つのEPDCCHセット内がUSSと第2のCSSに配置されてもよい。例えば、EPDCCHセット0がUSSと第2のCSSに配置されてもよい。 When EPDCCH is arranged in the second CSS, an EPDCCH set arranged in the second CSS may be set. For example, EPDCCH set 0 may be arranged in the USS, and EPDCCH set 1 may be arranged in the second CSS. Moreover, the inside of one EPDCCH set may be arrange | positioned at USS and 2nd CSS. For example, EPDCCH set 0 may be arranged in the USS and the second CSS.
 EPDCCHが配置される第2のCSSのアグリゲーションレベルは、4と8をサポートする。また、アグリゲーションレベル4では4つのEPDCCH候補、アグリゲーションレベル8では2つのEPDCCH候補が定義される。なお、アグリゲーションレベル1、2、16、32をサポートしてもよい。この場合、PDCCH候補数を制限することで第2のCSSでブラインドデコーディング数を増加させない。例えば、第2のCSSのアグリゲーションレベルで2、4、8がサポートされる場合、各アグリゲーションレベルで2つのPDCCH候補が定義される。 The aggregation level of the second CSS in which the EPDCCH is arranged supports 4 and 8. In addition, four EPDCCH candidates are defined in aggregation level 4, and two EPDCCH candidates are defined in aggregation level 8. Note that aggregation levels 1, 2, 16, and 32 may be supported. In this case, the blind decoding number is not increased in the second CSS by limiting the number of PDCCH candidates. For example, when 2, 4, and 8 are supported in the second CSS aggregation level, two PDCCH candidates are defined in each aggregation level.
 第2のCSSでのPDCCHモニタリングに用いられるRNTIの種類の一例について説明する。 An example of the type of RNTI used for PDCCH monitoring in the second CSS will be described.
 第2のCSSには、少なくともランダムアクセス応答の通知を行うPDCCH、特定の端末装置1に対しTPCコマンドを指示するPDCCH、あるいはTDD UL/DL設定の通知を行うPDCCHを配置することができる。また、MeNBとSeNB間のバックホールの遅延が大きい場合、RRC再設定時であってもSeNBから送信を行う必要がある。すなわち、端末装置1は、RA-RNTI、TPC-PUCCH-RNTI、TPC-PUSCH-RNTI、TDD-ModeA-RNTI、C-RNTI、SPS C-RNTI、Temporary C-RNTIを用いて、第2のCSSに配置されるPDCCHをモニタする。 In the second CSS, at least a PDCCH for notifying a random access response, a PDCCH for instructing a TPC command to a specific terminal device 1, or a PDCCH for notifying a TDD UL / DL setting can be arranged. Moreover, when the delay of the backhaul between MeNB and SeNB is large, it is necessary to transmit from SeNB even at the time of RRC reset. That is, the terminal device 1 uses the second CSS using RA-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TDD-ModeA-RNTI, C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, and Temporary C-RNTI. The PDCCH arranged in the
 一方で、第2のCSSには、システム情報あるいはページングに関する情報が割り当てられたPDCCHを配置する必要がない。また、プライマリーセカンダリーセルはRRC接続モードで用いられるため、RRC再設定時に必要な下位の送信方式による送信のための下りリンク/上りリンクグラントが割り当てられたPDCCHを配置する必要がない。すなわち、端末装置1は、SI-RNTI、P-RNTIを用いて、第2のCSSに配置されるPDCCHをモニタしなくてもよい。 On the other hand, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which system information or information related to paging is allocated in the second CSS. Further, since the primary / secondary cell is used in the RRC connection mode, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which a downlink / uplink grant for transmission by a lower transmission scheme required at the time of RRC reconfiguration is allocated. That is, the terminal device 1 may not monitor the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using SI-RNTI and P-RNTI.
 第2のCSSでのPDCCHモニタリングに用いられるRNTIの種類の一例について説明する。 An example of the type of RNTI used for PDCCH monitoring in the second CSS will be described.
 第2のCSSには、少なくともランダムアクセス応答の通知を行なうPDCCH、特定の端末装置1に対しTPCコマンドを指示するPDCCH、あるいはTDD UL/DL設定の通知を行うPDCCHを配置することができる。すなわち、端末装置1は、少なくともRA-RNTI、TPC-PUCCH-RNTI、TPC-PUSCH-RNTI、TDD-ModeA-RNTIを用いて、第2のCSSに配置されるPDCCHをモニタする。 In the second CSS, at least a PDCCH for notifying a random access response, a PDCCH for instructing a TPC command to a specific terminal device 1, or a PDCCH for notifying a TDD UL / DL setting can be arranged. That is, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using at least RA-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, and TDD-ModeA-RNTI.
 一方で、第2のCSSには、システム情報あるいはページングに関する情報が割り当てられたPDCCHを配置する必要がない。また、プライマリーセカンダリーセルはRRC接続モードで用いられるため、RRC再設定時に必要な下位の送信方式による送信のための下りリンク/上りリンクグラントが割り当てられたPDCCHを配置する必要がない。すなわち、端末装置1は、SI-RNTI、P-RNTI、C-RNTI、SPS C-RNTI、Temporary C-RNTIを用いて、第2のCSSに配置されるPDCCHをモニタしなくてもよい。 On the other hand, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which system information or information related to paging is allocated in the second CSS. Further, since the primary / secondary cell is used in the RRC connection mode, it is not necessary to arrange a PDCCH to which a downlink / uplink grant for transmission by a lower transmission scheme required at the time of RRC reconfiguration is allocated. That is, the terminal device 1 may not monitor the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS by using SI-RNTI, P-RNTI, C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, and Temporary C-RNTI.
 なお、第2のCSSに、セルの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるPDCCHを配置してもよい。すなわち、端末装置1は、スモールセルオン/オフに関連するRNTI(SCE-RNTI)を用いて、第2のCSSに配置されるPDCCHをモニタする。 In addition, you may arrange | position PDCCH containing the information which instruct | indicates the state of starting / stopping of a cell in 2nd CSS. That is, the terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH arranged in the second CSS using RNTI (SCE-RNTI) related to small cell on / off.
 第2のCSSにより、端末装置1は、プライマリーセカンダリーセルにおいて、ブラインドデコーディング数が増加する。具体的には、セカンダリーセルではUSSのみが配置されるに対し、プライマリーセカンダリーセルではUSSと第2のCSSの両方が配置される。第2のCSSのブラインドデコーディング数が第1のCSSのブラインドデコーディング数と同等とすれば、12回のブラインドデコーディング数の増加となり、端末装置1の負担が増大する。 Due to the second CSS, the terminal device 1 increases the number of blind decoding in the primary secondary cell. Specifically, only the USS is arranged in the secondary cell, whereas both the USS and the second CSS are arranged in the primary secondary cell. If the blind decoding number of the second CSS is equal to the blind decoding number of the first CSS, the number of blind decoding increases 12 times, and the burden on the terminal device 1 increases.
 第2のCSSにおけるブラインドデコーディング数の削減の一例を説明する。 An example of reduction in the number of blind decoding in the second CSS will be described.
 C-RNTI、SPS C-RNTI、Temporary C-RNTIを用いて、第2のCSSに配置されるPDCCHをモニタしない場合、第2のCSSにDCIフォーマット0/1Aを配置させないことで、第2のCSSにおけるブラインドデコーディング数を削減させることができる。 If the PDCCH placed in the second CSS is not monitored using C-RNTI, SPS C-RNTI, or Temporary C-RNTI, the second CSS is not placed in the DCI format 0 / 1A. The number of blind decoding in CSS can be reduced.
 このとき、DCIフォーマット3/3AはDCIフォーマット1Cのペイロードサイズに合わせてパディングされる。もしくは、TPCコマンドを送信する新しいDCIフォーマット(DCIフォーマット3B)が設定される。 At this time, the DCI format 3 / 3A is padded according to the payload size of the DCI format 1C. Alternatively, a new DCI format (DCI format 3B) for transmitting a TPC command is set.
 DCIフォーマット3Bは、1ビットの電力調整によるPUCCHおよびPUSCHに対するTPCコマンドの送信のために用いられる。端末装置1は、自局に割り当てられたインデックス(TPC-Index)に対応するビット情報を検出することによって、PUSCHまたはPUCCHに対応する送信電力制御コマンドの値を検出することができる。また、DCIフォーマット3Bは、スクランブルされるRNTIの種類に応じて、PUSCHに対する送信電力制御コマンドを示すかPUCCHに対する送信電力制御コマンドを示すかが判別される。DCIフォーマット3Bは、DCIフォーマット1Cのペイロードサイズに合わせてパディングされる。 DCI format 3B is used for transmission of TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH by 1-bit power adjustment. The terminal device 1 can detect the value of the transmission power control command corresponding to the PUSCH or the PUCCH by detecting the bit information corresponding to the index (TPC-Index) assigned to the own station. Also, in the DCI format 3B, it is determined whether a transmission power control command for PUSCH or a transmission power control command for PUCCH is indicated according to the type of scrambled RNTI. The DCI format 3B is padded according to the payload size of the DCI format 1C.
 これにより、第2のCSSには、DCIフォーマット1Cと同じペイロードサイズの制御情報のみが配置されるため、ブラインドデコーディング数を削減することができる。具体的には、第2のCSSにおいて、アグリゲーション4において6つのPDCCH候補と1種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、また、アグリゲーション8において2つのPDCCH候補と1種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。すなわち、端末装置1は、第2のCSSにおいて6回のデコードを試みる。これにより、CSSにおけるブラインドデコーディング数を半減させることができる。 Thereby, since only the control information having the same payload size as that of the DCI format 1C is arranged in the second CSS, the number of blind decoding can be reduced. Specifically, in the second CSS, an attempt is made to decode six PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format in aggregation 4, and in aggregation 8 two PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format. Try to decode. That is, the terminal device 1 tries 6 times of decoding in the second CSS. Thereby, the number of blind decoding in CSS can be halved.
 第2のCSSにおけるブラインドデコーディング数の削減の一例を説明する。 An example of reduction in the number of blind decoding in the second CSS will be described.
 第2のCSSにおいて、DCIフォーマット1CはDCIフォーマット0と同じペイロードサイズになるまでパディングビットを挿入する。これにより、第2のCSSには、DCIフォーマット0と同じペイロードサイズの制御情報のみが配置されるため、ブラインドデコーディング数を削減することができる。具体的には、第2のCSSにおいて、アグリゲーション4において6つのPDCCH候補と1種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試み、また、アグリゲーション8において2つのPDCCH候補と1種類のビットサイズのDCIフォーマットのデコードを試みる。すなわち、端末装置1は、第2のCSSにおいて6回のデコードを試みる。これにより、CSSにおけるブラインドデコーディング数を半減させることができる。 In the second CSS, padding bits are inserted until DCI format 1C has the same payload size as DCI format 0. Thereby, since only the control information having the same payload size as that of the DCI format 0 is arranged in the second CSS, the number of blind decoding can be reduced. Specifically, in the second CSS, an attempt is made to decode six PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format in aggregation 4, and in aggregation 8 two PDCCH candidates and one type of bit-size DCI format. Try to decode. That is, the terminal device 1 tries 6 times of decoding in the second CSS. Thereby, the number of blind decoding in CSS can be halved.
 ブラインドデコーディング数の増加の観点から、全ての端末装置1が第2のCSSのモニタリングをサポートする必要はない。そこで、基地局装置3に、端末装置1が第2のCSSをモニタすることが可能か否かの能力を示す情報(ケイパビリティ)が通知されてもよい。 From the viewpoint of increasing the number of blind decoding, it is not necessary for all the terminal devices 1 to support the monitoring of the second CSS. Therefore, the base station device 3 may be notified of information (capability) indicating the capability of whether or not the terminal device 1 can monitor the second CSS.
 処理能力の高い端末装置1は、基地局装置3に、第2のCSSのモニタリングが可能であることを示す情報を通知する。一方で、処理能力の低い端末装置1は、基地局装置3に、第2のCSSのモニタリングが不可能であることを示す情報を通知する。基地局装置3は、各端末装置1からの第2のCSSをモニタすることが可能か否かの能力を示す情報を取得し、第2のCSSのモニタリングが可能である端末装置1のみに第2のCSSの設定を行なう。ここで、基地局装置3は、第2のCSSのモニタリングが可能である端末装置1をUEグループとして設定してもよい。 The terminal device 1 having a high processing capability notifies the base station device 3 of information indicating that the second CSS can be monitored. On the other hand, the terminal device 1 with a low processing capability notifies the base station device 3 of information indicating that the second CSS cannot be monitored. The base station device 3 obtains information indicating the capability of monitoring the second CSS from each terminal device 1, and only the terminal device 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS can receive the second CSS. 2 CSS is set. Here, the base station apparatus 3 may set the terminal apparatus 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS as a UE group.
 第2のCSSのモニタリングが可能である端末装置1に対しては、基地局装置3は第2のCSSにPDCCHを配置して、ランダムアクセス応答の通知やTDD UL/DL設定の通知などを行なう。 For the terminal device 1 capable of monitoring the second CSS, the base station device 3 arranges the PDCCH in the second CSS and performs notification of a random access response, notification of TDD UL / DL setting, and the like. .
 第2のCSSのモニタリングが不可能である端末装置1に対しては、基地局装置3はUSSにPDCCHを配置して、ランダムアクセス応答の通知やTDD UL/DL設定の通知などを行う。この際、ブラインドデコーディング数の観点から、ランダムアクセス応答の通知はDCIフォーマット1Aが用いられ、またTDD UL/DL設定の通知で用いられるDCIフォーマット1CはDCIフォーマット0と同じペイロードサイズまでパディングされる。 For the terminal device 1 that cannot monitor the second CSS, the base station device 3 arranges the PDCCH in the USS and performs notification of a random access response, notification of TDD UL / DL setting, and the like. At this time, from the viewpoint of the number of blind decoding, DCI format 1A is used for notification of random access response, and DCI format 1C used for notification of TDD UL / DL setting is padded to the same payload size as DCI format 0. .
 これにより、第2のCSSのモニタリングが不可能である処理能力の低い端末装置1に対しても、ランダムアクセス応答の通知やTDD UL/DL設定の通知などを行なうことが可能となる。 Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the random access response, the notification of the TDD UL / DL setting, and the like even to the terminal device 1 having a low processing capability for which the second CSS cannot be monitored.
 なお、第2のCSSをモニタすることが可能か否かの能力を示す情報は、デュアルコネクティビティモードで運用が可能か否かを示す情報に関連付けて通知されてもよい。すなわち、デュアルコネクティビティモードで運用が可能であれば、第2のCSSをモニタすることが可能であってもよい。 Note that the information indicating whether or not it is possible to monitor the second CSS may be notified in association with information indicating whether or not the operation can be performed in the dual connectivity mode. That is, the second CSS may be able to be monitored as long as the operation is possible in the dual connectivity mode.
 スモールセルのセカンダリーセルに対する起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が、DCIフォーマット(DCIフォーマットを伴うPDCCH/EPDCCH)を用いて、送信される場合の端末装置1および基地局装置3の処理について説明する。 The processing of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 when information indicating the activation / deactivation state for the secondary cell of the small cell is transmitted using the DCI format (PDCCH / EPDCCH with the DCI format) will be described. .
 あるDCIフォーマットに、複数のセル(スモールセル、セカンダリーセル、サービングセル)のそれぞれに対する起動/停止の状態を指示する1ビットがセットされてもよい。例えば、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットが15ビットで構成される場合、15セル分の起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれることを意味してもよい。つまり、1ビットで起動/停止の状態が示されてもよい。また、その1ビットで起動の状態が示される時、同時にその1ビットに対応するセルに対するCSIリクエストとして認識されてもよい。その1ビットで起動の状態が示される時、その1ビットに対応するCSIを、受信してから所定のサブフレーム後の最初の上りリンクサブフレームで送信する。また、DCIフォーマットを構成するビットの位置と、セルインデックス(例えば、サービングセルインデックス、スモールセルインデックス、オン/オフセルインデックスなど)が予め対応付けられてもよい。 In a certain DCI format, 1 bit that indicates the activation / deactivation state of each of a plurality of cells (small cell, secondary cell, serving cell) may be set. For example, when the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state is composed of 15 bits, it may mean that the information indicating the start / stop state for 15 cells is included. That is, the start / stop state may be indicated by one bit. When the activation state is indicated by the 1 bit, it may be recognized as a CSI request for the cell corresponding to the 1 bit at the same time. When the activation status is indicated by the 1 bit, the CSI corresponding to the 1 bit is transmitted in the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe is received. Moreover, the position of the bit which comprises a DCI format, and a cell index (For example, a serving cell index, a small cell index, an on / off cell index, etc.) may be matched beforehand.
 なお、DCIフォーマットでは起動の状態のみを指示してもよい。例えば、1ビットにおける‘1’は起動を示し、‘0’は前の状態と同状態であること示す。この場合、デアクティベーションタイマーなどの停止の状態を指示する他の方法と併用されることが好ましい。 In the DCI format, only the activation state may be indicated. For example, “1” in one bit indicates activation, and “0” indicates the same state as the previous state. In this case, it is preferably used in combination with another method for instructing the stop state such as a deactivation timer.
 なお、DCIフォーマットでは停止の状態のみを指示してもよい。例えば、1ビットにおける‘1’は停止を示し、‘0’は前の状態と同状態であることを示す。この場合、MAC CEによるアクティベーションの通知などの起動の状態を指示する他の方法と併用されることが好ましい。 In the DCI format, only the stop state may be indicated. For example, “1” in one bit indicates stop, and “0” indicates the same state as the previous state. In this case, it is preferably used in combination with another method for instructing the activation state such as activation notification by MAC CE.
 あるDCIフォーマットに、複数のセル(スモールセル、セカンダリーセル、サービングセル)のそれぞれに対する起動/停止の状態を指示するnビットがセットされてもよい。例えば、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットが15ビットで構成される場合、15÷nセル分の起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれることを意味してもよい。つまり、nビットで起動/停止の状態が示されてもよい。例えばnビットで通知される情報は、nサブフレームのセルの起動/停止の状態の情報である。nビットにおける各ビットがサブフレームに対応する。具体的には、8ビットで通知される情報は、8サブフレームの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報である。例えば、nビットで通知される情報は、起動/停止の状態のサブフレームパターンを示す情報である。起動/停止の状態のサブフレームパターンは、予め定められてもよい。起動/停止の状態のサブフレームパターンは、上位層で通知されてもよい。具体的には、2ビットで通知される情報は、4通りのサブフレームパターンを示す。起動/停止の状態を指示するビットの長さは、サブフレームパターンの種類の最大数に応じて決定される。サブフレームパターンの種類の最大数は、上位層で設定されてもよい。 In a certain DCI format, n bits indicating the activation / deactivation state of each of a plurality of cells (small cell, secondary cell, serving cell) may be set. For example, when the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state is composed of 15 bits, it may mean that the information indicating the start / stop state for 15 ÷ n cells is included. . That is, the start / stop state may be indicated by n bits. For example, the information notified by n bits is information on the activation / deactivation state of cells in n subframes. Each bit in n bits corresponds to a subframe. Specifically, the information notified in 8 bits is information indicating the start / stop state of 8 subframes. For example, the information notified by n bits is information indicating a subframe pattern in a start / stop state. The subframe pattern of the start / stop state may be determined in advance. The subframe pattern in the start / stop state may be notified in an upper layer. Specifically, the information notified with 2 bits indicates four types of subframe patterns. The length of the bit indicating the start / stop state is determined according to the maximum number of types of subframe patterns. The maximum number of types of subframe patterns may be set in an upper layer.
 起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるPDCCH/EPDCCHは、起動/停止の状態を示すためのRNTI(例えば、SCE-RNTI)によってスクランブルされる。あるPDCCH/EPDCCHをSCE-RNTIによってデコードが成功した場合、端末装置1は、そのPDCCH/EPDCCHに起動/停止の状態を示す情報が含まれていると認識する。これにより、起動/停止の状態を示す情報が他の制御情報と同じDCIフォーマットに含まれても、起動/停止の状態を示すための情報であることを端末装置1に認識させることができる。 The PDCCH / EPDCCH including information indicating the start / stop state is scrambled by an RNTI (for example, SCE-RNTI) for indicating the start / stop state. When a certain PDCCH / EPDCCH is successfully decoded by the SCE-RNTI, the terminal device 1 recognizes that the information indicating the start / stop state is included in the PDCCH / EPDCCH. Thereby, even if the information indicating the start / stop state is included in the same DCI format as the other control information, the terminal device 1 can recognize that it is information for indicating the start / stop state.
 なお、スモールセルのセカンダリーセルに対する起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が、他のRNTIでスクランブルされた他の制御情報を含んだDCIに同梱されてもよい。例えば、ダイナミックTDDにおけるUL/DL設定7の状態を用いて、セルの停止の状態が示されてもよい。言い換えると、UL/DL設定1~6はセルの起動の状態を示されてもよい。また、例えば、ダイナミックTDDにおけるUL/DL設定を示す情報以外の余ったビットを用いてセルの起動/停止の状態を指示してもよい。また、例えば、TPCコマンドを通知する情報以外の余ったビットを用いてセルの起動/停止の状態を指示してもよい。 It should be noted that information instructing the start / stop state for the secondary cell of the small cell may be included in the DCI including other control information scrambled by another RNTI. For example, the state of cell stop may be indicated using the state of UL / DL setting 7 in dynamic TDD. In other words, UL / DL settings 1 to 6 may indicate the activation status of the cell. Further, for example, a cell activation / deactivation state may be indicated using a surplus bit other than information indicating the UL / DL setting in dynamic TDD. Further, for example, the remaining bits other than the information for notifying the TPC command may be used to indicate the cell activation / deactivation state.
 なお、セカンダリーセルに対する起動の状態を指示する情報は、下りリンクグラント/上りリンクグラントを指示するDCIフォーマットの中にフィールドが設定されて通知されてもよい。例えば、DCIフォーマット4やDCIフォーマット2Dに、サービングセルを指示する3ビットのフィールドが設定される。端末装置1は、下りリンクグラント/上りリンクグラントのDCIフォーマットで指示されたサービングセルが起動の状態であると認識する。 Note that the information indicating the activation state for the secondary cell may be notified by setting a field in the DCI format indicating the downlink grant / uplink grant. For example, a 3-bit field indicating a serving cell is set in DCI format 4 or DCI format 2D. The terminal device 1 recognizes that the serving cell indicated by the DCI format of the downlink grant / uplink grant is in the activated state.
 なお、セカンダリーセルに対する停止の状態を指示する情報は、下りリンクグラント/上りリンクグラントを指示するDCIフォーマットの中にフィールドが設定されて通知されてもよい。例えば、DCIフォーマット4やDCIフォーマット2Dに、サービングセルを指示する3ビットのフィールドが設定される。端末装置1は、下りリンクグラント/上りリンクグラントのDCIフォーマットで指示されたサービングセルが停止の状態であると認識する。 Note that the information indicating the stop state for the secondary cell may be notified by setting a field in the DCI format indicating the downlink grant / uplink grant. For example, a 3-bit field indicating a serving cell is set in DCI format 4 or DCI format 2D. The terminal device 1 recognizes that the serving cell indicated by the DCI format of the downlink grant / uplink grant is in a stopped state.
 起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットでは、複数のセルグループをまたいで起動/停止の状態を指示しないことが好ましい。例えば、マスターセルグループに所属するセカンダリーセルに対応する起動/停止の状態を指示する情報と、セカンダリーセルグループに所属するセカンダリーセルに対応する起動/停止の状態を指示する情報は、1つのDCIフォーマットの中に含まれない。言い換えると、1つのDCIフォーマットの中に含まれる起動/停止の状態を指示する情報は、1つのセルグループに所属するサービングセルのみに対応する。 In the DCI format including information indicating the start / stop state, it is preferable not to specify the start / stop state across a plurality of cell groups. For example, the information indicating the start / stop state corresponding to the secondary cell belonging to the master cell group and the information indicating the start / stop state corresponding to the secondary cell belonging to the secondary cell group are one DCI format. Not included. In other words, the information indicating the activation / deactivation state included in one DCI format corresponds only to the serving cell belonging to one cell group.
 マスターセルグループに所属するセルの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、プライマリーセルの第1のCSSに配置される。ブラインドデコーディングの処理負担の観点から、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、第1のCSSに配置される他のDCIフォーマットと同じビット数であることが好ましい。具体的には、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、DCIフォーマット0/1A/3/3AまたはDCIフォーマット1Cと同じペイロードサイズになるようにビットがパディングされて第1のCSSに配置される。端末装置1はプライマリーセルのCSSをモニタし、プライマリーセルが所属するセルグループの複数のセカンダリーセル(スモールセル)の起動/停止の状態をDCIフォーマットによって取得する。これにより、1つのPDCCHで複数の端末装置に通知することが容易となり、オーバーヘッドの削減となる。 The DCI format including information indicating the start / stop state of the cells belonging to the master cell group is arranged in the first CSS of the primary cell. From the viewpoint of the processing burden of blind decoding, it is preferable that the DCI format including the information indicating the activation / deactivation state has the same number of bits as other DCI formats arranged in the first CSS. Specifically, in the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state, the bits are padded so that the payload size is the same as that of the DCI format 0 / 1A / 3 / 3A or the DCI format 1C. Located in CSS. The terminal device 1 monitors the CSS of the primary cell, and acquires the activation / deactivation state of a plurality of secondary cells (small cells) of the cell group to which the primary cell belongs in the DCI format. Thereby, it is easy to notify a plurality of terminal devices using one PDCCH, and overhead is reduced.
 セカンダリーセルグループに所属するセルの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、プライマリーセカンダリーセルのSSに配置される。セカンダリーセルグループに所属するセルの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、プライマリーセカンダリーセルの複数の端末装置がモニタできるSSに配置されることが好ましい。例えば、セカンダリーセルグループに所属するセルの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、第2のCSSに配置される。ブラインドデコーディングの処理負担の観点から、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、第2のCSSに配置される他のDCIフォーマットと同じビット数であることが好ましい。具体的には、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、DCIフォーマット0/1A/3/3AまたはDCIフォーマット1Cと同じペイロードサイズになるようにビットがパディングされてCSSに配置される。端末装置1はプライマリーセカンダリーセルの第2のCSSをモニタし、プライマリーセカンダリーセルが所属するセルグループの複数のセカンダリーセル(スモールセル)の起動/停止の状態をDCIフォーマットによって取得する。これにより、1つのPDCCH/EPDCCHで複数の端末装置に通知することが容易となり、オーバーヘッドの削減となる。 The DCI format including information instructing the start / stop state of the cells belonging to the secondary cell group is arranged in the SS of the primary secondary cell. The DCI format including information instructing the activation / deactivation state of cells belonging to the secondary cell group is preferably arranged in the SS that can be monitored by a plurality of terminal devices of the primary secondary cell. For example, a DCI format including information indicating the activation / deactivation state of a cell belonging to the secondary cell group is arranged in the second CSS. From the viewpoint of the processing burden of blind decoding, it is preferable that the DCI format including the information indicating the activation / deactivation state has the same number of bits as other DCI formats arranged in the second CSS. Specifically, in the DCI format including the information indicating the start / stop state, bits are padded so as to have the same payload size as the DCI format 0 / 1A / 3 / 3A or DCI format 1C and arranged in the CSS. Is done. The terminal device 1 monitors the second CSS of the primary secondary cell, and acquires the activation / deactivation state of a plurality of secondary cells (small cells) of the cell group to which the primary secondary cell belongs in the DCI format. Thereby, it becomes easy to notify a plurality of terminal devices using one PDCCH / EPDCCH, and overhead is reduced.
 なお、セルの起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれるDCIフォーマットは、そのセルのUSSに配置されてもよい。この場合、起動/停止の状態を指示する1ビットの情報で通知してもよい。 Note that a DCI format including information indicating the activation / deactivation state of a cell may be arranged in the USS of the cell. In this case, notification may be made with 1-bit information indicating the start / stop state.
 端末装置1は、セルの起動/停止の状態を指示する次のDCIフォーマットで指示されるまで、前に送信されたDCIフォーマットで指示された起動/停止の状態を認識し続けてもよい。この場合、セルの起動/停止の状態を指示するDCIフォーマットは、周期的に送信されることが好ましい。起動/停止の状態を指示するDCIフォーマットが送信される周期およびタイミング(サブフレーム)は、端末装置1に通知される。起動/停止の状態を指示するDCIフォーマットが送信される周期は、例えば1無線フレーム(10サブフレーム)や1ハーフフレーム(5サブフレーム)である。起動/停止の状態を指示するDCIフォーマットが送信されるタイミングは、例えばサブフレーム0やサブフレーム5である。周期的に送信されることにより、端末装置1は起動/停止の状態を認知する期間を明示的に認識することができる。 The terminal device 1 may continue to recognize the start / stop state instructed in the previously transmitted DCI format until instructed in the next DCI format instructing the cell start / stop state. In this case, it is preferable that the DCI format instructing the cell activation / deactivation state is transmitted periodically. The cycle and timing (subframe) at which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted are notified to the terminal device 1. The cycle in which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted is, for example, one radio frame (10 subframes) or one half frame (5 subframes). The timing at which the DCI format instructing the start / stop state is transmitted is, for example, subframe 0 or subframe 5. By periodically transmitting, the terminal device 1 can explicitly recognize the period for recognizing the start / stop state.
 端末装置1は、セルの起動/停止の状態を指示する次のDCIフォーマットで指示される前に、停止の状態として認識するように変更してもよい。この場合、例えば、停止の状態に遷移するためのタイマー(スモールセルデアクティベーションタイマー)がセットされ、タイマーが超えた場合に端末装置1は基地局装置3からの指示を受ける前に停止の状態として認識する。 The terminal device 1 may be changed so as to be recognized as a stop state before being instructed by the next DCI format that indicates the start / stop state of the cell. In this case, for example, a timer (small cell deactivation timer) for transitioning to the stop state is set, and when the timer exceeds, the terminal device 1 is set to the stop state before receiving an instruction from the base station device 3. recognize.
 また、サービングセルと送信点が異なるセル(隣接セル、送信ポイント)のそれぞれに対する起動/停止の状態の指示をDCIフォーマットで行なってもよい。この場合、サービングセルと送信ポイントが異なるセルとは光ファイバーなどの低遅延なバックホールで接続されていることが好ましい。 Also, the start / stop state instruction for each cell (adjacent cell, transmission point) having a different transmission point from that of the serving cell may be performed in the DCI format. In this case, the serving cell and the cell having a different transmission point are preferably connected by a low-delay backhaul such as an optical fiber.
 オン/オフセルPDCCH設定(on/off cell PDCCH configuration)は、スモールセル(またはスモールセルに相当するセカンダリーセル/サービングセル)の起動/停止の状態を示すためのRNTIおよびインデックスを規定するために用いられる。スモールセルのオン/オフの機能は、この設定とともにセットアップされたり、リリースされたりしてもよい。 The on / off cell PDCCH configuration (on / off cell PDCCH configuration) is used to specify an RNTI and an index for indicating a start / stop state of a small cell (or a secondary cell / serving cell corresponding to the small cell). The small cell on / off function may be set up or released with this setting.
 オン/オフセルPDCCH設定には、DCIフォーマットが、スモールセル(サービングセル)の起動/停止の状態を指示するDCIフォーマットであることを示すRNTI(例えば、SCE-RNTI)が含まれてもよい。また、オン/オフセルPDCCH設定には、DCIフォーマットで起動/停止の状態が示されるスモールセルのインデックスのリストが含まれてもよい。そのリストによって、特定のスモールセルに対して、起動/停止の状態が通知されてもよい。例えば、あるDCIフォーマットが15ビットで構成される場合、端末装置1は、すべてのビットに対して、起動/停止の状態をチェックするのではなく、リストによって示されたインデックスに対応するビットのみ起動/停止の状態をチェックしてもよい。それ以外のビットについては、すべて停止の状態であると認識してもよい。 The on / off cell PDCCH setting may include an RNTI (eg, SCE-RNTI) indicating that the DCI format is a DCI format that indicates the activation / deactivation state of the small cell (serving cell). In addition, the on / off cell PDCCH setting may include a list of small cell indexes indicating activation / deactivation states in the DCI format. The list may notify a specific small cell of the activation / deactivation state. For example, when a certain DCI format is composed of 15 bits, the terminal apparatus 1 does not check the activation / deactivation state for all bits, but activates only the bits corresponding to the index indicated by the list. You may check the status of / stop. All other bits may be recognized as being in a stopped state.
 端末装置1は、あるサブフレームi(i=0,1,2,…)において、あるセルに対して起動の状態を示す情報を含むDCIフォーマットを検出した場合、サブフレームi+k(kは所定の値)でそのセルが起動の状態にあると認識する。停止の状態についても同様の処理を行なってもよい。なお、起動の状態と停止の状態で、kの値は異なってもよい。 When the terminal device 1 detects a DCI format including information indicating an activation state for a certain cell in a certain subframe i (i = 0, 1, 2,...), The subframe i + k (k is a predetermined value). Value) to recognize that the cell is activated. Similar processing may be performed for the stop state. Note that the value of k may be different between the activated state and the deactivated state.
 第1のDCIフォーマットで、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれる場合、第1のDCIフォーマットサイズは、他のDCIフォーマットのサイズと同じであってもよい。DCIフォーマットのサイズを合わせることによって、ブラインドデコーディング数を増加させることなく、新しい指示情報を設定することができる。第1のDCIフォーマットと第2のDCIフォーマットで、送信する制御情報の数(種類)や必要なビット数などが、異なる場合、制御情報として用いないビットをパディングしてもよい。 When the first DCI format includes information indicating the start / stop state, the first DCI format size may be the same as the sizes of other DCI formats. By matching the size of the DCI format, new instruction information can be set without increasing the number of blind decoding. If the number (type) of control information to be transmitted and the number of necessary bits are different between the first DCI format and the second DCI format, bits that are not used as control information may be padded.
 また、第1のDCIフォーマットで、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報が含まれる場合、起動/停止の状態を指示する情報に必要なビット以外のビットについては、削除されてもよい。つまり、第1のDCIフォーマットサイズは、必要に応じて、増減してもよい。 In addition, when information indicating the start / stop state is included in the first DCI format, bits other than the bits necessary for the information indicating the start / stop state may be deleted. That is, the first DCI format size may be increased or decreased as necessary.
 起動/停止の状態を指示する情報によって、起動の状態が指示された場合、端末装置1は、起動の状態が指示されたセルに対するCSI測定を行ない、所定のサブフレーム後の最初の上りリンクサブフレームで、CSI報告を行なってもよい。 When the activation state is instructed by the information indicating the activation / deactivation state, the terminal apparatus 1 performs CSI measurement for the cell in which the activation state is instructed, and the first uplink subframe after a predetermined subframe is performed. A CSI report may be performed in a frame.
 PDCCH/EPDCCHとDRSが同じサブフレームで送信される場合、PDCCH/EPDCCHを復調・復号するために、URS(またはDMRS)が同じサブフレームで送信されてもよい。 When PDCCH / EPDCCH and DRS are transmitted in the same subframe, URS (or DMRS) may be transmitted in the same subframe in order to demodulate and decode PDCCH / EPDCCH.
 PDCCH/EPDCCHとDRSが同じサブフレームで送信される場合、端末装置1は、DRS(DRSを構成する複数の信号のうちの1つ)を用いて、PDCCH/EPDCCHの復調・復号を行なってもよい。 When PDCCH / EPDCCH and DRS are transmitted in the same subframe, terminal apparatus 1 may perform demodulation / decoding of PDCCH / EPDCCH using DRS (one of a plurality of signals constituting DRS). Good.
 端末装置1は、上位層シグナリングによって、あるセルに対するDRSの設定がセットされた場合、あるセルに対するDRSの測定サブフレームにおいて、所定の回数、測定結果が閾値を満たさなかったとすれば、プライマリーセルを用いて、DRSの再設定を要求してもよい。 When the DRS setting for a certain cell is set by higher layer signaling, the terminal apparatus 1 determines that the measurement result does not satisfy the threshold in a DRS measurement subframe for a certain cell, May be used to request resetting of the DRS.
 次に、ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態(implicit deactivation)について説明する。 Next, the implicit OFF state (implicit deactivation) of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 なお、ON/OFFセルは小セル(Small Cell)と同じであってもよい。 Note that the ON / OFF cell may be the same as the small cell.
 基地局装置3をON状態(動作中の状態、起動の状態)からOFF状態(停止の状態)に遷移させることでセル間干渉を抑圧させている場合(説明のため、基地局装置3がON/OFFセルを用いている場合と称する)、端末装置1に設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーが満了するよりも前に、ON/OFFセルがOFF状態になることが想定される。 When inter-cell interference is suppressed by transitioning the base station device 3 from the ON state (operating state, starting state) to the OFF state (stopping state) (for the sake of explanation, the base station device 3 is ON) It is assumed that the ON / OFF cell enters the OFF state before the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell set in the terminal device 1 expires. The
 なお、ON/OFFセルがOFF状態とは、端末装置1が基地局装置3から下りリンクの送信を期待しない状態であってもよい。すなわち、PSS/SSS、CRS、CSI-RS、PBCH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、PDSCHのうち、少なくとも1つが送信されない状態であってもよい。例えば、1ハーフフレーム以上(5サブフレーム以上)PSS/SSSが送信されない状態である。例えば、基地局装置3がOFF状態とは、DRSのみが送信されている状態である。 Note that the ON / OFF cell being in the OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 does not expect downlink transmission from the base station device 3. That is, at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and PDSCH may not be transmitted. For example, PSS / SSS is not transmitted for one half frame or more (5 subframes or more). For example, the base station device 3 being in the OFF state is a state in which only DRS is transmitted.
 なお、ON/OFFセルがOFF状態とは、端末装置1が従来の端末装置とは異なる処理を行う状態であってもよく、ON/OFFセルがON状態とは、端末装置1が従来の端末装置と同様の処理が可能な状態であってもよい。 It should be noted that the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 performs a process different from that of the conventional terminal device. It may be in a state where processing similar to that of the apparatus is possible.
 なお、ON/OFFセルのOFF状態において端末装置1は、該ON/OFFセルにおいてPUCCH、PUSCH、などの上りリンクの送信を行ってもよい。すなわち、該ON/OFFセルは、OFF状態でも受信処理を行ってもよい。 Note that, in the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 may perform uplink transmission such as PUCCH and PUSCH in the ON / OFF cell. That is, the ON / OFF cell may perform reception processing even in the OFF state.
 なお、ON/OFFセルのOFF状態において端末装置1は、該ON/OFFセルに関連する情報を解放(リリース、削除)しなくてもよい。例えば、ON/OFFセルのOFF状態において端末装置1は、該ON/OFFセルに関連する情報を保持し、ON/OFFセルがON状態となったときに該ON/OFFセルに関連する情報を再び使用してもよい。 Note that in the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 does not have to release (release or delete) information related to the ON / OFF cell. For example, in the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 holds information related to the ON / OFF cell, and stores information related to the ON / OFF cell when the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state. It may be used again.
 なお、ON/OFFセルがOFF状態になることと、ON/OFFセルがデアクティベーションされることは同じであってもよく、ON/OFFセルのデアクティベーションは従来のデアクティベーション(非ON/OFFセルのデアクティベーション)と同じであってもよい。 The ON / OFF cell may be in the OFF state and the ON / OFF cell may be deactivated, and the deactivation of the ON / OFF cell is the same as the conventional deactivation (non-ON / OFF cell). Deactivation).
 なお、ON/OFFセルがOFF状態と従来のデアクティベーションは同時に実行されてもよい。 Note that the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state and the conventional deactivation may be executed simultaneously.
 ON/OFFセルがON状態からOFF状態へ遷移する(基地局装置3が起動の状態から停止の状態に遷移する)度に、基地局装置3がL1シグナリング(DCIフォーマット)やL2シグナリング(MAC CE)によってON/OFFセルのOFF状態を端末装置1に通知すると、制御情報のオーバーヘッドが増加する。 Each time the ON / OFF cell transitions from the ON state to the OFF state (the base station device 3 transitions from the activated state to the deactivated state), the base station device 3 performs L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE ) To notify the terminal device 1 of the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, the control information overhead increases.
 しかし、ON/OFFセルがON状態からOFF状態へ遷移する度にON/OFFセルのON状態/OFF状態を端末装置1に通知しなければ、端末装置1はOFF状態となったセルのOFF状態タイマーが満了するまで、OFF状態となっているON/OFFセルにおいてPDCCHのモニタなどのオペレーションを行うため余分にバッテリーを消費する。 However, if the ON / OFF cell is not notified to the terminal device 1 every time the ON / OFF cell transitions from the ON state to the OFF state, the terminal device 1 is in the OFF state of the cell that has been turned OFF. Until the timer expires, an extra battery is consumed to perform operations such as monitoring of PDCCH in an ON / OFF cell that is in an OFF state.
 そこで、基地局装置3がON/OFFセルを用いている場合、端末装置1が暗示的にON/OFFセルのOFF状態を判定(仮定)し、OFF状態と判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルを端末装置1が暗示的にOFF状態と認識すること(implicit deactivation)、もしくは、OFF状態と判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行することが有効である。例えば、OFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作は、PSS/SSS、CRS、CSI-RS、PBCH、PDCCH、EPDCCH、PDSCHのうち、少なくとも1つが送信されないと仮定した動作であってもよい。例えば、OFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作は、端末装置1が従来の端末装置とは異なる処理を行う状態であってもよい。例えば、OFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作は、端末装置1がPUCCH、PUSCH、などの上りリンクの送信のみを行う動作であってもよい。 Therefore, when the base station device 3 uses an ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 implicitly determines (assumes) the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell, and determines (assumes) the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state. The terminal device 1 implicitly recognizes it as being in an OFF state (implicit deactivation), or shifts to an operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state in an ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) as an OFF state. It is effective. For example, the operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state may be an operation assuming that at least one of PSS / SSS, CRS, CSI-RS, PBCH, PDCCH, EPDCCH, and PDSCH is not transmitted. Good. For example, the operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in an OFF state may be a state in which the terminal device 1 performs processing different from that of a conventional terminal device. For example, the operation in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state may be an operation in which the terminal device 1 performs only uplink transmission such as PUCCH and PUSCH.
 なお、端末装置1は、端末装置1に設定されるセルがON/OFFセルか否かを示すことに関連する情報を基地局装置3から受信してもよい。すなわち、基地局装置3は端末装置1に対して、端末装置1に設定するセルがON/OFFセルか否かを示すことに関連する情報を送信してもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may receive information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell from the base station device 3. That is, the base station device 3 may transmit information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell to the terminal device 1.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の報告を行う。つまり、ON/OFFセルがON状態からOFF状態へ遷移した場合、該ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーが満了するまで、もしくは、基地局装置3によって該ON/OFFセルのOFF状態が通知されるまで、OFF状態のON/OFFセルにおいてCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の算出に関連する情報を測定する。 The terminal device 1 reports CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for ON / OFF cells in which the ON state is set. That is, when the ON / OFF cell transitions from the ON state to the OFF state, the OFF state timer of the ON / OFF cell is notified until the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell expires or by the base station device 3 Until it is done, information related to the calculation of CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) is measured in the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state.
 OFF状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、端末装置1がCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)の算出に関連する情報を測定するために用いる参照信号(CRS、CSI-RS、DRSなど)が送信されない場合がある。つまり、端末装置1がOFF状態となったON/OFFセルに対するCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)を算出すると、特定のCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)が算出される可能性が高くなる。そこで、端末装置1はON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、特定のCQI(Channel Quality Indicator)/PMI(PrecodingMatrix Indicator)/RI(Rank Indicator)/PTI(Precoding Type Indicator)を所定の回数以上算出すると、ON/OFFセルにおいて参照信号が送信されていない、つまり、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(OFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 In the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state, the terminal device 1 measures information related to the calculation of CQI (Channel QualityIndicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator). In some cases, reference signals (CRS, CSI-RS, DRS, etc.) used for transmission are not transmitted. That is, when calculating CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) for an ON / OFF cell in which the terminal device 1 is in an OFF state, a specific CQI ( There is a high possibility of calculating Channel Quality Indicator) / PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator). Therefore, the terminal device 1 performs a specific CQI (Channel Quality / Indicator) / PMI (PrecodingMatrix Indicator) / RI (Rank Indicator) / PTI (Precoding Type Indicator) a predetermined number of times or more in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. When calculated, it is determined (assumed) that the reference signal is not transmitted in the ON / OFF cell, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (ON in the OFF state) / Transfer to operation when communicating with OFF cell).
 例えば、所定の回数“out of range(許容範囲外)”を算出した場合、もしくは、所定のサブフレーム数連続するサブフレームにおいて所定の回数“out of range(許容範囲外)”を算出した場合、もしくは、所定の回数連続で“out of range(許容範囲外)”を算出した場合に、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。 For example, when the predetermined number of times “out of range (outside the allowable range)” is calculated, or when the predetermined number of times “out of range (outside the allowable range)” is calculated in a predetermined number of subframes, Alternatively, when “out of range” is calculated continuously for a predetermined number of times, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as an OFF state (ON / OFF of the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) The operation may be shifted to communication with a cell).
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数および/または所定の回数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 OFF状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、DRSが送信されない場合がある。端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、DRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、DRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力が閾値を超えない場合、ON/OFFセルにおいてDRSが送信されていない、つまり、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 DRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state. In the ON / OFF cell, when the DRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, or when the received power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, It is determined (assumed) that the DRS is not transmitted, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)
 例えば、所定の回数DRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、所定のサブフレーム数連続するサブフレームにおいて所定の回数DRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、所定の回数連続でDRSが検出されない場合に、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。 For example, when the predetermined number of times DRS is not detected, or when the predetermined number of times DRS is not detected in a predetermined number of subframes, or when the predetermined number of times DRS is not continuously detected, the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
 RSが検出されない場合とは、RSがマップされるREの平均電力が閾値を超えない場合である。なお、電力を計算するREは、複数のサブフレームにまたがって平均されてもよい。電力を計算するREは、特定のサブフレームでのみ平均されてもよい。なお、電力を計算するREは、システム帯域幅の一部のリソースブロックで平均され、一部のリソースブロックで平均されなくてもよい。 The case where the RS is not detected is a case where the average power of the RE to which the RS is mapped does not exceed the threshold value. Note that the RE for calculating the power may be averaged over a plurality of subframes. The REs that calculate power may be averaged only in specific subframes. Note that the RE for calculating the power is averaged over some resource blocks of the system bandwidth and may not be averaged over some resource blocks.
 なお、RSが一部または全て存在しないサブフレームは、端末装置1に通知される。端末装置1は、一部または全て存在しないサブフレームにおいて、RSが存在しないREに対して計算する電力の平均に含めない。 Note that a subframe in which part or all of the RS does not exist is notified to the terminal device 1. The terminal device 1 does not include in the average of the power calculated for the RE in which no RS exists in a subframe in which some or all of the terminal devices 1 do not exist.
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数および/または所定の回数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 なお、DRSが検出されない場合は、RSRPおよび/またはRSRQに基づいて判定されてもよい。 In addition, when DRS is not detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.
 なお、DRSが検出されない場合は、サブフレームの平均受信電力またはDRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when DRS is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that DRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 また、ON状態を示すDRSパターンとOFF状態を示すDRSパターンを独立に定義し、OFF状態を示すDRSパターンが検出された場合、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。すなわち、基地局装置3はON状態とOFF状態で異なるDRSパターンを用いてDRSを送信してもよい。 Also, a DRS pattern indicating the ON state and a DRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be defined independently, and when the DRS pattern indicating the OFF state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the OFF state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS using different DRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 OFF状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、CRSが送信されない場合がある。端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、CRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、CRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力が閾値を超えない場合、ON/OFFセルにおいてCRSが送信されていない、つまり、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 CRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state. In the ON / OFF cell, when the CRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the CRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, CRS is not transmitted, that is, it is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)
 例えば、所定の回数CRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、所定のサブフレーム数連続するサブフレームにおいて所定の回数CRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、所定の回数連続でCRSが検出されない場合に、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。 For example, when a predetermined number of CRSs are not detected, or when a predetermined number of CRSs are not detected in a predetermined number of subframes, or when a predetermined number of CRSs are not continuously detected, the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数および/または所定の回数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 なお、CRSが検出されない場合は、RSRPおよび/またはRSRQに基づいて判定されてもよい。 In addition, when CRS is not detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.
 なお、CRSが検出されない場合は、サブフレームの平均受信電力またはCRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when CRS is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that CRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 また、ON状態を示すCRSパターンとOFF状態を示すCRSパターンを独立に定義し、OFF状態を示すCRSパターンが検出された場合、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。すなわち、基地局装置3はON状態とOFF状態で異なるCRSパターンを用いてCRSを送信してもよい。 Also, the CRS pattern indicating the ON state and the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be independently defined, and when the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the OFF state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit CRS using different CRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルでPDCCH/EPDCCHをモニタする。端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルで、PDCCH/EPDCCHが所定のサブフレーム数以上連続で検出されない場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。すなわち、端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するCIFの値に基づくサーチスペースで、PDCCH/EPDCCHが所定のサブフレーム数以上連続で検出されない場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。すなわち、基地局装置3は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するCIFの値に基づくサーチスペースにPDCCH/EPDCCHを配置しない。 The terminal device 1 monitors the PDCCH / EPDCCH in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. The terminal apparatus 1 determines (assumes) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state when PDCCH / EPDCCH is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, The ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, when the terminal device 1 does not detect PDCCH / EPDCCH continuously for a predetermined number of subframes or more in the search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, the base station device 3 It is determined (assumed) that the cell is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state (the operation shifts to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, the base station device 3 does not arrange the PDCCH / EPDCCH in the search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set.
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 なお、PDCCH/EPDCCHが検出されない場合は、巡回冗長検査(CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check)でエラー検出されないこと、もしくは、サブフレームの平均受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when PDCCH / EPDCCH is not detected, it may be determined that no error is detected by cyclic redundancy check (CRC: “Cyclic Redundancy Check”) or that the average received power of a subframe is compared with a predetermined threshold. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHが所定のサブフレーム数以上連続で検出されない場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 In the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, the terminal device 1 has a downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set or an uplink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. If PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating (uplink grant) is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more, it is determined (assumed) that the base station device 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state ( The operation proceeds to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおいて、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHが所定のサブフレーム数以上連続で検出されない場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。すなわち、端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するCIFの値に基づくサーチスペースで、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHが所定のサブフレーム数以上連続で検出されない場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。すなわち、基地局装置3は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するCIFの値に基づくサーチスペースで、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHを配置しない。 In the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, the terminal device 1 is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set or the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. If the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the uplink grant (uplink grant) is not continuously detected for a predetermined number of subframes or more, it is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state. (The operation shifts to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell). That is, the terminal device 1 is a search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set, and the downlink grant (downlink grant) or the ON state for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in an OFF state when PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell for which is set is not detected continuously for a predetermined number of subframes or more, The ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state). That is, the base station apparatus 3 is a search space based on the CIF value related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, and the downlink grant (downlink grant) or ON for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. A PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell in which the state is set is not arranged.
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes in which the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対して間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)が設定された場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 The terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the OFF state when discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) is set for the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set. The / OFF cell is recognized as being in the OFF state (the operation shifts to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state).
 なお、端末装置1は、ショートDRXに関するパラメータが設定された場合、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識しないことが好ましい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行しないことが好ましい)。 In addition, when the parameter regarding the short DRX is set, the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and preferably does not recognize the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state (the ON It is preferable not to shift to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the / OFF cell).
 なお、ON/OFFセルに対する間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)は、ON/OFFセル毎に独立で設定されてもよい。 Note that discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for ON / OFF cells may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.
 なお、ON/OFFセルに対する間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)の継続時間に関連するタイマーは、サブフレーム単位で設定されてもよい。 Note that a timer related to the duration of intermittent reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for an ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 OFF状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、PHICHが送信されない(端末装置1が送信した上りリンクデータ(Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH)に対するACK(ACKnowledgement)またはNACK(Negative ACKnowledgement)を示すHARQインディケータ(HARQフィードバック、応答情報)が送信されない)場合がある。端末装置1は、ON状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいてPHICHが検出されない(端末装置1が送信した上りリンクデータ(Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH)に対するACK(ACKnowledgement)またはNACK(Negative ACKnowledgement)を示すHARQインディケータ(HARQフィードバック、応答情報)が検出されない)場合、基地局装置3がOFF状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 The PHICH is not transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state (HARQ indicator indicating ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) transmitted by the terminal device 1. (HARQ feedback, response information) may not be transmitted). The terminal device 1 does not detect PHICH in the ON / OFF cell in which the ON state is set (ACK (ACKnowledgement) or NACK (Negative ACKnowledgement) for uplink data (Uplink Shared Channel: UL-SCH) transmitted by the terminal device 1) Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the OFF state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the OFF state (the ON / OFF cell). The operation shifts to the case of communication with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in FIG.
 例えば、所定の回数PHICHが検出されない場合、もしくは、所定のサブフレーム数連続するサブフレームにおいて所定の回数PHICHが検出されない場合、もしくは、所定の回数連続でPHICHが検出されない場合に、該ON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてOFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。 For example, when a predetermined number of times PHICH is not detected, or when a predetermined number of times PHICH is not detected in a predetermined number of subframes, or when a predetermined number of times PHICH is not detected, the ON / OFF The cell may be recognized as being in an OFF state (the operation may be shifted to communication with an ON / OFF cell in the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell).
 なお、端末装置1がON/OFFセルにおけるOFF状態を判定する所定のサブフレーム数および/または所定の回数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of subframes and / or the predetermined number of times that the terminal device 1 determines the OFF state in the ON / OFF cell may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 なお、PHICHが検出されない場合は、サブフレームの平均受信電力またはPHICHが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when PHICH is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that PHICH is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 なお、上記ON/OFFセルの暗示的OFF状態の例は、それぞれ別個に実行されることに限定されず、2つ以上同時に実行されてもよい、また、仕様書などで規定される他のデアクティベーションと同時に実行されてもよい。 Note that the above example of the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell is not limited to being executed separately, and two or more may be executed at the same time. It may be executed at the same time as the activation.
 なお、OFF状態であると判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルのOFF状態(OFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作への移行)は、OFF状態であると判定(仮定)した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから適用されてもよいし、OFF状態であると判定(仮定)した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数後から適用されてもよい。 Note that the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) that is in the OFF state (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state) is the wireless that is determined (assumed) as being in the OFF state. It may be applied from a frame and / or subframe, or may be applied after a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number of subframes from a radio frame and / or subframe determined (assumed) to be in an OFF state. Good.
 なお、OFF状態であると判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルのOFF状態(OFF状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作への移行)を適用するまでの所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of radio frames until the application of the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) in the OFF state (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the OFF state) / or the predetermined number The number of subframes may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.
 次に、ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態(implicit activation)について説明する。 Next, the implicit ON state (implicit activation) of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 なお、基地局装置3のON状態は、端末装置1が従来の端末装置と同様の処理が可能な状態である。基地局装置3のON状態における具体的な例は以下の通りである。端末装置1はPSS、SSSおよびPBCHを受信することを期待する。端末装置1は所定のサブフレームにおいてPDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHのモニタリングをする。端末装置1は設定されたCSI報告モードに基づいてCSI報告を行う。端末装置1はCSI報告のための参照信号(例えば、CRSまたはCSI-RS)およびCSI参照リソースが存在することを期待する。 Note that the ON state of the base station device 3 is a state in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as a conventional terminal device. A specific example of the base station device 3 in the ON state is as follows. The terminal device 1 expects to receive PSS, SSS, and PBCH. The terminal device 1 monitors PDCCH and / or EPDCCH in a predetermined subframe. The terminal device 1 performs CSI reporting based on the set CSI reporting mode. The terminal apparatus 1 expects a reference signal (for example, CRS or CSI-RS) for CSI reporting and a CSI reference resource to exist.
 なお、ON/OFFセルのON状態において端末装置1は、OFF状態において保持していた、該ON/OFFセルに関連する情報を再び使用してもよい。 In the ON state of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 may use again the information related to the ON / OFF cell that was held in the OFF state.
 なお、ON/OFFセルがON状態になることと、ON/OFFセルがアクティベーションされることは同じであってもよく、ON/OFFセルのアクティベーションは従来のアクティベーション(非ON/OFFセルのアクティベーション)と同じであってもよい。 Note that it may be the same that the ON / OFF cell is turned on and the ON / OFF cell is activated, and the activation of the ON / OFF cell is the same as the conventional activation (non-ON / OFF cell). Activation).
 なお、ON/OFFセルがON状態と従来のアクティベーションは同時に実行されてもよい。 Note that the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state and the conventional activation may be executed simultaneously.
 ON/OFFセルがOFF状態からON状態へ遷移する(基地局装置3が停止の状態から起動の状態に遷移する)度に、基地局装置3がL1シグナリング(DCIフォーマット)やL2シグナリング(MAC CE)によってON/OFFセルのON状態を端末装置1に通知すると、制御情報のオーバーヘッドが増加する。 Each time the ON / OFF cell transitions from the OFF state to the ON state (the base station device 3 transitions from the stopped state to the activated state), the base station device 3 performs L1 signaling (DCI format) or L2 signaling (MAC CE ) To notify the terminal device 1 of the ON / OFF cell ON state, the overhead of the control information increases.
 そこで、基地局装置3がON/OFFセルを用いている場合、端末装置1が暗示的にON/OFFセルのON状態を判定(仮定)し、ON状態と判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルを端末装置1が暗示的にON状態すること(implicit activation)、もしくは、ON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行することが有効である。例えば、ON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作は、端末装置1がON/OFFセルがOFF状態において保持していた、該ON/OFFセルに関連する情報を再び使用する動作であってもよい。例えば、ON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作は、端末装置1が従来の端末装置と同様の処理が可能な動作であってもよい。 Therefore, when the base station apparatus 3 uses the ON / OFF cell, the terminal apparatus 1 implicitly determines (assumes) the ON state of the ON / OFF cell, and the ON / OFF cell that is determined (assumed) as the ON state. It is effective that the terminal device 1 implicitly turns on (implicit activation) or shifts to an operation when communicating with an ON / OFF cell in the ON state. For example, the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state is an operation in which the terminal device 1 uses again the information related to the ON / OFF cell that the ON / OFF cell has held in the OFF state. May be. For example, the operation in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state may be an operation in which the terminal device 1 can perform the same processing as the conventional terminal device.
 なお、端末装置1は、端末装置1に設定されるセルがON/OFFセルか否かを示すことに関連する情報を基地局装置3から受信してもよい。すなわち、基地局装置3は端末装置1に対して、端末装置1に設定するセルがON/OFFセルか否かを示すことに関連する情報を送信してもよい。 Note that the terminal device 1 may receive information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell from the base station device 3. That is, the base station device 3 may transmit information related to indicating whether the cell set in the terminal device 1 is an ON / OFF cell to the terminal device 1.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 OFF状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、DRSが送信されない場合がある、すなわち、ON/OFFセルがON状態でのみDRSを送信する場合がある。端末装置1は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、DRSが検出された場合、もしくは、DRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力が閾値を超えた場合、ON/OFFセルにおいてDRSが送信されている、つまり、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 In an ON / OFF cell that is in an OFF state, a DRS may not be transmitted, that is, a DRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in an ON state. When the DRS is detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the received power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted exceeds the threshold value, the terminal device 1 is the ON / OFF cell. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF of the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to operation when communicating with a cell).
 なお、DRSが検出された場合は、RSRPおよび/またはRSRQに基づいて判定されてもよい。 In addition, when DRS is detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.
 なお、DRSが検出された場合は、サブフレームの平均受信電力またはDRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when DRS is detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that DRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 また、ON状態を示すDRSパターンとOFF状態を示すDRSパターンを独立に定義し、ON状態を示すDRSパターンが検出された場合、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。すなわち、基地局装置3はON状態とOFF状態で異なるDRSパターンを用いてDRSを送信してもよい。 In addition, a DRS pattern indicating an ON state and a DRS pattern indicating an OFF state may be defined independently, and when a DRS pattern indicating an ON state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as an ON state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit DRS using different DRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 ON状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、DRSが送信されない場合がある、すなわち、ON/OFFセルがOFF状態でのみDRSを送信する場合がある。端末装置1は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、DRSが検出されない場合、もしくは、DRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力が閾値を超えない場合、ON/OFFセルにおいてDRSが送信されていない、つまり、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 The DRS may not be transmitted in the ON / OFF cell that is in the ON state, that is, the DRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in the OFF state. In the ON / OFF cell, when the DRS is not detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the DRS is transmitted does not exceed the threshold, It is determined (assumed) that the DRS is not transmitted, that is, the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to the operation when communicating with.)
 なお、DRSが検出されない場合は、RSRPおよび/またはRSRQに基づいて判定されてもよい。 In addition, when DRS is not detected, you may determine based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.
 なお、DRSが検出されない場合は、サブフレームの平均受信電力またはDRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when DRS is not detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that DRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 OFF状態となったON/OFFセルにおいては、CRSが送信されない場合がある、すなわち、ON/OFFセルがON状態でのみCRSを送信する場合がある。端末装置1は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルにおいて、CRSが検出された場合、もしくは、CRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力が閾値を超えた場合、ON/OFFセルにおいてCRSが送信されている、つまり、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 In the ON / OFF cell that is in the OFF state, the CRS may not be transmitted, that is, the CRS may be transmitted only when the ON / OFF cell is in the ON state. When the CRS is detected in the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, or when the reception power of the resource assuming that the CRS is transmitted exceeds the threshold value, the terminal device 1 is the ON / OFF cell. Is determined (assumed) that the base station apparatus 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (ON / OFF of the ON state in the ON / OFF cell) Move to operation when communicating with a cell).
 なお、CRSが検出された場合は、RSRPおよび/またはRSRQに基づいて判定されてもよい。 In addition, when CRS is detected, it may be determined based on RSRP and / or RSRQ.
 なお、CRSが検出された場合は、サブフレームの平均受信電力またはCRSが送信されていると仮定するリソースの受信電力を所定の閾値と比較することで判定されてもよい。なお、所定の閾値は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 In addition, when CRS is detected, you may determine by comparing the average received power of a sub-frame, or the received power of the resource assumed that CRS is transmitted with a predetermined threshold value. The predetermined threshold value may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station device 3.
 また、ON状態を示すCRSパターンとOFF状態を示すCRSパターンを独立に定義し、ON状態を示すCRSパターンが検出された場合、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識してもよい(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行してもよい)。すなわち、基地局装置3はON状態とOFF状態で異なるCRSパターンを用いてCRSを送信してもよい。 Also, the CRS pattern indicating the ON state and the CRS pattern indicating the OFF state may be independently defined, and when the CRS pattern indicating the ON state is detected, the ON / OFF cell may be recognized as the ON state (the ON state The operation may be shifted to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the / OFF cell). That is, the base station apparatus 3 may transmit CRS using different CRS patterns in the ON state and the OFF state.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおいて、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはOFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHが検出された場合、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 In the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the terminal device 1 is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set. When the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the uplink grant (uplink grant) is detected, it is determined (assumed) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and the ON / OFF cell is recognized as the ON state (the ON / OFF The operation proceeds to the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state in the OFF cell).
 なお、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおける、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはOFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHは、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するキャリアインディケーターフィールド(CIF、Carrier IndicatorField)に基づくサーチスペースに配置されないことが好ましい(ON状態が設定されたセルに関連するキャリアインディケーターフィールド(CIF、Carrier Indicator Field)に基づくサーチスペースに配置されることが好ましい)。 In addition, in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set It is preferable that the PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the grant (uplink grant) is not arranged in the search space based on the carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier IndicatorField) related to the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set (the ON state is set). It is preferably arranged in a search space based on a carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier Indicator Field) associated with the selected cell.
 なお、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおける、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはOFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHは、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するRNTIでCRCマスクされていることが好ましい。 In addition, in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set The PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating a grant is preferably CRC masked with an RNTI related to an ON / OFF cell in which an OFF state is set.
 なお、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおける、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはOFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示すPDCCH/EPDCCHは、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに関連するキャリアインディケーターフィールド(CIF、Carrier IndicatorField)に関するビット情報を含むペイロードサイズであることが好ましい。 In addition, in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set, the downlink grant (downlink grant) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set or the uplink for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set The PDCCH / EPDCCH indicating the grant is preferably a payload size including bit information regarding a carrier indicator field (CIF, Carrier IndicatorField) related to an ON / OFF cell in which an OFF state is set.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対する間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)に関連するタイマーが満了した場合、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 The terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state when a timer related to discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for the ON / OFF cell in which the OFF state is set expires, The ON / OFF cell is recognized as being in the ON state (the operation is shifted to the ON / OFF cell when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state).
 なお、ON/OFFセルに対する間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)は、ON/OFFセル毎に独立で設定されてもよい。 Note that discontinuous reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for ON / OFF cells may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.
 なお、ON/OFFセルに対する間欠受信(DRX: Discontinuous Reception)の継続時間に関連するタイマーは、サブフレーム単位で設定されてもよい。 Note that a timer related to the duration of intermittent reception (DRX: “Discontinuous” Reception) for an ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.
 ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の一例について説明する。 An example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell will be described.
 端末装置1は、OFF状態が設定されたON/OFFセルに対するショートDRXに関連するタイマーが満了した場合、基地局装置3がON状態であると判定(仮定)し、該ON/OFFセルをON状態と認識する(該ON/OFFセルにおいてON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作に移行する)。 When the timer related to the short DRX for the ON / OFF cell for which the OFF state is set expires, the terminal device 1 determines (assumes) that the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and turns on the ON / OFF cell. It recognizes as a state (it moves to the operation | movement in the case of communicating with the ON / OFF cell of an ON state in this ON / OFF cell).
 なお、ON/OFFセルに対するショートDRXは、ON/OFFセル毎に独立で設定されてもよい。 The short DRX for the ON / OFF cell may be set independently for each ON / OFF cell.
 なお、ON/OFFセルに対するショートDRXの継続時間に関連するタイマーは、サブフレーム単位で設定されてもよい。 Note that the timer related to the duration of the short DRX for the ON / OFF cell may be set in units of subframes.
 なお、上記ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態の例は、それぞれ別個に実行されることに限定されず、2つ以上同時に実行されてもよい、また、仕様書などで規定される他のアクティベーションと同時に実行されてもよい。 The example of the implicit ON state of the ON / OFF cell is not limited to being executed separately, and two or more may be executed at the same time. It may be executed at the same time as the activation.
 なお、ON状態であると判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルのON状態(ON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作への移行)は、ON状態であると判定(仮定)した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから適用されてもよいし、ON状態であると判定(仮定)した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数後から適用されてもよい。 Note that the ON state of the ON / OFF cell determined (assumed) that is in the ON state (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state) is the wireless that is determined (assumed) as being in the ON state. It may be applied from a frame and / or subframe, or may be applied after a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number of subframes from a radio frame and / or subframe determined (assumed to be in an ON state) Good.
 なお、ON状態であると判定(仮定)したON/OFFセルのON状態(ON状態のON/OFFセルと通信する場合の動作への移行)を適用するまでの所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 It should be noted that the predetermined number of radio frames until the ON state of the ON / OFF cell determined to be in the ON state (assumed) (transition to the operation when communicating with the ON / OFF cell in the ON state) is applied. The number of subframes may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.
 なお、上記ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態および/または暗示的OFF状態は、端末装置1が所定の機能(ケイパビリティ、UE Capability)を持っている場合に実行されてもよい。 Note that the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 has a predetermined function (capability, UEabilityCapability).
 なお、上記ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態および/または暗示的OFF状態は、端末装置1が所定のモードの場合に実行されてもよい。例えば、Implicit/Explicit activation modeが定義される場合、端末装置1がImplicit modeの場合に上記ON/OFFセルの暗示的ON状態および/または暗示的OFF状態が実行されてもよい。Implicit/Explicit activation modeの切り替えは、MAC CEにおいてリザーブされているRフィールドを用いて通知されることが好ましく、Rフィールドが“0”にセットされている場合、Explicit activation modeを示し、Rフィールドが“1”にセットされている場合、Implicit activation modeを示すことが好ましい。 Note that the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 is in a predetermined mode. For example, when the Implicit / Explicit activation mode is defined, the implicit ON state and / or the implicit OFF state of the ON / OFF cell may be executed when the terminal device 1 is the Implicit mode. The switching of the Implicit / Explicit activation mode is preferably notified using the R field reserved in the MAC CE, and when the R field is set to “0”, the explicit activation mode is indicated, and the R field is When set to “1”, it is preferable to indicate the Implicit activation mode.
 次に、ON/OFFセルのOFF状態タイマー(OFFタイマー、スモールセルデアクティベーションタイマー)について説明する。 Next, the ON / OFF cell OFF state timer (OFF timer, small cell deactivation timer) will be described.
 ON/OFFセルのON状態の指示を受信した場合、端末装置1は、そのON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーをスタートまたはリスタートする。 When receiving the ON state instruction of the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.
 ON/OFFセルにおけるPDCCHが、下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)または上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示さない場合、もしくは、ON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおけるPDCCHが、ON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示さない場合、もしくは、ON/OFFセルに対するPDCCHの指示が存在しない場合、端末装置1は、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーをカウントアップする(1つ進める、1を加算する)。なお、OFF状態タイマーが無線フレーム単位である場合は、所定の無線フレーム全てにおいて、PDCCHの指示が存在しない場合にカウントアップする。なお、OFF状態タイマーが複数サブフレームの単位である場合は、複数サブフレームの全てにおいて、PDCCHの指示が存在しない場合にカウントアップする。 When the PDCCH in the ON / OFF cell does not indicate a downlink grant (uplink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell is a downlink grant for the ON / OFF cell (Downlink grant) or the uplink grant for the ON / OFF cell (uplink grant) is not indicated, or if there is no PDCCH instruction for the ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 is turned OFF related to the ON / OFF cell. Count up the state timer (advance by 1 and add 1). When the OFF state timer is in units of radio frames, the count is incremented when there is no PDCCH instruction in all predetermined radio frames. When the OFF state timer is a unit of a plurality of subframes, it is counted up when there is no PDCCH instruction in all of the plurality of subframes.
 なお、OFF状態タイマーは、特定のサブフレームのみでカウントアップしてもよい。言い換えると、OFF状態タイマーは、特定のサブフレーム以外ではカウントアップされない。例えば、上りリンクサブフレームでは、OFF状態タイマーは上記の条件を満たしてもカウントアップされない。例えば、MBSFNサブフレームでは、OFF状態タイマーは上記の条件を満たしてもカウントアップされない。例えば、上位層で指示されたサブフレームでは、OFF状態タイマーは上記の条件を満たしてもカウントアップされない。 Note that the OFF state timer may be counted up only in a specific subframe. In other words, the OFF state timer is not counted up except for a specific subframe. For example, in the uplink subframe, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied. For example, in the MBSFN subframe, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied. For example, in the subframe indicated by the higher layer, the OFF state timer is not counted up even if the above condition is satisfied.
 ON/OFFセルに関連付けられているOFF状態タイマーが満了した場合、端末装置1は、そのON/OFFセルをOFF状態と認識する。 When the OFF state timer associated with the ON / OFF cell expires, the terminal device 1 recognizes the ON / OFF cell as the OFF state.
 ON/OFFセルにおけるPDCCHが、下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)または上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示す場合、もしくは、ON/OFFセルをスケジューリングするサービングセルにおけるPDCCHが、ON/OFFセルに対する下りリンクグラント(downlink grant)またはON/OFFセルに対する上りリンクグラント(uplink grant)を示す場合、端末装置1は、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーをスタートまたはリスタートする。 When the PDCCH in the ON / OFF cell indicates a downlink grant (downlink grant) or an uplink grant (uplink grant), or the PDCCH in the serving cell that schedules the ON / OFF cell is a downlink grant ( In the case of indicating a downlink grant or an uplink grant for an ON / OFF cell, the terminal device 1 starts or restarts an OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.
 ON/OFFセルのOFF状態の指示を受信した場合、もしくは、ON/OFFセルに関連付けられているOFF状態タイマーが満了した場合、端末装置1は、そのON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーをストップする。 When receiving an OFF state instruction of an ON / OFF cell, or when an OFF state timer associated with the ON / OFF cell expires, the terminal device 1 displays an OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell. Stop.
 なお、ON/OFFセルのOFF状態タイマーはデアクティベーションタイマー(セルの維持時間に関連するタイマー)と同じであってもよい。すなわち、ON/OFFセルのOFF状態タイマーはON/OFFセルの維持時間に関連するタイマーであってもよい。 In addition, the OFF state timer of the ON / OFF cell may be the same as the deactivation timer (timer related to the cell maintenance time). That is, the ON / OFF cell OFF state timer may be a timer related to the ON / OFF cell maintenance time.
 ON/OFFセルを用いてセル間干渉を抑圧する場合、端末装置1の位置やトラフィック量に応じて動的にON/OFFセルのON状態とOFF状態を切り換える。そして、ON/OFFセルのON状態とOFF状態の切り替えが高速になるほど端末装置1の位置やトラフィック量への適応性が高くなる。 When suppressing inter-cell interference using an ON / OFF cell, the ON / OFF cell is dynamically switched between the ON state and the OFF state according to the position of the terminal device 1 and the traffic volume. And the adaptability to the position and traffic volume of the terminal device 1 becomes higher as the switching between the ON state and the OFF state of the ON / OFF cell becomes faster.
 なお、ON/OFFセルおよび/または非ON/OFFセルは、プライマリーセルに設定されてもよいし、セカンダリーセルに設定されてもよいし、セカンダリーセルの中でも特別な機能(例えば、プライマリーセルの機能)を持つセカンダリーセル(プライマリーセカンダリーセル、スペシャルセル)に設定されてもよい。 The ON / OFF cell and / or the non-ON / OFF cell may be set as the primary cell, may be set as the secondary cell, or has a special function (for example, the function of the primary cell) in the secondary cell. ) May be set to a secondary cell (primary secondary cell, special cell).
 なお、ON/OFFセルおよび/または非ON/OFFセルは、常にオン状態が設定されてもよい。 Note that the ON state may be always set for the ON / OFF cell and / or the non-ON / OFF cell.
 つまり、ON/OFFセルと非ON/OFFセルは、端末装置1において独立に維持されることが好ましい。すなわち、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値と非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値は独立に設定されることが好ましい。 That is, it is preferable that the ON / OFF cell and the non-ON / OFF cell are maintained independently in the terminal device 1. That is, it is preferable that the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell are set independently.
 OFF状態タイマーの初期値設定の一例について説明する。 An example of setting the initial value of the OFF state timer will be described.
 ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値を上位層(RRC層)からパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r12を用いて設定し、非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値を上位層(RRC層)からパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10を用いて設定してもよい。 The initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set from the upper layer (RRC layer) using the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12, and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is set to the upper layer (RRC). Layer) to parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.
 OFF状態タイマーの初期値設定の一例について説明する。 An example of setting the initial value of the OFF state timer will be described.
 ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値と非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値を同じパラメータを2つ以上用いて設定してもよい。例えば、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10を2つ以上用いてON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値と非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値を設定してもよい。 The initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set using two or more of the same parameters. For example, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set using two or more parameters sCellDeactivationTimer-r10.
 OFF状態タイマーの初期値設定の一例について説明する。 An example of setting the initial value of the OFF state timer will be described.
 非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値に関連するパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10をON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値に読み替えて、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値を設定してもよい。例えば、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10に無線フレームの数に関連する値であるrf2が設定されていた場合、rf1と読み替えてON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値を設定してもよい。 The parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 related to the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is replaced with the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell, and the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell An initial value may be set. For example, when rf2, which is a value related to the number of radio frames, is set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell may be set as rf1.
 非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値に関連するパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10をON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値として設定してもよい。 The parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 related to the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell may be set as the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell.
 なお、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r12とパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10には、無線フレームの数に関連する値であるrf2、rf4、rf8、rf16、rf32、rf64、rf128の内から少なくとも1つが設定されることが好ましい。ここで、rf2は、2無線フレームに対応し、rf4は、4無線フレームに対応し、rf8は、8無線フレームに対応し、rf16は、16無線フレームに対応し、rf32は、32無線フレームに対応し、rf64は、64無線フレームに対応し、rf128は、128無線フレームに対応する。 It should be noted that at least one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which are values related to the number of radio frames, is preferably set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10. Here, rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames, rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames, rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames, and rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames. Correspondingly, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames and rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.
 なお、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r12とパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10に設定される無線フレームの数に関連する値は異なる値から選択されてもよい。例えば、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10には、無線フレームの数に関連する値であるrf2、rf4、rf8、rf16、rf32、rf64、rf128の内から少なくとも1つが設定され、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r12には、無線フレームの数に関連する値であるrf1、rf2、rf4、rf8、rf16、rf32、rf64の内から少なくとも1つが設定されることが好ましい。ここで、rf1は、1無線フレームに対応し、rf2は、2無線フレームに対応し、rf4は、4無線フレームに対応し、rf8は、8無線フレームに対応し、rf16は、16無線フレームに対応し、rf32は、32無線フレームに対応し、rf64は、64無線フレームに対応し、rf128は、128無線フレームに対応する。 Note that the value related to the number of radio frames set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 may be selected from different values. For example, at least one of rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, and rf128, which are values related to the number of radio frames, is set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10, and the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 is set in the radio frame It is preferable that at least one of rf1, rf2, rf4, rf8, rf16, rf32, and rf64, which is a value related to the number of. Here, rf1 corresponds to 1 radio frame, rf2 corresponds to 2 radio frames, rf4 corresponds to 4 radio frames, rf8 corresponds to 8 radio frames, and rf16 corresponds to 16 radio frames. Correspondingly, rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames, and rf128 corresponds to 128 radio frames.
 なお、パラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r12および/またはパラメータsCellDeactivationTimer-r10に設定される値は、サブフレームの数に関連する値から選択されてもよい。 Note that the value set in the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r12 and / or the parameter sCellDeactivationTimer-r10 may be selected from values related to the number of subframes.
 なお、OFF状態タイマーの初期値は、設定を受信した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから適用されてもよいし、設定を受信した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数後から適用されてもよい。 The initial value of the OFF state timer may be applied from a radio frame and / or subframe that has received the setting, or a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined number from the radio frame and / or subframe that has received the setting. It may be applied after the number of subframes.
 なお、第1のOFF状態タイマーの初期値が設定されている端末装置1に対して、第2のOFF状態タイマーの初期値が設定された場合、第2のOFF状態タイマーの初期値の設定を受信した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから適用されてもよいし、第2のOFF状態タイマーの初期値の設定を受信した無線フレームおよび/またはサブフレームから所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数後から適用されてもよいし、第2のOFF状態タイマーの初期値を無視してもよい。 When the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set for the terminal device 1 for which the initial value of the first OFF state timer is set, the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set. It may be applied from the received radio frame and / or subframe, or the setting of the initial value of the second OFF state timer is set to a predetermined number of radio frames / or a predetermined subframe from the received radio frame and / or subframe. It may be applied several times later, or the initial value of the second OFF state timer may be ignored.
 なお、OFF状態タイマーの初期値を適用する所定の無線フレーム数/または所定のサブフレーム数は、予め定義されていてもよいし、基地局装置3から通知されてもよい。 Note that the predetermined number of radio frames / or the predetermined number of subframes to which the initial value of the OFF state timer is applied may be defined in advance or may be notified from the base station apparatus 3.
 なお、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値は上位層(RRC層)を用いて設定してもよい。 Note that the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell may be set using the upper layer (RRC layer).
 なお、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値はL1シグナリング(例えば、DCIフォーマット)を用いて設定してもよい。例えば、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値はL1シグナリング(例えば、DCIフォーマット)を用いて設定し、非ON/OFFセルに関連するデアクティベーションタイマーの初期値は上位層(RRC層)を用いて設定してもよい。 In addition, you may set the initial value of the OFF state timer relevant to an ON / OFF cell using L1 signaling (for example, DCI format). For example, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set using L1 signaling (eg, DCI format), and the initial value of the deactivation timer related to the non-ON / OFF cell is set to the upper layer (RRC layer). ) May be used.
 なお、端末装置1に複数のON/OFFセルが設定される場合、ON/OFFセルに関連するOFF状態タイマーの初期値は、設定された複数のON/OFFセルに対して共通の値を設定してもよいし、設定された複数のON/OFFセルそれぞれに対して個別の値を設定してもよいし、設定された複数のON/OFFセルをグループ化してグループに対して共通の値を設定してもよい。 In addition, when a plurality of ON / OFF cells are set in the terminal device 1, the initial value of the OFF state timer related to the ON / OFF cell is set to a common value for the set ON / OFF cells. Alternatively, individual values may be set for each of a plurality of set ON / OFF cells, or a plurality of set ON / OFF cells may be grouped to be a common value for the group. May be set.
 以下では、端末装置1のCSI測定およびCSI報告の詳細を説明する。 Hereinafter, details of CSI measurement and CSI report of the terminal device 1 will be described.
 CSIは、CQI(Channel quality indicator)、PMI(Precoding matrix indicator)、PTI(Precoding type indicator)および/またはRI(Rank indicator)で構成される。RIは、送信レイヤーの数(ランク数)を示す。PMIは、予め規定されたプレコーディング行列を示す情報である。PMIは、1つの情報または2つの情報により、1つのプレコーディング行列を示す。2つの情報を用いる場合のPMIは、第1のPMIと第2のPMIとも呼称される。CQIは、予め規定された変調方式と符号化率との組み合わせを示す情報である。基地局装置3に推奨するCSIを報告する。端末装置2は、トランスポートブロック(コードワード)毎に、所定の受信品質を満たすCQIを報告する。 The CSI is configured by CQI (Channel quality indicator), PMI (Precoding matrix indicator), PTI (Precoding type indicator) and / or RI (Rank indicator). RI indicates the number of transmission layers (number of ranks). PMI is information indicating a precoding matrix defined in advance. The PMI indicates one precoding matrix by one piece of information or two pieces of information. The PMI in the case of using two pieces of information is also referred to as a first PMI and a second PMI. CQI is information indicating a combination of a modulation scheme and a coding rate defined in advance. The recommended CSI is reported to the base station apparatus 3. The terminal device 2 reports a CQI that satisfies a predetermined reception quality for each transport block (codeword).
 周期的CSI報告が可能なサブフレーム(reporting instances)は、上位層で設定される情報(CQIPMIインデックス、RIインデックス)に基づいて、報告の周期およびサブフレームオフセットによって決定される。なお、上位層で設定される情報は、CSIを測定するために設定されるサブフレームセット毎に設定可能である。複数のサブフレームセットに対して1つの情報しか設定されない場合、その情報は、サブフレームセット間で共通であるとみなしてもよい。 Subframes (reporting instances) capable of periodic CSI reporting are determined by the reporting period and subframe offset based on information (CQIPMI index, RI index) set in an upper layer. Note that information set in the upper layer can be set for each subframe set set for measuring CSI. When only one information is set for a plurality of subframe sets, the information may be regarded as common between the subframe sets.
 送信モード1~9で設定された端末装置2に対して、各サービングセルに対して1つのP-CSI報告は、上位層シグナリングによって設定される。 For the terminal device 2 set in the transmission modes 1 to 9, one P-CSI report for each serving cell is set by higher layer signaling.
 送信モード10で設定された端末装置2に対して、各サービングセルに対して1つ以上のP-CSI報告は、上位層シグナリングによって設定される。 For the terminal device 2 set in the transmission mode 10, one or more P-CSI reports for each serving cell are set by higher layer signaling.
 送信モード9または10で設定された端末装置2に対して、8CSI-RSポートが設定され、ワイドバンドCQIでシングルPMIの報告モード(モード1-1)が上位層シグナリングによってあるパラメータ(PUCCH_format1-1_CSI_reporting_mode)を用いてサブモード1もしくはサブモード2に設定される。 A parameter (PUCCH_format1-1_CSI_reporting_mode) in which an 8CSI-RS port is set for the terminal device 2 set in the transmission mode 9 or 10 and the single PMI reporting mode (mode 1-1) is set by the higher layer signaling in the wideband CQI. ) To set submode 1 or submode 2.
 端末選択サブバンドCQI(UE-selected subband CQI)に対して、あるサービングセルのあるサブフレームでのCQI報告は、帯域幅パートとして示されるサービングセルの帯域幅の特定の部分(一部)におけるチャネル品質の報告である。 For terminal-selected subband CQI (UE-selected) subband CQI), the CQI report in a subframe of a serving cell indicates the channel quality in a specific part (part) of the serving cell bandwidth indicated as the bandwidth part. It is a report.
 CSI報告タイプは、PUCCH CSI報告モードをサポートしている。CSI報告タイプは、PUCCH報告タイプ(PUCCH reporting type)と呼称される場合もある。タイプ1報告は、端末選択サブバンドに対するCQIフィードバックをサポートしている。タイプ1a報告は、サブバンドCQIと第2のPMIフィードバンクをサポートしている。タイプ2、タイプ2b、タイプ2c報告は、ワイドバンドCQIとPMIフィードバックをサポートしている。タイプ2a報告は、ワイドバンドPMIフィードバンクをサポートしている。タイプ3報告は、RIフィードバックをサポートしている。タイプ4報告は、ワイドバンドCQIをサポートしている。タイプ5報告は、RIとワイドバンドPMIフィードバックをサポートしている。タイプ6報告は、RIとPTIフィードバックをサポートしている。 The CSI report type supports the PUCCH CSI report mode. The CSI report type may be referred to as PUCCH reporting type (PUCCH reporting type). Type 1 reporting supports CQI feedback for terminal selection subbands. Type 1a reporting supports subband CQI and a second PMI feed bank. Type 2, type 2b, and type 2c reports support wideband CQI and PMI feedback. Type 2a reports support wideband PMI feedbanks. Type 3 reports support RI feedback. Type 4 reports support wideband CQI. Type 5 reports support RI and wideband PMI feedback. Type 6 reports support RI and PTI feedback.
 以下では、ON状態およびOFF状態をサポートする基地局装置3において、端末装置1のCSI測定およびCSI報告の詳細を説明する。 Hereinafter, details of CSI measurement and CSI report of the terminal device 1 in the base station device 3 that supports the ON state and the OFF state will be described.
 端末装置1は、基地局装置3からCSI測定およびCSI報告に関する情報が設定される。CSI測定は、参照信号および/または参照リソース(例えば、CRS、CSI-RS、CSI-IMリソース、および/またはDRS)に基づいて行われる。CSI測定に用いられる参照信号は、送信モードの設定などに基づいて決まる。CSI測定は、チャネル測定と干渉測定とに基づいて行われる。例えば、チャネル測定は、所望のセルの電力を測定する。干渉測定は、所望のセル以外の電力と雑音電力とを測定する。 The terminal device 1 is set with information related to CSI measurement and CSI reporting from the base station device 3. CSI measurements are made based on reference signals and / or reference resources (eg, CRS, CSI-RS, CSI-IM resources, and / or DRS). The reference signal used for CSI measurement is determined based on transmission mode settings and the like. CSI measurement is performed based on channel measurement and interference measurement. For example, channel measurement measures the power of a desired cell. Interference measurement measures power other than the desired cell and noise power.
 一例として、端末装置1は、CRSに基づいてチャネル測定と干渉測定とを行う。別の一例として、端末装置1は、CSI-RSに基づいてチャネル測定を行い、CRSに基づいて干渉測定を行う。別の一例として、端末装置1は、CSI-RSに基づいてチャネル測定を行い、CSI-IMリソースに基づいて干渉測定を行う。別の一例として、端末装置1は、DRSに基づいてチャネル測定と干渉測定とを行う。 As an example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on CRS. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on CSI-RS, and performs interference measurement based on CRS. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on CSI-RS, and performs interference measurement based on CSI-IM resources. As another example, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement and interference measurement based on DRS.
 端末装置1は、基地局装置3のON状態とOFF状態とを考慮して、CSI測定を行うことができる。例えば、端末装置1は、CSI測定を行うための参照信号および/または参照リソースに対して、基地局装置3のON状態とOFF状態とを考慮することができる。なお、以下の説明では、CSI測定における参照信号は参照リソースも含む。特に、干渉測定のための参照信号は、干渉測定のために参照されるリソースと読み替えることができる。すなわち、干渉測定のためのリソースは、信号がマッピングされていなくてもよい。そのため、干渉測定のためのリソースが、基地局装置3のON状態とOFF状態とに応じて、有効か無効かを決定することができる。 The terminal device 1 can perform CSI measurement in consideration of the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3. For example, the terminal device 1 can consider the ON state and the OFF state of the base station device 3 with respect to the reference signal and / or reference resource for performing CSI measurement. In the following description, the reference signal in CSI measurement includes a reference resource. In particular, a reference signal for interference measurement can be read as a resource referred to for interference measurement. That is, the signal for interference measurement does not have to be mapped. Therefore, whether the resource for interference measurement is valid or invalid can be determined according to the ON state and the OFF state of the base station apparatus 3.
 一例として、端末装置1は、CSI測定において、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態でのみ送信され、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態でのみ送信される、と想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態のサブフレームで送信され、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のOFF状態のサブフレームで送信されない、と想定する。端末装置1は、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態のサブフレームで送信され、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のOFF状態のサブフレームで送信されない、と想定する。言い換えると、端末装置1は、基地局装置3がON状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいてチャネル測定を行い、基地局装置3がON状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいて干渉測定を行う。これにより、基地局装置3は、OFF状態の場合、端末装置1におけるCSI測定のための参照信号を止めることができる。 As an example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement only when the base station device 3 is ON, and transmits a reference signal for interference measurement only when the base station device 3 is ON. Assume that That is, the terminal device 1 transmits the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose The terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for CSI measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state.
 別の一例として、端末装置1は、CSI測定において、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態でのみ送信され、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態で送信される、と想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態のサブフレームで送信され、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のOFF状態のサブフレームで送信されない、と想定する。端末装置1は、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームで送信される、と想定する。言い換えると、端末装置1は、基地局装置3がON状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいてチャネル測定を行い、基地局装置3がON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいて干渉測定を行う。これにより、基地局装置3は、OFF状態の場合、端末装置1におけるチャネル測定のための参照信号を止めることができる。また、端末装置1は基地局装置3がON状態またはOFF状態に関わらず干渉測定が可能であるため、端末装置1が干渉測定において時間方向に平均化などの処理を行う場合、その処理の精度が向上できる。 As another example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement only when the base station device 3 is in an ON state, and the reference signal for interference measurement is an ON state of the base station device 3 and Assume that it is transmitted in the OFF state. That is, the terminal device 1 transmits the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit the reference signal for channel measurement in the subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose The terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the reference signal for interference measurement is transmitted in the ON frame and the OFF state subframe of the base station apparatus 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state, and the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe of the frame. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for channel measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform interference measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in interference measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.
 別の一例として、端末装置1は、CSI測定において、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態で送信され、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態でのみ送信される、と想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームで送信される、と想定する。端末装置1は、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態のサブフレームで送信され、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のOFF状態のサブフレームで送信されない、と想定する。言い換えると、端末装置1は、基地局装置3がON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいてチャネル測定を行い、基地局装置3がON状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいて干渉測定を行なう。これにより、基地局装置3は、OFF状態の場合、端末装置1における干渉測定のための参照信号を止めることができる。また、端末装置1は基地局装置3がON状態またはOFF状態に関わらずチャネル測定が可能であるため、端末装置1がチャネル測定において時間方向に平均化などの処理を行う場合、その処理の精度が向上できる。 As another example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement when the base station device 3 is in an ON state and an OFF state, and a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3. Assume that it is sent only in the state. That is, terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted in subframes of base station apparatus 3 in the ON state and the OFF state. The terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the ON state of the base station device 3, and does not transmit a reference signal for interference measurement in a subframe in the OFF state of the base station device 3. Suppose. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state, and the substation in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe of the frame. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can stop the reference signal for the interference measurement in the terminal device 1 in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform channel measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in channel measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.
 別の一例として、端末装置1は、CSI測定において、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態で送信され、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態で送信される、と想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、チャネル測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームで送信される、と想定する。端末装置1は、干渉測定のための参照信号が基地局装置3のON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームで送信される、と想定する。言い換えると、端末装置1は、基地局装置3がON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいてチャネル測定を行ない、基地局装置3がON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレームのうち所定のサブフレームで送信される参照信号に基づいて干渉測定を行う。これにより、基地局装置3は、OFF状態において、参照以外の信号およびチャネルの送信を止めた場合でも、端末装置1におけるCSI測定が可能となる。また、端末装置1は基地局装置3がON状態またはOFF状態に関わらずCSI測定が可能であるため、端末装置1が干渉測定において時間方向に平均化などの処理を行う場合、その処理の精度が向上できる。 As another example, in the CSI measurement, the terminal device 1 transmits a reference signal for channel measurement when the base station device 3 is in an ON state and an OFF state, and a reference signal for interference measurement is the ON signal of the base station device 3. Suppose that it is sent in state and off state. That is, terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a reference signal for channel measurement is transmitted in subframes of base station apparatus 3 in the ON state and the OFF state. The terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the reference signal for interference measurement is transmitted in the ON frame and the OFF state subframe of the base station apparatus 3. In other words, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among the subframes in which the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state, and the base station device 3 is in the ON state and the OFF state. Interference measurement is performed based on a reference signal transmitted in a predetermined subframe among subframes in a state. Thereby, the base station apparatus 3 can perform CSI measurement in the terminal apparatus 1 even when transmission of signals and channels other than the reference is stopped in the OFF state. Further, since the terminal device 1 can perform CSI measurement regardless of whether the base station device 3 is in the ON state or the OFF state, when the terminal device 1 performs processing such as averaging in the time direction in interference measurement, the accuracy of the processing Can be improved.
 以下では、チャネル測定および干渉測定のための参照信号の具体的な例を説明する。 Hereinafter, specific examples of reference signals for channel measurement and interference measurement will be described.
 所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1において、その端末装置1は、CQIの値を計算するためのチャネル測定を行う。そのCQIの値は、所定のサブフレームで報告され、あるCSIプロセスに対応する。そのチャネル測定は、そのCSIプロセスに関連付けられたCSI-RSリソースの設定における非ゼロパワーCSI-RSのみに基づいて行われる。もし、そのCSIプロセスにおいて、その所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1に対して、ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータが上位レイヤーによって設定される場合、ON状態のサブフレーム以内のCSI-RSリソースがそのチャネル測定を行うために用いられる。 In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The channel measurement is based only on non-zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of CSI-RS resources associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, the RRC parameter related to the ON state and the OFF state is set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the CSI-RS within the ON state subframe is set. Resources are used to make that channel measurement.
 所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1において、その端末装置1は、CQIの値を計算するためのチャネル測定を行う。そのCQIの値は、所定のサブフレームで報告され、あるCSIプロセスに対応する。そのチャネル測定は、そのCSIプロセスに関連付けられたCSI-RSリソースの設定における非ゼロパワーCSI-RSのみに基づいて行われる。もし、そのCSIプロセスにおいて、その所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1に対して、ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータが上位レイヤーによって設定される場合、ON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレーム以内のCSI-RSリソースがそのチャネル測定を行うために用いられる。 In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs channel measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The channel measurement is based only on non-zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of CSI-RS resources associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the sub-frame within the ON state and the OFF state CSI-RS resources are used to make that channel measurement.
 所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1において、その端末装置1は、CQIの値を計算するための干渉測定を行う。そのCQIの値は、所定のサブフレームで報告され、あるCSIプロセスに対応する。その干渉測定は、そのCSIプロセスに関連付けられたCSI-IMリソースの設定におけるゼロパワーCSI-RSのみに基づいて行われる。もし、そのCSIプロセスにおいて、その所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1に対して、CSIサブフレームセットが上位レイヤーによって設定される場合、CSI参照リソースに属するサブフレームのサブセット以内のCSI-IMリソースがその干渉測定を行うために用いられる。もし、そのCSIプロセスにおいて、その所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1に対して、ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータが上位レイヤーによって設定される場合、ON状態のサブフレーム以内のCSI-RSリソースがその干渉測定を行うために用いられる。 In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs interference measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The interference measurement is based only on the zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of the CSI-IM resource associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, a CSI subframe set is set by an upper layer for the terminal device 1 set in the predetermined transmission mode, a CSI-IM within a subset of subframes belonging to the CSI reference resource Resources are used to make that interference measurement. If, in the CSI process, the RRC parameter related to the ON state and the OFF state is set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the CSI-RS within the ON state subframe is set. Resources are used to make that interference measurement.
 所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1において、その端末装置1は、CQIの値を計算するための干渉測定を行う。そのCQIの値は、所定のサブフレームで報告され、あるCSIプロセスに対応する。その干渉測定は、そのCSIプロセスに関連付けられたCSI-IMリソースの設定におけるゼロパワーCSI-RSのみに基づいて行われる。もし、そのCSIプロセスにおいて、その所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1に対して、CSIサブフレームセットが上位レイヤーによって設定される場合、CSI参照リソースに属するサブフレームのサブセット以内のCSI-IMリソースがその干渉測定を行うために用いられる。もし、そのCSIプロセスにおいて、その所定の送信モードに設定された端末装置1に対して、ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータが上位レイヤーによって設定される場合、ON状態およびOFF状態のサブフレーム以内のCSI-RSリソースがその干渉測定を行うために用いられる。 In the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the terminal device 1 performs interference measurement for calculating the CQI value. The CQI value is reported in a given subframe and corresponds to a CSI process. The interference measurement is based only on the zero power CSI-RS in the configuration of the CSI-IM resource associated with the CSI process. If, in the CSI process, a CSI subframe set is set by an upper layer for the terminal device 1 set in the predetermined transmission mode, a CSI-IM within a subset of subframes belonging to the CSI reference resource Resources are used to make that interference measurement. If, in the CSI process, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set by the upper layer for the terminal device 1 set to the predetermined transmission mode, the sub-frame within the ON state and the OFF state CSI-RS resources are used to make the interference measurements.
 なお、本実施形態の説明において、ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータは、上位レイヤーで設定される。ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータの設定は、セル状態情報のための設定とも呼称される。セル状態情報のための設定は、物理レイヤーで明示的または黙示的に通知されるセル状態情報のために用いられる。例えば、セル状態情報のための設定は、物理レイヤーで明示的または黙示的に通知されるセル状態情報を受信するために必要な情報を含む。セル状態情報のための設定は、CSIプロセス毎に個別に設定できる。セル状態情報のための設定は、CSIサブフレームセット毎に個別に設定できる。 In the description of the present embodiment, RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set in the upper layer. The setting of the RRC parameter regarding the ON state and the OFF state is also referred to as setting for cell state information. The setting for cell state information is used for cell state information that is explicitly or implicitly notified in the physical layer. For example, the configuration for cell state information includes information necessary for receiving cell state information that is explicitly or implicitly notified in the physical layer. The settings for cell state information can be set individually for each CSI process. The setting for cell state information can be individually set for each CSI subframe set.
 CSIプロセスは、上位レイヤーで端末装置1に固有の情報として設定される。端末装置1は、1つ以上のCSIプロセスが設定され、そのCSIプロセスの設定に基づいてCSI測定およびCSI報告を行う。例えば、端末装置1は、複数のCSIプロセスが設定された場合、それらのCSIプロセスに基づく複数のCSIを独立に報告する。それぞれのCSIプロセスは、セル状態情報のための設定、CSIプロセスの識別子、CSI-RSに関する設定情報、CSI-IMに関する設定情報、CSI報告のために設定されるサブフレームパターン、周期的なCSI報告に関する設定情報、および/または、非周期的なCSI報告に関する設定情報を含む。なお、セル状態情報のための設定は、複数のCSIプロセスに対して共通であってもよい。 The CSI process is set as information unique to the terminal device 1 in the upper layer. The terminal device 1 is set with one or more CSI processes, and performs CSI measurement and CSI reporting based on the settings of the CSI processes. For example, when a plurality of CSI processes are set, the terminal device 1 independently reports a plurality of CSIs based on those CSI processes. Each CSI process is configured for cell state information, CSI process identifier, CSI-RS configuration information, CSI-IM configuration information, subframe pattern configured for CSI report, and periodic CSI report. And / or configuration information regarding aperiodic CSI reporting. Note that the settings for cell state information may be common to multiple CSI processes.
 以下では、あるサービングセルにおけるCSI参照リソースの詳細を説明する。 Hereinafter, details of CSI reference resources in a serving cell will be described.
 CSI参照リソースは、端末装置1がCSI測定を行うために用いられるリソースである。例えば、端末装置1は、CSI参照リソースで示される下りリンク物理リソースブロックのグループを用いて、PDSCHが送信される場合のCSIを測定する。CSIサブフレームセットが上位レイヤーで設定された場合、それぞれのCSI参照リソースは、CSIサブフレームセットのいずれかに属し、CSIサブフレームセットの両方に属しない。 The CSI reference resource is a resource used for the terminal device 1 to perform CSI measurement. For example, the terminal device 1 measures the CSI when the PDSCH is transmitted using the group of downlink physical resource blocks indicated by the CSI reference resource. When the CSI subframe set is configured in an upper layer, each CSI reference resource belongs to one of the CSI subframe sets and does not belong to both of the CSI subframe sets.
 周波数方向において、CSI参照リソースは、求められるCQIの値に関連するバンドに対応する下りリンク物理リソースブロックのグループによって定義される。 In the frequency direction, a CSI reference resource is defined by a group of downlink physical resource blocks corresponding to a band related to a required CQI value.
 レイヤー方向(空間方向)において、CSI参照リソースは、求められるCQIが条件をつけるRIおよびPMIによって定義される。言い換えると、レイヤー方向(空間方向)において、CSI参照リソースは、CQIを求める時に想定または生成されたRIおよびPMIによって定義される。 In the layer direction (spatial direction), the CSI reference resource is defined by RI and PMI on which the required CQI is conditional. In other words, in the layer direction (spatial direction), the CSI reference resource is defined by the RI and PMI assumed or generated when obtaining the CQI.
 時間方向において、CSI参照リソースは、所定の1つの下りリンクサブフレームによって定義される。具体的には、CSI参照リソースは、CSI報告するサブフレームより所定のサブフレーム数前のサブフレームによって定義される。CSI参照リソースを定義する所定のサブフレーム数は、送信モード、フレーム構成タイプ、設定されるCSIプロセスの数、および/または、CSI報告モードなどに基づいて決まる。例えば、端末装置1に対して、1つのCSIプロセスと周期的なCSI報告のモードが設定される場合、CSI参照リソースを定義する所定のサブフレーム数は、有効な下りリンクサブフレームのうち、4以上の最小値である。 In the time direction, the CSI reference resource is defined by one predetermined downlink subframe. Specifically, the CSI reference resource is defined by a subframe that is a predetermined number of subframes before the subframe that reports CSI. The predetermined number of subframes defining the CSI reference resource is determined based on the transmission mode, the frame configuration type, the number of CSI processes to be configured, and / or the CSI reporting mode. For example, when one CSI process and a periodic CSI report mode are set for the terminal device 1, the predetermined number of subframes defining the CSI reference resource is 4 out of valid downlink subframes. This is the minimum value.
 以下では、有効な下りリンクサブフレームの詳細を説明する。 In the following, details of valid downlink subframes will be described.
 あるサービングセルにおける下りリンクサブフレームは、以下の条件の一部または全部が当てはまる場合、有効であると考えられる。条件の1つとして、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、ON状態およびOFF状態に関するRRCパラメータが設定される端末装置1において、ON状態のサブフレームである。条件の1つとして、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、端末装置1において下りリンクサブフレームとして設定される。条件の1つとして、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、所定の送信モードにおいて、MBSFN(Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network)サブフレームではない。条件の1つとして、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、端末装置1に設定された測定間隔(measurement gap)の範囲に含まれない。条件の1つとして、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、周期的なCSI報告において、端末装置1にCSIサブフレームセットが設定される時、周期的なCSI報告にリンクされるCSIサブフレームセットの要素または一部である。条件の1つとして、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、CSIプロセスに対する非周期的CSI報告において、上りリンクのDCIフォーマット内の対応するCSIリクエストを伴う下りリンクサブフレームにリンクされるCSIサブフレームセットの要素または一部である。その条件において、端末装置1に所定の送信モードと、複数のCSIプロセスと、CSIプロセスに対するCSIサブフレームセットとが設定される。 A downlink subframe in a certain serving cell is considered to be effective when some or all of the following conditions apply. As one of the conditions, an effective downlink subframe is an ON state subframe in the terminal device 1 in which RRC parameters related to the ON state and the OFF state are set. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is set as a downlink subframe in the terminal device 1. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is not an MBSFN (Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network) subframe in a predetermined transmission mode. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is not included in the range of the measurement interval (measurement) gap) set in the terminal device 1. As one of the conditions, the effective downlink subframe is an element of the CSI subframe set linked to the periodic CSI report when the CSI subframe set is set in the terminal device 1 in the periodic CSI report. Or part. As one of the conditions, a valid downlink subframe is a CSI subframe set linked to a downlink subframe with a corresponding CSI request in the uplink DCI format in an aperiodic CSI report for the CSI process. It is an element or part. Under the conditions, a predetermined transmission mode, a plurality of CSI processes, and a CSI subframe set for the CSI process are set in the terminal device 1.
 また、あるサービングセル内のCSI参照リソースのための有効な下りリンクサブフレームが存在しない場合、そのサービングセルにおけるCSI報告は対応する上りリンクサブフレームで除外される。すなわち、有効な下りリンクサブフレームがON状態のサブフレームであることが条件である場合、端末装置1は、OFF状態のサブフレームは有効な下りリンクサブフレームではないと想定する。 Also, when there is no valid downlink subframe for the CSI reference resource in a certain serving cell, the CSI report in that serving cell is excluded in the corresponding uplink subframe. That is, when it is a condition that a valid downlink subframe is a subframe in an ON state, the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that a subframe in an OFF state is not a valid downlink subframe.
 また、基地局装置3(サービングセル)がOFF状態になった場合、端末装置1は、それ以前のON状態のサブフレームを含む全てのサブフレームは、有効な下りリンクサブフレームではないと想定してもよい。すなわち、基地局装置3(サービングセル)がOFF状態になった場合、端末装置1は、有効な下りリンクサブフレームは、その後にON状態になったサブフレームまたはON状態を通知したサブフレーム以降の所定のサブフレームであると想定する。 In addition, when the base station device 3 (serving cell) is in the OFF state, the terminal device 1 assumes that all subframes including the previous ON state subframe are not valid downlink subframes. Also good. That is, when the base station apparatus 3 (serving cell) is in the OFF state, the terminal apparatus 1 determines that the effective downlink subframe is a predetermined subframe after the subframe in which the ON state is notified or the ON state is notified thereafter. Are assumed to be subframes of
 また、OFF状態のサブフレームであっても、端末装置1は、有効な下りリンクサブフレームであるための条件としてもよい。すなわち、端末装置1は、有効な下りリンクサブフレームであるかどうかは、ON状態またはOFF状態のサブフレームに関わらず決定してもよい。 Also, even if the subframe is in an OFF state, the terminal device 1 may use a condition for being a valid downlink subframe. That is, the terminal device 1 may determine whether or not it is a valid downlink subframe regardless of the subframe in the ON state or the OFF state.
 また、端末装置1は、ON状態のサブフレームと、OFF状態の一部のサブフレームとが、有効な下りリンクサブフレームであるための条件としてもよい。OFF状態の一部のサブフレームは、予め規定された所定のサブフレーム、基地局装置3固有に設定される所定のサブフレーム、または端末装置1固有に設定されるサブフレームである。例えば、OFF状態の一部のサブフレームは、所定のサブフレームと、その所定のサブフレームから所定数前のサブフレームとの間のサブフレームである。例えば、その所定のサブフレームは、ON状態になったサブフレームまたはON状態を通知したサブフレームである。その所定のサブフレームは、CSIリクエストが含まれるDCIフォーマットを受信したサブフレームである。その所定のサブフレームは、CSI報告するサブフレームである。 Also, the terminal device 1 may use conditions for the subframes in the ON state and some subframes in the OFF state to be valid downlink subframes. Some subframes in the OFF state are predetermined subframes defined in advance, predetermined subframes set specifically for the base station apparatus 3, or subframes set specific to the terminal apparatus 1. For example, some subframes in the OFF state are subframes between a predetermined subframe and a predetermined number of subframes before the predetermined subframe. For example, the predetermined subframe is a subframe that is in the ON state or a subframe that has notified the ON state. The predetermined subframe is a subframe that has received the DCI format including the CSI request. The predetermined subframe is a subframe for CSI reporting.
 以下では、基地局装置3のセル状態(ON状態またはOFF状態)の通知方法の具体的な一例を説明する。 Hereinafter, a specific example of the cell state (ON state or OFF state) notification method of the base station apparatus 3 will be described.
 基地局装置3は、端末装置1に対して、RRCのシグナリングを通じて、セル状態情報に関する設定を行う。基地局装置3は、端末装置1に設定されたセル状態情報に関する設定に基づいて、所定の方法によりセル状態を通知する。端末装置1は、基地局装置3から、RRCのシグナリングを通じて、セル状態情報に関して設定される。端末装置1は、基地局装置3から設定されたセル状態情報に関する設定に基づいて、所定の方法によりセル状態を認識する。 The base station apparatus 3 performs settings related to cell state information for the terminal apparatus 1 through RRC signaling. The base station device 3 notifies the cell state by a predetermined method based on the setting related to the cell state information set in the terminal device 1. The terminal apparatus 1 is set with respect to cell state information from the base station apparatus 3 through RRC signaling. The terminal device 1 recognizes the cell state by a predetermined method based on the setting related to the cell state information set from the base station device 3.
 セル状態を通知する方法は、明示的な方法または黙示的な方法である。一例として、セル状態は、PDCCHまたはEPDCCHで送信されるDCIを用いて通知されるセル状態情報に基づいて、明示的に通知される。例えば、端末装置1は、セル状態情報が1を示す場合はON状態であり、セル状態情報が0を示す場合はOFF状態であると認識する。別の一例として、セル状態は、参照信号の有無に基づいて黙示的に通知される。参照信号の有無は、参照信号の受信電力または受信レベルと、所定のしきい値との比較によって決まる。別の一例として、セル状態は、DRXの設定または手順に基づいて黙示的に通知される。例えば、端末装置1は、非DRX期間ではON状態であり、DRX期間ではOFF状態であると認識する。別の一例として、セル状態は、MACレイヤーで通知されるセルの活性化(Activation)または非活性化(Deactivation)に基づいて、黙示的に通知される。例えば、端末装置1は、セルの活性化(Activation)の期間ではON状態であり、セルの活性化(Activation)の期間ではOFF状態であると認識する。 The method for notifying the cell state is an explicit method or an implicit method. As an example, the cell state is explicitly notified based on cell state information notified using DCI transmitted by PDCCH or EPDCCH. For example, the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state when the cell state information indicates 1 and is in the OFF state when the cell state information indicates 0. As another example, the cell state is notified implicitly based on the presence or absence of a reference signal. The presence or absence of the reference signal is determined by comparing the reception power or reception level of the reference signal with a predetermined threshold value. As another example, cell status is reported implicitly based on DRX configuration or procedure. For example, the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state during the non-DRX period and is in the OFF state during the DRX period. As another example, the cell state is notified implicitly based on cell activation (Activation) or deactivation (Deactivation) notified in the MAC layer. For example, the terminal device 1 recognizes that it is in the ON state during the cell activation period and is in the OFF state during the cell activation period.
 セル状態情報に関する設定は、端末装置1がセル状態を認識するために用いられる情報が設定される。例えば、セル状態情報に関する設定は、セル状態情報が通知されるPDCCHまたはEPDCCHを受信またはモニタリングするために用いられる情報として、サブフレーム情報、サーチスペースに関する情報、RNTIに関する情報などを含む。セル状態情報に関する設定は、参照信号の有無を認識するために用いられる情報として、参照信号に関する情報、仮想セル識別子、所定のしきい値、サブフレーム情報などを含む。 The setting related to the cell state information is information used for the terminal device 1 to recognize the cell state. For example, the setting related to cell state information includes subframe information, information related to search space, information related to RNTI, and the like as information used to receive or monitor PDCCH or EPDCCH for which cell state information is notified. The setting related to the cell state information includes information related to the reference signal, a virtual cell identifier, a predetermined threshold, subframe information, and the like as information used to recognize the presence or absence of the reference signal.
 以下では、端末装置1におけるセル状態の通知の認識の詳細を説明する。 Hereinafter, details of the recognition of the cell state notification in the terminal device 1 will be described.
 一例として、端末装置1におけるセル状態の通知の認識は、セル状態情報を通知するDCIを含むPDCCHまたはEPDCCHに付加される巡回冗長検査(Cyclic redundancy check; CRC)に基づいて行われる。例えば、巡回冗長検査で得られる値が正しくなかった場合、端末装置1はセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかったと判断する。 As an example, the terminal apparatus 1 recognizes the cell state notification based on a cyclic redundancy check (CCR) added to the PDCCH or EPDCCH including the DCI that notifies the cell state information. For example, when the value obtained by the cyclic redundancy check is not correct, the terminal device 1 determines that the notification of the cell state has not been recognized (detected).
 別の一例として、端末装置1におけるセル状態の通知の認識は、参照信号の受信電力または受信レベルが所定のしきい値の範囲内であるかどうかに基づいて行われる。例えば、第1のしきい値と、第1のしきい値より大きい第2のしきい値とが規定または設定され、参照信号の受信電力または受信レベルが第1のしきい値から第2のしきい値までの範囲内であれば、端末装置1はセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかったと判断する。また、参照信号の受信電力または受信レベルが第1のしきい値より低い場合、端末装置1はOFF状態であると判断する。参照信号の受信電力または受信レベルが第2のしきい値より高い場合、端末装置1はON状態であると判断する。 As another example, the notification of the cell state notification in the terminal device 1 is performed based on whether the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is within a predetermined threshold range. For example, a first threshold value and a second threshold value greater than the first threshold value are defined or set, and the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is changed from the first threshold value to the second threshold value. If it is within the range up to the threshold value, the terminal device 1 determines that the notification of the cell state could not be recognized (detected). Further, when the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is lower than the first threshold value, it is determined that the terminal device 1 is in the OFF state. When the reception power or reception level of the reference signal is higher than the second threshold value, it is determined that the terminal device 1 is in the ON state.
 以下では、端末装置1がセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかった場合の処理(動作)について説明する。 Hereinafter, a process (operation) when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the notification of the cell state will be described.
 一例として、あるサブフレームにおいて端末装置1がセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかった場合、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、OFF状態であると想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、OFF状態が通知された場合と同じ処理を行なう。 As an example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is assumed to be in the OFF state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. . That is, the terminal device 1 performs the same process as when the OFF state is notified until the next subframe where the notification of the next cell state is performed.
 一例として、あるサブフレームにおいて端末装置1がセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかった場合、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、ON状態であると想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、ON状態が通知された場合と同じ処理を行う。 As an example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is assumed to be in the ON state until the subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. . That is, the terminal device 1 performs the same processing as when the ON state is notified until the subframe where the next cell state notification is performed.
 一例として、あるサブフレームにおいて端末装置1がセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかった場合、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、ON状態またはOFF状態とは異なる状態であると想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、ON状態またはOFF状態が通知された場合と異なる処理を行う。 As an example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is in the ON state or the OFF state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. Assume different states. That is, the terminal device 1 performs a process different from the case where the ON state or the OFF state is notified until the next subframe where the notification of the next cell state is performed.
 例えば、ON状態またはOFF状態とは異なる状態であるサブフレームにおいて、端末装置1は、下りリンクサブフレームがON状態であり、上りリンクサブフレームがOFF状態であると想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、一部または全部の下りリンクの信号および/またはチャネルの受信またはモニタリングを行い、一部または全部の上りリンクの信号および/またはチャネルの送信は行わない。例えば、端末装置1は、参照信号の受信、PDCCHのモニタリングおよび/またはEPDCCHのモニタリングを行い、周期的なCSI報告および/またはSRSの送信は行わない。 For example, in a subframe that is different from the ON state or the OFF state, the terminal apparatus 1 assumes that the downlink subframe is in the ON state and the uplink subframe is in the OFF state. That is, the terminal device 1 receives or monitors a part or all of the downlink signals and / or channels, and does not transmit part or all of the uplink signals and / or channels. For example, the terminal device 1 performs reception of a reference signal, PDCCH monitoring, and / or EPDCCH monitoring, and does not perform periodic CSI reporting and / or SRS transmission.
 例えば、ON状態またはOFF状態とは異なる状態であるサブフレームにおいて、端末装置1は、下りリンクサブフレームがOFF状態であり、上りリンクサブフレームがON状態であると想定する。すなわち、端末装置1は、一部または全部の下りリンクの信号および/またはチャネルの受信またはモニタリングを行わず、一部または全部の上りリンクの信号および/またはチャネルの送信は行う。例えば、端末装置1は、参照信号の受信、PDCCHのモニタリングおよび/またはEPDCCHのモニタリングを行わず、周期的なCSI報告および/またはSRSの送信は行う。 For example, in a subframe that is different from the ON state or the OFF state, the terminal device 1 assumes that the downlink subframe is in the OFF state and the uplink subframe is in the ON state. That is, the terminal device 1 does not receive or monitor a part or all of the downlink signals and / or channels, and transmits part or all of the uplink signals and / or channels. For example, the terminal device 1 does not receive the reference signal, monitor the PDCCH, and / or monitor the EPDCCH, and performs periodic CSI report and / or SRS transmission.
 例えば、ON状態またはOFF状態とは異なる状態であるサブフレームにおいて、端末装置1は、ON状態とは異なる所定のPDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHのモニタリングを行う。所定のPDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHは、ON状態とは異なる所定のサーチスペースでモニタリングされる。所定のPDCCHおよび/またはEPDCCHは、ON状態とは異なる所定のRNTIでスクランブルされたCRCが付加される。 For example, in a subframe that is in a state different from the ON state or the OFF state, the terminal device 1 monitors a predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH that is different from the ON state. The predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH is monitored in a predetermined search space different from the ON state. A CRC scrambled with a predetermined RNTI different from the ON state is added to the predetermined PDCCH and / or EPDCCH.
 以上の説明では、あるサブフレームにおいて端末装置1がセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかった場合、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームまで、所定の状態であると想定することを説明したが、それに限定されるものではない。例えば、あるサブフレームにおいて端末装置1がセル状態の通知を認識(検出)できなかった場合、端末装置1は、次のセル状態の通知が示すセル状態を適用するサブフレームまで、所定の状態であると想定してもよい。これにより、セル状態の通知が行われるサブフレームと、その通知により示されるセル状態が適用されるサブフレームとが独立に規定または設定できる。 In the above description, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 is in a predetermined state until the next subframe in which the next cell state notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the terminal device 1 cannot recognize (detect) the cell state notification in a certain subframe, the terminal device 1 remains in a predetermined state until the subframe to which the cell state indicated by the next cell state notification is applied. You may assume that there is. Thereby, the subframe in which the cell state is notified and the subframe to which the cell state indicated by the notification is applied can be defined or set independently.
 本実施形態において説明した様々な方法、手順、設定、および/または処理は、デュアルコネクティビティにおいて、PcellとpScellとで独立であってもよい。 The various methods, procedures, settings, and / or processes described in the present embodiment may be independent between the Pcell and the pScell in dual connectivity.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、上りリンクCoMPを行なう機能(ul-CoMP)がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing uplink CoMP (ul-CoMP).
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、バンドコンビネーション(CA, non-CA)を行なう機能(supportedBandCombination, supportedBandListEUTRA)がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function (supportedBandCombination, supportedBandListEUTRA) for performing a band combination (CA, non-CA).
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、クロスキャリアスケジューリングを行なう機能(crossCarrierScheduling)がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing cross carrier scheduling (crossCarrierScheduling).
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、複数のタイミングアドバンスの機能(multipleTimingAdvance)がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a plurality of timing advance functions (multipleTimingAdvance).
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、CSIプロセスの機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support the function of the CSI process.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、異なるTDD UL-DL設定のセル(複数のセル)を用いて、通信を行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using cells (plural cells) having different TDD UL-DL settings.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、eIMTAを行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing eIMTA.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、スモールセルを用いて通信を行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using a small cell.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、複数の基地局装置と同時に通信を行なう機能(dual-connectivity)がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function (dual-connectivity) for performing communication simultaneously with a plurality of base station devices.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、異なるフレーム構造タイプのセル(複数のセル)を用いて、通信を行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of performing communication using cells (a plurality of cells) of different frame structure types.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、同時に送受信を行なう機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support the function of simultaneously transmitting and receiving.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、EPDCCHを受信する機能がサポートされてもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may support a function of receiving the EPDCCH.
 上記の実施形態における端末装置1は、上記サポートされた機能を示す情報(UE-EUTRA-capabilityやFeatureGroupIndicator)を基地局装置3に送信してもよい。 The terminal device 1 in the above embodiment may transmit information (UE-EUTRA-capability or FeatureGroupIndicator) indicating the supported function to the base station device 3.
 上記の実施形態において、PDCCHサブフレームは、PDCCHを伴うサブフレームとして定義されるだけでなく、EPDCCH(Enhanced PDCCH)やR-PDCCH(Relay-PDCCH)を伴うサブフレームとして定義されてもよい。 In the above embodiment, the PDCCH subframe may be defined not only as a subframe accompanied by PDCCH, but also as a subframe accompanied by EPDCCH (Enhanced PDCCH) or R-PDCCH (Relay-PDCCH).
 上記の実施形態の詳細により、基地局装置3と端末装置1が通信する無線通信システムにおいて、伝送効率を向上させることができる。 According to the details of the above embodiment, transmission efficiency can be improved in the wireless communication system in which the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 communicate.
 本発明に関わる基地局装置3、および端末装置1で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる上記実施形態の機能を実現するように、CPU(Central Processing Unit)等を制御するプログラム(コンピュータを機能させるプログラム)であっても良い。そして、これら装置で取り扱われる情報は、その処理時に一時的にRAM(Random Access Memory)に蓄積され、その後、Flash ROM(Read Only Memory)などの各種ROMやHDD(Hard Disk Drive)に格納され、必要に応じてCPUによって読み出し、修正・書き込みが行われる。 A program that operates in the base station device 3 and the terminal device 1 related to the present invention is a program that controls a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or the like (a computer is functioned) so as to realize the functions of the above-described embodiments related to the present invention Program). Information handled by these devices is temporarily stored in RAM (Random Access Memory) during processing, and then stored in various ROMs such as Flash ROM (Read Only Memory) and HDD (Hard Disk Drive). Reading, correction, and writing are performed by the CPU as necessary.
 なお、上述した実施形態における端末装置1、基地局装置3の一部、をコンピュータで実現するようにしても良い。その場合、この制御機能を実現するためのプログラムをコンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録して、この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行することによって実現しても良い。 Note that the terminal device 1 and a part of the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may be realized by a computer. In that case, the program for realizing the control function may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium may be read by the computer system and executed.
 なお、ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、端末装置1、又は基地局装置3に内蔵されたコンピュータシステムであって、OSや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。また、「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、フレキシブルディスク、光磁気ディスク、ROM、CD-ROM等の可搬媒体、コンピュータシステムに内蔵されるハードディスク等の記憶装置のことをいう。 The “computer system” here is a computer system built in the terminal device 1 or the base station device 3 and includes hardware such as an OS and peripheral devices. The “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a storage device such as a flexible medium, a magneto-optical disk, a portable medium such as a ROM or a CD-ROM, and a hard disk incorporated in a computer system.
 さらに「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、インターネット等のネットワークや電話回線等の通信回線を介してプログラムを送信する場合の通信線のように、短時間、動的にプログラムを保持するもの、その場合のサーバやクライアントとなるコンピュータシステム内部の揮発性メモリのように、一定時間プログラムを保持しているものも含んでも良い。また上記プログラムは、前述した機能の一部を実現するためのものであっても良く、さらに前述した機能をコンピュータシステムにすでに記録されているプログラムとの組み合わせで実現できるものであっても良い。 Furthermore, the “computer-readable recording medium” is a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, such as a communication line when transmitting a program via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line, In such a case, a volatile memory inside a computer system serving as a server or a client may be included and a program that holds a program for a certain period of time. The program may be a program for realizing a part of the functions described above, and may be a program capable of realizing the functions described above in combination with a program already recorded in a computer system.
 また、上述した実施形態における基地局装置3は、複数の装置から構成される集合体(装置グループ)として実現することもできる。装置グループを構成する装置の各々は、上述した実施形態に関わる基地局装置3の各機能または各機能ブロックの一部、または、全部を備えてもよい。装置グループとして、基地局装置3の一通りの各機能または各機能ブロックを有していればよい。また、上述した実施形態に関わる端末装置1は、集合体としての基地局装置3と通信することも可能である。 Also, the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment can be realized as an aggregate (device group) composed of a plurality of devices. Each of the devices constituting the device group may include a part or all of each function or each functional block of the base station device 3 according to the above-described embodiment. The device group only needs to have one function or each function block of the base station device 3. The terminal device 1 according to the above-described embodiment can also communicate with the base station device 3 as an aggregate.
 また、上述した実施形態における基地局装置3は、EUTRAN(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)であってもよい。また、上述した実施形態における基地局装置3は、eNodeBに対する上位ノードの機能の一部または全部を有してもよい。 Further, the base station apparatus 3 in the above-described embodiment may be EUTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network). In addition, the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may have a part or all of the functions of the upper node for the eNodeB.
 また、上述した実施形態における端末装置1、基地局装置3の一部、又は全部を典型的には集積回路であるLSIとして実現してもよいし、チップセットとして実現してもよい。端末装置1、基地局装置3の各機能ブロックは個別にチップ化してもよいし、一部、又は全部を集積してチップ化してもよい。また、集積回路化の手法はLSIに限らず専用回路、又は汎用プロセッサで実現しても良い。また、半導体技術の進歩によりLSIに代替する集積回路化の技術が出現した場合、当該技術による集積回路を用いることも可能である。 In addition, a part or all of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 in the above-described embodiment may be realized as an LSI that is typically an integrated circuit, or may be realized as a chip set. Each functional block of the terminal device 1 and the base station device 3 may be individually chipped, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a chip. Further, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. In addition, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces LSI appears due to progress in semiconductor technology, an integrated circuit based on the technology can also be used.
 また、上述した実施形態では、端末装置もしくは通信装置の一例として端末装置を記載したが、本願発明は、これに限定されるものではなく、屋内外に設置される据え置き型、または非可動型の電子機器、たとえば、AV機器、キッチン機器、掃除・洗濯機器、空調機器、オフィス機器、自動販売機、その他生活機器などの端末装置もしくは通信装置にも適用出来る。 In the above-described embodiment, the terminal device is described as an example of the terminal device or the communication device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a stationary type or a non-movable type installed indoors and outdoors. The present invention can also be applied to terminal devices or communication devices such as electronic devices such as AV devices, kitchen devices, cleaning / washing devices, air conditioning devices, office devices, vending machines, and other daily life devices.
 以上、この発明の実施形態に関して図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計変更等も含まれる。また、本発明は、請求項に示した範囲で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を適宜組み合わせて得られる実施形態についても本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。また、上記各実施形態に記載された要素であり、同様の効果を奏する要素同士を置換した構成も含まれる。 As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and includes design changes and the like without departing from the gist of the present invention. The present invention can be modified in various ways within the scope of the claims, and embodiments obtained by appropriately combining technical means disclosed in different embodiments are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. Moreover, it is the element described in each said embodiment, and the structure which substituted the element which has the same effect is also contained.
 (1)本発明の目的を達成するために、本発明は、以下のような手段を講じた。すなわち、本実施形態の端末装置は、第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングと、第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングの切り替えに関連する所定の上位層パラメータを受信することを特徴としている。 (1) In order to achieve the object of the present invention, the present invention has taken the following measures. That is, the terminal device according to the present embodiment is characterized by receiving a predetermined higher layer parameter related to switching between the first secondary cell activation timing and the second secondary cell activation timing.
 (2)また、本実施形態の端末装置において、前記上位層パラメータを受信した場合、セカンダリーセルのセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングを、第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングから第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングに切り換える。 (2) Moreover, in the terminal device of this embodiment, when the upper layer parameter is received, the secondary cell activation timing of the secondary cell is changed from the first secondary cell activation timing to the second secondary cell activation timing. Switch.
 (3)また、本実施形態の端末装置において、前記上位層パラメータを受信した場合、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションに加え、前記セカンダリーセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)が適用される。 (3) Moreover, in the terminal device of this embodiment, when the upper layer parameter is received, ON / OFF (start / stop) of the secondary cell is applied in addition to the activation of the secondary cell.
 (4)また、本実施形態の端末装置において、前記上位層パラメータを受信した場合、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションを、前記セカンダリーセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)に切り替える。 (4) Also, in the terminal device of the present embodiment, when the upper layer parameter is received, the activation / deactivation of the secondary cell is switched to ON / OFF (start / stop) of the secondary cell.
1(1A、1B、1C) 端末装置
3 基地局装置
101 上位層処理部
103 制御部
105 受信部
107 送信部
301 上位層処理部
303 制御部
305 受信部
307 送信部
1011 無線リソース制御部
1013 サブフレーム設定部
1015 スケジューリング情報解釈部
1017 CSI報告制御部
3011 無線リソース制御部
3013 サブフレーム設定部
3015 スケジューリング部
3017 CSI報告制御部
1301 測定部
13011 第1層フィルタリング部
13012 第3層フィルタリング部
13013 リポート基準の評価部
1 (1A, 1B, 1C) Terminal apparatus 3 Base station apparatus 101 Upper layer processing section 103 Control section 105 Reception section 107 Transmission section 301 Upper layer processing section 303 Control section 305 Reception section 307 Transmission section 1011 Radio resource control section 1013 Subframe Setting unit 1015 Scheduling information interpretation unit 1017 CSI report control unit 3011 Radio resource control unit 3013 Subframe setting unit 3015 Scheduling unit 3017 CSI report control unit 1301 Measurement unit 13011 First layer filtering unit 13012 Third layer filtering unit 13013 Evaluation of report criteria Part

Claims (14)

  1.  第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングと、第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングの切り替えに関連する所定の上位層パラメータを受信する
     移動局装置。
    A mobile station apparatus that receives a predetermined upper layer parameter related to switching between a first secondary cell activation timing and a second secondary cell activation timing.
  2.  前記上位層パラメータを受信した場合、セカンダリーセルのセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングを、第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングから第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングに切り換える
     請求項1記載の移動局装置。
    The mobile station apparatus of Claim 1. When the said upper layer parameter is received, the secondary cell activation timing of a secondary cell is switched from a 1st secondary cell activation timing to a 2nd secondary cell activation timing.
  3.  前記セカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングは、前記セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを受信してから、アクティベートに対応する動作の一部または全部を適用するタイミングである
     請求項2記載の移動局装置。
    The mobile station apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the secondary cell activation timing is a timing at which a part or all of an operation corresponding to activation is applied after receiving an activation command for the secondary cell.
  4.  前記上位層パラメータを受信した場合、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションに加え、前記セカンダリーセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)が適用される
     請求項1記載の移動局装置。
    The mobile station apparatus according to claim 1, wherein when the upper layer parameter is received, ON / OFF (activation / stop) of the secondary cell is applied in addition to activation of the secondary cell.
  5.  前記アクティベーションはアクティベーションコマンドによって指示され、前記ON/OFF(起動/停止)はL1シグナリングによって指示される
     請求項4記載の移動局装置。
    The mobile station apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the activation is instructed by an activation command, and the ON / OFF (start / stop) is instructed by L1 signaling.
  6.  前記上位層パラメータを受信した場合、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションを、前記セカンダリーセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)に切り替える
     請求項1記載の移動局装置。
    The mobile station apparatus according to claim 1, wherein when the upper layer parameter is received, activation / deactivation of the secondary cell is switched to ON / OFF (activation / deactivation) of the secondary cell.
  7.  前記アクティベーション/デアクティベーションはアクティベーションコマンド/デアクティベーションコマンドによって指示され、前記ON/OFF(起動/停止)はL1シグナリングによって指示される
     請求項6記載の移動局装置。
    The mobile station apparatus according to claim 6, wherein the activation / deactivation is instructed by an activation command / deactivation command, and the ON / OFF (start / stop) is instructed by L1 signaling.
  8.  第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングと、第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングの切り替えに関連する所定の上位層パラメータを送信する
     する基地局装置。
    A base station apparatus that transmits a predetermined upper layer parameter related to switching between the first secondary cell activation timing and the second secondary cell activation timing.
  9.  前記上位層パラメータを送信した場合、セカンダリーセルのセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングを、第1のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングから第2のセカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングに切り換える
     請求項8記載の基地局装置。
    The base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein when the higher layer parameter is transmitted, the secondary cell activation timing of the secondary cell is switched from the first secondary cell activation timing to the second secondary cell activation timing.
  10.  前記セカンダリーセルアクティベーションタイミングは、前記セカンダリーセルのためのアクティベーションコマンドを送信してから、前記アクティベーションコマンドを受信した移動局装置がアクティベートに対応する動作の一部または全部を適用するタイミングである
     請求項9記載の基地局装置。
    The secondary cell activation timing is a timing at which the mobile station apparatus that receives the activation command applies a part or all of the operation corresponding to the activation after transmitting the activation command for the secondary cell. The base station apparatus according to claim 9.
  11.  前記上位層パラメータを送信した場合、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーションに加え、前記セカンダリーセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)を適用する
     請求項8記載の基地局装置。
    The base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein when the upper layer parameter is transmitted, ON / OFF (activation / stop) of the secondary cell is applied in addition to activation of the secondary cell.
  12.  前記アクティベーションはアクティベーションコマンドによって指示し、前記ON/OFF(起動/停止)はL1シグナリングによって指示する
     請求項11記載の基地局装置。
    The base station apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the activation is instructed by an activation command, and the ON / OFF (start / stop) is instructed by L1 signaling.
  13.  前記上位層パラメータを送信した場合、セカンダリーセルのアクティベーション/デアクティベーションを、前記セカンダリーセルのON/OFF(起動/停止)に切り替える
     請求項8記載の基地局装置。
    The base station apparatus according to claim 8, wherein when the upper layer parameter is transmitted, the activation / deactivation of the secondary cell is switched to ON / OFF (activation / deactivation) of the secondary cell.
  14.  前記アクティベーション/デアクティベーションはアクティベーションコマンド/デアクティベーションコマンドによって指示し、前記ON/OFF(起動/停止)はL1シグナリングによって指示する
     請求項13記載の基地局装置。
     
     
    The base station apparatus according to claim 13, wherein the activation / deactivation is instructed by an activation command / deactivation command, and the ON / OFF (start / stop) is instructed by L1 signaling.

PCT/JP2015/074118 2014-09-29 2015-08-26 Terminal device and base station device WO2016052019A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014197765A JP2017208583A (en) 2014-09-29 2014-09-29 Terminal device and base station device
JP2014-197765 2014-09-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016052019A1 true WO2016052019A1 (en) 2016-04-07

Family

ID=55630065

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/074118 WO2016052019A1 (en) 2014-09-29 2015-08-26 Terminal device and base station device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2017208583A (en)
WO (1) WO2016052019A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017195490A1 (en) * 2016-05-12 2017-11-16 株式会社Nttドコモ User device and measurement method
JPWO2021064888A1 (en) * 2019-10-02 2021-04-08
CN112640376A (en) * 2018-07-06 2021-04-09 株式会社Ntt都科摩 User terminal

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210378046A1 (en) * 2018-06-19 2021-12-02 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Communication system and communication terminal device

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012209649A (en) * 2011-03-29 2012-10-25 Sharp Corp Communication system, mobile station device, base station device, radio resource allocation method and integrated circuit

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012209649A (en) * 2011-03-29 2012-10-25 Sharp Corp Communication system, mobile station device, base station device, radio resource allocation method and integrated circuit

Non-Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"3GPP TS 36.133 V12.4.0", 3GPP, June 2014 (2014-06-01), pages 64 - 68, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/dynareport/36133.htm> *
"3GPP TS 36.213 V12.2.0", 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION GROUP RADIO ACCESS NETWORK; EVOLVED UNIVERSAL TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS (E-UTRA);PHYSICAL LAYER PROCEDURES (RELEASE 12), June 2014 (2014-06-01), pages 11, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/dynareport/36213.htm> *
ALCATEL -LUCENT ET AL.: "System design for transition time reduction for small cell ON/OFF", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#76B R1-141245, 22 March 2014 (2014-03-22), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/tsg_ran/WG1_RL1/TSGR1_76b/Docs/R1-141245.zip> [retrieved on 20151006] *
ALCATEL-LUCENT ET AL.: "System Design for transition time reduction of Scell", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#78 R1-143008, 10 August 2014 (2014-08-10), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/tsg_ran/WG1_RL1/TSGR1_78/Docs/R1-143008.zip> *
SAMSUNG: "Discussion on UE SCell activation delay in CA", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#73 R1- 131953, 11 May 2013 (2013-05-11), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/tsg_ran/WG1_RL1/TSGR1_73/Docs/R1-131953.zip> [retrieved on 20151006] *
SHARP: "L1 procedure for small cell on/off", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#77 R1-142199, 10 May 2014 (2014-05-10), Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/tsg_ran/WG1_RL1/TSGR1_77/Docs//R1-142199.zip> *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017195490A1 (en) * 2016-05-12 2017-11-16 株式会社Nttドコモ User device and measurement method
US11290901B2 (en) 2016-05-12 2022-03-29 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User equipment and measurement method
CN112640376A (en) * 2018-07-06 2021-04-09 株式会社Ntt都科摩 User terminal
JPWO2021064888A1 (en) * 2019-10-02 2021-04-08
JP7500593B2 (en) 2019-10-02 2024-06-17 株式会社Nttドコモ Terminal, base station, communication method and communication system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2017208583A (en) 2017-11-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6578272B2 (en) Terminal device and communication method
JP6618084B2 (en) Terminal apparatus, base station apparatus and method
JP6602756B2 (en) Terminal apparatus and method
JP6559657B2 (en) Terminal device, communication method, and integrated circuit
JP6511689B2 (en) Terminal apparatus, base station apparatus and method
JP6568058B2 (en) Terminal apparatus, base station apparatus, and communication method
JP6675977B2 (en) Terminal device and method
JP6628365B2 (en) Terminal device, base station device and communication method
WO2016072497A1 (en) Base station device, terminal device, and method
WO2016121631A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device
WO2016121665A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device
WO2016121637A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device
WO2016052017A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device
WO2016072488A1 (en) Base station device, terminal device, and method
WO2016052019A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device
WO2015166886A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15846671

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15846671

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1